Panduit Industrial Ethernet Physical Infrastructure Reference ...

7 downloads 840 Views 56MB Size Report
Architecture Design Guide is a direct result of an intensive, .... 2.10 PROCESS PLANT APPLICATION . ..... 4.10.1 Develop
building a smarter, unified business foundation Connect. Manage. Automate.

Panduit Industrial Ethernet Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Design Guide

Panduit

17301 S. Ridgeland Ave. Tinley Park Illinois 60477 USA www.panduit.com Phone: 800-777-3300 Fax: 708-532-1811

www.panduit.com

Preface

Design + Implementation Guide About PANDUIT PANDUIT is a worldclass developer and provider of leadingedge solutions that help customers optimize the physical infrastructure through simplification, agility and operational efficiency. PANDUIT’s Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI) based solutions give enterprises the capabilities to connect, manage and automate communications, computing, power, control and security systems for a smarter, more unified business foundation. Strong relationships with technology leaders complemented with its global staff and unmatched service and support, make PANDUIT a valuable and trusted partner.

Disclaimer THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS INTENDED AS A GUIDE FOR USE BY PERSONS HAVING TECHNICAL SKILL AT THEIR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK, AND IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” PANDUIT DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT, AND FURTHER NO WARRANTIES ARE CREATED WITH RESPECT TO ANY COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, IN CONNECTION WITH INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR ITS IMPLEMENTATION. PANDUIT AND ROCKWELL AUTOMATION DISCLAIM ANY LIABILITY ARISING FROM ANY USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, OR FOR THE ABSENCE OF SAME. INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS

Copyright Information

DOCUMENT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE THE TECHNICAL OR OTHER ADVICE OF PANDUIT.

Copyright 2009, Panduit Corp. Trademark Information • Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries. • ODVA and EtherNet/IP are trademarks owned and used by ODVA. • Rockwell Automation and FactoryTalk are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. • Stratix 8000™, Stratix 6000™, and Stratix 2000™ are trademarks owned and used by Rockwell Automation and its various subsidiary entities.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Preface, Page 2

Preface: Design + Implementation Guide Authorship Team The Industrial Ethernet Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Design Guide is a direct result of an intensive, collaborative effort from numerous dedicated Panduit professionals. This diverse group consists of research engineers, product engineers, application engineers, control engineers, installers, technicians, product marketing specialist, technical writers, graphic designers and editors. Panduit is fortunate to be able to tap into these individuals for their insights, creativity and experiences. This document also leveraged expertise of actual implementations, best practices and hard fought lessons from our own global manufacturing community.

PANDUIT wishes to thank and recognize the Rockwell Automation Network & Security Services team for their significant contribution to this guide. Rockwell Automation Network & Security Business Rockwell Automation Networks Business The Network & Security Services team is truly a converged organization made up of manufacturing engineers and IT professionals. They provide a family of services to assess, design, implement, audit, and manage new and existing industrial control and information networks and security technology, policies and procedures for those networks and the personnel that use them.

Finally this Design Guide must also recognize the ongoing support and guidance from our corporate leadership team.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Preface, Page 3

Table of Contents Design + Implementation Guide

Section 1: Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7

1.8 1.9

GOALS OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELATED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WHAT IS INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WHAT IS “REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PURPOSE OF THIS REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . END-TO-END ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORGANIZATION OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 Office Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Industrial Physical Network Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDARDS-BASED END-TO-END ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORGANIZATION OF THIS GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-11

Section 2: Organization of Control System Networks 2.1 2.2

THE IMPORTANCE OF THE NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . REFERENCE ARCHITECTURE TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 PERA Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 ISA-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 ISA-99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 MANUFACTURING ZONE NETWORK LAYERS AND CONVERGENCE . . 2.3.1 Layers of the Manufacturing Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Connecting Manufacturing to Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Enterprise Connectivity Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.4 Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 ROCKWELL AUTOMATION AND CISCO SYSTEMS® REFERENCE ARCHITECTURES FOR MANUFACTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 CONTROL ROOM AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 NETWORK DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 CONTROL PANEL AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 ON-MACHINE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 PROCESS PLANT APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 SCADA APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 DISCRETE MANUFACTURING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 PACKAGING / CONVEYING APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

2-1 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-13 2-15 2-19 2-33 2-44 2-56 2-74 2-86 2-96 2-106 2-115

TOC, Page 4

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide Section 3: Physical Infrastructure Project Phases 3.1 3.2 3.3

BASIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR PROJECT PHASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAILED CHECKLIST OF PROJECT STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROJECT PHASE DESIGN TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 3-4 3-7

Section 4: Physical Infrastructure Implementation 4.1

Copper Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.1 Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.2 Unshielded vs. Shielded Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.3 Media and Connector Selection for Noise Mitigation . . . . . 4.1.1.4 Pre-Terminated Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.1 Pathways and Spacing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.2 Cable Separation Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.3 Cable Pulling & Installation Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.4 Cable Management in theTelecommunications Room . . . . . 4.1.2.5 Cable Management in the Production Office Area . . . . . . . 4.1.2.6 Copper Jack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.7 Installation Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.1 Channel Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.2 Alien Crosstalk Testing (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.3 Standards Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Fiber Optic Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.1 Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.2 Bandwidth and Reach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.3 Pre-Terminated Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.4 Harsh Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.5 Hybrid Patch Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Building the Fiber Optic Cable with Stratix Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2.1 Selecting Stratix SFP Modules & Sepcifying Fiber Media. . 4.2.2.2 Specifying Fiber Patch Cables for Stratix Cabels for Stratix SFP Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Adapters for Legacy Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 End-to-End Channel Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.1 End-to-End Channel Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.2 End-to-End Channel Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5.1 Cable Pulling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5.2 Terminating OPTICAM® Fiber Optic Connectors . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

4-2 4-2 4-2 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-17 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-28 4-30 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-37 TOC, Page 5

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide 4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

Grounding and Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 End-to-End Grounding & Bonding System Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.1 Grounding Electrode System (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.2 Utility Entrance Facility/Grounding & Bonding Infrastructure 4.3.1.3 Telecommunications System Grounding (Control Rooms & Data Centers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.4 Control System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3.1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Racks and Cabinet Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.1 Physical Infrastructure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.2 Selection of Cabinets or Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.3 Selection of Vertical and Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . 4.4.2.4 Mounting Stratix Switches on DIN Rail or in Blanking Panels 4.4.2.5 Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.6 Thermal Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pathway Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Selection: Control Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Selection: Plant Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.1 Abrasion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.2 Cable Ties and Installation Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.3 Adhesive Backed Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.4 Cable Accessories Product Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2.1 Mount Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2.2 Adhesive Backed Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2.3 Dynamic Cable Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1.1 Control Room Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1.2 Network Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1.3 Zone Cabling Enclosure Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1.4 Control Panel Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2.1 Label Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2.2 Label Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

4-38 4-40 4-41 4-44 4-50 4-61 4-63 4-63 4-64 4-64 4-65 4-65 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-68 4-70 4-70 4-72 4-72 4-73 4-74 4-80 4-80 4-81 4-82 4-83 4-83 4-84 4-91 4-92 4-96 4-96 4-96 4-97 4-98 4-98 4-98 4-101 4-103 4-104 4-107 4-107 4-108

TOC, Page 6

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide 4.8

4.9

4.10

Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Selection: Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1.1 Physical Infrastructure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1.2 Keyed Connector Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1.3 Physical Network Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Selection: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2.1 Data Access Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2.2 LOTO Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2.3 Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 Installation: Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3.1 Keyed Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.4 Installation: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1.1 Network Architecture Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1.2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1.3 Power over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1.4 Effective Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1.5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.2 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.3 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power over Ethernet (PoE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 Developing Industrial Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.4 Documenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-109 4-110 4-111 4-112 4-112 4-114 4-114 4-115 4-115 4-116 4-116 4-117 4-123 4-124 4-124 4-125 4-125 4-126 4-126 4-126 4-127 4-128 4-129 4-131 4-132 4-133

Section 5: Network & Security Services 5.1

5.2

Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Assess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Design and Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.5 Manage and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Assess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Design and Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 Managed Security Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6

TOC, Page 7

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide Appendix A: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4

Conduit Fill Capacity Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack Vertical Manager Horizontal Cable Fill Capacity Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . Approved Test Leads for PANDUIT Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Product Specification Details . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information

................

A-2 A-8 A-14 A-17

B-1

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding/Bonding System Technical Information C.1 C.2 C.3

Example Grounding & Bonding System Specification Document for GES Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Grounding & Bonding System Specification Document for Communications Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Grounding & Bonding System Visual Inspection and Documentation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-2 C-3 C-15

Figures Figure 1.1-1

Figure 1.1-2 Figure 1.1-3 Figure 1.1-4 Figure 1.1-5 Figure 1.1-6 Figure 1.1-7 Figure 1.1-8

Figure 1.1-9

Industrial Ethernet continues to move forward towards the factory floor and occupies a solid position at the control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical manufacturing infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid plant floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home runs to each node back to telecommunication room in an office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed zone cabling enclosures dramatically cut number of home runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship of Physical Infrastructure to Logical Network Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The MICE matrix defines environmental classes in three levels and four parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An end-to-end channel solution often cuts across several MICE environments, ranging from environmentally controlled control rooms to more rugged environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correspondence of MICE Environments, control network areas, and physical infrastructure elements . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

1-2 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-8

1-9 1-10

TOC, Page 8

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide Figure 2.2-1 Figure 2.2-2 Figure 2.2-3 Figure 2.3-1 Figure 2.3-2 Figure 2.3-3 Figure 2.6-1 Figure 2.6-2 Figure 2.6-3 Figure 2.7-1 Figure 2.7-2 Figure 2.7-3 Figure 2.8-1 Figure 2.8-2 Figure 2.8-3 Figure 2.8-4 Figure 2.8-5 Figure 2.8-6 Figure 2.8-7 Figure 2.8-8 Figure 2.8-9 Figure 2.9-1 Figure 2.9-2. Figure 2.9-3. Figure 2.10-1 Figure 2.10-2 Figure 2.10-3 Figure 2.11-1 Figure 2.11-2 Figure 2.11-3 Figure 2.12-1 Figure 2.12-2 Figure 2.12-3 Figure 2.13-1 Figure 2.13-2 Figure 2.13-3

The Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture (PERA) Model for Industrial Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA-95 addresses the interface between levels 3 and 4 of the PERA model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA-99 addresses manufacturing and control systems electronic security for the PERA model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Overview of Common Areas of Industrial Control and Network System Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Zone Network Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Early Attempts at Control and Network System Integration Led to Unacceptable Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Diagram for network distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for network distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail diagram for network distribution physical infrastructure . . . . . Logical Diagram for Network Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for zone cabling enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail diagram for zone cabling enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Switch and Panduit Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupled Noise on Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal and Noise Routing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Reference Designs (IEEE 1100 Emerald Book) . . . . . Example Blockout Device to Support Network Security Initiatives at Control Panel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Diagram for control panel(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for Control Panel overall layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for control panel stratix mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Detail diagram of control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical diagrams for On Machine distributed networking . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram of On-Machine network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Detail design for On Machine distributed network . . . . . . . Logical Diagram for Process plant network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for Process plant network infrastructure . . . . . . . Detail of Process Plant network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Diagram for SCADA network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for SCADA network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Diagram for SCADA network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Diagram for discrete manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Diagram for discrete manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail diagram for discrete manufacturing network physical infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Diagram for Packaging/ Conveying Network . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical diagram for packaging/conveying network . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail diagram for Packaging/Conveying physical network infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-47 2-48 2-49 2-57 2-58 2-58 2-61 2-62 2-63 2-64 2-65 2-66 2-76 2-77 2-78 2-89 2-91 2-92 2-99 2-101 2-102 2-109 2-110 2-111 2-118 2-119 2-120

TOC, Page 9

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide Figure 3.1-1 Figure 4.1-1

Figure 4.1-2 Figure 4.1-3 Figure 4.1-4 Figure 4.1-5 Figure 4.2-1 Figure 4.3-1 Figure 4.3-2 Figure 4.3-3 Figure 4.3-4 Figure 4.3-5 Figure 4.3-6 Figure 4.3-7 Figure 4.3-8 Figure 4.3-9 Figure 4.3-10 Figure 4.3-11 Figure 4.3-12 Figure 4.3-13. Figure 4.3-14. Figure 4.3-15

Figure 4.3-16. Figure 4.3-17

Figure 4.3-18 Figure 4.3-19.

OSI 7-Layer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MICE boundaries can change at various points across channel length as cabling channels pass through multiple areas, as defined in TIA-1005 (Source: ISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced Copper Media Types and Reac / Bandwidth Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison of STP and UTP 10GBASE-T Compliant Cabling. . . . . Coupled Common Mode Noise Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal and Noise Routing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiber Cable Un-spooling For Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Grounding and Bonding System in a Control Room with Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic View of a Generic Grounding Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . Grounding Electrode System Graphical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Entrance Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure Requirements of the ANSI/J-STD-607-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Center Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Room Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Diagram of Typical Grounding and Bonding of the Control Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding washers can be used to create electrical continuity in racks and cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESD wrist straps and ports enhance equipment protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telecommunications room bonding topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Busbar Hardware and Armored Fiber Grounding Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Ground Loop caused by voltage difference between equipment grounds at two ends of a shielded cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid bonding using RC circuit that blocks low frequency ground loop currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Loop formed between patch panel and switch due to ground voltage differences. The hybrid bond at the device prevents ground loop from patch to device for lower frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulated patch panel prevents ground loop at switch and patch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The PANDUIT® StructuredGround™ System for data center grounding provides robust connections that have low resistance, are easy to install, and are easily checked during inspections . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

3-1

4-1 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-32

4-40 4-42 4-43 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-53 4-54 4-54 4-55 4-56

4-57 4-58

4-58 4-59

4-60 TOC, Page 10

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide Figure 4.3-20 Figure 4.3-21 Figure 4.3-22 Figure 4.3-23

Figure 4.5-1

Figure 4.5-2 Figure 4.5-3 Figure 4.5-4 Figure 4.5-5 Figure 4.5-6 Figure 4.5-7 Figure 4.5-8 Figure 4.5-9 Figure 4.5-10 Figure 4.5-11 Figure 4.5-12 Figure 4.5-13 Figure 4.5-14 Figure 4.5-15 Figure 4.5-16 Figure 4.5-17 Figure 4.6-1 Figure 4.6-2 Figure 4.6-3 Figure 4.6-4 Figure 4.8-1

Figure 4.8-2 Figure 4.8-3

PANDUIT Shielded Cable and Jack Module Termination . . . . . . . . . Schematic Diagram of Control Panel Grounding and Bonding . . . . Motor Cable Grounding Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Best Wiring Solution: Shielded input/output with insulated jacket completely avoids ground noise problems in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANDUIT® FiberRunner® and FIBER-DUCT™ Routing System protects fi ber optic cables from damage to support network reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANDUIT® FiberRunner® Overhead Pathway with Spill-Out . . . . . Schematic of FiberRunner® overhead pathway to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example installation of FiberRunner® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example installation of FiberRunner® overhead pathway to PANDUIT® NetAccess™ cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Routing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of under-fl oor wire basket pathway to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example installation of fiber optic trunk cable transitioning . . . . . . . Example installation of GridRunner™ under floor wire basket pathway with 2-post rack and vertical cable manager. . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead wire basket to four-post rack transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of overhead wire basket to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . Example installation of transition from overhead wire basket . . . . . . Example installation of overhead wire basket to 4-post rack . . . . . . Overhead ladder rack with PANDUIT Waterfall Accessory . . . . . . . . Schematic of overhead ladder rack to rack/cabinet transition . . . . . Example installation of overhead ladder rack to two-post rack transition with PANDUIT® Patch-Runner™ Vertical Cable Manager. . Example installation of overhead ladder rack to two-post rack transition with PANDUIT® Patch-Runner™ Vertical Cable Manager. . Approximate Wire Outside Diameter Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Ties Recommended for Control Panel and On-Machine Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Ties Recommended for Control Room, Network Distribution, and Zone Cabling Enclosure Applications . . . PIM systems optimize a consolidation strategy and improve business agility by achieving better port utilization through superior management of network ports and IT assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Panduit Keyed LC System provides a superior level of security to fiber optic channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RJ45 Plug Lock-In device installed on patch cords secures connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

4-61 4-62 4-62

4-63

4-74 4-75 4-75 4-75 4-75 4-76 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-78 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-83 4-85 4-88 4-91

4-111 4-113 4-114

TOC, Page 11

Table of Contents: Design + Implementation Guide Figure 4.8-4 Figure 4.8-5

Figure 4.8-6 Figure 4.8-7 Figure 4.9-1 Figure 4.9-2

LC Connector Lock-In (left) and LC Duplex Adapter Blockout . . . . . Data Access Ports manage risk in industrial settings by providing access to the network without opening the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels to meet NFPA 70E requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label to meet UL508A identification requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 TSB 162 - Generic (left ) and Custom (right) Wireless Cell Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Layout Showing AP Deployments Powered by PoE Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4.10-1 Applications currently driving the adoption of PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10-2 Hybrid PoE / Logic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10-3 With the ongoing digitalization of security and surveillance systems organizations today can take advantage of Ethernet, Internet, or wireless technologies as the backbone of their security infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10-4 PoE-enabled RFID readers and IP-based surveillance cameras provide additional security to correlate asset movement and human interactions . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10-5 AC Wiremap Testing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10-6 Example PoE Test Results from Fluke DTX-1800 Series Cable Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.11-1 By capturing and transporting all operational and services data over a physically converged infrastructure, it becomes possible to implement facility-driven policies that support business requirements and tenant/customer demands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.11-2 Connected Building Solutions deploy all building systems along common pathways to multiple zones where systems connectivity is required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

4-114

4-115 4-115 4-125 4-124 4-125 4-128 4-129

4-130

4-131 4-132 4-132

4-136

4-137

TOC, Page 12

Section 1 Introduction

Manufacturing convergence helps companies reach their goals for productivity, globalization, innovation and sustainability by merging manufacturing and office systems with environments. The deployment of standard Ethernet-based Local Area Networks (LAN) enables businesses to utilize real-time manufacturing information to make product, material, purchasing, and resource decisions. The use of unmodified Ethernet for industrial protocols, such as EtherNet/IP, improves communications between the manufacturing floor and enterprise systems to achieve workflow efficiencies and a converged environment. Deployment complexities associated with industrial Ethernet such as environment, noise mitigation and logical segmentation must be overcome to achieve high availability and maintain data integrity in the manufacturing cell/area zones. Poor decisions can result from a lack of understanding of both enterprise IT and manufacturing requirements and their differences. Without a strong, Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI)based design strategy in place, organizations take on unnecessary risk. These risks include overfilled network closets, cabinets that are difficult to service, disorganized industrial enclosures, costly re-work, and increased machine downtime. In order to address these issues, PANDUIT has collaborated with Rockwell Automation, Cisco and other industry leaders to develop this Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide for designing, deploying and managing the physical infrastructure for an Industrial Ethernet network. 1.1

Goals of this Guide

The following are goals for this guide: • With criticality of infrastructure in plant operations, Rockwell Automation and PANDUIT are joining to ensure consistent practices are applied in the Physical Infrastructure design of Industrial Networks • By applying proven, standards-based design approaches, the organizations will deliver industrial networks with a desired state of transparency. The network, applications and controls hardware will operate in a choreographed manner. • By delivering optimum performance and verifiable, traceable schematics that enable expedient maintenance and repair, the organizations deliver unprecedented business value to plant operations.

1.2

Related Documents

This document builds upon the work by Rockwell Automation and Cisco on Reference Architectures for Manufacturing. Reference Architectures for Manufacturing provides education, design guidance, recommendations and best practices to help establish a robust and secure network infrastructure that facilitates manufacturing and enterprise network convergence. Reference Architectures for Manufacturing incorporates the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture and Cisco Ethernet-to-the-Factory. Reference Architectures for Manufacturing are built on technology and manufacturing standards common between IT and manufacturing, establishing a Manufacturing Framework of network segmentation for traffic management and policy enforcement, such as security, remote access, and Quality of Service (QoS). Other documents which support and inform this Guide in the specification, deployment, and testing of Industrial Ethernet physical infrastructures include the following: • ANSI/TIA-1005: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises (forthcoming, 2009) • TIA/EIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Standard (2001) • TIA-569A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces • ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A: Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings • ANSI-J-STD-607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications in Commercial Buildings • ANSI/TIA/EIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers • Network Infrastructure for EtherNet/IP: Introduction and Considerations (ODVA, 2007) • Industrial Ethernet on the Plant Floor: A Planning and Installation Guide, by Robert Lounsbury (ISA, 2008)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-1

Section 1: Introduction 1.3

What is Industrial Ethernet?

Ethernet is the network transmission protocol, developed in 1973, that has evolved into the adopted standard for the overwhelming majority of office communication systems. While Ethernet was evolving, so were the networks for automation control. The development and growth of these two types of networks were based on significantly different demands. Over the years many protocols, both open and proprietary, have evolved for factory automation. This is problematic as industrial protocols are not interoperable, either between each other or the Ethernet in the front offices. Industrial Ethernet solves this problem. Industrial Ethernet was developed to provide a common platform to improve Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) processes among the various processing equipment manufacturers, as well as to offer a seamless cross-transfer of critical data between the plant floor and support offices. Within manufacturing, Ethernet solutions ease the deployment of industrial networks and automation control systems that enable expansion of operations as well as increased collaboration and productivity. On the factory floor, factors such as safety, security, and compliance also become an important part of physical infrastructure design (see Figure 1-1).

1.4

What is Reference Architecture”?

In their 2007 ODVA white paper “The Importance of Reference Architectures in Manufacturing Networks,” Brian Batke (Rockwell Automation) and Paul Didier (Cisco) make a compelling case for the utility of reference designs that can be used to standardize the deployment of industrial networks: A Reference Architecture is a fundamental organization of a system, the relationship between its components and the environment, and the principles governing its design and evolution. Architectures provide customers with a framework for optimizing their technical resources in support of business and technical requirements. … Reference Architectures provide a way to deliver knowledge and expertise in standard networking in an Automation and Control context to increase confidence, spur take-up and drive consistency in the Industrial Ethernet market.

By integrating production, data acquisition, purchasing, quality, logistics, sales, and building automation systems onto a single common infrastructure, customers can improve network efficiency, reduce operational costs, and increase manufacturing productivity across several areas: • Monitoring the manufacturing operations and processes Figure 1.1-1. Industrial Ethernet continues to move forward towards

• Controlling the manufacturing operation and processes locally and remotely • Data acquisition for Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), production, purchasing, quality, logistics and sales • Transfer of design files or engineering parameters

the factory floor and occupies a solid position at the control level.

With a Reference Architecture, all involved stakeholders can increasingly focus on a common solution which reduces risk of deployment by relying on known and tested solutions; simplifies decision-making; enables more re-use; provides consistent models, capabilities, and equipment; improves service and support; and helps customers deploy solutions that meet their specific business issues.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-2

Section 1: Introduction According to Batke and Didier, the key attributes of a Reference Architecture are: • Compatibility with unique industrial protocols and the communication models they incorporate • Performance (latency, jitter, minimal packet loss) and availability requirements of automation and control applications • Logical segmentation of production and enterprise networks, allowing networks to safely and securely share data, services, and access from the production floor without introducing security risks of the Internet and enterprise network to the control system • Physical requirements of the production floor • Automation and control network solutions must be manageable by people who may not be trained experts in network technologies or administration • Scalability to meet widely varying sizes of production facilities and future growth. 1.5

Purpose of this Reference Guide

The PANDUIT Physical Layer Reference Architecture Guide approaches manufacturing challenges as they relate to the physical infrastructure from a broad system-level view, one that promotes manufacturing convergence. It also covers how enterprise IT and manufacturing systems stakeholders can properly connect, manage, identify, and secure cabling throughout the physical infrastructure for an end-to-end physical implementation of the reference architectures recommended by Rockwell Automation and Cisco (see Figure 1.1-2). Like the Cisco-Rockwell Automation logical Reference Architectures for Manufacturing before it, the purpose of this Guide is to accelerate the convergence of standard networking technologies with the industrial automation and control environment. Specifically, this Guide focuses on identifying physical layer reference solutions that reflect new realities in the industrial space.

These realities include: 1. The development of hardened switches for deployment outside of a static control room environment and onto the factory floor, requiring new cabling techniques to mitigate the effects of heat, humidity, and noise over a multiconnector cabling channel 2. The use of distributed cabling topologies and patching technologies, which enhances the flexibility and scalability of Industrial Ethernet networks to achieve greater operational efficiencies 3. The critical role played by a robust, testable grounding and bonding system to ensure system uptime and availability by mitigating noise issues that can disrupt communications and control. A converged Industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure requires deploying control rooms with a greater level of IT technology to leverage the intelligence built into today’s control systems for greater productivity and reliability. This convergence with IT technology necessitates greater deployment of servers, firewalls and switching technology to deliver the productivity benefits with a robust architecture as described in the Rockwell, Cisco’s reference architecture. 1.6

Best Practice for Each Area and Application

Today’s automation systems depend on industrial Ethernet for real-time control, device configuration, data collection, and even safety sub-systems. The productivity of the manufacturing plant is built on layers of hardware and software that comprise the automation system with the physical layer being the lowest, but most critical, layer. This physical layer, comprised of the network media, connectivity, enclosures, pathways, grounding/bonding, identification, and port locking devices provides the critical channels for communication to exist.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-3

Section 1: Introduction This document provides guidance on selecting, planning, installing and testing a physical layer that ensures performance. The physical architecture for a typical manufacturing enterprise is physically located in multiple areas that have unique environmental, security and performance considerations. This document will describe the physical infrastructure architectures recommended for each of the following areas: • Industrial Data Center / Control Room

However, these physical locations can have differing needs based on the type of manufacturing operation. For example, a process line may have longer distances and higher security requirements than a small assembly operation.

NOTE: Experts estimate that 50% - 90% of network disruptions are due to problems with this physical layer!

• Network Distribution • Zone Cabling Enclosure • Control Panel • On Machine

Fig. 1.1-2. Typical manufacturing infrastructure is comprised of distinct areas with differing environmental, performance, and security challenges.identified.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-4

Section 1: Introduction

Fig. 1.1-3 Hybrid plant floor plan with example manufacturing zones identified.

The best practice recommendations for the physical infrastructure are described for a hypothetical-hybrid-plant that has application zones for packaging/material handling (discrete) mixing (process/batch) and material storage (SCADA) operations. The physical architecture for the networks that make this plant run overlay the factory floor plan and should be planned as a robust infrastructure based on sound Rockwell/Cisco logical architectures that are designed for performance, scalability, security, and maintainability. Each of the following application zones of this hybrid plant will be analyzed and described in this document:

The initial part of the plan starts with a floor plan to evaluate the building layout and to determine the location of the individual network zones. These network zones and their interconnection form the backbone of the network physical infrastructure. This is sometimes referred to as “lines-andboxes”. However lines–and-boxes are merely a logical representation of the network. This guide helps map that logical view onto the physical implementation. This is a critical step, so it is worthwhile to understand the trade-offs that are made for zone selection.

• Discrete (e.g. Assembly and Packaging/Material Handling) • Process (e.g. Mixing ) • SCADA (e.g. Material Storage)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-5

Section 1: Introduction 1.7

Zone Cabling Architecture Advantages

1.7.1

Office Example

Zone Cabling Topology provides a cost-effective alternative to deploying your network infrastructure by increasing the network’s flexibility, accessibility and scalability. This concept originated in commercial wiring for offices, etc. but can offer these same advantages for industrial applications. Benefits include: • Reduced home-run wiring • Ease zone adjustments or expansions • Reduces size of central closet

 Fig. 1.1-4: Centralized Cabling: Home runs to each node back to telecommunication room in an office.

 Fig. 1.1-5: Zone Cabling: Distributed zone cabling enclosures dramatically cut number of home runs.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-6

Section 1: Introduction 1.7.2

Industrial Physical Network Zones

For industrial application, a zone cabling architecture can provide these same important advantages in distributing cabling to switches in control panels or on machine switches and devices.

PNZ Physical Network Zone

Fig 1.1-6: The diagram

ZCE Zone Cabling Enclosure above illustrates the CP

Control Panel

basic concept of mapping physical network zones to your physical infrastructure. The following describes useful terms and rules for layout of an industrial automation network into physical zones.

1. Physical Zone Network Key terms a. A Network is a collection of two or more end-points connected via a pathway. b. An end-point is a uniquely addressable device as defined by the Network. c. A pathway is the unbroken media that data is broken when it is changes type or connector. d. A Physical Network Zone (PNZ) is a collection of one or more end-points that share a common pathway.

2. Physical Zone Network Design rules a. A PNZ may only wholly include other PNZ . And a PNZ can only be inherited into one other PNZ. A PNZ may include multiple PNZ. b. Use dashed lines to represent logical collection and solid line to mean a physical location (panel, floor area, machine) c. The naming reference for zones shall follow [level1]. [level2].[level3]…[Leveln] This physical network zone cabling approach can be employed for our hybrid factory example for great reduction in home run cabling and improve manageability benefits.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-7

Section 1: Introduction tt 1.8

Standards-based End-to-End Environmental Considerations

Effective integration of Industrial Ethernet into an existing or new manufacturing or processing facility can be challenging. Along with environmental protection, network stakeholders need to factor variables such as interoperability, deployment, security, reliability, electrical performance and cost into network design and deployment.

• M1I1C1E1 describes a worst-case environment according to ISO/IEC 11801 • M2I2C2E2 describes a worst-case light industrial environment • M3I3C3E3 describes a worst-case industrial environment This system provides a method of categorizing the environmental classes for decision-making on the level of hardening required the network media, connectors, pathways and enclosures. A higher MICE level means that your physical infrastructure may need to be:

To help stakeholders throughout the decision-making process, the ISO/IEC 24702 and TIA-1005 standards recommend use of the MICE (Mechanical, Ingress Rating, Climatic, Electromagnetic) classification system. The MICE concept is • Ruggedized for vibration based on the assumption that cabling, even under the worst conditions of an environmental class, is still protected and • Sealed for wash down guarantees reliable network operation (see Figure 1-7): • Fabricated with materials that can withstand extreme temperatures • Shielded for rejecting EMI noise.

 Figure 1.1-7. The MICE matrix defines environmental classes in three levels and four parameters.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-8

Section 1: Introduction TIA-1005 defi nes terminology for the various levels of the physical infrastructure so that the MICE levels required can be analyzed and specifi ed for each area. Industrial environment conditions can vary greatly depending on the type of manufacturing, location of equipment, ambient conditions, installation standards, and building construction so there are no hard rules about level of protection required for each zone. In many cases, telecommunication rooms, factory floor, and work area levels can safely use commercial grade physical infrastructure if the MICE ratings show that there are no signifi cant hazards present. For harsh environments though, specifying connectivitywith appropriate ratings to withstand wash down or shielded solutions in high EMI environments make sense.

An end-to-end channel solution often cuts across several MICE environments, ranging from environmentally controlled control rooms or enclosures where commercial grade solutions and best practices can offer best value and performance to more rugged environments where IP67 rated connectivity offers advantages (see Figure(s) 1-8 / 1-9). Reference architectures for physical infrastructure provide a roadmap for specifying, installing, testing, and documenting the connectivity that spans from the enterprise connection down to the machine level. The physical infrastructure provides the means to ensure performance, security, reliability and maintainability of the switches, servers, and

Fig. 1.1-8:

 Fig. 1.1-9:

 Figures 1-8 and 1-9. An end-to-end channel solution often cuts across several MICE environments, ranging from environmentally controlled control rooms to more rugged environments

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-9

Section 1: Introduction control devices that constitute a complete architecture. This infrastructure guidance requires a systems level view of grounding/bonding considerations, best practices for mitigating noise concerns, security defense in depth, as well as proven media and connectivity that can be installed and tested effectively. Reference architectures also provide roadmap for IT and Controls engineers to plan the infrastructure in light of the environmental issues exposed by MICE analysis selecting appropriate hardening and form factors for the particular level of the architecture (see Table 1-1). The reference architecture provides guidance on:

- Building out control rooms that leverage best practices proven in data center applications worldwide - Network distribution that delivers top performance with security, scalability and fl exibility - Control panel solutions engineered to mitigate noise concerns and provide testability of these critical links - Distributed ‘On-Machine’ network installations requiring sealed connectors and other environmental measures.

Enclosures Racks, Pathways, Grounding/Bonding Physical Security

Telecommunications Room Control Room

Typical MICE Range 1 (commercial grade) Factory Floor

Fiber Copper Connectivity Pathways

Network Distribution

Typical MICE Ranges 1-2 from commercial grade to light industrial Work Area

Zone Enclosures MUTOA Physical Security

Consolidation points

Typical MICE Ranges 1-2 from commercial grade to light industrial Automation island

Copper Fiber Patching Wire management Grounding/Bonding Identification Physical Security

Control Panels,On Machine (distributed)

MICE Ranges 1-3 from commercial grade to harsh environment rated

Table 1.1-9. Correspondence of MICE Environments, Control Network Areas, and Physical Infrastructure Elements

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-10

Section 1: Introduction 1.9

Organization of this Guide

Benefiting both enterprise IT and manufacturing system stakeholders, this document describes project phasing considerations, application scenarios, and service options associated with the design, testing, and maintenance of the physical infrastructure. Section 1 introduces the goals and purpose of the Guide, and describes the basic components of an end-to-end UPIbased Industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure solution (see sidebar for a summary of the UPI vision). Section 2 presents a series of Reference Architectures for industrial networks, which are divided into two types: • Areas (control room, cabling and connectivity, control panel, distribution [i.e. “zone”] point, and on-machine) present detailed examples of the building blocks of the Industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure • Applications (process, SCADA, discrete manufacturing, and packaging/shipping, which illustrate how physical layer Areas can be combined to meet application-specific requirements Section 3 reviews infrastructure project phases, recommending best practices (and identifying likely pitfalls) that are encountered, from planning and design to testing and auditing. Section 4 organizes installation and testing information for each element of the physical infrastructure, from copper and fiber media selection to testing procedures for cabling and grounding systems. The section concludes with a review of the benefits that several innovative technologies (Power over Ethernet [PoE], wireless, and intelligent buildings) can offer industrial networks. Section 5 is a guide to services and support. By using a reference architecture based on UPI principles to integrate IT and manufacturing systems, organizations can improve network efficiency, reduce operational costs, and increase manufacturing productivity to build a smarter foundation and drive successful manufacturing convergence.

The Vision: A Three-Phase Evolution Designs based on Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI) principles intelligently unite physical and logical systems to help organizations manage risk within the physical infrastructure. This approach ultimately allows organizations to increase safety and security in the workplace, manage systems more effectively, minimize downtime and mean time to repair (MTTR), and satisfy regulatory compliance requirements to minimize network disruptions and maximize performance. The degree of unification across the physical infrastructure can be defined in terms of three levels – Align, Converge, and Optimize. • Align: The first phase involves deploying modular and scalable passive, active and intelligent products, software and tools that align and connect systems within individual areas. • Converge: The second phase involves integrating products, software and tools into a converged physical infrastructure solution that extends across more than one enterprise area. • Optimize: The third phase involves optimizing the entire physical infrastructure into a seamless interoperable system across all critical systems and areas. UPI-based solutions are tailored by industry and customized by application, and span all core systems necessary to run a business from data center and facilities operations to next-generation intelligent buildings and across the factory floor. Examples include physical cable routing and management solutions designed to integrate with the reference architectures, untangle over-filled network closets and control room cabinets that are difficult to service. Similarly designed bonding and grounding measures defuse disruptive electrical “noise” before it adversely impacts control system performance, and ID and labeling solutions clearly identify system connections as well as hazardous electrical areas to protect network and worker safety. Frequent interaction between IT and facilities management teams helps to deliver a physical infrastructure that best fits the unique business needs of each organization. This approach to designing and specifying physical infrastructure technologies enables tangible improvements in system efficiency and productivity along with a substantial reduction in operational costs.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 1-11

Section 2

Organization of Control System Networks Networks and industrial automation systems have common challenges. Consideration has to be given to how products connect and interact together. In addition to physical attributes like cabling and connectors, the communications methods needed between products are crucial to system stability and integrity. How products exchange their data, the system throughput requirements, and the configuration, maintenance and expandability all demand careful consideration. Data requirements vary by device and application. The amount of data that needs to be moved effects bandwidth and the optimal packet size. Another consideration for industrial automation networks is the type of data that is being moved including I/O, polled, change-of-state, cyclic, program upload/download and diagnostics to mention a few. Real time control of I/O, drives, motion control and even safety requires ensuring determinism and update frequencies to deliver the desired repeatability and system performance of the industrial automation network. Control system networks are not new having developed from proprietary schemes to today’s open systems. The explosive growth of Ethernet communications, faster microprocessors and powerful computer software applications has driven the need to architect systems that deliver on the desired efficiency and standardized connectivity enabled by networked resources while protecting the uptime and performance of critical automation systems. The following sections will examine the importance of the network infrastructure, review background on the architecture levels required for a highly integrated manufacturing operation, review network topologies and convergence options, and finally introduce Cisco/Rockwell Automation Reference Architectures for Manufacturing which provide a framework for building automation system that leverages network communications to deliver unprecedented efficiency, security, performance, and maintainability to industrial operations. 2.1

The Importance of the Network Infrastructure

The network infrastructure is a path for information flow; it provides connectivity between automation components and its users. Network infrastructure includes the transmission media (to include fiber, copper and wireless), the hardware to control the transmission paths (to include switches, routers and access points), and the software that sends, receives and manages traffic.

Strong, Transparent Network Structure The network infrastructure can be compared to the steel structure of a factory or plant. This skeleton is built to weather the conditions by following established standards and a design based on the requirements for the use of the structure. Regular inspections insure the structure is sound and identify any areas in need of repair. This assures the user they can go in their respective factories and plants without considering the state of the structure. Essentially, the structure becomes transparent to its users. The original design is referenced during moves, adds and changes to the structure. The network infrastructure should also be transparent to its users. Like our example, this can be accomplished through the use of standards and a design based on the requirements from the users. Monitoring of the network ensures the transmission media, its paths and the software are operating at optimal performance. Network monitoring provides insight turning reactions into predictions when infrastructure upsets occur. The network design, after implemented and audited, becomes a living document during moves, adds and changes to the infrastructure. A clear view of the network goes a long way in intelligent decision making during troubleshooting or performance analysis. Conversely, a poorly designed, installed and documented network will cause confusion and hamper vision of those troubleshooting or analyzing a system’s performance. A transparent network like a clean windshield provides your best view of the road ahead and reduces risks of problems. Evolution from Segregation to Convergence Commonly, automation assets were purposefully segregated on proprietary or open networks that could effectively perform data collection or control tasks but not capable of further integration. Islands of automation were isolated and constrained by networks with limited bandwidth, number of nodes and overall length. Asset owners grew confident with these networks mainly because of their relative simplicity and well documented parameters. Information exchange between the manufacturing and the enterprise zones though required expensive, customized hardware and software interfaces, if available. For many though, disjointed systems were created that relied on a user’s reproduction of data stored on clipboards or transcribed from operator interfaces into spreadsheets. This scenario lends itself to slow business decisions, higher error rates and limited availability to manufacturing information.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-1

Section 2.2: Reference Architecture Terminology air, steam, etc. at a manufacturing site are reliable since these Convergence is not a new concept, but used to be limited utilities enable nearly every phase of manufacturing. Now, by disparate networks and technology in the manufacturing the Ethernet network infrastructure is just as important since zone. What were islands of automation are now enabled it is a critical part of each level of the manufacturing space by protocols such as CIP and technology that promote including safety, process, and control as well as for superviconvergence from the manufacturing zone upwards into the enterprise zone. EtherNet/IP, a standard Ethernet technology, sory functions, MES and enterprise integration. The network enabled users to unite control, communication and computa- infrastructure is critical for convergence and enabling timely business decisions. The infrastructure, its design, policies and tion into a multidiscipline industrial network. Since Ethernet procedures, audits and automated monitoring is what enables is the prevalent network in the enterprise it became the common point of convergence. Through providing visibility of transparency and 99.99% uptime that drives an operation to profitability in today’s competitive environment. all layers of the manufacturing architecture to formulate key performance indicators (KPIs), convergence enables greater 2.2 Reference Architecture Terminology business agility and opportunities for innovation. Instead of business decision being held up by manually created spreadsheet one can simply leverage technology used every The following section discusses the Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture (PERA) for Control System Functions, day to view KPIs such as a VoIP phone or smart phone. ISA-95 and ISA-99 which provide important terminology and conceptual models for describing a networked control Ethernet networks quickly became accessible to users, both at home and work. With the promotion of COTS, commercial architecture. A thorough understanding of these application models and standards allows for selection of a physical off the shelf, and plug-n-play mentality, users were enabled infrastructure architecture that delivers full value for automawith confidence that networking automation assets would be tion investments. as simplistic as a home Ethernet network. In other instances enterprise IT relied on established policies and procedures 2.2.1 PERA Model to enlighten the manufacturing zone with Ethernet. Not realized at first, but the requirements used to create enterThe Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture is a common prise policies and procedures for the enterprise zone were and well understood model in the industry for organizing not applicable and actually detrimental in the manufacturing control system functions and activities (see Figure 2A-1). zone. For example, network policies of pushing automatic The model was developed by a collection of industrial and updates and patches that work well for office users can academic representatives, and segments control devices cause disruptions to critical control systems that may not be and equipment into hierarchical functions. validated for use with the new update or patch. Why Does the Networking Infrastructure Matter? Infrastructure allows disparate components to work together on a grand scale that should be easy for user to interact with, accomplishing goals that otherwise would be impossible to achieve. With a well executed, transparent network infrastructure in place, the automation system architecture is better understood resulting in greater confidence in operating and maintaining highly integrated manufacturing systems. The network’s physical infrastructure provides the foundation for the layers of automation that enable great productivity gains, improved performance, and enhanced safety. Networking infrastructure can be thought of as a new critical utility for the manufacturing plant. Tremendous resources and planning ensure traditional critical utilities such as power,

This model has been incorporated into many other models and standards in the industry. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA) ISA-95, Enterprise-Control System Integration and ISA-99, Manufacturing and Control Systems Security have identified the levels and framework. The PERA model divides control system elements into five levels: Level 0 – Process Level 0 is comprised of a wide variety of sensors and devices to monitor and control both discrete and analog variables. They perform the basic functions of monitoring and controlling the cell/area zone. Devices can be traditional hard wired devices or more sophisticated networked

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-2

Section 2.2: Reference Architecture Terminology devices with take advantage of advanced configuration and status information. Level 1 – Basic Control Level 1 consists of interfaces to the Level 0 devices (I/O, linking devices, bridges and so on) and controllers. Again, controllers may be stand-alone in single controller applications or multiple controllers on a peer-to-peer network. The controllers may be PLC, traditionally used in discrete applications as in discrete control, or a PAC which typically is for analog control found in the process applications such as continuous process or batch control. Controllers at this level not only need peer-to-peer communications but also to Level 2 and beyond for operator interfaces, engineering workstations, MES and so on. The upper levels may also initiate the communications by polling the controller for status and data about the actual application being controlled as well as take input for execution such as a batch cycle complete. Level 2 – Area Supervisory Control Level 2 represents the systems and functions associated with the runtime supervision and operation of a cell/area zone. Depending of the size and complexity of the application these functions may also carry over to Level 3. Level 3 – Site Manufacturing Operations and Control The systems that exist in Level 3 manage the plant/manufacturing wide functions. Levels 0 through 3 are considered critical to operations. These systems may communicate with controllers in Level 1, function as a staging area for changes in the cell/area zone and share data with the enterprise (Levels 4 and 5) systems and applications. Because these systems are primarily based on standard computing equipment and operating systems, they are more likely to communication with standard networking protocols. Level 4 – Site Business Planning and Logistics Network Level 4 is where functions and systems exist that need standard access to services provided by the enterprise network. This level is viewed as an extension of the enterprise network. The basic business administration tasks are performed here and rely on standard IT services. These functions and services include Internet access, E-mail, Enterprise applications, and non-critical production systems such as manufacturing execution systems and overall plant reporting (for example, inventory, performance, and so on).

Although important, these services are not considered as critical to the manufacturing zone. Because of the more open nature of the systems and applications within the enterprise network, this level is often viewed as a source of threats and disruptions to the manufacturing zone. Level 5 – Enterprise Network Level 5 is where the centralized IT systems and functions exist. Enterprise resource management, business-to-business, and business-to-customer services are typically located here.

Figure 2.2-1. The Purdue Enterprise Reference Architecture (PERA) Model for Industrial Control Systems

2.2.2

ISA-95

Purpose To create a standard that will define the interface between control functions and other enterprise functions based upon the Purdue Reference Model for CIM (hierarchical form) as published by ISA. The interface initially considered is the interface between levels 3 and 4 of that model (see Figure 2-2). Additional interfaces will be considered, as appropriate. The goal is to reduce the risk, cost, and errors associated with implementing these interfaces. The standard must define information exchange that is robust, safe, and cost effective. The exchange mechanism must preserve the integrity of each system’s information and span of control. Scope • Multi-part effort • Define in detail an abstract model of the enterprise, tions, and its information exchange. • Establish common terminology for the description and understanding of enterprise, including manufacturing control functions and business process functions, and its information exchange.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-3

Section 2.2: Reference Architecture Terminology • Define electronic information exchange between the manufacturing control functions and other enterprise functions including data models and exchange definitions. Publications The ISA-95 committee has published the first three standards in a series that define the interfaces between enterprise activities and control activities: • ANSI/ISA-95.00.01-2000, Enterprise-Control System Integration, Part 1: Models and Terminology, provides standard terminology and a consistent set of concepts and models for integrating control systems with enterprise systems that will improve communications between all parties involved. The models and terminology emphasize good integration practices of control systems with enterprise systems during the entire life cycle of the systems. • ANSI/ISA-95.00.02-2001, Enterprise-Control System Integration, Part 2: Object Model Attributes, contains additional details and examples to help explain and illustrate the Part 1 objects. • ANSI/ISA-95.00.03-2005, Enterprise-Control System Integration, Part 3: Activity Models of Manufacturing Operations Management, presents models and terminology for defining the activities of manufacturing operations management. For information on obtaining these published standards, click here. Current Work ISA-SP95 is currently developing additional standards in the series, including Part 4: Activity Models of Manufacturing Operations Management; and has recently completed Part 5: Business-to-Manufacturing Transactions. ISA-95 does much of its work electronically, but also holds periodic face-to-face meetings. For more information on ISA-95, contact Charley Robinson, ISA Standards. Reference: http://www.isa.org/MSTemplate.cfm?MicrositeID= 285&CommitteeID=4747

Figure 2.2-2. ISA-95 addresses the interface between levels 3 and 4 of the PERA model.

2.2.3

ISA-99

Purpose The concept of manufacturing and control systems electronic security is applied in the broadest possible sense, encompassing all types of plants, facilities, and systems in all industries. Manufacturing and control systems include, but are not limited to: • Hardware and software systems such as DCS, PLC, SCADA, networked electronic sensing, and monitoring and diagnostic systems • Associated internal, human, network, or machine interfaces used to provide control, safety, and manufacturing operations functionality to continuous, batch, discrete, and other processes. Physical security is an important component in the overall integrity of any control system environment, but it is not specifically addressed in this series of documents. The ISA-99 Committee will establish standards, recommended practices, technical reports, and related information that will define procedures for implementing electronically secure manufacturing and control systems and security practices and assessing electronic security performance (see Figure 2-3). Guidance is directed towards those responsible for designing, implementing, or managing manufacturing and control systems and shall also apply to users, system integrators, security practitioners, and control systems manufacturers and vendors.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-4

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence The Committee s focus is to improve the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of components or systems used for manufacturing or control and provide criteria for procuring and implementing secure control systems. Compliance with the Committee’s guidance will improve manufacturing and control system electronic security, and will help identify vulnerabilities and address them, thereby reducing the risk of compromising confidential information or causing Manufacturing Control Systems degradation or failure. Scope The ISA-99 Committee addresses manufacturing and control systems whose compromise could result in any or all of the following situations: • endangerment of public or employee safety • loss of public confidence • violation of regulatory requirements • loss of proprietary or confidential information • economic loss • impact on national security Publications ISA-SP99 completed the first editions of two key ISA technical reports in 2004: • ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.01-2004, Security Technologies for Manufacturing and Control Systems • ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.02-2004, Integrating Electronic Security into the Manufacturing and Control Systems Environment Current Work Currently, ISA-SP99 is focused on completing the first two in a series of ANSI/ISA standards while, at the same time, updating ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.01-2004 to reflect new information and technology. First ballots by the ISA-99 committee were completed on the Part 1 and Part 2 draft standards on May 30 and June 5, 2006, respectively. Reference: http://www.isa.org/MSTemplate.cfm?MicrositeID= 988&CommitteeID=6821

Figure 2.2-3. ISA-99 addresses manufacturing and control systems electronic security for the PERA model.

2.3

Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence

A thorough understanding of the manufacturing zone and convergence issues are important to selecting a physical infrastructure architecture that addresses performance, security and maintainability requirements. Based on the PERA model ISA-99, the following areas can be described for the manufacturing space which require network topologies to converge and integrate (see Figure 2-4). Enterprise Zone. The manufacturing zone must integrate with the enterprise applications to exchange production (ex. Historical data) and resource data (ex. Recipe management). Direct access to the manufacturing zone is typically not required, with the exception of partner access (remote access). Access to data and the networks in the manufacturing zone must be managed and controlled to maintain the availability and stability of the plant or factory networks. Demilitarized Zone (DMZ). An area for computing resources that need to be shared between the Enterprise and Manufacturing zone and that is designed with security measures to prevent direct access between the enterprise and manufacturing equipment. This area provides an important function for connecting the critical factory floor equipment to data and services from the enterprise level.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-5

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence

Figure 2.3-1. Schematic Overview of Common Areas of Industrial Control and Network System Integration

Manufacturing Zone. The manufacturing zone comprises the cell/area zone networks and site-level activities. It is important because all the systems critical to monitoring the plant or factory operations are in this zone. Cell/Area Zone. The cell/area zones are the functional areas within the plant or factory. Some of the cell/area zones within a plant or factory might include raw material handling, mixing, assembly and finished goods material handling. It may be as small as a single Process Automation Controller (PAC) and its associated devices, or multiple controllers. Anything within the cell/area zones are involved in the realtime control of a functional aspect of the plant or factory. Safety Zone. The safety zone is considered highest priority in process or manufacturing. Historically, safety systems have been hard-wired, difficult to maintain and do not accommodate change easily. Safety networks provide all the advantages of traditional distributed I/O for complex safety systems thus improving diagnostics and the ability to implement changes programmatically.

2.3.1

Layers of the Manufacturing Zone

To meet the needs of the industrial automation customer, control systems network architecture has been separated into three layers (see Figure 2-5). This three-layer architecture must be open from top to bottom. Open means that the independently managed technology is available without restriction to all, both in terms of technology access and the ability to contribute enhancements to the open standard. This openness provides freedom of choice, allowing customers to choose the best-in-class products for their industrial automation systems. The architecture must also be based on globally accepted standards supported by a majority of companies in the control marketplace. Taking careful consideration of communication needs of both simple and complex products, it becomes clear which layer and which network is more appropriate for that product.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-6

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence

Figure 2.3-2. Manufacturing Zone Network Layers

• The Information Layer is typically a backbone and a management interface into the control system. This layer typically transfers data between supervisory devices and links into the manufacturing execution system (MES). • The Control and Information Layer is typically used for the transmission of time-critical control data between separate manufacturing cells, where time-critical data delivery is very important. Quite often, the Control and Information Layer is used to link multiple device layer networks.

2.3.2

• The Device Layer network is typically used for connecting devices such as sensors and actuators, which historically have been hard wired into the Control & Information Layer. These simple sensors and actuators continue to grow in capability, and the Device Layer network makes it easier to install and use these products, taking advantage of these extended capabilities.

Connecting Manufacturing to Enterprise Also, factory floor network traffic can potentially flood enterprise level.

Figure 2.3-3. Early Attempts at Control and Network System Integration Led to Unacceptable Risk

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-7

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence The desire to share data between manufacturing and enterprise is very strong and leads to great improvements in productivity. However, early attempts lead to problems due to failure to consider the differences between these zones and the resultant risks from connecting them together. Industrial automation networks have unique consideration from the traditional Enterprise Zone environments. Unique protocols and use of multicast traffic Determinism and real-time requirements Availability, security and safety considerations Physical requirements of the factory floor is driving unique products and topologies • Need to provide and control vendor access • • • •

The three-layer network architectural model does not address these concerns. With significant growth in Ethernetbased industrial automation protocols driving the need for specific switching, routing, security and wireless design guidance from non-traditional IT resources are often requested.

2.3.3

As the need for more data increases in the Enterprise Zone from the Manufacturing Zone for systems such as MES, the Information Layer became skewed. With little or no consideration to network architecture the Manufacturing Zone was trusted into the Enterprise Zone with direct connections made from manufacturing switches and devices to existing office/enterprise networks. The results led to many problems both with manufacturing system outages as well as disruptions to office/enterprise networks. Early attempts at enterprise integration as shown in Figure 2-6 left control cell/areas too exposed to enterprise risks. Several risks of directly connecting the manufacturing zone to the enterprise zone include: • Security: Risk of unauthorized changes • Malware: virus, worm disruptions • Management: Patching or network updates not appropriate for control devices • Traffic: Control network messages flooding enterprise causing disruption

Enterprise Connectivity Options

The following tables and figures clearly articulate the pros and cons for various approaches to factory integration from totally isolated to fully secure connectivity:

(See separate charts on subsequent pages)

A. Isolated No connection to the enterprise B. Integrated Direct connection to enterprise without DMZ or VLAN C. VLAN Virtual LAN approach to segment and secure network D. Firewall Demilitarized Zone leveraging Hardware/software to separate and secure levels

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-8

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence A. Isolated No connection to the enterprise

Pro

Con

100% isolation

No real time data transfer or remote access

most secure (if done properly)

Difficult (additional time) and substantial cost to: • Administer • Patch • Update Virus Definitions • Update/Install Software No visibility to network operations (and security issues)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-9

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence B. Integrated Direct connection to enterprise without DMZ or VLAN

Pro

Con

Connectivity is provided for data cess/visibility

No isolation - events from one network acimpact the other Administration is difficult without effecting other networks/uptime Control system exposed to the business networks, corporate network and internet Insecure - least secure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-10

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence C. VLAN Virtual LAN approach to segment and secure network

Pro

Con

Connectivity is scalable

Difficult to secure - very high cost of ownership (from security perspective)

Better isolation

Excessive ingress and egress points

Current state

Difficult to isolate in response to network events Scalability with security is very difficult

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-11

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence D. Firewall Demilitarized Zone leveraging Hardware/software to separate and secure levels

Pro

Con

Best security/access trade off

Expensive - drives additional costs in networking hw and servers

Single ingress/egress point between networks

Complexity (required special skill set)

Easy to isolate in response to network events

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-12

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence 2.3.4

b. Linear or Daisy Chain Commonly used for Level 0 and Level 1

Topologies

Topology refers to the network physical structure rather than the layer or zone of the architecture. A wide variety of topologies have been developed over the history of networking that address tradeoffs in cost, flexibility, robustness, and complexity. The advent of low cost embedded switch technology and wireless has allowed for a greater range of topologies for Ethernet than ever before. This section discusses the pros and cons of common topology options:

Pro

Con • Traffic subject to the “weakest link” • Multiple single points of failure • No redundancy

a. Bus b. Linear or Daisy Chain c. Star, Extended Star, Redundant Star d. Ring, Dual Ring e. Mesh, Partial Mesh

a. Bus Commonly used for Level 0 and Level 1 for legacy networks but not used in today’s switched Ethernet. Pro

Con • Limited to half duplex • Collisions are unavoidable • Multiple single points of failure • No redundancy

c1. Star (i.e., Hub and Spoke) Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 5 Pro

Con • All traffic between segments must past through a central point • Single point of failure, the “hub” • No redundancy

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-13

Section 2.3: Manufacturing Zone Layers and Convergence c.2 Extended-Star (i.e., Hub and Spoke) Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 3

d1. Ring Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 3

Pro

Pro

Con • More resilient than a star • No redundancy

• Redundancy • No single point of failure

Con • Possibly, convergence time depending on technology • Ring can tolerate only one failure at a time

c3. Redundant Star Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 5 Pro • Redundancy

Con • All traffic between segments must past through a central point

• No single point of failure when the central point uses redundant hardware d2. Dual-Ring Commonly used for Level 0 through Level 3 Pro • Redundancy • No single point of failure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Con • Possibly, convergence time depending on technology • Ring can tolerate only one failure at a time, depending on failure

Page 2-14

Section 2.4: Rockwell Automation & Cisco Systems® e1. Full-Mesh Commonly used for Level 3 and Level 5

e2. Partial-Mesh Commonly used for Level 3 and Level 5

Pro

Pro

Con

• Redundancy

• Expensive; N(N-1)/2 where N is the number of devices, in this case switches where the result is the number of links needed

• Redundancy

Con • Compromise fault tolerance for cost

• High availability • No single point of failure

• High availability • No single point of failure

2.4

Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems® Reference Architectures for Manufacturing

• EtherNet/IP™ Guidance for Selecting Cables [PDF] – (ODVA)

The Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems® Reference Architectures for Manufacturing provide a framework for • Techniques for Infrastructure Deployment: Reference implementing automation systems that leverage network Architectures in Manufacturing Networks [PDF] – (ODVA) communications to deliver unprecedented efficiency, security, performance, and maintainability to industrial operations. • Ethernet Network Design for IT and Manufacturing The following diagrams show this network from a logical and Automation – (Automation Fair 2008) Learn the Guidelines switching perspective. Key concepts for this logical architecfor designing Ethernet infrastructures, including topology ture include setup of a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) for a sedesign, protocol selection, and media-switch router cure connection of the factory floor to the enterprise through technology. Both IT and manufacturing automation firewalls, and segmenting zones for each cell/area. Redunconsiderations are included. dant star topologies are the preferred solution but there are cases where ring or bus approaches make sense. Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems® Reference Architectures for Manufacturing offers many suggested best The full explanation of the Rockwell Automation and Cisco practices which impact availability, security, and Systems® Reference Architectures for Manufacturing can be performance. A solid understanding of this advice will lead to found at: intelligent choices for the physical infrastructure. http://www.ab.com/networks/architectures.html

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-15

Section 2.4: Rockwell Automation & Cisco Systems®

Robust and Secure Network Infrastructure • Enterprise Zone for IT networks • DMZ as a buffer zone to securely share data and services • Manufacturing zone where critical production floor systems exist • Cell/Area zone where devices and controllers reside

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-16

Section 2.4: Rockwell Automation & Cisco Systems®

Developed against tested and validated architectures • Hierarchical approach to segment key network functions

• Cisco Validated Design I • Network infrastructure services

• Multiple topologies • Security built-in

• Standard Ethernet, Standard IP, and EtherNet/IP (Standard)

• High-availability options

• Expandable for future functions

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-17

Section 2.4: Rockwell Automation & Cisco Systems® Industrial Ethernet Reference Architecture Best Practices Manufacturing Zone best practices • Replicate critical services in the manufacturing zone, consider the following: - Domain Services e.g. LDAP or Active Directory - Naming services e.g. DNS & WINS - IP Address services e.g. DHCP - Time services e.g. NTP or PTP • Availability: apply redundant network routers/switches and links to maintain overall network availability • Scalability: small sites use combined core and distribution switches; larger or growing sites should separate to avoid oversubscription on uplinks. • Deploy Security and Network Management • Routing: Use link-state routing protocols or EIGRP for Layer 3 load balancing and convergence - Use EIGRP to simplify configuration - If standard protocols are required, use OSPF or IS-IS No overlapping IP addresses with enterprise network. No redundant IP addresses (Network Address Translation is maintenance overhead). Cell/Area Zone Design best practices • Design small Cell/Area zones in a VLAN to better manage and shape the traffic – devices that need to talk to each other in one VLAN. • Use Managed Switches • Connect in Full-duplex mode to avoid collisions • Use Gigabit Ethernet ports for trunks/uplinks for lower latency & jitter • Use IGMP Snooping/Querier functions to control CIP multicast traffic volume • Use resilient network topologies, Ring or preferably Redundant Star. Use RSTP to manage loops, recover from connectivity loss for network convergence. • Apply port security to limit use of open ports. • Enable Layer 2 security features to protect Cell/Area zone.

Security best practices Implement network-wide security that is fully embedded into the network infrastructure, to protect against and prevent who has network access and what they can do. • Rockwell Automation Network & Security Services – e.g. consulting and audits • Device Hardening • Threat defense - Defending the edge - Protecting the interior - Guarding the endpoints • Manufacturing and Enterprise Zone barrier with Demilitarized zone (DMZ) DMZ best practices • Only path to the Manufacturing zone • No Traffic traverses the DMZ. - No common protocols in each logical firewall • Set-up functional sub-zones in the DMZ to segment access to data and services (e.g. Partner zone) • Be prepared to “turn-off” access via the firewall • No Control Traffic into the DMZ (or at a minimum not out of the DMZ) • Limit outbound connections from the DMZ

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-18

Section 2.5: Control Room Area 2.5

Control Room Area

A highly competitive process industry is driving manufacturers to improve efficiency, productivity, and safety. At the forefront is the control room - the nerve center that links and orchestrates manufacturing processes. Greater demands are being placed on control room architectures to replace outdated controls and labor-intensive manual processes. The goal? Increased output, less waste, higher availability, and improved safety.

A robust and adaptive industrial Ethernet network infrastructure is critical to the success of this implementation. There are several key issues for control room architectures with industrial Ethernet at the core, including: • Installation • Security • Performance • Maintainability.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-19

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Reference Architectures Rockwell and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that meet the specialized needs for a control room to deliver process automation excellence. These architectures describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, software, network switches, and control level devices that meet the needs for performance and reliability from software and device levels. In addition to this reference architecture level, the physical layer reference architecture is also crucial. The physical layer architecture refers to the infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and optimize the physical plant connectivity and installation. A structured, engineered approach is essential for the physical layer to ensure that investments in a control room deliver optimum output. Physical Layout Considerations When designing the physical layer for a control room, the key engineering considerations include the wiring back to the control room and wire management in the control room. Understanding the size of the operation, plant and control room layout, environment, plant expansion potential, and network topologies will help establish the physical layer infrastructure back to the control room. The control room may pre-exist, constraining size and lacking features like a raised floor. In addition, there may need to be coexistence with legacy wiring and devices while transitioning and during the long term. Inside the control room, there is a complex synergy of servers, monitors, printers, control devices, communication gear, etc. In fact, a modern control room is similar in architecture to a data center room. Over the years, control rooms and data centers have been converging on networks, servers, and switches driven by the need to integrate to the enterprise. Consequently, the best practices from data center rooms can be leveraged for enclosures, wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, power distribution, and thermal dissipation. The following solution matrix explores this in more detail. Network Schematic Analysis Since the control room is the hub between manufacturing and the enterprise systems, both the IT and control world must be served equally. This leads to an opportunity to leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunction with process control system knowledge. Ideally, a partnership between IT and controls groups will emerge. One approach is to develop ‘hybrid’ IT and engineering resources with skills

to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. The ‘hybrid’ resource can come from either the IT or control groups. One of the primary tasks is to review a schematic layout of the process system’s switches and control devices. This allows the groups to make decisions on physical infrastructure components to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design. This guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with call outs indicating where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For industries commonly featuring redundant networks and possibilities for sub networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant, as well as in control plans, should be considered. In order to reduce risks associated with installation and long term performance, select fiber and copper connectivity solutions that are engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. End to End Solution In summary, perform a thorough analysis and develop a plan for the physical infrastructure for control room out to field devices. This will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, control panels and on-machine wiring will result in process control systems that enable the full benefit of the investments made in advanced process control systems. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this architecture.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-20

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Control Room Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure for a Control Room. Necessary steps include: 1. Define the logical architecture governing the layout of industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams. 2. Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, enclosures, rack systems and control panels. The following diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution.

3. Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy the Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Discuss the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations. 1. Define the Logical Architecture .

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-21

Section 2.5: Control Room Area 2. Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

• Enclosure systems designed for optimum cable management for fiber and copper connectivity while allowing for proper thermal management of critical servers and switches • Color coded and keyed solutions to segregate and control patching to avoid inadvertent patching mistakes that bypass DMZ firewalls that separate office and control networks

• Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to communication disruptions • Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block out connectivity

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-22

Section 2.5: Control Room Area 3. Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-23

Section 2.5: Control Room Area 4. Discuss the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

Control Room Issues

Panduit Solution

Future proof, High Availability, high perfor-

Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solu-

mance connectivity

tions

Security: Control and Management of con-

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent

nections, patching

crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2 ) Enterprise Data Center connectivity DMZ Shared enclosure, rack areas

connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels Manufacturing Zone (Level 3) Control Room

Performance: Noise issues

Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet systems

Performance: Cable/Connector performance

Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that exceeds standards

Performance: Thermal management

Enclosure systems and wire management solutions that efficiently direct cooling to critical servers and switches improving robustness

High Availability: Redundant networks

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Cable management

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

Wireless implementation

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals

Deploying wireless access points securely

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated

without expensive power runs

enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power Over Ethernet (POE) to distribute power

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-24

Section 2.5: Control Room Area 6. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure: Server Cabinets and accessories Panduit Part #

Description

CS1

Server cabinet frame with top panel. Single hinge perforated front door. Two sets of cage nut equipment mounting rails. 45 RU cable management on rear of rear posts. One set of POU mounting brackets. Dimensions: 84.0”H x 31.5”W x 41.1”D (2134mm x 800mm x 1044mm)

CN1

Switch cabinet frame with top panel. Dual hinge perforated front door. Two sets of #12-24 tapped equipment mounting rails. 45 RU cable management on rear of rear posts. Dimensions: 84.0”H x 31.5”W x 41.1”D (2134mm x 800mm x 1044mm)

CMR19X84

2 Post Patching Rack with space identification Double-sided #12-24 EIA universal mounting hole spacing. 24 #12-24 mounting screws included. Paint piercing washers included.

DPFP4

4RU filler panels. Direct airflow in cabinet applications. Mount to standard EIA 19” racks or cabinets. #12-24 and M6 mounting screws included

NM1

Front and rear 1RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers

NMF2

Front only 2RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers

NMF4

Front only 4RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers

PRV8

8 inch wide vertical cable manager, includes four PRSP7 slack spools. Dimensions: 83.9”H x 8.0”W x 16.4”D(2131mm x 203mm x 417mm)

PRV6

6 inch wide vertical cable manager, spools are not included. Dimensions: 84”H x 6”W x 16.4”D. (2133.6mm x 152.4mm x 416.6mm)

PRD8

8 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 8.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x 40mm)

PRD6

6 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 6.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x 40mm)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-25

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Copper Cables/Connectors/Outlet Boxes Panduit Part#

Description

CBXD6BL-AY

Surface mount box accepts six Mini-Com® Modules. Provides slots that accept cable ties for strain relief. Provides bend radius control. Supplied with label holder/screw cover. Dimensions: 1.04”H x 4.95”W x 3.79”L (26.42mm x 125.73mm x 96.27mm)

CPP24FMWBLY

1RU 24-Port flush mount modular patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates: For use with CJ688TG* Category 6 Jack Modules

CWPP12WBL

Alternate 12-Port patch panel supplied with three factory installed CFFP4 snap-in faceplates with integrated wall mount bracket

CJ688TG*

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module. * add suffix IW (Off White, EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red, BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet)

UTPSP*M**Y

1m Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end. * for lengths 1 to 20 feet (Increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 foot lengths ** add suffix BL (BLACK), BU (BLUE), GR (Green), RD (RED), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange), or VL (Violet)

Optional Keyed Jack Module CJK688TG*

Keyed Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module

Optional Keyed Patch Cord for use with Keyed Jack Module UTPKSP*^

Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.

Copper Jacks, Cable, Patch, Assemblies Jacks Panduit Part#

Description

CJ6X88TGI*

Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

CJK6X88TG*

Keyed Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

CJ688TG*

Mini-Com® Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module.

CJK688TG*

Keyed Mini-Com® Category 6 UTP Jack Module * add suffix IW (Off White, EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red, BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet). STP Shielded Jacks also available.

Horizontal Cable Panduit Part#

Description

PUR6X04**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR UTP Copper Cable

PUP6X04**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP UTP Copper Cable

PUR6004BU-UY

TX6™ Cat6 CMR UTP Copper Cable

PUP6004BU-UY

TX6™ Cat6 CMP UTP Copper Cable

PSR6004**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR U/FTP Copper Cable

PSP6004**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP U/FTP Copper Cable

** add suffix BL (BLACK), BU (BLUE), GR (Green), RD (RED), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange), or VL (Violet) ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

STP Shielded Cable also available. Page 2-26

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Patch Cords Panduit Part#

Description

UTP6X^**

TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords

UTPK6X^**

Keyed TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords

UTPSP*M**Y

1m Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end.

UTPKSP*^

Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other. ** add suffix BL (BLACK), BU (BLUE), GR (Green), RD (RED), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange), or VL (Violet). * for lengths 1 to 20 feet (Increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 foot lengths STP Shielded Patch Cable also available

Patch Panels Panduit Part#

Description

DP**6X88TGY

DP6™ 10Gig™ Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

DPA**6X88TGY

DP6™ 10Gig™ Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

DP**688TGY

DP6™ Category 6 Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

DPA**688TGY

DP6™ Category 6 Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

CPP**FMWBLY

Mini-Com® 1RU 24-Port flush mount modular patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates: For use with CJ688TG* Category 6 Jack Modules

CPPA48HDWBLY

48-Port angled high density patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates (space not available for component labels)

CBXD6BL-AY

Surface mount box accepts six Mini-Com® Modules. Provides slots that accept cable ties for strain relief. Provides bend radius control. Supplied with label holder/screw cover. ** = Number of Jack Ports 24 or 48 24 = 1RU Rack Space 48 = 2RU Rack Space

QuickNet Panduit Part#

Description

QAPBCBCBXX**

QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cable Assembly construted of Category 6A, UTP, plenum cable (blue) with pre-terminated cassette (blue jacks installed) on each end. ** available in one foot increments in lengths from 10 feet to 295 feet (also available in Category 6 version)

QPP24BL

24-Port patch panel which accepts QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cassettes and Patch Panel Adapters (48 port also available)

QPPACBAB07

QuickNet Plug Pack Cable Assembly made with Category 6A, CM Blue Cable with a 6-pack blue plug pack on one end to modular plugs on the other end (also available in Category 6 version)

Punchdown System Panduit Part#

Description

GPKBW**Y

GP6™ PLUS Punchdown System ** = either 144-Pair (36-Port) or 432-Pair (108-Port)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-27

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Fiber Products Panduit Part#

Description

F^E10-10M*Y

Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths). Replace ^ with X for 10Gig, 5 for 50/125um (OM2), 6 for 62.5/125um (OM1) or 9 for 9/125um (OS1). Replace the numbers for specific connector type 10 = LC, 2 = ST, 3 = SC. * implies length. Can be ordered in any hybrid configuration.

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8, 12). AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and keying solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or phosphorous bronze split sleeves.

CFAPPBL*

Fiber Patch Panel. Replace * with one or two depending on how many FAPs or cassettes are necessary

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules. Replace * with a D or S for single or duplex, ^^ with color (dependent on fiber type) and delete the Z for phosphorous bronze sleeves.

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors. Fiber optic connectors. Replace ^^ with connector type (LC, Keyed LC, SC, or ST). Replace * with color (AQ, BL, EI)

FODR*^^Y

Fiber Optic Distribution Cable. Replace * with X-10Gig, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM. Replace ^^ with fiber count (6,12,24,36,48,72,96,144,216,288)

FCXO-12-Y

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes, 50/125μm (OM3). Available in MM (OM2), MM (OM1) and SM (OS1) and in 6, 12 or 24 fiber options

FX12D5-5M1Y

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Interconnect Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3). Replace X with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1). Replace 5-5 (LC - LC) with connectors required: 2-ST, 3-SC

FSPX*55F*A

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Trunk Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3), various lengths. Replace X with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1)

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8, 12). AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and keying solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or phosphorous bronze split sleeves.

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules. Replace * with a D or S for single or duplex, ^^ with color (dependent on fiber type) and delete the Z for phosphorous bronze sleeves.

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors. Fiber optic connectors. Replace ^^ with connector type (LC, Keyed LC, SC, or ST). Replace * with color (AQ, BL, EI)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-28

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Fiber Raceway Parts Panduit Part#

Description

FR4X4**6

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Solid Wall Channel.

FRHC4**6

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Snap-On Hinged Cover.

FRBC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 QuikLock Coupler.

FRT4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Fitting.

FRTSC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Cover.

FRFWC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Fitting.

FRFWCSC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Cover.

FRRA4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Fitting.

FRRASC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Cover.

FREC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 End Cap.

FRSP**

FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit.

FRSP4C**

FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit Cover for 4x4 Channel.

FBC2X2**

FIBERRUNNER 2x2 QuikLock Coupler.

FIDT2X2**

Single Port Spill-Out t 1.5” ID Split Corrugated Loom Tubing.

FR6TRBN58

FIBERRUNNER QuikLock New Threaded Rod for 5/8” Threaded Rod

FR6TB12

FIBERRUNNER QuikLock Trapeze Bracket

** Replace with desired color, YL for yellow, BL for Black or OR for Orange

Gridrunner Wireway Parts Panduit Part#

Description

GR21X4X24PG

GRIDRUNNER 21”W x 4”D x 24”L Wire Basket Section

GR21X4X48PG

GRIDRUNNER 21”W x 4”D x 48”L Wire Basket Section

GR12X4X24PG

GRIDRUNNER 12”W x 4”D x 24”L Wire Basket Section

GR12X4X48PG

GRIDRUNNER 12”W x 4”D x 48”L Wire Basket Section

GRFWC21PG

GRIDRUNNER Universal Intersection

GRPBPG

GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Bracket

GRCLAMPPG-X

GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Clamp

GRBR4PG

GRIDRUNNER Bend Radius Control Corner

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-29

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Cable Routing/Management Panduit Part#

Description

CCH50-S10-C

Heavy-Duty Fixed Diameter Clamps

CCS25-S8-C

Standard Fixed Diameter Clamps

CH105-A-C14

Cable Holder

CLT100-C20

Corrugated Loom Tubing

CSH-D20

Cable Spacers

JP131W-L20

J-PRO™ Cable Support System

Cable Ties Panduit Part#

Description

HLM-15R0 *

HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black

HLS-75R0 *

HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black

HLB2S-C0 *

100 Pc TAK-TY Stacked Strips, 7” Strip Tie, 0.75” Width, Black

HLS3S-X0 *

HLS Series 12” Strip Tie, Black

HLT2I-X0 *

HLT Series 8” Loop Tie, Black

HLT3I-X0 *

HLT Series 12” Loop Tie, Black

HLTP2I-X12 *

HLTP Series 8” Loop Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

HLSP3S-X12 *

HLSP Series 12” Strip Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

CBOT24K

Cable Bundle Organizing Tool

PRPC13-69 PRPC13-60

Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention Device - Only used with select Panduit Power Outlet Units (Natural and BLK color)

ERT2M-C20

8.5” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

ERT3M-C20

11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

* Available in multiple colors

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-30

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Control Room Grounding/Bonding Panduit Part#

Description

Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure Parts GB2B0314TPI-1

Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) 1/4” x 2” x 24”, Solid Copper, Tin Plated.

HTWC250-250-1

H-Tap w/Cover Kit: Run 250kcmil - #2 AWG, Tap 250kcmil - #2 AWG

LCC3/0-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 3/0 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC2-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 2 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC4-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC4-12W

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4 AWG, 1/2’ stud hole, 1 3/4” spacing

LCC6-14AW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 6 AWG, 1/4’ stud hole, 5/8” spacing

GUBC500-6

Universal Beam Grounding Clamp

GLMHK

1/2” Hardware Kit for Universal Beam Grounding Clamp

HDW1/4-KT

Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 1/4”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville (locking) washers

HDW3/8-KT

Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 3/8”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville (locking) washers

LTYK

Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding Label Kit

Use these Grounding Jumper Kits when go going directly from Rack/Cabinet to TMGB or TGB. Use with HDW hardware kits. GJ672UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 72” (6’)

GJ696UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 96” (8’)

GJ6120UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 120” (10’)

GJ6144UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 144” (12’)

GJ6168UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 168” (14’)

GJ6192UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 192” (16’)

GJ6216UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 216” (18’)

GJ6240UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 240” (20’)

GJ6264UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 264” (22’)

GJ6288UH

Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC), 6 AWG, 288’ “ (24’)

RGCBNJ660P22

Common Bonding Network Jumper Kit. 6 AWG from Rack/Cabinet to #6 AWG to #2 AWG

RGCBNJ660PY

Common Bonding Network Jumper Kit. 6 AWG from Rack/Cabinet to #2 AWG to 250 kcmil.

For hanging grounding jumpers from ladder racks and bonding ladder rack sections together. GACB-1

Auxiliary Cable Bracket

GACBJ68U

Auxiliary Cable Bracket Jumper Kit, 8”

Rack and Cabinet Grounding and Bonding Components RGS134-1Y

Vertical Grounding Strip Kit, threaded equipment mounting rails

RGS134B-1

Vertical Grounding Strip Kit, Cage Nut equipment mounting rails

RGRB19U

Horizontal Grounding Bus Bar kit, threaded equipment mounting rails

RGRB19CN

Horizontal Grounding Bus Bar Kit, Cage Nut equipment mounting rails

RGESD2-1

ESD Port, #12-24 threaded rail

RGESDB-1

ESD Port, Cage Nut Rails

RGESDWS

ESD Wrist Strap

GJS660U

Equipment Jumper Kit, 6 AWG, 60” (5’), one end factory terminated with straight two-hole compression connector.

RGTBSG-C

Green Bonding Screws, #12-24, box of 100

CNBK

Bonding Cage Nut, 50 pack

CNB4K

Bonding Cage Nut, 4 pack

For bonding and grounding armor fiber cable.

ACG24K

Armored Fiber Cable Grounding Kit, up to 0.84 diameter

ACG24K-500

Armored Fiber Cable Grounding Kit, up to 1.03 diameter

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-31

Section 2.5: Control Room Area Identification Parts - LS8E printer items only shown Panduit Part#

Description

C200X100YPC

Printable Label for Grounding Busbars

C200X100YPC

Printable Label for Rack Identification

C200X100YPC

Printable Label for Enclosure Identification

S100X160VAC

Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification

S100X220VAC

Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification

NWSLC-2Y

Cable identification sleeve for 2mm fiber cable

NWSLC-3Y

Cable identification sleeve for 3mm fiber cable

NWSLC-7Y

Cable identification sleeve for MTP fiber cable

S100X150VAC

Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification

S100X225VAC

Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification

T100X000VPC-BK

Printable Label for Fiber Port Identification

C252X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 4 Port Identification

C379X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 6 Port Identification

C100X000VUC-BK

Printable Label for Pathway Identification

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-32

Section 2.6: Network Distribution 2.6

Network Distribution

There is a balancing act to connecting the manufacturing zone control room to the cell/area zone. Users must decide on architectures, physical media, and connectivity that distribute networking that is cost-effective while also possessing enough flexibility, environmental ruggedness and performance headroom to hold up to current and future manufacturing needs. With the rapid pace of technological developments, specifying network distribution can be confusing as there are multiple categories of copper cabling and modes of fiber media that address varying channel lengths, performance targets, and EMI noise levels. A growing move to wireless approaches also factor into decisions for connecting far flung operations or those with challenging environmental issues. Power over Ethernet technology distributes networking and AC power sufficient for video cameras, sensors, and wireless access points.

 ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-33

Section 2.6: Network Distribution The selection of media and connectivity for network infrastructure is best analyzed as a system design encompassing the media, connectors, security, and installation products that will perform as a solution long term. Certified designers and installers can ensure that this technology is deployed appropriately and support the underlying reference architecture for the application. Key issues for network distribution architectures with industrial Ethernet at the core include installation, reliability, security, production growth, and performance. Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that meet the specialized needs for network distribution to deliver automation excellence. These architectures describe the connectivity between the Cell and Manufacturing zones at a logical level. In addition to this reference architecture level, the physical layer reference architecture is also crucial. The physical layer architecture refers to the infrastructure required to achieve the connectivity considering data throughput, environment, wiring distances, and availability. A structured, engineered approach is essential for the physical layer to ensure that investments in network distribution deliver optimum output. Physical Layout Considerations Key engineering considerations when designing the physical layer for network distribution include data through-put, distance, reliability, and environment. Understanding the size of the operation, plant layout, harsh conditions, plant expansion potential, and network topologies will help establish the physical layer infrastructure requirements. In addition, there may need to be coexistence with legacy wiring and devices while transitioning and long term. State-of-the-art technologies like fiber, deliver superior performance by handling high traffic volume, immunity to noise, and long distances. Reliable termination is essential to achieve excellent performance and reliability. Some possibilities include pre-terminated fiber connectors, or copper bulk head connectors like IP67 or M12. Redundant networks pose different challenges such as cross connection or incorrect port connections. Color coded connectors and Lock-in connectors can mitigate this risk. Cable routing poses other challenges. Cables may be exposed to harsh environments such as extreme weather or vibration. Insulation and abrasion protection products shield cables such

as spiral wrap or heat shrink tubing. Securing cabling may require weather-resistant cable ties and, in extreme cases, rugged stainless steel wire management products. Network Schematic Analysis Industrial Ethernet implementations can leverage the experience of traditional office Ethernet by partnering with IT. This leads to an opportunity to apply best practices from the IT world in conjunction with process control system knowledge. The ideal is a partnering between IT and controls groups. One approach is development of ‘hybrid’ IT and engineering resources with skills to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. The ‘hybrid’ resource can come from either the IT or control groups. One of the primary tasks is to review a schematic layout of the network distribution to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design. This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For industries where redundant networks are common and also have possibilities for sub networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. End-to-End Solution In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for control room out to field devices will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-34

Section 2.6: Network Distribution for control room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, control panels and on-machine wiring will result in process control systems that enable the full benefit of the investments made in advanced process control systems. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this architecture. Network Distribution Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure for network distribution. 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture Define the logical architecture governing the layout of industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams.

3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy the Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, enclosures, rack systems and control panels. The following diagram shows how cable reach factors dictate whether to use copper, single mode or multi-mode cabling. Zone cabling approaches can also distribute cabling though passive patch panels or active patch panels with switches. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-35

Section 2.6: Network Distribution 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

Fig 2.6-1 Logical Diagram for network distribution

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-36

Section 2.6: Network Distribution 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

Fig 2.6-2 Physical Diagram for network distribution -

Copper Layer: Use for short reach (less than 328 ft, 100m). • Choose Category 6 cable and connectors for 10/100/1000Mb performance.

-

Fiber Layer: • For Medium reach (328 to 1800 ft, 101m to 550m) use Multimode fiber cable. • For Long reach (Greater than 1800 ft) use Single mode fiber

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-37

Section 2.6: Network Distribution 3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig 2.6-3 Detail diagram for network distribution physical infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-38

Section 2.6: Network Distribution 4. Discuss the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

Network Distribution Issues

Panduit Solution

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2) Enterprise Data Center connectivity

Futureproof, High Availability, high perfor- Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity mance connectivity solutions

DMZ Shared enclosure, rack areas

Security: Control and Management of connections, patching

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels PanView infrastructure management

Manufacturing Zone (Level 3) Control Room

Performance: Noise issues

Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet systems

Performance: Cable/Connector performance

Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that exceeds standards

High Availability: Redundant networks

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Cable management

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-39

Section 2.6: Network Distribution 5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure: Copper Jacks, Cable, Cable Assemblies Jack Modules Panduit Part#

Description

CJ6X88TG*

Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

CJK6X88TG*

Keyed Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

CJ688TG*

Mini-Com® Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module.

CJK688TG*

Keyed Mini-Com® Category 6 UTP Jack Module * add suffix IW (Off White, EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red, BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet). STP Shielded Jacks also available.

Horizontal Cable Panduit Part#

Description

PUR6X04**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR UTP Copper Cable

PUP6X04**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP UTP Copper Cable

PUR6004BU-UY

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR UTP Copper Cable

PUP6004BU-UY

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP UTP Copper Cable

PSR6004**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMR U/FTP Copper Cable

PSP6004**

TX6™ 10Gig™ CMP U/FTP Copper Cable

PUR6X04BU-UY

High Performance Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable.

PSR6004BU-UGY

Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-Pair U/FTP shielded copper cable.

PUR6004BU-UY

High Performance Category 6 riser (CMR) cable 4-pair UTP copper cable.

PUR5504BU-W

Category 5e riser (CMR) cable 4 pair UTP copper cable. STP Shielded cable also available.

QuickNet Panduit Part#

Description

QAPBCBCBXX**

QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cable Assembly construted of Category 6A, UTP, plenum cable (blue) with pre-terminated cassette (blue jacks installed) on each end. ** available in one foot increments in lenghts from 10 feet to 295 feet (Category 6 also available)

QPP24BL

24-Port patch panel which accepts QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cassettes and Patch Panel Adapters

Punchdown System Panduit Part#

Description

GPKBW**Y

GP6™ PLUS Punchdown System ** = either 144-Pair (36-Port) or 432-Pair (108-Port)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-40

Section 2.6: Network Distribution Plug to Plug, Plug to Jack Cable Assemblies Panduit Part#

Description

UAPPBU25

Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UAPRBU25

Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UPPBU25Y

Category 6 UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UPRBU25Y

Category 6 UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UAJPBU25BL

Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black Mini-Com TX6A 10Gig UTP Jack Module on the other.

UAJRBU25BL

Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black Mini-Com TX6A 10Gig UTP Jack Module on the other.

UJPBU25BLY

Category 6 UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS Modular Plugs on one end and a black Mini-Com TX6 PLUS UTP Jack Module on the other.

UJRBU25BLY

Category 6 UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS Modular Plugs on one end and a black MiniCom TX6 PLUS UTP Jack Module on the other.

Fiber Interconnection Panduit Part #

Description

FSDR606Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)

FSDR606Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)

FODRX06Y

Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM3)

FSDR906Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor singlemode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)

FSPR606Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)

FSPR506Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)

FOPRX06Y

Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM3)

FSPR906Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor armored singlemode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)

FSCR606Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)

FSCR506Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,

FOCRX06Y

Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor/outdoor all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,

FSCR906Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,

FSGR606Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,

50/125μm (OM2) 50/125μm (OM3) 9/125μm (OS1) 62.5/125μm (OM1)

FSGR506Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)

FOGRX06Y

Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM3)

FSGR906Y

Opti-Core 6 fiber indoor/outdoor armored singlemode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)

FSTN606

Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)

FSTN506

Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-41

Section 2.6: Network Distribution Panduit Part #

Description

FOTNX06

Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,

FSTN906

Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant all-dielectric multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)

FSWN606

Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 62.5/125μm (OM1)

FSWN506

Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 50/125μm (OM2)

FOWNX06

Opti-Core 10gig, 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable,

50/125μm (OM3)

50/125μm (OM3)

FSWN906

Opti-Core 6 fiber outside plant armored multimode OFNR riser type distribution cable, 9/125μm (OS1)

FOGPX^^^LNF***B

10 Gig LC to pigtail armored distribution cable with pulling eye on pigtail end and grounding kit for both ends of cable (also available in SM) ^^ is fiber count to 288. *** Length in meters

FOGP9^^^LNF***B

Singlemode LC to LC armored distribution cable with grounding kit for both ends of cable (also available in 10Gig MM) *** length in meters

F^E10-10M*Y

Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths)

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs)

CFAPPBL*

Fiber Patch Panel

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors

FODR*^^Y

Fiber Optic Distribution Cable

FCXO-12-Y

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes, 50/125μm (OM3)

FX12D5-5M1Y

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Interconnect Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3)

FSPX*55F*A

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Trunk Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3), various lengths

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs)

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors

Cable Ties Panduit Part #

Description

HLM-15R0 *

HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black

HLS-75R0 *

HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black

HLB2S-C0 *

100 Pc TAK-TY Stacked Strips, 7” Strip Tie, 0.75” Width, Black

HLS3S-X0 *

HLS Series 12” Strip Tie, Black

HLT2I-X0 *

HLT Series 8” Loop Tie, Black

HLT3I-X0 *

HLT Series 12” Loop Tie, Black

HLTP2I-X12 *

HLTP Series 8” Loop Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

HLSP3S-X12 *

HLSP Series 12” Strip Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

CBOT24K

Cable Bundle Organizing Tool

PRPC13-69

Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention Device - Only used with select Panduit Power Outlet Units (Natural and BLK

PRPC13-60

color)

ERT2M-C20

8.5” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

ERT3M-C20

11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-42

Section 2.6: Network Distribution Fiber Raceway Parts Panduit Part #

Description

FR4X4**6

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Solid Wall Channel.

FRHC4**6

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Snap-On Hinged Cover.

FRBC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 QuikLock Coupler.

FRT4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Fitting.

FRTSC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Cover.

FRFWC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Fitting.

FRFWCSC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Cover.

FRRA4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Fitting.

FRRASC4**

FBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Cover.

FREC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 End Cap.

FRSP**

FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit.

FRSP4C**

FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit Cover for 4x4 Channel.

FBC2X2**

FIBERRUNNER 2x2 QuikLock Coupler.

FIDT2X2**

Single Port Spill-Out t 1.5" ID Split Corrugated Loom Tubing.

FR6TRBN58

FIBERRUNNER QuikLock New Threaded Rod for 5/8" Threaded Rod

FR6TB12

FIBERRUNNER QuikLock Trapeze Bracket

FR6ALB

FIBERRUNNER Adjustable Ladder Rack Bracket ** Replace with desired color, YL for yellow, BL for Black or OR for Orange

Identification Parts - LS 8E printer items only shown Panduit Part #

Description

S100X160VAC

Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification

S100X220VAC

Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification

NWSLC-2Y

Cable identification sleeve for 2mm fiber cable

NWSLC-3Y

Cable identification sleeve for 3mm fiber cable

NWSLC-7Y

Cable identification sleeve for MTP fiber cable

S100X150VAC

Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification

S100X225VAC

Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification

C100X000VUC-BK

Printable Label for Pathway Identification

H100X044H1C

Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification

H100X084H1C

Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification

H100X084H1C

Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification

H100X084H1C

Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification

C100X000VUC-BK

Printable Label for Pathway Identification

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-43

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure 2.7

Zone Cabling Enclosure

Network architectures spread out over large areas can benefit from topologies that consolidate network infrastructure closer to the areas where network drops are located. The basic idea is to move infrastructure such as switches and patch panels that might be housed in racks or enclosures in a control room out to the manufacturing cell/area. This approach, termed a “zone cabling” approach by the cabling industry, can help facilitate a network design that complies with Rockwell Automation and Cisco guidance for cell/area zones concerning segmenting networks for each automation cell to improve performance and robustness. This zone cabling approach has many benefits including cost savings, flexibility for machine moves/changes, and improved availability. To distribute switches, patch panels, POE equipment, and wireless requires designing enclosures with appropriate environmental ratings, security features, wire management, and identification. The manufacturing zone and the cell/area zones that comprise it are potentially home to several layers of networking including critical automation networks linking PAC systems, FactoryTalk servers, motion control as well as networking required for PCs, displays, and printers that are tied to the business network. These enterprise application interfaces may be co-located near the machines or process line so that the distribution of both of these networks may be efficiently handled by one zone cabling enclosure. A further complication is that there may be network drops for building automation related systems such as security cameras, environmental controls, HVAC or power systems. Thus there may be 2-3 networks co-located in one area. Consolidating the network drops from these different network layers into one zone cabling enclosure can reduce floor space, enclosure costs and maintainability if properly managed. However, this converged approach can result in serious outages and security breaches if not properly secured and organized.

Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that meet the specialized needs for network distribution to deliver automation excellence. These architectures describe the connectivity between the Cell and Manufacturing zones at a logical level. In addition to this reference architecture level, the physical layer reference architecture is also crucial. The physical layer architecture refers to the infrastructure required to achieve the connectivity considering data throughput, environment, wiring distances, and availability. A structured, engineered approach is essential for the physical layer to ensure that investments in network distribution deliver optimum output.



©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-44

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that promote segmenting networks into cell/area zones at a logical level based on PERA models. In addition to this reference architecture level, the physical layer reference architecture for a zone cabling approach is also crucial. The physical layout and component selection for a zone cabling architecture comprised of enclosures and zone cabling is critical for ensuring the desired logical architecture performs with the desired level of performance and availability while also ensuring security and maintainability. Physical Layout Considerations Zone enclosures can range in complexity from small enclosures housing one Stratix switch with connectivity to a handful of devices in an area to larger 19” rack systems that consolidate wiring for dozens of control network drops as well as for business system and/or building system drops in the area. The design principles for a small enclosure leverage control panel design principles utilizing DIN rail devices while the layout for a 19” rack system can employ rack-based patch panels for high-density network wiring management. In either case, it’s advised to design the network infrastructure with security, performance, testability, and maintainability in mind. For control panel based designs, design tools such as Bentley’s promise can enable easy standardization on best practice designs leveraging reference designs. For 19” rack designs, Visio based reference designs for layout of each RU of the rack space with the appropriate patching, POR, Cisco switch or Rockwell Automation Stratix switch can assist in providing designs that leverage best practices for wire management and connectivity.

Network Schematic Analysis Network schematics are important tools for control engineers and IT personnel to review the physical infrastructure design and component selection. By reviewing the copper and fiber channels implemented in the zone cabling enclosure, the locations where testability, performance and security are concerns can be highlighted and addressed. This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For industries where redundant networks are common and also have possibilities for sub networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. End-to-End Solution In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for the zone cabling enclosure is key for ensuring its value and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for zone cabling enclosures and cabling will result in cost savings, flexibility and improved performance and security. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this zone cabling architecture.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-45

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure Network Distribution Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure for a zone cabling enclosure system. 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture Define the logical architecture governing the layout of industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams. 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, enclosures, rack systems and control panels. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed (i.e., “zone cabling”) topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations. Physically layout the zone cabling enclosure with switches, patching, and PoE devices, as required.

3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy the Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-46

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

Fig 2.7-1 Logical Diagram for Network Zones

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-47

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

Stratix 8000

Fig 2.7-2 Physical Diagram for Zone Cabling Enclosure

-

Enclosure systems designed for optimum cable management for fiber and copper connectivity while allowing for proper thermal management of critical servers and switches.

-

Color coded and keyed solutions to segregate and control patching to avoid inadvertent patching mistakes that bypass DMZ firewalls that separate office and control networks.

-

Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to communication disruptions

\- Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and blockconnectivity

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-48

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure 3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig 2.7-3 Detail diagram for zone cabling enclosure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-49

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure 4. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure Zone Cabling

Zone Issues

Panduit Solution

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: Distance, Throughput

Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance, reducing risk

Maintainability: Access

Ceiling enclosures, racks, panels ideal for mainframe or array storage

Maintainability: Cabling

Pre-terminated MTP cassettes, fiber adapter panel (FAP), or fiber optic adapter modules and their associated trunk cables, interconnect cables, connectors and patch cords

Mixture of Office and IE network

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-50

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure 5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure: Server Cabinets, Ethernet enclosures and accessories Panduit Part#

Description

CS1

Server cabinet frame with top panel. Single hinge perforated front door. Two sets of cage nut equipment mounting rails. 45 RU cable management on rear of rear posts. One set of POU mounting brackets. Dimensions: 84.0”H x 31.5”W x 41.1”D (2134mm x 800mm x 1044mm)

CN1

Switch cabinet frame with top panel. Dual hinge perforated front door. Two sets of #12-24 tapped equipment mounting rails. 45 RU cable management on rear of rear posts. Dimensions: 84.0”H x 31.5”W x 41.1”D (2134mm x 800mm x 1044mm)

CMR19X84

2 Post Patching Rack with space identification Double-sided #12-24 EIA universal mounting hole spacing. 24 #12-24 mounting screws included. Paint piercing washers included.

DPFP4

4RU filler panels. Direct airflow in cabinet applications. Mount to standard EIA 19” racks or cabinets. #1224 and M6 mounting screws included

NM1

Front and rear 1RU horizontal cable manager.

Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-

24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers

NMF2

Front only 2RU horizontal cable manager. Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-24 and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers

NMF4

Front only 4RU horizontal cable manager.

Mount to 19” EIA racks and cabinets. Covers, #12-24

and M6 mounting screws included. Design fits flush to the front of the NetRunner™ High Capacity WMPVHCF45E and WMPVHC45E Vertical Managers

PRV8

8 inch wide vertical cable manager, includes four PRSP7 slack spools. Dimensions: 83.9”H x 8.0”W x 16.4”D(2131mm x 203mm x 417mm)

PRV6

6 inch wide vertical cable manager, spools are not included. Dimensions: 84”H x 6”W x 16.4”D. (2133.6mm x 152.4mm x 416.6mm)

PRD8

8 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 8.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x 40mm)

PRD6

6 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 6.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x 40mm)

IAEIP66

Industrial Ethernet enclosure 18.50”H x 18.50”W x 8.00”D, supplied with 115/230V to 24Vdc Power Supply. Ip 66/Nema 4x rated.

IAECGP

Industrial Ethernet gland plate, with 14 industrial ethernet bulkhead fittings and patch cords. Attaches to IAEIP66 enclosure.

IAEFKSC

Industrial Ethernet SC fiber uplink kit. Terminates 4 SC connectors to two duplex fiber uplinks.

PZAEWM3

PanZone Active wall enclosure, 38.50”H x 27.92”W x 8.61”D

PZAEGK

Structured Ground kit for PanZone enclosure.

PZC12S

PanZone Wall mount cabinet for consolidation, 25.81”H x 25” W x 22.85”D

PZWIFIN

Wireless Access Point, for Cisco Aironet, 13.75”H x 12”W x 4.75”D

PZNWE12

Wireless Access Point for Cisco Aironet, 13.56”H x 13.47”W x 6.56”D, Nema 4x/IP 66 rated.

PZNWE12S

Wireless Access Point for Cisco Aironet, 13.56”H x 13.47”W x 6.56”D, Nema 4x/IP 66 rated. Includes shielded connectivity kit for POE (power over ethernet) applications.

PRD6

6 inch wide dual hinged metal door. Dimensions: 82.8”H x 6.1”W x 1.6”D(2104mm x 206mm x 40mm)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-51

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure Copper Cables/Connectors/Patch/Assemblies Jack Modules Panduit Part#

Description

CJ6X88TG*

Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

CJK6X88TG*

Keyed Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

CJ688TG*

Mini-Com® Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module.

CJK688TG*

Keyed Mini-Com® Category 6 UTP Jack Module * add suffix IW (Off White, EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red, BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet). STP Shielded Jacks also available.

Patch Cords Panduit Part#

Description

UTP6A^**

TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords

UTPK6A^**

Keyed TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords

UTPSP*M**Y

Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end, meter lengths.

UTPKSP*^

Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.

Patch Panels Panduit Part#

Description

DP**6X88TGY

DP6™ 10Gig™ Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

DPA**6X88TGY

DP6™ 10Gig™ Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

DP**688TGY

DP6™ Category 6 Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

DPA**688TGY

DP6™ Category 6 Angled Modular Punchdown Patch Panel

CPP**FMWBLY

Mini-Com® 1RU 24-Port flush mount modular patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates: For use with CJ688TG* Category 6 Jack Modules

CPPA48HDWBLY

48-Port angled high density patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates (space not available for component labels) ** = Number of Jack Ports 24 or 48 24 = 1RU Rack Space 48 = 2RU Rack Space

CBXD6BL-AY

Surface mount box accepts six Mini-Com® Modules. Provides slots that accept cable ties for strain relief. Provides bend radius control. Supplied with label holder/screw cover.

QuickNet Panduit Part#

Description

QAPBCBCBXX**

QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cable Assembly construted of Category 6A, UTP, plenum cable (blue) with pre-terminated cassette (blue jacks installed) on each end. ** available in one foot increments in lengths from 10 feet to 295 feet (also available in Category 6 version)

QPP24BL

24-Port patch panel which accepts QuickNet Pre-Terminated Cassettes and Patch Panel Adapters (48 port also available)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-52

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure Plug to Plug, Plug to Jack Cable Assemblies Panduit Part#

Description

UAPPBU25

Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UAPRBU25

Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UPPBU25Y

Category 6 UTP solid plenum cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UPRBU25Y

Category 6 UTP solid riser cable with TX6 PLUS modular Plugs on each end

UAJPBU25BL

Category 6A UTP solid plenum cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black Mini-Com TX6A 10Gig UTP Jack Module on the other.

UAJRBU25BL

Category 6A UTP solid riser cable with TX6A 10Gig modular plug on one end and a black Mini-Com TX6A 10Gig UTP Jack Module on the other.

MPSI588T

Category 5e, RJ45 shielded industrial plug with protective cover

IUTPCH*BLY

Category 5e UTP patch cord constructed of industrial grade UTP category 5e solid cable with dust caps

ISTPCH*MBLY

Category 5e STP patch cords constructed of industrial grade STP category 5e solid cable with dust caps

IndustrialNet Products Panduit Part#

Description

IAEBH5E

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial connector with protective cover

IAEBH5ES

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire shielded black industrial connector with protective cover

IAEBH6

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial connector with protective cover

IAEBH6S

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire shielded black industrial connector with protective cover

IAEBHC6

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial bulkhead coupler with protective cover

IEABHC5E

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial bulkhead coupler with protective cover

MPI588T

Category 5e, RJ45 industrial plug with protective cover

MPSI588T

Category 5e, RJ45 shielded industrial plug with protective cover

IUTPCH*BLY

Category 5e UTP patch cord constructed of industrial grade UTP category 5e solid cable with dust caps

ISTPCH*MBLY

Category 5e STP patch cords constructed of industrial grade STP category 5e solid cable with dust caps

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-53

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure Fiber Products Zone Cabling Enclosure Panduit Part#

Description

F^E10-10M*Y

Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths). Replace ^ with X for 10Gig, 5 for 50/125um (OM2), 6 for 62.5/125um (OM1) or 9 for 9/125um (OS1). Replace the numbers for specific connector type 10 = LC, 2 = ST, 3 = SC. * implies length. Can be ordered in any hybrid configuration.

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8, 12). AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and keying solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or phosphorous bronze split sleeves.

CFAPPBL*

Fiber Patch Panel. Replace * with one or two depending on how many FAPs or cassettes are necessary.

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules. Replace * with a D or S for single or duplex, ^^ with color (dependent on fiber type) and delete the Z for phosphorous bronze sleeves.

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors. Fiber optic connectors. Replace ^^ with connector type (LC, Keyed LC, SC, or ST). Replace * with color (AQ, BL, EI)

FODR*^^Y

Fiber Optic Distribution Cable. Replace * with X-10Gig, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM. Replace ^^ with fiber count (6,12,24,36,48,72,96,144,216,288)

FCXO-12-Y

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes, 50/125μm (OM3). Available in MM (OM2), MM (OM1) and SM (OS1) and in 6, 12 or 24 fiber options

FX12D5-5M1Y

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Interconnect Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3). Replace X with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1) . Replace 5-5 (LC - LC) with connectors required: 2-ST, 3-SC

FSPX*55F*A

QuickNet™ 10Gig™ MTP* Trunk Cable Assemblies, 50/125μm (OM3), various lengths. Replace X with, 5 for MM (OM2), 6 for MM (OM1) and 9 for SM (OS1)

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Replace * with number of ports required (4, 6, 8, 12). AQ designates 10G Aqua color, also available in other colors to designate fiber type and keying solutions. Available in ST, SC, LC, and Keyed LC. Available with zirconia ceramic or phosphorous bronze split sleeves.

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules. Replace * with a D or S for single or duplex, ^^ with color (dependent on fiber type) and delete the Z for phosphorous bronze sleeves.

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors. Fiber optic connectors. Replace ^^ with connector type (LC, Keyed LC, SC, or ST). Replace * with color (AQ, BL, EI)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-54

Section 2.7: Zone Cabling Enclosure Cable Ties Panduit Part#

Description

HLM-15R0 *

Hook and Loop HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black

HLS-75R0 *

Hook and Loop HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black

HLB2S-C0 *

100 Pc TAK-TY Stacked Strips, 7” Strip Tie, 0.75” Width, Black

HLS3S-X0 *

HLS Series 12” Strip Tie, Black

HLT2I-X0 *

HLT Series 8” Loop Tie, Black

HLT3I-X0 *

HLT Series 12” Loop Tie, Black

HLTP2I-X12 *

HLTP Series 8” Loop Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

HLSP3S-X12 *

HLSP Series 12” Strip Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

ERT2M-C20

8.5” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

ERT3M-C20

11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

Safety/Security Parts Panduit Part #

Description

PSL-DCPL

Package of 10 RJ45 Plug Lock-In Devices and one installation/removal tool -- for standard jacks

PSL-DCPLR

Package of 10 RJ45 Plug Lock-In Devices and one installation/removal tool -- for recessed jacks

PSL-DCJB

Package of 10 RJ45 Blockout Devices and one installation/removal tool

PSL-LCAB

Package of 10 LC Duplex Adapter Blockout Device and one installation/removal tool

FLCCLIW-X

Package of 10 LC Duplex Lock-In Clips and one removal tool

Identification Parts - LS 8E printer items only shown Panduit Part #

Description

C200X100YPC

Printable Label for Enclosure Identification

S100X160VAC

Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification

S100X220VAC

Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification

NWSLC-2Y

Cable identification sleeve for 2mm fiber cable

NWSLC-3Y

Cable identification sleeve for 3mm fiber cable

NWSLC-7Y

Cable identification sleeve for MTP fiber cable

S100X150VAC

Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification

S100X225VAC

Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification

T100X000VPC-BK

Printable Label for Fiber Port Identification

C252X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 4 Port Identification

C379X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 6 Port Identification

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-55

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area 2.8

that has low impedance for high frequency noise currents. This low impedance helps prevent noise from polluting network communications

Control Panel Area

2. Separation and Segregation One of the easiest and least expensive ways to prevent noise problems is to lay out the control panel using segregation and separation techniques. Segregation and separation is the practice of physically separating noisy circuits and devices from potential victims. When creating a panel layout, it is best to identify physical areas in the panel for clean and noisy circuits. The areas are defined by how much noise is generated and the sensitivity of the devices and circuits to noise. Two to three areas are created in each panel, depending on the application: 

Control Panels are the enclosures that protect automation components in a rugged NEMA rated enclosure specified for targeted environment. Control panels can vary greatly in size and construction depending on the size, power rating, and application requirements. However, one common control panel need that has developed is for recommended best practices for installing the critical control panel Ethernet switch and associated fiber and copper which provide connectivity to devices internal to and connected from the control panels. This Ethernet physical infrastructure internal to the control panel is critical to the performance of the automation system as Ethernet is now used for control and device level communications as well as for information level and safety level. The control panel environment can be hostile to networking and can present very real problems with communication disruptions or device failure so it is important to follow best practices for noise mitigation in control panel designs. The design of the physical infrastructure needs to ensure the performance, security, and maintainability in an environment that can have serious EMI, thermal, and space challenges. Key considerations for panel layout to mitigate noise issues include: 1. Grounding and Bonding Grounding and bonding is the foundation for controlling EMI in control systems. Use of galvanized back panels and low impedance braided bonding straps provide a ‘ground plane’

• • •

Very Noisy / Dirty (Right Side of the enclosure) Noisy/ Dirty (Right Side of the Enclosure) Clean / Sensitive (Left Side of the Enclosure)

Higher voltage devices should be mounted in the upper right-hand corner of the panel keeping as much distance as possible between the high voltage devices and any electronic devices such as Programmable Automation Controllers (PACs), DC power supplies, and timers that should ideally be on the opposite left side of the panel. Also maintain distance between motor power and encoder, I/O, and analog cables. 3. Filters and Suppression Filters are used both to clean up signals or power entering the panel as well as to prevent noise from a noise source from spreading within the panel. Install close to noise source or panel entrance to minimize length of unfiltered cable in the panel. Avoid bundling line side and load of filter together so noise does not couple back from the dirty side to the clean side. Suppressors are also used to redirect unwanted energy to inhibit noise coupling to sensitive circuits. They are recommended to be used across dry contacts or inductive loads to short circuit the energy stored in relay or solenoid coils rather than allowing high voltage noise spikes to be developed. The noise spikes from opening a large coil can easily reach hundreds or thousands of volts and present a very real noise source that should be suppressed at its source.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-56

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Physical Layout Considerations for Industrial Ethernet in Control Panels Industrial network planning for control panels requires more thought today than in the past. With the increase of industrial networking applications, special considerations are warranted to maximum protection from noise. Network cables should be carefully segregated from noisy and very noisy components, conductors, and zones.

Figure 2.8-1. Ethernet Switch and Panduit Patch Panel mounted on Side Plane with PANDUIT PanelMax™ Corner Duct

The key considerations for layout of Ethernet switches and cabling systems in a control panel include: • Panel space for Ethernet switch, patching, and cable management • Media and connector selection • Design for testability, maintainability, safety • Use of design tools Panel space for Ethernet switch, patching, cable management. Proper space allocation provides important benefits for noise immunity for the switch as well as for the cabling. The cabling needs to be routed away from noise sources while also following recommended bend radius control. NEC/NFPA 70 Article 800.133A recommends communication wires and cables be separated at least 50 mm (2 in.) from conductors. For fiber, provide panel space for installing fiber patching with slack management. For copper cables that need to leave panel, it is recommended to install patching so that the link can be tested. Many cabinets can accommodate a side panel which can provide adequate spacing for a well executed industrial networking layer (see Figure 2.8-1). Use of wire management products that maximize use of panel corners can provide additional back panel or side panel space as well as improve wire management and cable segregation. Note that locating the Ethernet switch and patching well away from any power devices or live conductors can improve safety for any qualified technician working in the control panel. Inadvertent contact with high voltage is a cause of arc flash events or electrical shock events that are life threatening as well as costing industry millions a year in damages and litigation. Avoid deforming the Ethernet cable by cinching too tight with cable ties. Deforming the cable can cause increased return loss and unbalance in the cable resulting in more noise pick up.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-57

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Media and Connector Selection: Copper Cabling. Installation of copper Ethernet cabling near control panel noise sources increases potential for common mode noise coupling that can result in bit errors and delays. Commonmode noise is the voltage that can develop on the entire LAN channel with respect to ground. Since Ethernet cabling system uses differential mode signaling, the voltage difference within the two wires in a twisted pair defines the signal so common mode noise should be subtracted out and not cause a problem.

Figure 2.8-2 illustrates the allowed coupled common mode noise signal in a 1000Base-T and 100Base-T system for a 100 meter channel. Note that 100Base-T cable cannot tolerate more than 0.5 volt of noise coupling near 100 MHz with the 1000BaseT tolerating much less only 0.1 V. A VFD, servo, or inductive load with spikes in hundreds of volts could easily couple in noise at these low levels leading to disrupted communications. The balance of twisted pair cables and RJ45 connectors is key to preventing common mode noise from being converted to differential mode noise that corrupts communication (see Figure 2.8-3). If the balance is perfect, then the differential mode measurements will be equal on both conductors of the twisted pair and thereby cancel out imposed noise. Not all manufacturers design their connectors for optimized balance so it is important to review this critical specification when choosing a connector as well as patch cable vendor.

Figure 2.8-2. Coupled Noise on Ethernet

Figure 2.8-3. Signal and Noise Routing Diagram.

In practice, a completely balanced system is unachievable and a level of imposed noise is observed on one of the two conductors. The CMRR (Common-Mode Rejection Ratio) of a cabling system is a ratio, articulated in dB, of commonmode noise rejected and prevented from converting to a differential mode voltage. IEEE and EIA/TIA defies the minimum requirements for CMRR in term of TCL and TCTL which are power ratio measurements characterizing unbalance from transmit and receive ends.

Infrastructure design techniques that can improve noise rejection include maintaining proper bend radius and separation distance between conductors, avoiding overtightened cable ties, using shielded cables where possible, observing good bonding practices for shielded and motor cables, and ensuring cable and connector balance using best-in-class vendor connectivity solutions that exceed standards specifications. The key for unshielded copper performance is to select connectivity with superior balance that exceeds standard margins to minimize risks.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-58

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area

Tips for Industrial Ethernet The following are key considerations that can improve noise rejection. •

Separation distance from conductors



Cable balance



Connector selection



Maintain proper bend radius



Avoid over tightened cable ties



STP use where possible



Shielding bonding for STP



Good motor cable bonding practice



Exceed standard connector and cabling specs

Media and Connector Selection: Copper Cabling Fiber inherently provides noise immunity and supports longer runs than copper media. Internal to the control panel, more devices are supporting direct fiber connectivity. PANDUIT offers modular pre-tested patch cords that can transition for legacy fiber cable that may already be in your control panel area. For example, patch cords and surface mount boxes that would allow transitioning from SC to LC connectors required for the Stratix switch interface. Pre-polished termination solutions and application tools provide the ability to terminate fiber in the field without adhesive or polishing using an easy to use tool that provides visual indication that a quality termination was made. Electricians can be easily trained to install fiber rather than relying on outside specialists.

Design for Testability, Maintainability, Safety. Testability refers to the ability to verify that the network links are functional and can pass tests indicating that they meet the intended category or performance margin targets. A best practice recommendation is to install patching locations in the control panel so that these critical links can be tested after installation and on periodic basis to insure performance. The identification of cables, ports, devices, and panels are key for maintainability. The identification aids in cross-referencing to documentation and in interpreting/documenting test results. As control panels grow more sophisticated network-wise and may require collaboration from controls and IT people during troubleshooting and commissioning, it’s important to not lose sight of safety. Control panels can house dangerous voltages and arc flash hazards that endanger life and limb. NFPA and OSHA regulations require that only qualified electricians are allowed access to the control panel due to these extreme hazards. An important safety tool in minimizing this risk is a data access port that provides safe access to a network port and utility outlet without opening the control panel. Due to the dynamic nature of control panel devices and network connectivity that changes over time, a data access port that is modular and can be field upgraded offers advantages in preserving its utility and safety function.

 ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-59

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Use of Design Tools

Using reference designs and design tools can greatly aid the control panel designer to conform to best practices to achieve desired system life cycle cost savings. Reference designs can include preferred arrangements for devices PLCs, drives, power supplies, filters as well as for the critical physical infrastructure of the control panel. The guidance for a ‘defense in depth’ for noise mitigation is spelled out in these reference designs where the control vendor shows recommendations for the critical bonding, grounding scheme for the system. These reference designs detail how to lay out clean and dirty wireways in the control panel to avoid noise coupling by providing recommended spacing between different classes of conductors. There are also recommendations for shielded cable practice as well as filter location and wiring guidance. Templates and Design tool area

Related Standards, Information

Noise mitigation layout

IEEE 1100 Chapter 10 Rockwell Automation GMC-RM001_-en-p.pdf

Industrial network practice

ODVA PUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guide.pdf ODVA PUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manual.pdf

Panel Layout

UL508A Industrial control panels

Design tools

http://www.bentley.com/en-US/Products/promise/Product-Resources.htm

Reference designs for industrial networking layer practice in control panels are also available to provide examples of best practice recommendations for an industrial Ethernet layer designed for performance, testability, reliability and maintainability (see Figure 2.8-4). Cisco and Rockwell have provided design guides as well as organizations such as ODVA. Design tools such as Bentley’s promisE provide control panel design tools with the ability for the user to develop their own template referencing the best practices for their industry and vendor list. This layout tool includes 3 D images of devices along with ability to layout wireways and cable routing. Thus you can leverage template designs that include all factors for good noise mitigation.

Network Schematic Analysis Industrial Ethernet implementations can leverage off of the experience of traditional office Ethernet by partnering with IT. This leads to an opportunity to apply best practices from the IT world in conjunction with process control system knowledge. The ideal is a partnering between IT and controls groups. One approach is development of ‘hybrid’ IT and engineering resources with skills to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. The ‘hybrid’ resource can come from either the IT or control groups. One of the primary tasks is to review a schematic layout of the network distribution to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-60

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Routing sensitive & noisy cables

Routing very noisy cables

Figure 2.8-4. Examples of Reference Designs (IEEE 1100 Emerald Book) Physical Security Physical security can prevent unauthorized devices from being plugged into a critical network risking a control disruption and downtime. Lock-in products can keep connectors plugged into a PAC or other device unless removed by an authorized user with a special tool. Blockout products conversely can keep open ports from a switch from being connected to unless the blockout device is removed with a special key (see Figure 2.8-5). Keyed copper or fiber solutions can prevent different network classes or segments from being inadvertently crossed. Uplink ports can be keyed differently than links to devices for example. Color coding can assist in making network ports for various segments more readily identifiable and keying. Network Schematic Analysis Network schematics are important tools for control engineers and IT personnel to review the physical infrastructure design and component selection. By reviewing the copper and fiber channels implemented in the zone cabling enclosure, the locations where testability, performance and security are concerns can be highlighted and addressed.

This Guide provides a reference schematic layout for a control showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where its recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For industries where redundant networks are common as well as possibilities for sub networks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

PAage 2-61

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area

Figure 2.8-5. Example Blockout Device to Support Network Security Initiatives at Control Panel Locations

End-to-End Solution In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for the control panel needs to be made to deliver on goals for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice approaches for noise mitigation, space optimization, grounding/bonding, safety, security, and industrial network media provide a clear path to control panel solutions that will support high performance networks and converged architectures. Control Panel Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure for a Control Panel. 1. Logical Design Define the logical architecture governing the layout of industrial systems and active devices internal to the panel and how these connect to the cell/area and manufacturing zone. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams.

space for installing the Stratix switch and networking with proper bend radius, identification, and patching for testability of links. A Data Access Port is critical for safe access to the internal networks internal to the panel. 3. Detail Design Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy the Ethernet network to the control panel. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

2. Physical Design Map out the physical layout of the panel. This step provides the opportunity to mitigate noise risks and provide enough

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-62

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area 1. Logical Design : Define the Logical Architecture

Fig 2.8-6 Logical Diagram for control panel(s)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-63

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area 2. Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

Fig 2.8-7 Physical Diagram for Control Panel overall layout

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-64

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area

Fig. 2.8-8 Physical Diagram for control panel stratix mounting

-

-

EMI noise considerations mitigated with grounding/ bonding and segregation of cabling to prevent noise coupling Surface mount boxes and patching for optimum cable management for fiber and copper connectivity and testability Color coded and keyed solutions to segregate and control patching to avoid inadvertent patching mistakes or unauthorized changes. Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block out connectivity

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-65

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area 3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig 2.8-9 Network Detail diagram of control panel

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-66

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area 4. The Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

Control Panel Issues

Panduit Solution

Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Control panels

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: Noise issues

Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pretested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

Safe access to Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular connectivity networks without exposing to shock, arc flash Arc Flash, Voltage Warning labels, lock out solutions hazards identified

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

page 2-67

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area 5. the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure:

Copper Cables/Connectors/Outlet boxes Panduit Part#

Description

PUR6004BU-UY

High Performance Category 6 riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable.

PSR6004BU-UGY

Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-Pair U/FTP shielded copper cable.

CBXD6BL-AY

Surface mount termination box accepts six Mini-Com® Modules. Dimensions: 1.04”H x 4.95”W x 3.79”L (26.42mm x 125.73mm x 96.27mm)

CJ688TG*

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module

CJS688TGY

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black jack module with integral shield

UTPSP1MY

1m Category 6 UTP Patch Cord with TX6 Plus Modular Plugs on each end

STP6X1MIG

1m Category 6A, 10 Gb/s STP Patch Cord with TX6 PLUS Modular Plugs on each end

Optional Keyed Jack Module CJK688TG*

Keyed Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal jack module

Optional Keyed Patch Cord for use with Keyed Jack Module UTPKSP*^

Keyed Category 6 UTP Patch Cord for use with matching Keyed Copper Jack Module. Patch cords contain one keyed RJ45 Plug on one and to a Standard RJ45 Plug on the other.

IAEBH6

Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. UTP type.

IAEBH6S

Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. STP type.

IAEBHC6

Category 6, RJ45 bulkhead coupler, IP67/IP65 rated.

(Required for higher MICE levels.)

Fiber Optic Parts Panduit Part#

Description

F^E10-10M*Y

Opticom® Multimode Duplex Patch Cord (various lengths)

FAP*WAQ^^Z

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs)

CMDJAQLCZBL

Fiber Optic adapter module, supplied with one LC Sr/Jr 10G fiber optic adapter.

CBX^IW-AY

MiniCom® Surface Mount Box

IAEF7JMA

Industrial LC fiber optic bulkhead adapter

IAEF617P-7PM1*

Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to LC patch cord

IAEF617P-NM1**

Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to pigtail

CM*^^ZBL

MiniCom® Fiber adapter modules

F^^MC*

Opticam Connectors (^^=LC, SC or ST)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-68

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Duct Parts Panduit Part#

Description

DRD33WH6

PanelMax DIN Rail Wiring Duct (base, cover, rail fasteners),PVC,7.25” x 3.16”X6’,White

DRDWR3-X

3” wire retainer for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.

DRDCS-X

3” corner transition strip for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.

CWD3WH6

PanelMax Corner Wiring Duct Base,PVC,4.40” x 3.57”,White (use with C2WH6 cover)

C2WH6

Duct Cover, PVC, 2”W X 6’, White

F1X3WH6

Narrow slotted duct,PVC,1”X3”X6’,White

C1WH6

Duct Cover, PVC, 1”W X 6’, White

F1X3LG6

Narrow slotted duct,PVC,1”X3”X6’,White

C1LG6

Duct Cover, PVC, 1”W X 6’, White

F2X3LG6

Narrow slotted duct,PVC,2”X3”X6’,White

C2LG6

Duct Cover, PVC, 2”W X 6’, White

F3X3WH6

Narrow slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,White

C3WH6

Duct Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, White

F3X3LG6

Narrow slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,LGray

C3LG6

Duct Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, Lgray

G1X3BL6

Slotted duct,PVC,1”X3”X6’,Black

C1BL6

Duct Cover, PVC, 1”W X 6’, Black

G3X3BL6

Slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,Black

C3BL6

Duct Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, Black

SD3HWH6

Slotted Duct Divider Wall, PVC, 3”H X 6’, White

SD4HWH6

Slotted Duct Divider Wall, PVC, 4”H X 6’, White (for use with CWD3WH6)

DB-C

Duct Divider Wall Mounting Base, PC

NR1

Duct Nylon Push Rivet For Mounting

CSPC3LG-Q

1” bend radius corner strip pre-cut for 3” wall height

FWR-C

Duct Wire Retainer/Label, Type F or CWD

WR3-X

Duct Wire Retainer, Type G or H, 3”

FL25X25LG-A

Slotted Flexible Duct, Polypropylene,25X25X500mm,LG,Adh.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-69

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Cable Ties Panduit Part#

Description

PLT1M-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 1” Bundle, Natural, miniature

PLT1.5M-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 1.5” Bundle, Natural, miniature

PLT1.5I-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 1.5” Bundle, Natural, Intermediate

PLT2I-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 2” Bundle, Natural, Intermediate

PLT3I-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 3” Bundle, Natural, Intermediate

PLT2S-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 2” Bundle, Natural, Standard

PLT3S-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 3” Bundle, Natural, Standard

PLT4S-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 4” Bundle, Natural, Standard

PLC2S-S10-M

Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Nylon 2” Bundle, Natural Clamp tie, Standard

PLC2S-S10-M30

Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, Clamp tie, Standard

PLT1M-M30

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon,1” Bundle, Black, miniature

PLT2S-M30

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 2” Bundle, Black, Standard

PLT4S-M30

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 4” Bundle, Black, Standard

PLM2S-M

Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Nylon, 2” Bundle, Natural Marker Tie

PLM2S-M30

Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 2” Bundle, Black Marker Tie

PFX-0

Marking Pen

PLWP1M-C

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon, 1” bundle, Natural, Wing mount, Miniature

PLWP2S-C

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon, 2” Bundle, Natural, Wing mount, Standard

PLWP1M-D30

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon, 1” bundle, Black, Wing mount, Miniature

PLWP2S-D30

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 2” Bundle, Black, Wing mount, Standard

PLT2S-M702Y

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 2” Bundle, Standard

PLT3S-M702Y

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 3” Bundle, Standard

GTS

Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-SM,M,I,S

GTH

Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-S,HS,LH,H

PTH

Cable Tie Tool - Pneumatic Install-S,HS,LH,H

PLT1M-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT1.5I-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT2I-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT3I-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT2S-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT3S-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT4S-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLWP1M-D0

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLWP2S-C0

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon

PLT1M-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene

PLT2S-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene

PLT3S-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene

PLT4S-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-70

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Abrasion Protection/Mounting Products Panduit Part#

Description

CCH50-S10-C

Heavy-Duty Fixed Diameter Clamps

CCS25-S8-C

Standard Fixed Diameter Clamps

CH105-A-C14

Cable Holder

CLT100-C20

Corrugated Loom Tubing

CSH-D20

Cable Spacers

JP131W-L20

J-PRO™ Cable Support System

MTP3S-E6-C

Standard Multiple Tie Plates

MTP4H-E10-C

Heavy-Duty Multiple Tie Plates

PUM-071-2S-D30

Push Mount Assemblies

PUM100-D30

Push Mounts with Umbrellas

PW75F-C20

PAN-WRAP™ Split Harness Wrap

SE75P-CR0

Braided Sleeving

T50F-C

Spiral Wrap

TA1S10-C

Tie Anchor Mounts

TM3S8-C

Cable Tie Mounts

TM3-X2-C0Y

Swivel Mounts

ABDCM30-A-C

Dynamic Cable Manager

ABM112-A-C

Adhesive Backed Mounts

ABMQS-A-Q

Multiple Bridge Adhesive Backed Mounts

ACC38-A-C

Adhesive Cord Clip

BEC62-A-L

Beveled Edge Clip

CPM87S-C

Control Panel Mounts

LC5-A-C8

Adhesive Backed Latching Clips

LWC50-A-L

Latching Wire Clip

MACC62-A-C

Metal Adhesive Cord Clip

VCC25-A-C

Vertical Cord Clip

HSTT50-C

Heat Shrink Thin Wall

HSTT4A47-48-Q

Heat Shrink (4:1)

T50F-C

Spiral Wrap

PW75F-C20

PAN-WRAP™ Split Harness Wrap

CLT100-C20

Corrugated Loom Tubing

SE75P-CR0

Braided Sleeving

MP250-C

Marker Plates

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-71

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Grounding/Bonding Parts Panduit Part#

Description

RGRB19U

Grounding Busbar, 19”, tin plated, 20 mounting holes with #12-24 x 1/2” screws. For terminating Ground wires from various components

PV*-14RX

Ring Terminal, 1/4” stud hole, * PV14 to PV6 - 16awg-6awg. For terminating Ground wires from various components. Other sizes and styles available

BS10**45U

Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole terminals, 3/8” bolt hole. For bonding multiple sub-panels together and other equipment. ** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches

BS10**45

Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole terminals, 3/8” bolt hole, green/yellow insulation. For bonding of doors to enclosures and where abrasion protection is required. ** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches.

RGW-100-1Y

3/8” bolt hole, Paint Piercing Grounding Washers, pack of 100. For bonding sub-panels to enclosures at the mounting studs.

RGTBSG-C

Green Bonding Screws, #12-24 x 1/2”, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted flanges to sub-panels.

RGTBSM6G-C

Green Bonding Screws, M6 x 15mm, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted flanges to sub-panels.

TRBSK

Bonding Stud Kit, #12-24 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to subpanels, on-machine applications

TRBSM6K

Bonding Stud Kit, M6 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to subpanels, on-machine applications

BGN-C

Bonding Nuts, #12-24, box of 100. For bonding various components to sub-panels, onmachine applications

BGNM6-C

Bonding Nuts, M6. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-machine applications

RGTS-CY

Thread Forming Screw, #12-24 x 1/2”

RGTSM6-C

Thread Forming Screw, M6 x 12mm

Safety/Security Parts Panduit Part#

Description

PVS0305W2102Y

Arc Flash Label, 3”x5”

PVS0305W2201Y

Short Circuit Current Rating Label, 3”x5”

PSL-CBNT

“No” Tool Circuit Breaker Lockout Device

PSL-P

Individual Plug Lockout Device

PSL-WS

Toggle Switch Lockout Device

PSL-4RED

XENOY™ plastic body padlock with steel shackle

PSL-1

Lockout Hasp with 1” diameter jaw and overlapping tabs

PVT-41

“DO NOT OPERATE” Lockout/Tagout tag with cable tie

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-72

Section 2.8: Control Panel Area Identification Parts - LS 8E printer items shown only Panduit Part#

Description

C200X100YPC

Printable Label for Enclosure Identification

S100X160VAC

Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification

S100X220VAC

Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification

NWSLC-2Y

Cable identification sleeve for 2mm fiber cable

NWSLC-3Y

Cable identification sleeve for 3mm fiber cable

NWSLC-7Y

Cable identification sleeve for MTP fiber cable

S100X150VAC

Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification

S100X225VAC

Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification

T100X000VPC-BK

Printable Label for Fiber Port Identification

C061X030FJC

Printable Label for Single Port Identification

C252X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 4 Port Identification

C379X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 6 Port Identification

C100X000VUC-BK

Printable Label for Duct Identification

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-73

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area 2.9

On-Machine Area

The term “On-Machine” refers to automation components installed directly to the equipment so they are distributed across a machine or process rather than in a protected control panel. Mounting control devices on machinery or process equipment rather than in a panel offers many advantages compared to mounting in a control panel. However, it also requires devices and cabling systems that can take the environment as well as special considerations for wire management, identification, and maintainability. The advantages include enclosure cost savings, installation time savings, and less specialized expertise in wiring required. However, exposure to the machine/process environment typically means that there are more issues with dust, moisture, shock, temperature, etc. than in a protected control enclosure. Thus, devices need to be sealed and ruggedized as do their network and power connections. As there are many devices and cables consolidating on a machine, there are new requirements for wire management and abrasion protection as well as rugged identification that will ensure that the on machine cabling and devices can be installed and maintained efficiently. An analysis of the MICE levels (mechanical, Ingress, Climatic/Chemical and Electromagnetic conditions) will allow for selecting media, connectivity, and wire management that performs reliably long term. Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that meet the specialized needs for network distribution to deliver process automation excellence. These

architectures describe the connectivity between the Cell and Manufacturing zones at a logical level. In addition to this reference architecture level, the physical layer reference architecture is also crucial. The physical layer architecture refers to the infrastructure required to achieve the connectivity considering data throughput, environment, wiring distances, and availability. A structured, engineered approach is essential for the physical layer to ensure that investments in network distribution deliver optimum output. The On-Machine Device level networks typically utilize M12 connectivity rather than RJ45 connectivity because of the need for improved ruggedness. Rockwell Automation provides design tools in Integrated Architecture Builder for layout of the network and creating a bill of material for these M12 network connections and related modular power solutions. Physical Layout Considerations Key engineering considerations when designing the physical layer for network distribution for an On-Machine application include environmental analysis and machine or process layout. Understanding the size of the operation, plant layout, harsh conditions, plant expansion potential, and network topologies will help establish the physical layer infrastructure requirements. Zone cabling architectures and enclosures (see Section 2.7 of this Guide) can provide means to cost effectively and agilely distribute cabling for a wide area ‘on-machine’ application like a process plant. The physical layout of the machine will suggest locations for pathways and ‘on-machine’ device mounting panels. Cable routing, slack management and abrasion protection are important considerations for on machine cabling that should be considered once the machine layout is analyzed. Cables may be exposed to harsh environments such as extreme weather or vibration. Insulation and abrasion protection products shield cables such as spiral wrap or heat shrink tubing. Securing cabling may require weather resistant cable ties and in extreme cases rugged stainless steel wire management products. Food processing lines may require metal detectable wire management products for food safety. Network Schematic Analysis This section provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical On-Machine topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-74

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area be made, and where its recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment - where delays can be costly - as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. End-to-End Solution In summary, a thorough analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for control room out to field devices will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, control panels and on machine wiring will result in automation systems that enable the full benefit of the investments made. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this architecture. On-Machine Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure for an On-Machine distributed system. 1. Logical Design Define the logical architecture governing the layout of industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams.

2. Physical Design Map out the physical locations of servers, switches, enclosures, rack systems and control panels. The following diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations. 3. Detail Design Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. For On-Machine applications it is important to leverage Rockwell Automation’s Integrated Architecture Builder tool for developing the machine connectivity bill of material for On-Machine devices, power cables, device cables and associated M12 Ethernet cabling. PANDUIT physical infrastructure solutions are available to implement the higher level zone or control panel architectures as well as products to help secure, protect, manage, and identify the wiring mounted on the machinery. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-75

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

.

Fig 2.9-1. Logical diagrams for On Machine distributed networking

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-76

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements. Consider locations to Identify, manage, secure and protect the network and associated On-Machine cabling.

Fig 2.9-2. Physical Diagram of On-Machine network

• On-Machine wire management for slack management and protecting cabling. • Identification products should be applied to device and network cabling • Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to communication disruptions • Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock-in and blockout connectivity in zone cabling enclosures and control panels that connect to the On-Machine wiring

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-77

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area 3. Detail Design 4. Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig 2.9-3. Network Detail design for On Machine distributed network

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-78

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area 5. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

Zone Issues

Panduit Solution

On Machine

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: ESD, Noise issues

Bond machine sections and control panel systems for low impedance ground plane.

Reliability: Mitigate failures due to vibration and motion

Abrasion protection to prevent cable damage

Maintainability

Identification and wire management products that improve ability to change, modify, debug

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Deploying wireless access points securely without expensive power runs

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power

Mixture of Office and IE network in zone cabling enclosures

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Dynamic production floor - equipment relocation, additions, expansions, removal

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points. Wire management and identification products. Expandable, high density patch panels

Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified Warning labels, lock out solutions 6. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure: Copper Cables/Connectors/Outlet boxes Panduit Part#

Description

IAEBH6

Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. UTP type.

IAEBH6S

Category 6 RJ45 IP67/IP65 rated bulkhead connector. STP type.

IAEBHC6

Category 6, RJ45 bulkhead coupler, IP67/IP65 rated.

CM6PIW

MuTOA 6-port outlet box for Mini-Com modules Required for higher MICE levels

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-79

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area IndustrialNet Products Panduit Part#

Description

IAEBH5E

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial connector with protective cover

IAEBH5ES

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire shielded black industrial connector with protective cover

IEABHC5E

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire black industrial bulkhead coupler with protective cover

MPI588T

Category 5e, RJ45 industrial plug with protective cover

MPSI588T

Category 5e, RJ45 shielded industrial plug with protective cover

IUTPCH*BLY

Category 5e UTP patch cord constructed of industrial grade UTP category 5e solid cable with dust caps

ISTPCH*MBLY

Category 5e STP patch cords constructed of industrial grade STP category 5e solid cable with dust caps

Fiber Optic Parts Panduit Part#

Description

IAEF7JMA

Industrial LC fiber optic bulkhead adapter

IAEF617P-7PM1*

Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to LC patch cord

IAEF617P-NM1**

Industrial duplex multimode 62.5μm LC to pigtail

Fiber Raceway Parts Panduit Part#

Description

FR4X4**6

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Solid Wall Channel.

FRHC4**6

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Snap-On Hinged Cover.

FRBC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 QuikLock Coupler.

FRT4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Fitting.

FRTSC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Tee Cover.

FRFWC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Fitting.

FRFWCSC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Four Way Cross Cover.

FRRA4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Fitting.

FRRASC4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 Horizontal Right Angle Cover.

FREC4X4**

FIBERRUNNER 4x4 End Cap.

FRSP**

FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit.

FRSP4C**

FIBERRUNNER Spill-Over Fitting with 2x2 Exit Cover for 4x4 Channel.

FBC2X2**

FIBERRUNNER 2x2 QuikLock Coupler.

FIDT2X2**

Single Port Spill-Out t 1.5” ID Split Corrugated Loom Tubing.

FR6TRBN58

FIBERRUNNER QuikLock New Threaded Rod for 5/8” Threaded Rod

FR6TB12

FIBERRUNNER QuikLock Trapeze Bracket

FR6ALB

FIBERRUNNER Adjustable Ladder Rack Bracket ** Replace with desired color, YL for yellow, BL for Black or OR for Orange

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-80

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area Gridrunner wireway Parts Panduit Part#

Description

GR21X4X24PG

GRIDRUNNER 21”W x 4”D x 24”L Wire Basket Section

GR21X4X48PG

GRIDRUNNER 21”W x 4”D x 48”L Wire Basket Section

GR12X4X24PG

GRIDRUNNER 12”W x 4”D x 24”L Wire Basket Section

GR12X4X48PG

GRIDRUNNER 12”W x 4”D x 48”L Wire Basket Section

GRFWC21PG

GRIDRUNNER Universal Intersection

GRPBPG

GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Bracket

GRCLAMPPG-X

GRIDRUNNER Pedestal Clamp

GRBR4PG

GRIDRUNNER Bend Radius Control Corner

Duct Parts Panduit Part#

Description

DRD33LG6

PanelMax DIN Rail Wiring Duct (base, cover, rail fasteners),PVC,7.25” x 3.16”X6’,White

DRDWR3-X

3” wire retainer for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.

DRDCS-X

3” corner transition strip for PanelMax™ DIN Rail Wiring Duct.

H3X3LG6

Hinged Cover Slotted duct,PVC,3”X3”X6’,LGray

HC3LG6

Hinged Cover, PVC, 3”W X 6’, Lgray

CSPC3LG-Q

1” bend radius corner strip pre-cut for 3” wall height.

WR3-X

Duct Wire Retainer, Type G or H, 3”

Cable Ties Panduit Part#

Description

PLT1M-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT1.5M-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1.5” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT1.5I-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1.5” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT2I-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT3I-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 3” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT2S-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT3S-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 3” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4S-M

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLC2S-S10-M

Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLC2S-S10-M30

Pan-Ty Clamp Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT1M-M30

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6,1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT2S-M30

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4S-M30

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLM2S-M

Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLM2S-M30

Pan-Ty Marker Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PFX-0

Marking Pen

PLWP1M-C

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLWP2S-C

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLWP1M-D30

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

(Cable Ties continued next page) ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-81

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area Panduit Part#

Description

PLWP2S-D30

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT2S-M702Y

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT3S-M702Y

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 3” Bundle Diameter Standard

GTS

Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-SM,M,I,S

GTH

Cable Tie Tool - Manual Install-S,HS,LH,H

PTH

Cable Tie Tool - Pneumatic Install-S,HS,LH,H

PLT1M-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT1.5I-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1.5” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT2I-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT3I-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 3” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT2S-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT3S-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 3” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4S-M0

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLWP1M-D0

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLWP2S-C0

Pan-Ty Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT1M-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT2S-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT3S-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 3” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4S-C186

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT1M-M109

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT2S-M109

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT3S-M109

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 3” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4S-M109

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4H-TL109

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 4” Bundle Diameter Heavy

PLT1M-M76

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 1” Bundle Diameter Miniature

PLT2I-M76

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 2” Bundle Diameter Intermediate

PLT2S-M76

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 2” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4S-M76

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 4” Bundle Diameter Standard

PLT4H-TL76

Pan-Ty Cable Tie - Tefzel, 4” Bundle Diameter Heavy

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-82

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area Abrasion/Mounting Parts Panduit Part#

Description

ABM112-A-C

Adhesive Backed Mounts

ABMQS-A-Q

Multiple Bridge Adhesive Backed Mounts

ACC38-A-C

Adhesive Cord Clip

MACC62-A-C

Metal Adhesive Cord Clip

LWC50-A-L

Latching Wire Clip

BEC62-A-L

Beveled Edge Clip

VCC25-A-C

Vertical Cord Clip

HSTT50-C

Heat Shrink Thin Wall

HSTT4A47-48-Q

Heat Shrink (4:1)

T50F-C

Spiral Wrap

PW75F-C20

PAN-WRAP™ Split Harness Wrap

CLT100-C20

Corrugated Loom Tubing

SE75P-CR0

Braided Sleeving

CPM87S-C

Control Panel Mounts

TM3S8-C

Cable Tie Mounts

TA1S10-C

Tie Anchor Mounts

PUM100-D30

Push Mounts with Umbrellas

PUM-071-2S-D30

Push Mount Assemblies

CCS25-S8-C

Standard Fixed Diameter Clamps

CCH50-S10-C

Heavy-Duty Fixed Diameter Clamps

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-83

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area Grounding/Bonding Panduit Part#

Description

PV*-14RX

Ring Terminal, 1/4” stud hole, * PV14 to PV6 - 16awg-6awg. For terminating Ground wires from various components. Other sizes and styles available up to 1000 Kcmil

BS10**45U

Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole terminals, 3/8” bolt hole. For bonding multiple sub-panels together and other equipment. ** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches

BS10**45

Braided Bonding Strap, 1” Width, #4 AWG (38,400 CMA) Tin Copper Braid, one-hole terminals, 3/8” bolt hole, green/yellow insulation. For bonding of doors to enclosures and where abrasion protection is required. ** Sizes 04 - 12 in inches.

RGW-100-1Y

3/8” bolt hole, Paint Piercing Grounding Washers, pack of 100. For bonding sub-panels to enclosures at the mounting studs.

RGTBSG-C

Green Bonding Screws, #12-24 x 1/2”, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted flanges to sub-panels.

RGTBSM6G-C

Green Bonding Screws, M6 x 15mm, box of 100. Bonds equipment with painted flanges to sub-panels.

TRBSK

Bonding Stud Kit, #12-24 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to subpanels, on-machine applications

TRBSM6K

Bonding Stud Kit, M6 fasteners, box of 25. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-machine applications

BGN-C

Bonding Nuts, #12-24, box of 100. For bonding various components to sub-panels, onmachine applications

BGNM6-C

Bonding Nuts, M6. For bonding various components to sub-panels, on-machine applications

RGTS-CY

Thread Forming Screw, #12-24 x 1/2”

RGTSM6-C

Thread Forming Screw, M6 x 12mm

Safety/Security Parts Panduit Part#

Description

PVS0305W2102Y

Arc Flash Label, 3”x5”

PVS0305W2201Y

Short Circuit Current Rating Label, 3”x5”

PSL-CBNT

“No” Tool Circuit Breaker Lockout Device

PSL-P

Individual Plug Lockout Device

PSL-WS

Toggle Switch Lockout Device

PSL-4RED

XENOY™ plastic body padlock with steel shackle

PSL-1

Lockout Hasp with 1” diameter jaw and overlapping tabs

PVT-41

“DO NOT OPERATE” Lockout/Tagout tag with cable tie

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-84

Section 2.9: On-Machine Area Identification Parts - LS 8E printer items only shown Panduit Part#

Description

C200X100YPC

Printable Label for Enclosure Identification

H100X044H1C

Printable Label for 2mm/3mm Fiber Cable Identification

H100X084H1C

Printable Label for MTP Fiber Cable Identification

H100X084H1C

Printable Label for Cat 5/6 Copper Cable Identification

H100X084H1C

Printable Label for 10Gig Copper Cable Identification

T100X000VPC-BK

Printable Label for Fiber Port Identification

C061X030FJC

Printable Label for Single Port Identification

C252X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 4 Port Identification

C379X030FJC

Printable Label for Copper 6 Port Identification

C100X000VUC-BK

Printable Label for Duct Identification

M12 Connectivity - From Rockwell Automation 1585D-F4DC-SH

Rockwell M12 EtherNet connector, 4 pin straight female, IP67, shielded

1585D-M4DC-SH

Rockwell M12 EtherNet connector, 4 pin straight male, IP67, shielded

1585D-D4AC9-0M5

Rockwell M12 Ethernet receptacle, 4 pin female, IP67 with M16 x1.5 threads

1585D-DD4JD

Rockwell Female M12 receptacle to right angle RJ-45 receptacle, Pg 9 threads Required for higher MICE levels

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-85

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application 2.10

Process Plant Application

Process industries continue to show dynamic growth by leveraging technology advancements for greater efficiency, productivity, and safety in global deployments. Process plant control systems are now integrated solutions that leverage the capabilities that today’s computing and networking capabilities can bring to their operations. By replacing outdated analog control loops and labor intensive manual steps with advanced process control strategies, fieldbus and asset management systems process plants are realizing higher outputs, greater reliability, and improved safety. The successful implementation of these new architectures and capabilities creates new dependencies on the

industrial Ethernet network infrastructure. Key issues for process industries include high availability, security, performance, and maintainability. Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that meet the specialized needs of the process industry to deliver process automation excellence. These architectures describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, software, network switches, and control level devices that meet the needs for performance and reliability from software and device levels. However, the area not fully addressed – an area that is critical for the success of these architectures - is the physical layer. This

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-86

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application refers to the infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and optimize the connectivity and installation of the devices in the physical plant. A structured, engineered approach is required for this physical layer to ensure that the investments in control software, controllers, servers, switches, and fieldbus devices actually startup and perform at peak output. Physical Layout Considerations To properly engineer the physical layer for a process plant involves understanding the physical environment requirements which includes size of the operation, plant and control room layout, environmental considerations, and network topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone architecture is the control room which requires server and switch enclosures. The performance and security of the critical control applications housed in this room can be optimized by leveraging best practices from data center rooms concerning enclosures, wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, power and thermal considerations. The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone area of the architecture which involves distributing network cabling to motor control centers, distributed valves and sensors on fieldbus networks, instrumentation and control cabinets. Wireless use is growing, especially for sensors or actuators for which wired connectivity is too costly or failureprone due to harsh environment considerations. The physical layer design should leverage zone cabling consolidation cabinet designs that reduce installation cost and time while promoting improved manageability and flexibility. The media and connectivity selected should have performance that exceeds TIA standard margin to ensure performance long term. For connecting field devices in harsh MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets provide robust connectivity. Wire management and abrasion protection are key for reliability and maintainability for networks deployed ‘on-machine’ to connect to sensors or actuators in the process. A well-engineered grounding/bonding system that mitigates noise considerations for communications is critical both for the control room as well as distributed cabinets and I/O networks. Network Schematic Analysis As the network and computing resource requirements become more important to the process control systems, there is a need to leverage best practices from the IT world

in conjunction with process control system knowledge. This requires partnering between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hybrid’ engineering skills to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. It is recommended that IT and controls review a schematic layout of the process system’s switches and control devices to make decisions on physical infrastructure components to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design. This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For process industries where redundant networks are common and also have possibilities for subnetworks from several vendors, it is crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. End-to-End Solution In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for process plants for the entire network from the control room out to field devices will meet the critical needs for process plants for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, control panels and on-machine wiring will result in process control systems that enable the full benefit of the investments made in advanced process control systems. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this architecture.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-87

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application Process Plant Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure to support Process Plant applications. 1. Logical Design Define the logical architecture governing the layout of Process Plant industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams. 2. Physical Design Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, control room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations, and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations.

3. Detail Design Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of Process Plant areas, in order for the network and industrial systems to withstand the identified range of environments throughout the industrial facility. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-88

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

Fig 2.10-1. Logical Diagram for Process plant network

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-89

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-90

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application 1. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements Process Plant Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture for Process Plants • Zone architecture leveraging Fiber runs to zone enclosures with Stratix 8000 Switches to distribute copper and fiber to MCCs, control panels, process instrumentation • Control panels with Stratix 8000 switches for PACs, drives, instrumentation both internal to panel and ‘on machine’ • MCC enclosures with Stratix 8000 switches for internal networking Wireless access point(s) driven from zone enclosures with POE for wireless networks Fig 2.10-2. Physical Diagram for Process plant network infrastructure • Coordinated grounding and bonding to mitigate risks to communication disruptions • Control room featuring best practices for FactoryTalk servers, Stratix switches, Cisco Level 3 switches, firewalls. • Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block out connectivity

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-91

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application 3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig 2.10-3 Detail of Process Plant network

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-92

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application 4. Discuss the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Zone Issues Infrastructure Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2 )

Panduit Solution

Enterprise Data Center connectivity

Futureproof, High Availability, high performance connectivity

Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions

Security: Control and Management of connections, patching

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

DMZ Shared enclosure, rack areas

Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels PanView infrastructure management Manufacturing Zone (Level 3) Control room

Performance: Noise issues

Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet systems

Performance: Cable/Connector performance

Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that exceeds standards

Performance: Thermal management

Enclosure systems and wire management solutions that efficiently direct cooling to critical servers and switches improving robustness

High Availability: Redundant networks

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Cable management

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products PanView infrastructure management

Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Network Distribution

Large system deployments require robust communications over long distances

Fiber solutions with pre-terminated connections easing use of fiber

Network Consolidation Points

Cost effective consolidation with security and manageability

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points

Wireless implementation

Deploying wireless access points securely without expensive power runs

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power Over Ethernet (POE) to distribute power

Control panels

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: Noise issues

Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/ bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-93

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application Cell Area Zone (Continued) Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

On-Machine

Zone Issues

Panduit Solution

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Maintainability

Identification and wire management products that improve ability to change, modify, debug

Performance; ESD, Noise

Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions

Maintainability Safety Zone Control Panel, On-Machine

Safe access to networks without exposing to shock, arc flash

Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular connectivity

Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified Warning labels, lock out solutions Security: Network connectivity

Color coded, keyed jacks

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-94

Section 2.10: Process Plant Application 5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure: Solution Area

Products

Detailed Parts List

Control Room

Racks Enclosures Security Connectivity Grounding/Bonding Pathways

Section 2.5 Pages 2-19 to 2-32

Network Distribution

Fiber Cable Copper Cable Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.6 Pages 2-33 to 2-43

Zone Cabling

Enclosures Connectivity Cable Management Security Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.7 Pages 2-44 to 2-55

Control Panel

Connectivity Cable Management Safety Abrasion protection Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.8 Pages 2-56 to 2-73

On-Machine

Connectivity Abrasion protection Cable management Safety Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.9 Pages 2-74 to 2-85

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-95

Section 2.11: SCADA Application 2.11

SCADA Application

SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) applications are critical to many process applications including oil/gas, water treatment, wind farms, solar, and many others. SCADA applications are characterized by control panels distributed across a wide area linked by fiber optic cables or increasingly through wireless networks. Ethernet/IP communications as well as embedded web servers provide access to the data, configuration, and control enabled by these remote systems. SCADA control panel data is then consolidated and converged with other on-site or off-site process data in a control room where servers and higher level switches are housed. These control rooms are sometimes also deployed in harsh environments as a prefabricated e-building wired off-site and then deployed in the field. The outdoor environments that the control panels, control

rooms, and networking components are fielded present challenges for the physical infrastructure in regards to environmental ratings, cabling distances, wireless coverage as well as requirements for high security, high availability, and manageability. Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that address the form factors, cost considerations, security, and network topologies required for today’s SCADA systems. These architectures describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, software, network switches, and SCADA RTU systems. However, the area not fully addressed that is critical for the success of these architectures is the physical layer. This refers to the infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-96

Section 2.11: SCADA Application required to connect, manage, secure, and optimize the connectivity and installation of the networks, panels and control rooms required for these data collection and control systems. A structured, engineered approach is required for this physical layer to ensure that the investments in control software, controllers, servers, switches, and RTU devices actually startup and perform at peak output. Physical Layout Considerations To properly engineer the physical layer for a SCADA installation involves understanding the physical environment requirements including scale of the operation, control room layout, environmental considerations, and RTU network topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone architecture for a SCADA operation is the control room which requires server and switch enclosures. The performance and security of the critical control applications housed in this room can be optimized by leveraging best practices from data center rooms concerning enclosures, wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, power and thermal considerations. The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone area of the architecture which involves distributing network cabling and wireless connectivity to the typically widely distributed RTU systems. For high availability, redundant fiber rings are often employed which require consideration for media selection for the distances and environments involved as well as physical security concerns. Distributed enclosures for fiber distribution and consolidation may also be employed in certain architectures for cost-effective cabling to clusters of RTU panels. The media and connectivity selected should have performance that exceeds TIA standard margin to ensure performance long term. For connecting field devices in harsh MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets provide robust connectivity. Wire management and abrasion protection are key for reliability and maintainability for networks deployed ‘on-machine’ to connect to sensors or actuators in these harsh environment areas. A well-engineered grounding/bonding system that mitigates noise considerations for communications is critical, both for the control room and distributed cabinets and I/O networks. Network Schematic Analysis As the network and computing resource requirements become more important to the SCADA systems, there is a need to leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunc-

tion with process control system knowledge. This requires partnering between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hybrid’ engineering skills to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. It is recommended that IT and controls review a schematic layout of the SCADA system’s switches and control devices to make decisions on physical infrastructure components to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design. With the growing use of wireless for SCADA systems, it important to engineer a robust wireless access system by performing site surveys and leveraging vendor guidance. This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For SCADA where redundant networks are common and also have need for wireless access, it’s crucial to identify and secure these physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. Power over Ethernet approaches for wireless access points should be considered to minimize deployment costs and to provide robust coverage. End-to-End Solution In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for SCADA operations for the entire network from the control room out to RTU and field devices will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, wireless distribution, RTU control panels and field device

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-97

Section 2.11: SCADA Application wiring will result in SCADA operations that are more intelligent and robust. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this architecture. SCADA Plant Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure to support SCADA plant applications. 1. Logical Design Define the logical architecture governing the layout of the SCADA system. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams. 2. Network Design Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, control room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations, and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution.

3. Detail Design Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of Process Plant areas, in order for the network and industrial systems to withstand the identified range of environments throughout the industrial facility. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-98

Section 2.11: SCADA Application 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

Fig 2.11-1. Logical Diagram for SCADA network

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-99

Section 2.11: SCADA Application

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-100

Section 2.11: SCADA Application 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

• E-building remote control rooms leverage best practice grounding/ bonding and wire management for FactoryTalk servers, Stratix switches, Cisco Level 3 switches, firewalls. • Fiber ring connectivity from E-building to remote RTU. Use single mode for long distance runs and multimode fiber for shorter runs (see table in section IV_ • SCADA RTU Control panels with Stratix switches for PACs, drives, instrumentation leverage fiber connectivity • Wireless access point(s) driven from E-building with POE for wireless networks • Coordinated grounding and bonding to mitigate risks to communication disruptions Fig 2.11-2. Physical Diagram for SCADA network

• Control room featuring best practices for FactoryTalk servers, Stratix switches, Cisco Level 3 switches, firewalls. • Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block out connectivity

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-101

Section 2.11: SCADA Application 3. Develop Network Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig 2.11-3. Detail Diagram for SCADA network physical infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-102

Section 2.11: SCADA Application 4. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

SCADA Issues

Panduit Solution

Future-proof, High Availability, high performance connectivity

Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2 ) Enterprise Data Center connectivity DMZ Shared enclosure, rack areas

Security: Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels Control and Management of inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in connections, patching switches or patching to control who can make changes Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels PanView infrastructure management

Manufacturing Zone (Level 3) Control Room

Wireless implementation

Performance: Noise issues

Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet systems

Performance: Cable/Connector performance

Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that exceeds standards

Performance: Thermal management

Enclosure systems and wire management solutions that efficiently direct cooling to critical servers and switches improving robustness

High Availability: Redundant networks

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Cable management

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

Mixture of Office and IE network

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

Deploying wireless access points securely without expensive power runs

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power Over Ethernet (POE) to distribute power

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-103

Section 2.11: SCADA Application Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Network Distribution

Large system deployments require robust communications over long distances

Fiber solutions with pre-terminated connections easing use of fiber

Reliability: Impact of extreme weather conditions or harsh environment

Stainless and weather resistant wire management products. Non-metallic raceways, heat shrink, insulation/abrasion products. Bulk Head connectors (IP67 or M12)

Troubleshoot: Loss of network

PanView infrastructure management

Wireless implementation

Deploying wireless access points securely without expensive power runs

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power

Network Consolidation Points

Cost effective consolidation with security and manageability

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points

Control panels

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: Noise issues

Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/ bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Troubleshoot: Loss of network

PanView infrastructure management

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

Reliability: Impact of extreme weather conditions or harsh environment

Stainless and weather resistant wire management products. Non-metallic raceways, heat shrink, insulation/abrasion products. Bulk Head connectors (IP67 or M12)

Performance: ESD, Noise

Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions

Reliability: Mitigate failures due to vibration and motion

Abrasion and insulation protection to prevent severed wires.

Reliability: Impact of extreme weather conditions or harsh environment

Stainless and weather resistant wire management products. Non-metallic raceways, heat shrink, insulation/abrasion products. Bulk Head connectors (IP67 or M12)

Safe access to networks without exposing to shock, arc flash

Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular connectivity

Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified

Warning labels, lock out solutions

On Machine

Safety Zone Control Panel, On Machine

Security: Network connectivity Color coded, keyed jacks

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-104

Section 2.11: SCADA Application 5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure: Solution Area

Products

Detailed Parts List

Control Room

Racks Enclosures Security Connectivity Grounding/Bonding Pathways

Section 2.5 Pages 2-19 to 2-32

Network Distribution

Fiber Cable Copper Cable Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.6 Pages 2-33 to 2-43

Zone Cabling

Enclosures Connectivity Cable Management Security Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.7 Pages 2-44 to 2-55

Control Panel

Connectivity Cable Management Safety Abrasion protection Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.8 Pages 2-56 to 2-73

On-Machine

Connectivity Abrasion protection Cable management Safety Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.9 Pages 2-74 to 2-85

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-105

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application 2.12

Discrete Manufacturing Application

Discrete Manufacturing refers to manufacturing operations that create products from a bill of materials from a sequence of automated and manual steps rather than in a raw material flow as in a process plant. The automation required for typical discrete manufacturing operations involves motion control using servo and VFD drives, PAC controllers, pneumatics, robotics, vision systems, sensors, and other processing elements.

increased regulatory and security requirements also are factors driving changes in automation deployments. The rapid growth of Ethernet connectivity is making all this connected manufacturing automation possible but is fraught with problems if unsophisticated users attempt to ‘plug ‘n play’ into existing networks with low cost, unmanaged switches and cheap patch cords. Performance problems, startup delays, and production outages can occur from networking infrastructure not specified or installed to meet the application requirements, environmental and security challenges of the manufacturing space.

Today’s manufacturers are under pressure as never before to be globally competitive, which means configuring lean operations that have world-class efficiency, quality and agility. The discrete manufacturing automation system now requires These needs are driving use of MES applications to link the multiple levels of physical infrastructure for networked conERP to the factory floor to provide visibility and automatic nectivity that spans different environments and cuts across setup of equipment. Global manufacturing operations and

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-106

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application knowledge domains of control engineers and IT support staff. This infrastructure includes control rooms that resemble IT data centers with racks or enclosures housing multiple servers, switches, patching and other devices. Networking needs to be distributed to cell/area zones in an efficient manner that promotes high availability, maintainability, security, and flexibility. Control panels and on-machine cabling systems need to be engineered to promote testability, performance and security of the critical Ethernet communications that enable automation systems to function. Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that address the form factors, cost considerations, security, and network topologies required for today’s discrete manufacturing operations. These architectures describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, software, network switches, and control systems. However, the area not fully addressed that is critical for the success of these architectures is the physical layer. This refers to the infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and optimize the connectivity and installation of the networks, panels and control rooms required for control systems and MES integration. A structured, engineered approach is required for this physical layer to ensure that the investments in control software, controllers, servers, switches, and on machine devices actually startup and perform at peak output. Physical Layout Considerations To properly engineer the physical layer for a discrete manufacturing plant involves understanding the physical environment requirements which includes scale of the operation, control room layout, environmental considerations, and cell/area topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone architecture for a discrete plant operation is the control room which requires server and switch enclosures. The performance and security of the critical control applications housed in this room can be optimized by leveraging best practices from data center rooms concerning enclosures, wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, power and thermal considerations.

mistake proof can provide important benefits. Distributed (i.e., zone cabling) enclosures for fiber or copper distribution and consolidation should also be employed for cost-effective cabling to cell/areas where control panels housing Stratix switches may be located. The media and connectivity selected should have performance that exceeds TIA standard margin to ensure performance long term. For connecting field devices in harsh MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets provide robust connectivity. Wire management and abrasion protection are key for reliability and maintainability for networks deployed ‘on-machine’ to connect to sensors or actuators in harsh environment areas or when subjected to repetitive motion. A well-engineered grounding/bonding system that mitigates noise considerations for communications is critical, both for the control room as well as distributed cabinets and I/O networks. Network Schematic Analysis As the network and computing resource requirements become more important to discrete automation systems, there is a need to leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunction with automation system knowledge. This requires partnering between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hybrid’ engineering skills to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. It is recommended that IT and controls review a schematic layout of the discrete manufacturing system’s switches and control devices to make decisions on physical infrastructure components to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design.

This Guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For discrete manufacturing where office/business networks are commonly deployed in the same general area as manufacturing networks, it is crucial to identify and secure the critical control system physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems durThe next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone area of the architecture, which involves distributing network caing startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber bling and wireless connectivity to each grouping of machines. and copper media that can perform over the distances and Business/office networks may be co-located with the critienvironmental factors is key for robust operation. cal automation networks so means to identify, secure and ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-107

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will insure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. Power Over Ethernet approaches for wireless access points should be considered to minimize deployment costs and to provide robust coverage. End- to-End Solution In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for discrete manufacturing operations for the entire network from the control room out to control panels and on-machine devices will meet the critical needs for high availability, security and performance. Use of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, network distribution, network connectivity, wireless distribution, control panels and field device wiring will result in discrete manufacturing operations that are more intelligent and robust. This guide provides information on selecting, installing, testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure for all levels of this architecture. Discrete Manufacturing Physical Infrastructure This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure to support Discrete Manufacturing Plant layouts.

2. Physical Design Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, control room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations, and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations. 3. Detail Design Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools. This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of Discrete Manufacturing areas, in order for the network and industrial systems to withstand the identified range of environments throughout the industrial facility. NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and identify solutions to address your system needs. 5. Review the recommended solution component List of Materials and specify your infrastructure.

1. Logical Design Define the logical architecture governing the layout of Discrete Manufacturing industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-108

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

.

Fig 2.12-1 Logical Diagram for discrete manufacturing ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-109

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

• Control room featuring best practices

• Robust cable management to secure

for FactoryTalk servers, Stratix switches,

and isolate Ethernet and control ca-

Cisco Level 3 switches, firewalls.

bling mounted on machine.

• Control rooms housing enclosures/

• Grounding and bonding to equipment

racks with well engineered ground/

to mitigate risks to communication

bonding, power and thermal mgt.

disruptions

• Zone cabling approach to distribute ca-

• Enhanced security with keyed jacks,

bling efficiently to the machine/area/zone.

lock-in and blockout connectivity

Fig 2.12-2 Physical Diagram for discrete manufacturing

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-110

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application 3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig. 2.12-3 Detail diagram for discrete manufacturing network physical infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-111

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application 4. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

SCADA Issues

Panduit Solution

Future-proof, High Availability, high performance connectivity

Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2 ) Enterprise Data Center connectivity DMZ Shared enclosure, rack areas

Security: Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels Control and Management of inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections connections, patching in switches or patching to control who can make changes Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels PanView infrastructure management

Manufacturing Zone (Level 3) Control Room

Performance: Noise issues

Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet systems

Performance: Cable/Connector performance

Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that exceeds standards

Performance: Thermal management

Enclosure systems and wire management solutions that efficiently direct cooling to critical servers and switches improving robustness

High Availability: Redundant networks

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Cable management

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

Mixture of Office and IE network

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-112

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Network Distribution

Large system deployments require robust communications over long distances

Fiber solutions with pre-terminated connections easing use of fiber

Troubleshoot: Loss of network

PanView infrastructure management

Numerous network drops to controllers, HMIs, testers, printers, scanners, etc.

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

Network Consolidation Points

Cost effective consolidation with security and manageability

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points

Wireless implementation

Deploying wireless access points securely without expensive power runs

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power

Safety: Tripping hazard to wire movable equipment

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: Noise issues

Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/ bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Troubleshoot: Loss of network

PanView infrastructure management

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

Mixture of Office and IE network

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Dynamic production floor - equipment relocation, additions, expansions, removal

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points. Wire management and identification products. Expandable, high density patch panels

Performance; ESD, Noise

Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions

Reliability: Mitigate failures due to vibration and motion

Abrasion protection to prevent severed wires

Maintainability: additional and enhanced devices, HMI, printers, etc.

Identification and wire management products that improve ability to change, modify, debug

Control panels

On Machine

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-113

Section 2.12: Discrete Manufacturing Application Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Control Panel, On Machine

Safe access to networks without exposing to shock, arc flash

Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular connectivity

Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified

Warning labels, lock out solutions

Security: Network connectivity

Color coded, keyed jacks

5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure. Solution Area

Products

Detailed Parts List

Control Room

Racks Enclosures Security Connectivity Grounding/Bonding Pathways

Section 2.5 Pages 2-19 to 2-32

Network Distribution

Fiber Cable Copper Cable Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.6 Pages 2-33 to 2-43

Zone Cabling

Enclosures Connectivity Cable Management Security Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.7 Pages 2-44 to 2-55

Control Panel

Connectivity Cable Management Safety Abrasion protection Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.8 Pages 2-56 to 2-73

On-Machine

Connectivity Abrasion protection Cable management Safety Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.9 Pages 2-74 to 2-85

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-114

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications 2.13 Packaging / Conveying Applications

Packaging and conveying areas of a typical manufacturing enterprise feature a unique set of physical infrastructure requirements that bring together aspect of discrete manufacturing, process, and business system integration. Packaging is a dynamic industry due to the market impact and rapid advancements in materials and strategies for ensuring packaging that is secure, green, and that earns consumer preference. Conveying systems are comprised of conveying sections, bar code printers, readers, weigh scales, vision systems, palletizers and other logistics components that allow shipping final products efficiently. The automation required for typical packaging operations involve motion control using servo and VFD drives, PAC controllers, pneumatics, robotics, vision systems, sensors, and other processing elements. Conveying

systems rely on MCC (Motor Control Centers) and distributed I/O systems for conveying sections controlled by PAC systems for coordinated motion. The logistical needs to coordinate these steps are driving use of MES applications to link the ERP layer to the factory floor to provide visibility and automatic setup of equipment. The rapid growth of Ethernet connectivity is making all this connected manufacturing automation possible but is fraught with problems if unsophisticated users attempt to ‘plug ‘n play’ into existing networks with low-cost, unmanaged switches and cheap patch cords. Performance problems, startup delays, and production outages can occur from networking infrastructure not specified or installed to meet the application requirements, environmental and security challenges of the manufacturing space.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-115

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications The packaging automation systems and conveying operations now require multiple levels of physical infrastructure for networked connectivity that spans different environments and cuts across knowledge domains of control engineers and IT support staff. This infrastructure includes control rooms that resemble IT data centers with racks or enclosures housing multiple servers, switches, patching and other devices. IT closets are replaced with industrial enclosures on the plant floor. Networking needs to be distributed to cell/area zones in an efficient manner that promotes high availability, maintainability, security, and flexibility. Control panels and on-machine cabling systems need to be engineered to promote testability, performance and security of the critical Ethernet communications that enable automation systems to function. Reference Architectures Rockwell Automation and Cisco have mapped out reference architectures that address the form factors, cost considerations, security, and network topologies required for today’s discrete manufacturing operations. These architectures describe the strategy for a structured arrangement of servers, software, network switches, and control systems. However, the area not fully addressed that is critical for the success of these architectures is the physical infrastructure. This refers to the infrastructure required to connect, manage, secure, and optimize the connectivity and installation of the networks, panels and control rooms required for control systems and MES integration. A structured, engineered approach is required for this physical infrastructure to ensure that the investments in control software, controllers, servers, switches, and on machine devices actually startup and perform at peak output. Physical Layout Considerations To properly engineer the physical infrastructure for a packaging/conveying operation involves understanding the physical environment requirements including scale of the operation, control room layout, environmental considerations, and cell/area topologies. At the top of the manufacturing zone architecture for a discrete plant operation is the control room which requires server and switch enclosures. The performance and security of the critical control applications housed in this room can be optimized by leveraging best practices from data center rooms concerning enclosures, wire management, grounding/bonding, physical security, power and thermal considerations.

The next physical area to analyze is the cell/area zone area of the architecture which involves distributing network cabling and wireless connectivity to each grouping of machines. Business/office networks may be co-located with the critical automation networks so means to identify, secure and mistake proof can provide important benefits Distributed enclosures for fiber or copper distribution and consolidation should also be employed for cost-effective cabling to cell/ areas where control panels housing Stratix switches may be located. The media and connectivity selected should have performance that meets or exceeds TIA and ODVA standards to ensure performance long term. For connecting field devices in harsh MICE environments, sealed IP-67 rated cord sets provide robust connectivity. Wire management and abrasion protection are key for reliability and maintainability for networks deployed on-machine to connect to sensors or actuators in harsh environment areas or when subjected to repetitive motion. A well- engineered grounding/bonding system that mitigates noise considerations for communications is critical both for the control room as well as distributed cabinets and I/O networks. Network Schematic Analysis As the network and computing resource requirements become more important to packaging systems, there is a need to leverage best practices from the IT world in conjunction with automation system knowledge. This requires partnering between IT and controls groups, developing ‘hybrid’ engineering skills to be able to make key decisions on network architectures and physical infrastructure component selection. It is recommended that IT and controls review a schematic layout of the manufacturing system’s switches and control devices to make decisions on physical infrastructure components to ensure security, performance and testability for each layer of the design. This guide provides a reference schematic layout showing a typical topology with callouts that show where physical security for ports can be applied, where performance decisions on media and connectivity need to be made, and where it’s recommended to install patching for testability of critical fiber or copper links. For packaging/conveying operations where office/business networks are commonly deployed in the same general area as manufacturing networks, it is crucial to identify and secure the critical control system physical links to avoid configuration mistakes and to prevent problems during startups and maintenance. Selection of appropriate fiber

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-116

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications and copper media that can perform over the distances and environmental factors is key for robust operation. Diverse pathway planning for redundancy across the plant as well as in control plans should be considered. Selecting fiber and copper connectivity solutions engineered for high performance exceeding standard margins reduces risks associated with installation and long term performance. A careful plan for deploying test points will ensure that the network distribution meets performance targets before critical startups of equipment where delays can be costly as well as on a periodic basis during preventative maintenance to avoid loss of control during operation. Power over Ethernet (PoE) approaches for wireless access points should be considered to minimize deployment costs and to provide robust coverage.

2. Physical Design Map out the physical locations of control panels, MCC, control room, and production offices to identify Ethernet network structured cabling reach requirements, noise considerations, and bonding/grounding requirements. The following diagram shows recommended best practices for ‘in plant’ distribution. This step provides the opportunity to identify distributed zone cabling topologies and plan out required patching, test point, and security considerations. 3. Detail Design Develop a network-level schematic diagram (or use a reference diagram) to identify the exact physical layer components required to deploy Ethernet network. These components include number of patch cords and horizontal links, patching fields, bonding and grounding elements, labeling and identification schemes, cable management tools, and safety and security tools.

End-to-End Solution In summary, a careful analysis and plan developed for the physical infrastructure for packaging/conveying operations for the entire network from the control room out to control panels and ‘on-machine’ devices will meet the critical needs This diagram also should identify IP and NEMA ratings for for high availability, security and performance. Use of physical layer components based on MICE level analysis of reference architectures that leverage best practice physical Discrete Manufacturing areas, in order for the network and infrastructure approaches for control room hardware, netindustrial systems to withstand the identified range of enviwork distribution, network connectivity, wireless distribution, ronments throughout the industrial facility. control panels and field device wiring will result in discrete manufacturing operations that are more intelligent and robust. This Guide provides information on selecting, installing, NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 are often done concurrently. testing, and documenting this critical physical infrastructure 4. Review the levels of the architecture in the diagram and for all levels of this architecture. identify solutions to address your system needs. Packaging / Conveying Physical Infrastructure 5. Review the recommended solution component List of This section defines the sequence of actions involved with deploying a physical infrastructure to support Packaging/ Materials and specify your infrastructure. Conveying Plant layouts. 1. Logical Design Define the logical architecture governing the layout of Packaging and Conveying industrial systems and active devices. The logical architecture should be based on logical layer reference architectures developed by Rockwell Automation and Cisco, as well as on applicable topology diagrams.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-117

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications 1. Logical Design Define the Logical Architecture

Fig 2.13-1: Logical Diagram for Packaging/ Conveying Network ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-118

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications 2. Physical Design Map Device Locations to Identify Physical Infrastructure Reach, Noise, Bonding/Grounding Requirements

Fig. 2.13-2: Physical diagram for packaging/conveying network.

• Zone cabling approach to distribute cabling efficiently to the machine/area/zone • Robust cable management to secure and isolate Ethernet and control cabling mounted on machine on conveyor sections. • Grounding and bonding to equipment to mitigate risks to communication disruptions • Enhanced security with keyed jacks, lock in and block out connectivity

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-119

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications 3. Detail Design Develop Network-Level Schematic Diagram Identify Exact Physical Infrastructure Components

Fig. 2.13-3: Detail diagram for Packaging/Conveying physical network infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-120

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications 4. Review the Levels of the Architecture in the Diagram and Identify Solutions to Address Your System Needs. Zone Area Physical Infrastructure

SCADA Issues

Panduit Solution

Future-proof, High Availability, high performance connectivity

Fiber and 10GB copper connectivity solutions

Enterprise Zone (Level 1,2 ) Enterprise Data Center connectivity DMZ Shared enclosure, rack areas

Security: Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels Control and Management of inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections connections, patching in switches or patching to control who can make changes Lockable enclosure systems, cross connect patch panels PanView infrastructure management

Manufacturing Zone (Level 3) Control Room

Performance: Noise issues

Grounding/Bonding solutions for under raised floor, cabinet systems

Performance: Cable/Connector performance

Copper and Fiber solutions, installation tools, and testing guidance for end-to-end connectivity performance that exceeds standards

Performance: Thermal management

Enclosure systems and wire management solutions that efficiently direct cooling to critical servers and switches improving robustness

High Availability: Redundant networks

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing channels inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Cable management

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

Mixture of Office and IE network

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-121

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Network Distribution

Large system deployments require robust communications over long distances

Fiber solutions with pre-terminated connections easing use of fiber

Troubleshoot: Loss of network

PanView infrastructure management

Numerous network drops to controllers, HMIs, testers, printers, scanners, etc.

Fiber runner, enclosure and rack systems, wire management and identification products. PanView infrastructure management

Network Consolidation Points

Cost effective consolidation with security and manageability

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points

Wireless implementation

Deploying wireless access points securely without expensive power runs

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power

Safety: Tripping hazard to wire movable equipment

Utilize lockable, environmentally rated enclosures designed for Cisco Wireless Access Points and antenna systems and Power over Ethernet (PoE) to distribute power

Security: Control of ports

Color coded fiber and copper jacks or keyed connectivity solutions can provide means to segregate critical systems

Performance: Noise issues

Comprehensive control panel solution utilizing grounding/ bonding, cable segregation and separation to reduce risks

Performance: Throughput, Latency

Connectivity solutions that exceed standards for copper and fiber connectivity. Pre-tested patch cords deliver long term performance reducing risk

Testability: Verify during startup, preventative maintenance

Patching for testing fiber, copper uplinks and critical external connections. Pre-tested copper and fiber patch cords to mitigate risks

Troubleshoot: Loss of network

PanView infrastructure management

Reliability: Power

Superior termination with Panduit terminals.

Mixture of Office and IE network

Color coded, keyed jacks can prevent crossing networks inadvertently. Lock-in connectors can secure connections in switches or patching to control who can make changes

Maintainability: Dynamic production floor - equipment relocation, additions, expansions, removal

Zone enclosure solutions to cost effectively distribute cabling with consolidation points. Wire management and identification products. Expandable, high density patch panels

Performance; ESD, Noise

Comprehensive Grounding/Bonding solutions

Reliability: Mitigate failures due to vibration and motion

Abrasion protection to prevent severed wires

Maintainability: additional and enhanced devices, HMI, printers, etc.

Identification and wire management products that improve ability to change, modify, debug

Control panels

On Machine

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-122

Section 2.13: Packaging / Conveying Applications Cell/Area Zone (Level 0,1,2) Control Panel, On Machine

Safe access to networks without exposing to shock, arc flash

Panduit Data Access Port featuring secure modular connectivity

Arc Flash, Voltage hazards identified

Warning labels, lock out solutions

Security: Network connectivity

Color coded, keyed jacks

5. Review the Recommended Solution Component List of Materials and Specify your Infrastructure. Solution Area

Products

Detailed Parts List

Control Room

Racks Enclosures Security Connectivity Grounding/Bonding Pathways

Section 2.5 Pages 2-19 to 2-32

Network Distribution

Fiber Cable Copper Cable Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.6 Pages 2-33 to 2-43

Zone Cabling

Enclosures Connectivity Cable Management Security Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.7 Pages 2-44 to 2-55

Control Panel

Connectivity Cable Management Safety Abrasion protection Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.8 Pages 2-56 to 2-73

On-Machine

Connectivity Abrasion protection Cable management Safety Pathways Grounding/Bonding

Section 2.9 Pages 2-74 to 2-85

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 2-123

Section 3

Physical Infrastructure Project Phases ISO defined an Open System Interconnect 7 Layer reference model for networks (see Figure 3.1). The Physical Layer which forms the foundation layer for the entire network specifies the network media (copper, fiber wireless). The Network Physical Infrastructure includes the entire Physical Layer and adds the entire mechanical infrastructure necessary to support the Physical Layer and other layers that collectively form the network. The entire Network Physical Infrastructure is often relegated to a contractor’s discretion based on outdated specifications or past practices. To implement a Network Physical Infrastructure that supports a Rockwell Automation and Cisco’s Reference Architectures for Manufacturing, more careful consideration must be given to the physical architecture, component specification, installation practice, testing, and documentation.

To properly execute a robust industrial Network Physical Infrastructure based on Ethernet technology that addresses these considerations requires solid project planning to ensure that the decisions and actions are made at the right time and by the right people. If properly planned and executed, the result is a robust, high performance Network Physical Infrastructure that has enables fast startup of an automation system that performs reliably long term in spite of environmental issues and that can handle new devices or system reconfiguration over time. This section of this guide makes recommendations on how to turn a potentially chaotic process into a predictable controlled process that can be replicated globally. The following subsections will introduce: 1. Basic considerations for project phases 2. Best practices and pitfalls to avoid for each phase. 3. Detailed checklist of steps to consider for each phase and layer of a typical physical infrastructure project. 4. Design tools for those responsible for the major phases of an industrial Ethernet physical infrastructure project.

APPLICATION PRESENTATION SESSION TRANSPORT NETWORK LINK PHYSICAL Figure 3.1-1 OSI 7-Layer Model

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-1

Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases 3.1

Basic Consideration for Project Phases

Planning The planning phase is the most critical phase of the physical infrastructure installation process– changes after this stage will normally incur additional costs and delays to the project. A thorough project plan should be composed that identifies tasks, responsibilities, and due dates for the design, installation, testing and documentation steps. First step is to fully understand the existing system including field verification of equipment and available ports. Every effort should be made to understand types of traffic and limitations of the existing physical infrastructure. The reliability of existing system should also be investigated and quantified. The scope of the networking required for an automation system needs to be fully described to formulate an effective plan. The scope should include how the network will be used, in what type of physical atmosphere, code issues related to wiring, quantified amount and types of equipment on the network including POE, and potential future growth. Every effort should be made to reduce disparate systems operating on separate networks.

100% testing of all connections following Panduit warranty procedures. All testing is to be documented with copy to customer and Panduit for warranty records. All cabling must be properly labeled with products suitable for long-life in the environment. Every effort should be made to not deviate from design without careful consideration of original intent and limitations. Any changes to the design plan must be updated on CAD drawings for customer retention. All change orders to original design should be carefully reviewed so as to avoid in future work. As-built drawings and network documentation should be generated to provide important information for support and maintenance over the lifetime of the system.

NOTE: It can not be stressed enough that proper documentation occurs during each phase. Keeping up to date documentation for the entire network, including prints, mechanical hardware, devices, IP Addresses and switch configuration is essential to a successful network installation and operation.

Designing The design stage should include generating a Bill of Materials, CAD drawings, and firm scope of work for permit and bid use. When laying out the pathways for network installation, factor in production/maintenance department preference, ease of installation, and avoidance of harmful atmospheres where possible. As with the planning, field verification of routes should be performed to ensure no interferences which can change design and add to cost. Follow TIA, EIA, ANSI, Panduit Certified installers, tray fill %, etc… for best design practices. Bills of material should take into account specialty tools needed for installation and amount of slack needed at both ends of pulls. Every effort should be made to utilize pre-terminated products to reduce installation time and reduce errors in the field.

Implementing/Testing/Documentation/Operations The installation by certified installer should also include ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-2

Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases

Phase

Best Practices

Pitfalls To Avoid

Planning/Designing

Understanding the environment

Not planning the Infrastructure

Follow MICE

Not taking environment into consideration, using business network specifications on the plant floor

Understanding the extent of the network, how it will be used and by whom, who owns it, how changes will be made, future growth

Not planning for future growth Not understanding types of data traffic, how traffic interacts, and how to separate when and where necessary

Written specification for networking components, establishing consistency (cable, cable type, connectors, enclosures, connection methods, etc.)

Incompatible components or partial compliance to standards (i.e., using Category 6 cable with standard connectors)

Understanding the networking layout, the different types of traffic, limitations of the network Fully document the network design showing device location, cable runs, pathways, label designations, color codes, keying and segmenting for security Implementing

Neglecting to fully document the design and to specify cable labels results in mistakes during subsequent phases.

Network installation that will outlast the system, planned for future growth and future enhancements, ability to be used for future, faster network speeds when necessary, keeping costs reasonable, balancing future necessities with realistic costs Certified installers with cable certification documentation Installers, OEMs, system integrators having a standard to follow, no room for error

No structure or standard for OEMs / integrators to follow, mix of hardware makes for difficult maintenance

Using correct tool Using pretested, modular solutions Configuration for optimization

Out of the box configuration

Create ‘As Built’ documentation showing cable routing, iden- No ‘as built’ corrections to document tification, port assignments, and IP addresses assigned. results in confusion, wasted time Planned additions to the network Testing

Operational testing without unnecessary shutdown Test each horizontal link and store test results for future reference.

Operations

Adding in piecemeal Neglecting to test links can result in extended startup troubleshooting

Regularly monitor network, assess before or after changes made Monitor physical degradation due to environmental factors Keep documentation up to date as equipment moves, adds, changes Table 3-1. Project Phases Best Practices, Pitfalls to Avoid

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-3

Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases Control Room Design 1. Determine number of servers and form factor. Determine rack or enclosure space 2. Layout rack with higher level switches and The following section details considerations for each step of associated patching the project phases. 3. Layout demilitarized zone firewalls and associated cabling PLANNING a. Consider use of lockable enclosures, keyed 1. Review applicable codes and standards for application fiber or copper jacks, lock in/block out connection area and each level of the architecture technology to provide security 2. Review Application requirements, reference architecture 4. Select appropriate fiber and copper patching solutions logical diagrams 5. Specify blanking panels for mounting switches in 3. Review/Create block diagram for system following appli19 inch rack cable Rockwell Automation/Cisco reference architecture 6. Specify control room grounding bonding 4. Review site plan and building(s) floor plan to understand (See Section 2B, pages 2-37 and 2-38, Section 4C) the physical layout of equipment on a plant floor or grounds a. Underfloor or overhead solutions a. Identify cell/area zones 7. Specify fiber and copper pathway solutions for cabling b. Identify existing control rooms and suitable within room (see Section 2B, Section 4E) locations for expansion or new rooms as required. a. Fiber runner for overhead system (Section 2B, 5. Perform walk through area to identify and verify: page 2-35; Section 4E, pages 4-76 and 4-77) a. Existing cabling: location, category, media type b. Grid runner for under-floor system (Section 2B, b. Suitable pathway location for fiber or copper page 2-35 Section 4E, pages 4-78 and 4-79) media runs c. Transition points: Wire basket, Ladder Rack c. Cell/area zones and suitable locations for (Section 4E, pages 4-81 and 4-82) consolidation points 8. Review thermal management for enclosure systems d. Existing control room or networking rooms and (Section 4D page 4-73) suitable location for new room if necessary a. Consider wire management, ‘Cool Boot’ and e. Identify MICE level of environments for each other products to maximize cooling efficiency level of the architecture: 9. Review power conditioning and backup systems f. Identify physical cable run distances between: 10. Consider infrastructure management system to I. Control Room(s) monitor patching II. Control Panel (s) 11. Specify pretested patch cable solutions III. On Machine 12. Consider modular high density patching solutions 6. Review and document grounding/bonding scheme between enclosures, racks for building, control room, machine, cell or process 13. Use standards based identification schemes to mark enclosures, ports, cables. Consider color codes for DESIGN different network levels. General Layout 14. Determine Physical Security products to be used for 1. Layout plant floor locations for: segregating VLANs, network segments and DMZ: a. Control room racks/enclosures a. Keyed jacks, patch cords, b. Zone cabling consolidation points b. Lock-in, blockout for desired ports c. Network drops 15. If shielded cable is used, design bonding scheme I. Single mode fiber for runs over 550m to avoid ground loops - use insulated patching approach, II. Multimode fiber for runs under 550m evaluate hybrid bonding III. Copper for runs under 100m 2. Specify amount of cable for BOM including slack for each end of run 3.2

Detailed List of Project Steps

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-4

Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases Network Distribution Design 1. Review channel length and decide on appropriate media for each level 2. Review performance and environmental needs and select category of copper horizontal runs a. Choose media and connectors with performance margins over standard for improved noise mitigation (see section 4A) 3. Review performance and environmental needs of fiber horizontal runs a. Select appropriate rated cable and number of fibers required 4. Specify pathway products for each area: ladder rack, j-hook, corrugated loom tubing, conduit, (see section 4E) 5. Use standards based identification schemes to mark enclosures, ports, cables (see section 4G) Zone Cabling Enclosure Design 1. Determine environmental requirements and specify suitable enclosure rating 2. If zone enclosure is designed to be active or passive: a. Determine switch to be housed: 19 rack or Stratix panel mount switch b. Determine fiber/copper patching needs c. Determine Power over Ethernet (PoE) needs: mount midspan injectors in enclosure. 3. Determine number of RackUnits (RU’s) required to specify size of rack or enclosure 4. Layout enclosure RU’s with switches, patching, and Power over Ethernet (PoE) 5. Use standards based identification schemes to mark enclosures, ports, cables. Consider color codes for different network levels. 6. Determine physical security products (keyed jacks, patch cords, lock-in, blockout):

Control Panel Design 1. Address safety considerations for control panel a. Voltage and Arc Flash labels b. Provision for lockout/tagout c. Data Access Port for safe access to network without opening panel 2. Ensure panel uses appropriate grounding/bonding scheme and panel layout for noise mitigation (see section 4C pages 4-60 and 4-61) a. Galvanized back panel for any drives panel b. Bond sub panels c. Segregate clean and dirty signals in colorcoded duct 3. Specify location for Stratix switch and design installation details a. Route Protective Earth (PE) wire to switch b. Location for patching and/or surface mount box for fiber slack management c. Segregate network cabling, and leave space for proper bend radius 4. Provide for ability to test links with appropriate test points a. Surface mount boxes, patch panels 5. Copper solutions (see section 4A) a. Choose quality copper jacks and media with performance margins over standard for improved noise mitigation b. Specify pretested patch cords 6. Fiber connectivity (see section 4B) a. Choose OptiCam pre-polished solution to speed installation and reduce risks since no field polish or adhesive required. b. Specify pre-tested patch cords 7. Wire management (see section 4F) a. Specify abrasion protection and clips, clamps, and ties engineered to protect cable and avoid overcinching cables risking performance degradation. 8. Identification (See section 4G) a. Use standards based identification schemes to mark devices, ports, cables. Consider color codes for different network levels

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-5

Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases On-Machine Design (See section 2F) 1. Review scope of system and layout of machines and process 2. Specify locations for zone enclosures to feed ‘onmachine’ drops 3. Use M12 connectors or sealed RJ45 network connectivity for ‘on machine’ devices for devices exposed to high MICE level hazards (mechanical, ingress, chemical exposures). 4. Review grounding/bonding for equipment and control panels to mitigate EMI noise and ESD risks 5. Design ‘on machine’ pedestals or panels with wire management and identification features a. Hinged duct for slack management b. Clips and clamps for cable bundles c. Identification products for devices and cabling d. Metal detectable wire management products for food industry 6. Safety design: lockout/tagout, warning signage INSTALLATION Control Room, Network Distribution, Zone Cabling Enclosures 1. Certified installer using correct tools for fiber termination 2. Certified installer using correct tools for copper termination 3. Install bonding, grounding with specified conductor sizes and ensuring all paint piercing washers are used on painted surfaces, etc. to ensure adequate bonding. 4. Ensure adequate bend radius 5. Identify cabling and devices per drawing 6. Avoid over-cinching or deforming cabling

On-Machine 1. Use abrasion protection products to manage and protect cables 2. Consider use of duct for slack management 3. Separate different classes of wiring for noise mitigation 4. Identify devices, ports, cables, and address information TESTING 1. Test each copper link to ensure that it meets or exceeds Category ratings 2. Test each fiber link to ensure it has desired performance 3. Record baseline information on new system for later reference 4. Verify grounding and bonding resistance, record for later reference, audit OPERATION 1. Periodically audit network performance 2. Periodically check grounding/bonding integrity and resistance

NOTE: REMEMBER TO DOCUMENT 1.

Document Rack, port layout for switches in control room, zone enclosure or control panels

2.

Make as built network diagrams and plant layout schematics showing fiber and cable drops

Control Panels 1. Segregate wiring into color coded clean/dirty duct for noise mitigation 2. Install bonding for all subpanels. a. Use wide bonding straps rather than narrow gauge wire for bonding 3. Install surface mount boxes, patch fields to aid in testing 4. Install security devices to lock-in, block out ports per drawing 5. Install Data Access Port where convenient for troubleshooting in side of panel or on door 6. Use abrasion protection and dynamic cable mounts for wiring on door of panel to manage and secure cabling 7. Identify IP addresses of critical devices (e.g. PAC system, HMI, drives to allow connectivity for configuration or troubleshooting)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-6

Section 3 : Physical Infrastructure Project Phases 3.3

Project Phase Design Tools

Phase

Typically Responsible

Tools

Plan

Control Engineer, IT Network Analyst/ Engineer, Plant Engineer or Supervisor

- Reference Architectures - Design Guides - Project Management Software

Design

Control Engineer, IT Network Analyst/ Engineer

- Reference Architectures - Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture Builder - Panduit Design tool for Visio - Bentley promisE Electrical CAD tools for panel layout, network layout, documentation

Implement

Contractor, Electricians, Network analyst

- Panduit installation tooling and kits - Panduit training - Panduit Label Printing Systems - Bentley promisE Electrical CAD tools for panel layout, network documentation

Test

Contractor, Electricians, Network analyst

- Panduit training - Fluke testing tools

Operate

Regularly monitor network, assess before or after changes made

- FactoryTalk Asset Center - Panduit Panview patching infrastructure Monitoring

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 3-7

Section 4

Physical Infrastructure Implementation A network physical infrastructure implementation requires the selection of connectors, media, pathways, enclosures, identification and security components along with associated installation methodologies (e.g. wire management, grounding & bounding). The following section provides guidance on specifying, installing, testing, and documenting these critical components. The physical infrastructure forms the foundation to support the communication channels that connect a distributed system tasked with real-time control, process data collection and device configuration. Industrial networks require deterministic performance. Therefore, the physical infrastructure of the network channel must be specified with sufficient performance margin, proper environmental rating, and dependable security features to ensure that the network performs consistently and reliably. Besides EMI noise coupling risks, the other factors that are the most problematic for selecting, planning, and installing the fiber and copper media are the environmental factors that can prevail in certain points of a communication channel. These factors can range from extreme cold or hot temperatures outdoors or in a process line to humidity or chemical exposure that can degrade insulation to vibration or shock that can cause mechanical failures of connections. The MICE rating system allows these factors to be categorized and analyzed for mitigation. Products that can assist in mitigation include armored fiber cable, IP67 rated connectors, and special grades of insulation. A further refinement in best practices related to managing environmental concerns is described in TIA-1005 which allows more than 4 connectors per channel to enable setting up MICE boundary points (see Figure 4-1) along the channel length as the media passes through different areas. This approach can be very cost effective since only those limited areas needing elevated protection require the more expensive hardened infrastructure components. The areas that are more protected can use standard solutions which are more cost effective.

Figure 4.1-1. MICE boundaries can change at various points across channel length as cabling channels pass through multiple areas, as defined in TIA-1005 (Source: ISA).

To design an effective end-to-end solution that mitigates environmental and EMI requires carefully analyzing the control system communication requirements, device characteristics, environmental conditions and transition points, as well as availability and security considerations. Designers and specifiers are left to answer many questions regarding these critical connectivity issues. What type of media? How much hardening do I need? What is cost effective? What is overkill? What will meet today’s and tomorrow’s needs in the face of the new technologies …wireless, POE, VOIP? The answer requires careful consideration of many factors. Reference architectures and environmental analysis tools like the MICE rating system can provide these answers. The following selection guide information will reveal products that will allow implementing end to end connectivity that can meet these needs.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-1

Section 4: Physical Infrastructure Implementation STANDARDS and CODES ANSI/TIA-1005 / ANSI/TIA-1005-1 Publication of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises and its first addendum, covering Industrial Pathways and Spaces, is forthcoming is 2009. The documents are based on the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and TIA-569-B series of standards, and include appropriate allowances and exceptions to those standards for industrial premises. They also include techniques to mitigate mechanical, ingress, climate/chemical, and electromechanical (M.I.C.E.) effects across multiple areas. TIA/EIA-568-B TIA/EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard) covers structured cabling systems (both balanced copper cabling and fiber optic cabling) for commercial buildings, and between buildings in campus environments. The bulk of the standards define cabling types, distances, connectors, cable system architectures, cable termination standards and performance characteristics, cable installation requirements, and methods of testing installed cable. Two common network architectures are described by this standard: hierarchal star and centralized fiber (FTTx). TIA/EIA-569-B TIA/EIA-569-B (Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces) provides requirements for spaces (rooms or areas) and pathways into and through which telecommunications equipment and media are installed. This standard, along with Addendum 5 to TIA/EIA568-B, specifically addresses fiber to the enclosure (FTTE), a method for network deployment under which active equipment is typically centralized in a single location (such as a control room), and fiber backbones are run to distributed enclosures located close to machinery and work stations. This is the lowest cost and most flexible infrastructure.

at 10Gbit/sec. The data center is a fiber-rich environment where fiber runs typically are less than 50 meters. Storage Area Network (SAN) components are nearly 100% cabled with fiber media, and fiber cabling is an increasingly popular option as a high-speed server/switch interconnect. ISO/IEC 11801 International standard ISO/IEC 11801 (Generic Customer Premises Cabling) specifies general-purpose telecommunication cabling systems that are suitable for a wide range of applications (analog and ISDN telephony, various data communication standards, building control systems, factory automation). It covers both balanced copper cabling and fiber optic cabling. The standard was designed for use within commercial premises that may consist of either a single building or of multiple buildings on a campus. 4.1

Copper Media

4.1.1

Selection

When choosing Ethernet copper-based cabling solutions, the following criteria should be taken into consideration prior to installation to ensure system performance, reliability, and scalability. 4.1.1.1 Media Type Several different kinds of twisted-pair copper cables are available for deployment in Industrial Ethernet applications, depending on reach and bandwidth requirements (see Table 4.1-1). The following types of copper twisted-pair cable are most often deployed in industrial settings:

Category 6A • Allows 10 Gb/s performance over 100m channel • Designed for the most bandwidth intensive applications: • Converged networks – Data, VoIP, Stream Video, Medical Imagery TIA/EIA-942 • Backbones serving increase network traffic TIA/EIA-942 (Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard Data Centers – Shared network storage, for Data Centers) specifies the minimum requirements for clusters/server farms the telecommunications infrastructure of data centers and • Future proofing for the certain growth and demand on computer rooms. This standard differs from 568-B/569-B in that it specifically recommends a particular fiber grade, laser- the network • Can deploy PoE without sacrificing high network throughput optimized OM3, as the most reliable fiber media solution

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-2

Section 4.1: Copper Media Category 6 • Ideal for critical applications where network up-time is extremely important • Provides guaranteed performance headroom • Compensates for: • Variations in installation practices • Affects of future disturbance to the structured cabling system • Allows limited 10 Gb/s applications (37 meters)

Category 5e • Expansion of existing Category 5e networks • Expansion of short/limited life networks • Cost critical installations where future proofing/longevity is not an issue

Parameter

Category 5e

Category 6

Category 6A

Standard

• TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e

• TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6

• TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10

• ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2, Class D

• ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2, Class E • TSB-155 supports 10GBASE-T applications up to

Augmented Category 6 • ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2, Amendment 1 Class EA

37m channels Specified Bandwidth

100 MHz

250 MHz

500 MHz

Insertion Loss @ 100MHz 24 dB

21.3 dB

20.9 dB

Cable Diameter

0.19 – 0.21 inch

0.23 – 0.25 inch

0.295 inch

POE Support

Yes

Yes

Yes

10G/1000BASE-T

Category 5e

Category 6

Category 6A

Gigabit Ethernet

100 m

100 m

100 m

Ethernet Reach:

10Gigabit Ethernet

Not supported

37 m

100 m

10GBT low power mode

Not supported

Not supported

30 m

Fiber Channel Reach over Copper: FC-BASE-T

Category 5e

Category 6

Category 6A

1G FC-BASE-T

100 m

100 m

100 m

2G FC-BASE-T

60 m

70 m

100 m

4G FC-BASE-T

Not supported

40 m

100 m

Fig. 4.1-2. Balanced Copper Media Types and Reach / Bandwidth Characteristics

Ensuring 10Gb/s Performance. The control room physical infrastructure can be leveraged to support multiple generations of factory systems and equipment as machine cells are upgraded, reconfigured, or extended. Also, links in the control room may need to carry 10 Gb/s in order to support convergence of disparate batch, continuous process, discrete, safety, motion, and drive control industrial network technologies. For these reasons, a 10-Gigabit ready cabling infrastructure is recommended, with Industrial Ethernet bandwidth and reach requirements favoring the deployment of Category 6A copper links.

For 10GBASE-T performance the IEEE requires Category 6 electrical channel parameters to be extended from the current 250 MHz to 500 MHz, and introduces Power Sum Alien Crosstalk requirements up to 500 MHz. While the standard recognizes that Category 6 cabling systems may support 10 Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances, only Category 6A copper cabling systems will be able to support 10 Gb/s data rates for distances up to 100 meters.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-3

Section 4.1: Copper Media The IEEE also has determined that alien crosstalk is the main electrical parameter limiting the performance of the structured cabling system when applied to 10 Gigabit transmission lines. Alien crosstalk is a coupled signal in a disturbed pair arising from a signal in a neighboring cable. Today’s digital signal processing (DSP) electronics are not as effective in canceling alien crosstalk as they are for suppressing internal channel noise. Only through the use of innovative complementary design technologies that are developed to work together as a system can true 10 Gigabit warranted performance be achieved. In order to support 10 Gb/s data rates, new twisted-pair cable constructions improve cable separation in bundles and new connectors are available to ensure that gains achieved by the cable improvements are not lost in the channel. Jack modules, copper cable, patch panels and patch cords also must be precisely tuned to achieve 10 Gigabit speeds. 4.1.1.2 Unshielded vs. Shielded Solutions With the exception of some countries in Western Europe, the cable of choice throughout the world for structured copper cabling installations has been UTP. The IEEE 10GBASE-T specification, which defines 10 Gigabit Ethernet transmission over copper twisted pair, permits both UTP and STP copper cabling systems. There are advantages and disadvantages to using either type (see Table 4.1-2). The main advantage of using a STP cabling system is the dramatic suppression of alien crosstalk. The containment of this noise helps ensure better signal integrity than can be achieved with a UTP cabling system. The main advantages of UTP

cabling are that it is simpler to install, quicker to terminate, and less expensive than STP cabling based on product and installation costs. Also, within most regions, installers and contractors are more familiar with UTP cabling, including its proper installation. For many markets, a learning curve for STP cabling installations still remains. While proper bonding and grounding methods should always be followed, in practice there is often more confusion on how to do this with STP cabling and how much additional cost will be incurred to meet these requirements. Also, attention to proper grounding beyond the cabling itself to the electrical systems must be implemented to eliminate the possibility of ground loops. If the power cabling system is not properly designed and/or installed, an electrical potential difference could result between the two ends of an STP cabling link. This electrical potential difference could result in a ground loop, which would likely cause data rate errors. Thus, the overall integrity of the power and grounding system is very important to ensure 10GBASE-T date rate performance. This becomes less of an issue with UTP because UTP cabling systems are not closed ground loops.

Advantages of STP

Advantages of UTP

Excellent alien crosstalk suppression (> 20 dB ANEXT headroom

Installers and contractors are more comfortable installing UTP over

over the standard)

STP systems which may lead to lower installation quotes

Field testing for alien crosstalk not necessary due to superior

Additional step of bonding cable to connectivity components is not

headroom margin over the 10GBASE-T standard (estimated time

required, no potential ground loop concerns

savings of 20-40 minutes per individual link) Excellent immunity from devices that emanate EMI and FRI noise

No cable preparation required when terminating jacks, less installa-

such as WLAN’s, cellular phones, TV broadcasting or radios

tion time (Shielded jack termination takes 50% longer than UTP)

Increased patch cord cable manageability due to smaller cable

Lower product and installation cost

(0.23 in. STP vs. 0.29 in. UTP) UTP and STP patch cables have channel de-rating of 20% and 50% respectively, which allows for longer channel length in UTP installation when using more than 8 meters of patch cords Figure 4.1-3. Comparison of STP and UTP 10GBASE-T Compliant Cabling ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-4

Section 4.1: Copper Media 4.1.1.3 Media and Connector Selection for Noise Mitigation Installation of copper Ethernet cabling near control panel noise sources increases the potential for common mode noise coupling that can result in bit errors and delays. Common-mode noise is the voltage that can develop on the entire LAN channel with respect to ground. Since Ethernet cabling system uses differential mode signaling, the voltage difference within the two wires in a twisted pair defines the signal so common mode noise should be subtracted out and not cause a problem. Figure 4.1-2 illustrates the allowed coupled common mode noise signal in a 1000BASE-T and 100BASE-T system for a 100 meter channel. Note that 100Base-T cable cannot tolerate more than 0.5 volt of noise coupling near 100 MHz with the 1000BaseT tolerating much less only 0.1 V. A VFD, servo, or inductive load with spikes in hundreds of volts could easily couple in noise at these low levels leading to disrupted communications.

of a cabling system is a ratio, articulated in dB, of common-mode noise rejected and prevented from converting to a differential mode voltage. IEEE and EIA/TIA defies the minimum requirements for CMRR in term of TCL and TCTL which are power ratio measurements characterizing unbalance from transmit and receive ends. Infrastructure design techniques that can improve noise rejection include maintaining proper bend radius and separation distance between conductors, avoiding over-tightened cable ties, using shielded cables where possible, observing good bonding practices for shielded and motor cables, and ensuring cable and connector balance using best-in-class vendor connectivity solutions that exceed standards specifications.

Figure 4.1-5. Signal and Noise Routing Diagram

4.1.1.4 Pre-Terminated Solutions Pre-terminated cabling solutions are ideally suited for quick deployment in dense control room areas. The pre-tested modular construction of these cable assemblies offer several key advantages over using multi-connector cables that require time-consuming punchdown and testing:

Figure 4.1-4. Coupled Common Mode Noise Signal

The balance of twisted pair cables and RJ45 connectors is key to preventing common mode noise from being converted to differential mode noise that corrupts communication (see Figure 4.1-3). If the balance is perfect, then the differential mode measurements will be equal on both conductors of the twisted pair and thereby cancel out imposed noise. Not all manufacturers design their connectors for optimized balance so it is important to review this critical specification when choosing a connector as well as patch cable vendor. In practice, a completely balanced system is unachievable and a level of imposed noise is observed on one of the two conductors. The CMRR (Common-Mode Rejection Ratio)

• The primary benefit of using pre-terminated solutions is that they offer consistently high and precisely known levels of performance for improved network integrity. This level of reliability is crucial in all environments, where channel insertion loss budgets are very tight and channel performance issues have an immediate and negative impact on the bottom line. The PANDUIT® QuickNet™ copper pre-terminated solution exceeds standards for 10 GB/s performance, which leaves designers extra headroom in the channel for channel upgrades and modifications. • Pre-terminated components also are 100% factory terminated and tested to deliver assured quality and consistent, reliable performance. Highly controlled, precision termination processes for copper take place in

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-5

Section 4.1: Copper Media a clean factory environment to offer a strong advantage over the variability that can result from terminating many control room links under adverse field conditions. • Quick-snap connections reduce copper link install times by 75% for a very high speed of deployment. Cassettebased copper assemblies that plug in quickly throughout the data center drastically reduce installation time and cost. When you consider the hundreds or thousands of permanent links in today’s control rooms, the time and money saved using pre-terminated solutions adds up quickly and helps designers and installers to keep on schedule (and even more importantly, on budget).

• Finally, pre-terminated solutions are engineered for high design flexibility and scalability. These modular solutions help achieve high densities per unit of rack space and promote efficient use of floor space. The modularity of pre-terminated solutions also allows the control room to quickly and easily scale up as needed, which is especially valuable in high-growth storage areas. And the speed and ease of deployment translates into a similar ease to upgrade and maintain the system, as it takes very little time to make necessary moves, ads and changes.

Building the Copper Channel Category 6

Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS

Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig™

Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS

UTP Jack Module

UTP Jack Module

Shielded Jack Module

Specifications: Category 6/C

Specifications: Category 6A,

Specifications: 8-position

lass E eight-position jack

8-position jack module shall

jack module shall terminate 4-pair 22 – 26

module shall terminate unshielded twisted

terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26

AWG 100 ohm shielded twisted pair cable

4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and

AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall not require

and shall not require the use of a punch-

shall not require the use of a punchdown

the use of a punchdown tool.

down tool.

tool.

TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded

TX6™ PLUS UTP Patch

TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch

Jack Module

Cords

Cords

Specifications: Augmented

Specifications: Category

Specifications: Category 6A

Category 6 eight-position jack

6/Class E UTP patch cords

UTP patch cords shall be

module shall terminate shielded twisted

shall be constructed of 24 AWG unshielded

constructed of 24 AWG solid copper cable

4-pair 22-26 AWG 100 ohm cable and shall

twisted pair stranded copper cable and an

with an enhanced performance modular

not require the use of a punchdown tool.

enhanced performance modular plug at

plug at each end.

each end TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded

TX6000™ UTP Copper

TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP

Patch Cords

Cable

Copper Cable

Specifications: Category 6A

Specifications: Category 6

Specifications: Category 6A

shielded patch cords shall be constructed

cable shall exceed ANSI/TIA

cable shall meet the ANSI/EIA

of shielded 26 AWG stranded copper cable

/EIA-568-B.2-1 and IEC 61156-5 Category

/TIA-568-B.2-10 and IEC 61156-5 compo-

and an enhanced performance shielded

6 component standards.

nent standards.

modular plug at each end. TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded

TX6500™ UTP Copper

DP6™ PLUS Patch Panel

Cable – U/FTP

Cable

Specifications: Category 6

Specifications: Augmented

Specifications: Category 6

Class E punchdown patch

Category 6 Shielded Copper

cable shall far exceed ANSI/

panels shall terminate

Cable shall be constructed of 4-pair twisted

TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801

unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG,

insulated 23 AWG conductors.

Class E standards. The conductors shall be

100 ohm pair cable and shall mount to stan-

23 AWG construction with FEP (CMP) or

dard EIA 19” or 23”racks. Industry standard

polyolefin (CMR) insulation.

single wire 110 punchdown tool shall be used for terminations

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-6

Section 4.1: Copper Media Building the Copper Channel (cont.) Mini-Com® TX5e Shielded

Mini-Com® TX5e™ UTP

Data-Patch™ 10/100BASE-T Patch Panel

Jack Module

Jack Module

Specifications: 10/100BASE-T patch

Specifications: Eight-position

Specifications: Category

panels shall feature RJ45 ports on the front

jack module shall terminate 4

5e/Class D eight-position jack

of the panel. Panel PC board is wired for

pair 22-26 AWG 100 ohm shielded twisted

module shall terminate unshielded twisted

10BASE-Tand 100BASE-T Ethernet utilizing

pair cable and shall not require the use of a

4-pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and

pins 1, 2 and 3, 6. The back of the patch

punchdown tool.

shall not require the use of a punchdown

consists of female telco 50-pin/25-pair con-

tool.

nectors wired per RJ21 industry standards for backward compatibility.

TX5e™ Shielded Patch Cord

TX5e™ UTP Patch Cords

QuickNet™ Copper Cabling

Specifications: Category 5e

Specifications: Category

System The PANDUIT Quick

patch cords shall be con-

5e/Class D UTP patch cords

Net™ Copper Cabling System

structed of 26 AWG shielded

shall be constructed of

provides a custom, pre-termin-

stranded copper cable and shielded high

unshielded twisted pair stranded copper

ated cabling solution which meets unique

performance modular plugs at each end.

cable and a high performance modular plug

requirements. QuickNet™ Angled and Flat

at each end.

Patch Panels accept QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes, Patch Panel Adapters, and Blacks, which snap in and out, with one hand, for quick installation.

S/FTP TX5500™ Shielded Cable – S/FTP

TX5500™ UTP Copper

Mini-Com® Ultimate ID®

Specifications

Cable

Hybrid Box

The S/FTP Shielded cable shall be con-

Specifications

Specifications: The hybrid

structed of 4-pair insulated AWG conduc-

Category 5e cable shall far

box shall be a merging point

tors. The twisted pairs shall be wrapped in

exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2

for fiber and copper installations and shall

an overall metallic foil with an overall braid

and IEC 61156-5 Category 5e component

accept all modules. The hybrid box shall

within a LSZH or PVC jacket.

standards.

offer independent access to each type of media providing easy installation and maintenance. A retention block shall include a

DP5e™ Patch Panel

built-in spool that holds a total of 12 meters

Specifications: Category 5e/

of fiber buffered cable and shall accept a

Class D punchdown patch

single gang faceplate for up to 6 modules.

panels shall terminate

A cover extension shall provide additional

unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG,

security and bend radius protection to the

100 ohm cable and shall mount to standard

connections. The hybrid box shall comply

EIA 19” or 23” racks.

with labeling standards by including a station ID pocket and a 6 port ID pocket for all base mounted modules.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-7

Section 4.1: Copper Media Rockwell Automation Ethernet Media As Ethernet becomes increasingly utilized in industrial control, survival of physical media in rugged or harsh environments is becoming a necessity. Rockwell Automation’s Cat5e Ethernet cable was designed to supply a reliable network connection in harsh surroundings. By optimizing the balance of twisted pair conductors inside a robust Thermoplastic Elastomer (TPE) jacket, data is protected from noise, chemicals and mechanical issues. The cable is available in RJ45 patchcords for IP20 applications or in four-pin D-coded M12 patchcords for IP67 applications where high vibration, fluids and other contaminants can threaten the reliability of a network. M12 D-code field attachable insulation displacement connectors (IDC) are available in both shielded and unshielded housings with male or female connectors. Male eight-pin RJ45 connectors are available in both a crimp termination and a toolless IDC connector for custom cabling.

Rockwell Automation’s M12 to RJ45 bulkhead connector provides an elegant transition for network architecture from an IP20 setting to an IP67 environment. The adaptor can be used to connect remote junction boxes or implement an On-Machine™ solution with Armor™ I/O products. Rockwell Automation’s Ethernet media portfolio provides reliable connectivity to maintain network integrity and prevent costly downtime. See Rockwell Automation’s Network Media catalog information at the following link: http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/ documents/ca/1585-ca500_-en-p.pdf

Sample Rockwell Automation Ethernet Media Part Numbers Part Number

Description

1585D-M4DC-H

Field Installable M12 Polyamide Small Body unshielded, Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)

1585-F4TBDF-2

M12 Patchcord 4-conductor, Teal TPE, Flex-rated, 2 Meter (Female to Female)

1585D-M4TBDF-1A

M12 Patchcord 4-conductor, Teal TPE, Flex-rated, 1 Meter (Female to Male)

1585A-DD4JD

Female M12 Receptacle to RJ45 Female Adapter Right Angle; Polyamide and Brass with Nickel Plating

1585J-M8TBJM-1

RJ45 Patchcord 8-conductor, teal flex-rated robotic TPE , 1 meter

1585J-M8CC-H

Field Installable Cat6 RJ45 Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)

4.1.2 Installation Copper cabling systems must be installed in accordance to the cable management requirements set forth in ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard) and in ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B (Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces). To aid compliant installation, guidelines for installing copper cabling systems are provided below.

4.1.2.1

Pathways and Spacing Management

• Pathways should be located to allow easy access to cabling for non-disruptive maintenance and upgrades. • For initial installation, the maximum fill capacity for pathways (i.e. conduit, raceways, trays, baskets) is 40 percent (see Table 4A-3). Number cables = Pathway Internal Area X 40% Cable Area

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-8

Section 4.1: Copper Media Table 4A-3. Copper Cable Areas for Pathway Fill Calculations Panduit Cable Type

Part Number

Cable Area

TX6A™ 10Gig™ Plenum

P/N PUP6A04**

0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)

TX6A™ 10Gig™ Riser

P/N PUR6A04**

0.0683 inches2 (44mm2)

TX6A™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen

P/N PUL6A04**

0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)

Category 6A / 7

TX6A™ 10Gig™ CM/PVC

P/N PUC6A04**

0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)

TX6™ 10Gig™ Plenum Shielded

P/N PSP6004**

0.0683 inches2 (44 mm2)

TX6™ 10Gig™ Riser Shielded

P/N PSR6004**

0.0744 inches2 (48 mm2)

TX6™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen Shielded

P/N PUFL6X04**

0.0610 inches2 (40 mm2)

TX7000™ Category 7 Low Smoke Zero Halogen Shielded

P/N PSL7004**

0.0707 inches2 (46 mm2)

TX6000™ Category 6 Plenum

P/N PUP6004**

0.0426 inches2 (27.5 mm2)

TX6000™ Category 6 Riser

P/N PUR6004**

0.0452 inches2 (29.2 mm2)

Category 6

TX6000™ Category 6 Low Smoke Zero Halogen

P/N PUL6004**

0.0397 inches2 (25.6 mm2)

TX6000™ Category 6 CM

P/N PUC6004**

0.0397 inches2 (25.6 mm2)

TX6000™ Category 6 Low-Smoke ZeroHalogen Shielded

P/N PFL6004**

0.0688 inches2 (45 mm2)

TX6000™ Category 6 CM Shielded

P/N PFC6004**

0.0688 inches2 (45 mm2)

Category 5e TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum

P/N PUP5504**

0.0292 inches2 (18.8 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e Riser

P/N PUR5504**

0.0397 inches2 (25.6 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero Halogen

P/N PUL5504**

0.0294 inches2 (18.9 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e CM

P/N PUC5504**

0.0277 inches2 (17.9 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum Shielded

P/N PSP5504**

0.0433 inches2 (27.9 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e Riser Shielded

P/N PSR5504**

0.0494 inches2 (31.9 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero Halogen Shielded

PFL5504**

0.0468 inches2 (30.2 mm2)

TX5500™ Category 5e CM Shielded

P/N PFC5504**

0.0468 inches2 (30.2 mm2)

(NOTE: Refer to the TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling conduit fill capacity guideline table in Appendix A-1 of this document to determine the maximum number of cables per conduit trade size.)

• The maximum fill capacity of 60 percent is allowed to accommodate future additions after initial installation. • Proper cable bend radius control must be maintained throughout the pathways. The bend radius needs to be four (4) times the cable diameter (see Table 4.1-4).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-9

Section 4.1: Copper Media Table 4.1-4. Copper Cable Bend Radius Requirements Panduit Cable Type

Part Number

Minimum Bend Radius

TX6A™ 10Gig™ Plenum

P/N PUP6A04**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX6A™ 10Gig™ Riser

P/N PUR6A04**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX6A™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen

P/N PUL6A04**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

Category 6A / 7

TX6A™ 10Gig™ CM/PVC

P/N PUC6A04**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX6™ 10Gig™ Plenum Shielded

P/N PSP6004**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX6™ 10Gig™ Riser Shielded

P/N PSR6004**

1.23 inches (31 mm)

TX6™ 10Gig™ Low Smoke Zero Halogen Shielded

P/N PUFL6X04**

1.11 inches (28 mm)

TX7000™ Category 7 Low Smoke Zero Halogen Shielded

P/N PSL7004**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX6000™ Category 6 Plenum

P/N PUP6004**

0.772 inches (19.6 mm)

TX6000™ Category 6 Riser

P/N PUR6004**

0.9 inches (22.8 mm)

Category 6

TX6000™ Category 6 Low Smoke Zero Halogen

P/N PUL6004**

0.9 inches (22.86 mm)

TX6000™ Category 6 CM

P/N PUC6004**

0.9 inches (22.86 mm)

TX6000™ Category 6 Low-Smoke ZeroHalogen Shielded

P/N PFL6004**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX6000™ Category 6 CM Shielded

P/N PFC6004**

1.18 inches (30 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum

P/N PUP5504**

0.772 inches (19.6 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e Riser

P/N PUR5504**

0.9 inches (22.8 mm)

Category 5e

TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero Halogen P/N PUL5504**

0.774 inches (19.6 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e CM

P/N PUC5504**

0.752 inches (19.1 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e Plenum Shielded

P/N PSP5504**

1.18 inches (29.5 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e Riser Shielded

P/N PSR5504**

1.23 inches (31.25 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e Low Smoke Zero Halogen Shielded

PFL5504**

0.975 inches (24.8 mm)

TX5500™ Category 5e CM Shielded

P/N PFC5504**

0.975 inches (24.8 mm)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-10

Section 4.1: Copper Media • For control room applications, it is recommended to use PANDUIT® FIBERRUNNER™ or GridRunner™ Underfloor Cable Routing Systems for cable raceway management. The fittings provide minimum 1.5-inch bend radius to protect against signal loss due to excessive cable bends. • Pathways should be designed to allow for future expansion (minimum two cables per work area, with pathways supporting three cables per work area). Therefore when designing a pathway, the pathway needs to accommodate 150% of the initial cable installation. For example, if the initial design requires 2 cables each for ten work areas, the pathway shall be designed to accommodate 30 cables. • Conduit should be run in the most direct route possible with no more than two 90 degree bends between pull boxes and serve no more than three outlet boxes. Conduit bends should be at least six times the conduit diameter. Cable trays are to be installed per manufacturing guidelines and loading capacities must be considered during cabling installation. • Cable trays used in the ceiling should allow for at least 12 inches (305 mm) of clearance above the tray. Cable trays used in the floor should allow for at least 2 inches (51 mm) of clearance between the top part of the tray and the bottom of the floor tile. • J-mod® or J-PRO® Cable Support System should be located at 5 foot intervals maximum and have at least 3 inches (76 mm) of clearance above suspended ceilings. • Please reference Panduit website for J-mod® or J-PRO® Cabling Support System fill capacity information for various sizes available.

4.1.2.2 Cable Separation Management • There are no specific limitations with sharing pathways with other category copper cables throughout the whole cable run. • Separation and physical barriers between copper and power cables must be maintained within raceways. If copper and power cables need to cross, install perpendicular to each other. Please reference the National Electric Code for local installation guidelines. • The maximum channel distance for copper cabling in the backbone and/or horizontal is 328 feet (100 meters). The total length of equipment cords, patch cords and work area cords shall not exceed 33 feet (10 meters) • The maximum permanent link distance for copper cabling in the backbone and/or horizontal is 295 feet (90 meters) 4.1.2.3 Cable Pulling & Installation Management • The maximum pulling tension is not to exceed 25 lbf. Cable installation should not in any way deform the cable jacket. • The cable should not come in contact with any water or chemicals (ex. paint, lubricants), or be exposed to any high humidity during or after installation. • Avoid any cable kinks and maintain proper bend radius control during cabling pulling. If any kinks should occur, kinked cable should be removed and replaced. • Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties, Contour-Ty® Cable Ties, Belt-Ty™ In-Line Cable Ties or Pan-Ty® Cable Ties should be applied loosely and at random intervals to cable bundles to avoid any pinching or crushing of the cable jackets. • For aesthetics and ease of bundling, the Cable Bundling and Organizing Tool (ie: P/N CBOT24K) is recommended

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-11

Section 4.1: Copper Media 4.1.2.4 Cable Management in the Telecommunications Room • Organize and manage cables for quick and easy moves, adds and changes • Use the rack vertical manager fill cable capacity table in Appendix A-2 of this document to determine the maximum number of cables per telecommunication rack. • Termination procedures at the patch panel include: • Feed cables from both sides of the panel • Maintain acceptable bend radius levels • Do not kink cables • Do not cinch cable ties so tightly as to deform the cable in any way • To enhance wire management in the back of the panel, it is recommended that a strain relief bar (ie: P/N SRBM19BLY) be mounted to the rack. The strain relief bar includes Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties for additional cable management. • Termination procedures for patch panels include: • Follow PANDUIT installation instruction sheet PN379. • Outer cable jacket should be as close as possible to point of termination • Last twist should be no further than 0.5 inches from the point of termination.

4.1.2.5 Cable Management in the Production Office Area • For surface raceway applications, the PanWay® TG Surface Raceway system is the optimal solution in the work area for routing copper cables. The TG Raceway system provides adequate space to maintain proper cable bend radius control. • Allow for at least one outlet per work area with a minimum of two cable terminations. • Pathways should be designed to allow for future expansion. For example, work areas with two cables must be served by pathways that can accommodate a minimum of three cables. • Allow for at least 12 inches (305 mm) of slack at the work area. Pull slack up into the ceiling or back into the raceway and store it there, where it can later be pulled into the box if re-termination is necessary. • Terminate PANDUIT Mini-Com® Jack Modules per the appropriate installation instruction sheet referenced below. • To improve bend radius control copper cable in junction boxes, it is recommended that PANDUIT sloped faceplates (i.e. P/N UICFPSE2**) be used in the work area. • With PANDUIT sloped faceplates, the following junction boxes can be used with copper cable (ie: P/N JBX3510**A, JB1**-A, JBP1**-A, JBP1I**-A, JB1FS**-A, JBP2**-A, JB1D**-A, JBP1D**-A, JBP2D**-A). • With PANDUIT flush faceplates, the following junction boxes can be used copper cable (ie: P/N JB1D**-A, JBP1D**-A, JBP2D**-A).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-12

Section 4.1: Copper Media 4.1.2.6 Copper Jack Installation • Enhanced GIGA-TX TM Technology • Enhanced wire-cap that places all four pairs into quadrants • Forward motion termination, no punch-down tool required • Fast, easy, consistent performance UTP and STP same process, only difference in cable prep.

5. Push wire cap into jack

6. Snap jack onto wirecap with EGJT tool.

1. Verify parts: Jack and WireCap 4.1.2.7 Installation Reference Documents • DP6TM 10GigTM, DP6™ PLUS, and DP5eTM Patch Panel installation instruction sheet PN379. 2. Feed pairs into quadrants of wire cap

• Mini-Com® TX6ATM 10GigTM UTP Jack Modules installation instruction sheet PN511. • Mini-Com® TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Modules installation instruction sheet PN366. • Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS and TX5e™ UTP Jack Modules installation instruction sheet PN403. • Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS and TX5e™ Shielded Jack Modules installation instruction sheet PN399.

3. Pull pairs through to seat wire cap on insulation

4.1.3

Testing

Copper cabling transmission performance depends on cable characteristics, connecting hardware, patch cords and crossconnect wiring, the total number of connections, and the care with which they are installed and maintained. 4. Trim excess wire with CWST tool

The following channel test configuration should be used by system designers and users of data communications systems to verify the performance of the overall copper channel (see Figure 4.1-4). Channel performance is the most critical to the end user, as this is how their network will perform. The channel includes up to 90 m (295 ft) of horizontal cable, a work area equipment cord, a telecommunications outlet/ connector, an optional transition/consolidation connector, and two connections in the telecommunications room.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-13

Section 4.1: Copper Media

Figure 4.1-4. Schematic representation of copper cabling channel (in accordance with TIA/EIA-568B.2-1).

TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 recommends and ISO 11801 requires that the consolidation point be located at least 5 m (16.4 ft) from the telecommunications room to reduce the effect of multiple connections in close proximity on NEXT loss and return loss. Per the TIA standard, the total length of equipment cords, patch cords or jumpers and work area cords shall not be more than 10 m (32.8 ft). If total patch cords are longer than 10 meters, the entire channel length must be de-rated by the length exceeding 10 meters depending either by 20% or 50% depending on the patch cord cable type used. The connections to the equipment at each end of the channel are not included in the channel definition. The channel definition does not apply to those cases where the horizontal cabling is cross-connected to the backbone cabling. Panduit has evaluated the Fluke DTX-1800 Series Digital Cable Analyzer and approves the use of this tester for the certification of installed 10 Gb/s cabling channels. In order to verify that the installed cabling will meet or exceed the performance requirements of the designated classification defined in the IEEE 802.3an Standard, it is important that the following steps are followed. 4.1.3.1 Channel Testing

2. Perform a Set Reference procedure in the special functions prior to testing. Fluke Networks recommends that a Set Reference procedure be performed every 30 days to ensure the maximum accuracy of the test results. For detailed instructions on Set Reference procedure, refer to Fluke Network’s DTX-1800 Series Users Manual page 20, on “Setting the Reference for Twisted Pair Cabling”. The link for the User’s Manual is: http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/techdocs/Manuals. htm?pid=50004 Note: Fluke Networks also recommends factory calibration once a year to ensure that the test tool meets or exceeds the published accuracy specifications. 3. Select the Fluke Channel Adapter (# DTX-CHA001A (AxTalk)) and attach them to the DTX-1800 Series Main and Remote unit.

1. Verify that your DTX-1800 Series tester has the most upto-date software (software version 2.12 or better is required). The latest software updates can be found on the Fluke website at: http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/supportAndDownloads/downloadsAndUpdates/?pid=50004

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-14

Section 4.1: Copper Media 4. Select from the following Fluke Autotests: • 10GBASE-T • TIA Category 6A Ch • TIA Category 6A PL • ISO ClassEA Ch AMD1 • ISO ClassEA PL 25N1513 • TIA Category 6 Channel • ISO Channel Class E • TIA Category 5e Channel • ISO Class D Channel 5. For channel testing, install all patch cords prior to testing. Note: Panduit recommends for installers to install and test a few channels before completing the entire system. 6. Begin testing your installed channels with the Fluke DTX1800 Series Digital Cable Analyzer and save all test results. 7. Troubleshoot and repair any failing channels. Channels resulting in a PASS* are considered a PASS and will be acceptable for warranty. Note: The Fluke HDTDX analyzer and HDTDR test are very helpful when troubleshooting failing channels. Both can be found on the SINGLE TEST menu and will also run automatically when a failure occurs. 8. Submit electronic channel test reports to the Panduit Warranty Department with all required warranty paperwork. A channel warranty will then be given based on passing test results. Note: Panduit recommends for installers to install and test a few channels before completing the entire system.

4.1.3.2 Alien Crosstalk Testing (Optional) For testing Alien crosstalk the Alien crosstalk “DTX-10GKIT” for the Fluke DTX1800 is required.

The alien test kit contains the following items: • DTX-PLA002 Permanent Link adapters • AxTALK Analyzer Software- (software version 3.0 or newer is required). The latest software updates can be found on the Fluke website at: http://www.flukenetworks.com/fnet/en-us/supportAndDownloads/downloadsAndUpdates/?pid=50004 • • • •

DTX-ATERM Link Terminators (2) RJ45 to RJ45 Couplers (2) for channel testing DTX- CHA001A channel test heads DTX-AXTK1 (2) Alien Crosstalk Modules

Items needed in addition to the kit: • Patch cords (2) • Laptop computer Process description: 1. Determine bundles and cables to test: For 10GBASE-T (Category 6 TSB-155): • To certify a complete installation, choose 1% or 5 links whichever is greater. Start with the victim links as the longest since the highest insertion loss links are of the highest risk of failing • Include links that are terminated in neighboring positions in the patch panel if not in the bundle • Typically a 10 meter shorter link will achieve 1.5 or 2 dB improved margin • Include all of the links in the bundle as disturber links

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-15

Section 4.1: Copper Media If links are in the same bundle and are the same length: • For victims, choose 10% of the links in each bundle and round partial links down to the nearest link. For example, for a bundle of 12, test 1 link. • Next move down to the next longest bundle. As the lengths get shorter the results improve. Once 3 bundles of worst case margin 5 dB or better is achieved testing is finished.

7. When finished select end 2 and repeat. 8. When finished, select PSAACR-F. Repeat as for PSANEXT but now the main and remote units will be on opposite ends as shown below. If the patch cord is not long enough, use 2 patch cords and a separate link as the synchronization link. 9. When finished, select end 2 and repeat.

For Category 6A: • Select the longest and shortest links • Apply rules for 10GBASE-T 2. For alien testing, Fluke recommends performing a Set Reference at least once a day. 3. Perform permanent link internal testing to the appropriate standard and save all internals of the bundle under test to a separate folder. All links must pass internals. 4. Open the AxTalk Analyzer application and click on the new icon to start a new victim file. Browse for the folder containing the bundle internal tests. Select the file to be used as the victim link. By saving, the application will automatically title as the victim file as titled from the internal file selected.

Pass/fail determination: • For 10GBASE-T (Category 6 TSB-155) the overall pass or fail is determined from Alien Cross talk Margin Computation (ACMC) in the results detail. As long as the ACMC average is positive, the overall status is a pass.

5. Select the appropriate standard from the test limit menu. 6. Select end 1 and PSANEXT from the radio buttons. Run test and follow the directions. Connect the main and remote as shown below. The Main will always be the victim and the Remote the disturber. For PSANEXT both units are on the same end and the opposite end will have terminated plugs. Run a separate disturber test for each non-victim link of the bundle for end 1, while making the appropriate connection changes. This involves moving the remote and termination plug to the next disturber.

• For Category 6A, ACMC does not exist, and any single failure of any pair will result in an overall fail. For additional information, see Alien Crosstalk User Manual located under the help tab in the AxTalk Analyzer application.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-16

Section 4.1: Copper Media 4.1.3.3 Standards Limits TIA Category 6A Channel Freq. (MHz)

Insertion Loss (db)

NEXT (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

ACR-F (dB)

PS ACR-F (dB)

1

3

65.0

62.0

19.0

63.3

60.3

4

4.2

63.0

60.5

19.0

51.2

48.2

8

5.8

58.2

55.6

19.0

45.2

42.2

10

6.5

56.6

54.0

19.0

43.3

40.3

16

8.2

53.2

50.6

18.0

39.2

36.2

20

9.2

51.6

49.0

17.5

37.2

34.2

25

10.2

50.0

47.3

17.0

35.3

32.3

31.25

11.5

48.4

45.7

16.5

33.4

30.4

62.5

16.4

43.4

40.6

14.0

27.3

24.3

100

20.9

39.9

37.1

12.0

23.3

20.3

200

30.1

34.8

31.9

9.0

17.2

14.2

250

33.9

33.1

30.2

8.0

15.3

12.3

350

40.6

30.3

27.3

6.6

12.4

9.4

500

49.3

26.1

23.2

6.0

9.3

6.3

ACR-N (dB)

PSACR-N (dB)

ISO Class EA Ch AMD1 Freq. (MHz)

Insertion Loss (db)

NEXT (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

ACR-F (dB)

PS ACR-F (dB)

ACR-N (dB)

PSACR-N (dB)

1

4

65.0

62.0

19.0

63.3

60.3

61.0

58.0

4

4.2

63.0

60.5

19.0

51.2

48.2

58.9

56.4

8

5.8

58.2

55.6

19.0

45.2

42.2

52.4

49.8

10

6.5

56.6

54.0

19.0

43.3

40.3

50.1

47.5

16

8.2

53.2

50.6

18.0

39.2

36.2

45.0

42.4

20

9.2

51.6

49.0

17.5

37.2

34.2

42.5

39.8

25

10.2

50.0

47.3

17.0

35.3

32.3

39.8

37.1

31.25

11.5

48.4

45.7

16.5

33.4

30.4

36.9

34.2

62.5

16.4

43.4

40.6

14.0

27.3

24.3

28.0

24.2

100

20.9

39.9

37.1

12.0

23.3

20.3

19.0

16.2

200

30.1

34.8

31.9

9.0

17.2

14.2

4.7

1.8

250

33.9

33.1

30.2

8.0

15.3

12.3

-0.8

-3.7

350

40.6

30.6

27.6

6.6

12.4

9.4

-10.0

-13.0

500

49.3

27.9

24.8

6.0

9.3

6.3

-21.4

-24.5

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-17

Section 4.1: Copper Media TIA Category 6 Channel Freq. (MHz)

Insertion Loss (db)

NEXT (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

ACR-F (dB)

PS ACR-F (dB)

ACR-N (dB)

PSACR-N (dB)

1

3

65.0

62.0

19.0

63.3

60.3

62.0

59.0

4

4.0

63.0

60.5

19.0

51.2

48.2

59.0

56.5

8

5.7

58.2

55.6

19.0

45.2

42.2

52.5

49.9

10

6.3

56.6

54.0

19.0

43.3

40.3

50.2

47.7

16

8.0

53.2

50.6

18.0

39.2

36.2

45.2

42.6

20

9.0

51.6

49.0

17.5

37.2

34.2

42.6

39.9

25

10.1

50.0

47.3

17.0

35.3

32.3

39.9

37.2

31.25

11.4

48.4

45.7

16.5

33.4

30.4

37.0

34.3

62.5

16.5

43.4

40.6

14.0

27.3

24.3

26.9

24.1

100

21.3

39.9

37.1

12.0

23.3

20.3

18.6

15.8

200

31.5

34.8

31.9

9.0

17.2

14.2

3.3

0.3

250

35.9

33.1

30.2

8.0

15.3

12.3

-2.8

-5.8

ISO 11801 Channel Class E Freq. (MHz)

Insertion Loss (db)

NEXT (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

ACR-F (dB)

PS ACR-F (dB)

ACR-N (dB)

PSACR-N (dB)

1

4

65.5

62.0

19.0

63.3

60.3

61.0

58.0

4

4.2

63.0

60.5

19.0

51.2

48.2

58.9

56.4

8

5.9

58.2

55.6

19.0

45.2

42.2

52.3

49.7

10

6.6

56.6

54.0

19.0

43.3

40.3

50.0

47.4

16

8.3

53.2

50.6

18.0

39.2

36.2

44.9

42.3

20

9.3

51.6

49.0

17.5

37.2

34.2

42.3

39.7

25

10.5

50.0

47.3

17.0

35.3

32.3

39.6

36.9

31.25

11.7

48.4

45.7

16.5

33.4

30.4

36.7

34.0

62.5

16.9

43.4

40.6

14.0

27.3

24.3

26.5

23.7

100

21.7

39.9

37.1

12.0

23.3

20.3

18.2

15.4

200

31.7

34.8

31.9

9.0

17.2

14.2

3.1

0.1

250

35.9

33.1

30.2

8.0

15.3

12.3

-2.8

-5.8

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-18

Section 4.1: Copper Media TIA Category 5e Channel Freq. (MHz)

Insertion Loss (db)

NEXT (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

ACR-F (dB)

PS ACR-F (dB)

ACR-N (dB)

PSACR-N (dB)

1

3

60.0

57.0

17.0

57.4

54.4

57.0

54.0

4

4.5

53.5

50.5

17.0

45.5

42.4

49.1

46.1

8

6.3

48.6

45.6

17.0

39.3

36.3

42.3

39.3

10

7.1

47.0

44.0

17.0

37.4

34.4

39.9

36.9

16

9.1

43.6

40.6

17.0

33.3

30.3

34.5

31.5

20

10.2

42.0

39.0

17.0

31.4

28.4

31.8

28.8

25

11.4

40.3

37.3

16.0

29.4

26.4

28.9

25.9

31.25

12.9

38.7

35.7

15.1

27.5

24.5

25.9

22.9

62.5

18.6

33.6

30.6

12.1

21.5

18.5

15.0

12.0

100

24.0

30.1

27.1

10.0

17.4

14.4

6.1

3.1

Insertion Loss (db)

NEXT (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

ACR-F (dB)

PS ACR-F (dB)

ACR-N (dB)

PSACR-N (dB)

1

4

60.0

57.0

17.0

57.4

54.4

56.0

53.0

4

4.5

53.5

50.0

17.0

45.4

42.4

49.0

46.0

8

6.4

48.6

45.6

17.0

39.3

36.3

42.2

39.2

10

7.2

47.0

44.0

17.0

37.4

34.4

39.8

36.8

16

9.1

43.6

40.6

17.0

33.3

30.3

34.5

31.5

20

10.2

42.0

39.0

17.0

31.4

28.4

31.8

28.8

25

11.5

40.3

37.3

16.0

29.4

26.4

28.9

25.9

31.25

12.9

38.7

35.7

15.1

27.5

24.5

25.8

22.8

62.5

18.6

33.6

30.6

12.0

21.5

18.5

15.0

12.0

100

24.0

30.1

27.1

10.0

17.4

14.4

6.1

3.1

ISO 11801 Channel Class D Freq. (MHz)

4.1.4

Documenting

The following Permanent Link data should be documented as a result of copper testing: • Date of link testing • Names of personnel conducting the test. • Test Equipment details (manufacturer, model, and serial number) • Test direction and end point locations Using Fluke DTX 1800 field tester, the following should be set before testing: • Date and time • Operator, Site, Company • Store Plot Data

• Extended • HDTDX/HDTDR * Pass /Fail only (minimum) • All AUTOTESTS (better) • Test limit i.e. TIA, EN, ISO standards • Cable type • UTP, FTP, SSTP, or using Manufacturer • NVP • Outlet configuration • T568A or T568B

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-19

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2

Fiber Optic Media

4.2.1

Selection

When choosing Ethernet fiber optic cabling solutions, the following criteria should be taken into consideration prior to installation to ensure system performance, reliability, and scalability. 4.2.1.1 Media Type Two different types of fiber are available: single mode and multimode. Single mode. Singlemode fiber cable (commonly referred to as OS1 or OS2 cable) is a 125μm diameter fiber with a 9μm core that is capable of carrying very high data rates over very long lengths. The outer jacketing is colored yellow to distinguish it from other fiber cable types. OS1/OS2 fibers should meet or exceed numerous standards for optical fiber, including ITU-TG.652 (Categories A, B, C and D), IEC 60793-2-50, ISO 11801 OS2, and TIA-492-CAAB and Telecordia GR-20. Such fibers ensure performance over the entire 1260-1625nm spectrum and are compatible with legacy fiber and the geometric properties contributing to minimizing splice loss and increasing splice yield. Multimode. Multimode cable is a 125μm diameter fiber with either a 62.5μm or 50μm core that is capable of carrying a high data rate over very short lengths when compared to the singlemode cable. Multimode cable is categorized in six different categories: OM1, OM2, OM2+, OM3, and OM3+. OM1 cable has a core diameter of 62.5μm while the other cables (OM2 through OM4) have core diameters of 50μm. Each of these cable types are manufactured differently to allow for better performance. There is the standard multimode cable

which has the outer jacketing colored orange and a 10Gig Optimized cable which has the outer jacketing colored aqua. The standard multimode cable is designed to be used with LED (laser emitting diode) technology where the optimized multimode fiber is designed to be used with VCSEL (Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser) or laser type technologies. • The types of multimode fiber used in today’s networks include: • 62.5/125-μm (OM1) fiber, designed to achieve 10Base and 100Base data rates, and now largely a legacy fiber; • 50/125-μm (OM2) fiber, used to achieve 1-Gbit/sec data rates and higher; and • 50/125-μm (OM2+, OM3, and OM3+) fiber, used to achieve 10-Gbit/sec data rates and higher. OM2+ and OM3+ fiber grades offer nearly double the bandwidth of their parent fibers (“+” represents extended-reach OM2 and OM3 fiber). 4.2.1.2 Bandwidth and Reach Most fiber choices are based on an application-specific consideration of bandwidth and reach (see Table 4.2-1). • Bandwidth is the information-carrying capacity of the fiber. High-bandwidth fiber media allows longer-length channels, higher loss-budget margin, and greater design flexibility. • Reach (length) is a site-specific physical parameter that can be used to immediately narrow your fiber options. In general, as the data rate goes up, the reach goes down. Once reach is established, you can narrow your fiber options by identifying your users’ current and/or future bandwidth needs. The preferred Physical Medium Dependent (PMD), or transceiver, for 10-Gbit/sec fiber cabling systems is the shortwavelength (850-nm) VCSEL (vertical-cavity surface-emitting laser)-based serial modular transceiver. These low-cost electronics have captured the LAN market, are optimized and standardized for use with OM3 fiber up to 300 m, and are also compatible with OM2 fiber grades. Fiber media for these devices are optimized for the 850-nm wavelength window, but maintain a minimum bandwidth of 500 MHz·km for the 1310-nm window. The most economical 10-Gbit/sec network channels are those that deploy 50/125-μm fiber with serial transceiver electronics. The IEEE 802.3ae 10GBase-S standard speci-

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-20

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media fies that only OM3 laser-optimized fiber can support 10-Gbit/ sec up to 300 meters (m). The standard recognizes that other multimode cabling systems may support that rate over varying distances. For this reason, and as data center managers look toward “future-proofing” their cabling solutions, OM3 has become the 50-μm fiber of choice for 10-Gbit/sec premises and data center applications. The typical life of the physical infrastructure can reach 10-15 years, and with regular maintenance the facilities infrastructure and structured cabling are both expected to support multiple generations of IT equipment. It also is generally predicted that most (if not all) links in the data center will need to carry 10 Gb/s in the near future with certain critical “core” links supporting even faster data rates. For these reasons, a 10-Gigabit ready cabling infrastructure is recommended, with data center speed and reach requirements favoring the deployment of OM3 fiber optic links. Table 4.2-1. Multimode Fiber Types and Reach / Bandwidth Characteristics

4.2.1.3 Pre-Terminated Solutions Pre-terminated cabling solutions are ideally suited for quick deployment in dense control room areas. The pre-tested modular construction of these cable assemblies offer several key advantages over using multi-connector cables that require time-consuming punchdown and testing:

mance issues have an immediate and negative impact on the bottom line. The PANDUIT® QuickNet™ fiber pre-terminated solution exceeds standards for 10 GB/s performance, which leaves designers extra headroom in the channel for channel upgrades and modifications. • Pre-terminated components also are 100% factory terminated and tested to deliver assured quality and consistent, reliable performance. Highly controlled, precision termination processes for fiber take place in a clean factory environment to offer a strong advantage over the variability that can result from terminating many data center links under adverse field conditions. • Quick-snap connections reduce fiber link install times for a very high speed of deployment. Cassette-based fiber assemblies that plug in quickly throughout the data center drastically reduce installation time and cost. When you consider the hundreds or thousands of permanent links in today’s control rooms, the time and money saved using pre-terminated solutions adds up quickly and helps designers and installers to keep on schedule (and even more importantly, on budget). • Finally, pre-terminated solutions are engineered for high design flexibility and scalability. These modular solutions help achieve high densities per unit of rack space and promote efficient use of floor space. The modularity of pre-terminated solutions also allows the control room to quickly and easily scale up as needed, which is especially valuable in highgrowth storage areas. And the speed and ease of deployment translates into a similar ease to upgrade and maintain the system, as it takes very little time to make necessary moves, ads and changes.

• The primary benefit of using pre-terminated solutions is that they offer consistently high and precisely known levels of performance for improved network integrity. This level of reliability is crucial in all environments, where channel insertion loss budgets are very tight and channel perfor©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-21

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.1.4 Harsh Environments Optical fibers are housed in jackets of many different kinds, for deployment under a variety of environmental conditions. The three most common cable types are non-armored, armored, and IP-rated. • Non-armored is a standard cable that runs in cabling basket or cable ladder internal to a control, protected environment. This cabling type also can be installed in a duct system or pipe system depending on the environment.

4.2.1.5 Hybrid Patch Cords (SC-to-LC, etc.) New technologies have brought LC (small form factor type) connectors into the industry. Although they are becoming predominant, there are still many older legacy systems that still utilize SC, FC or ST type connectors that need to transition to this newer form factor. There are many different offerings of hybrid type patch cords that will enable this transition very easily.

• Armored cabling has a protected aluminum or metal housing around the fiber cable that protects the cabling from crushing or animal intrusion if it is buried underground. • IP-rated cabling is rated for high-temperatures, is chemically resistant, and can be used in harsh environments. Of these options, non-armored fiber optic cabling is the most cost-effective choice, as it can withstand temperatures between -40° to 167°F (-40° to 75°C) and therefore can be deployed in a majority of cases.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-22

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media Building the Fiber Optic Channel Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor Cable Specifications 10 GbE fiber optic, Standard singlemode and multimode indoor cable are available. Larger distribution cable features a 6-fiber sub-unit design that simplifies fiber identification, provides easy access and routing of the fibers, and increases cable durability with a dielectric central strength member.

OptiCam® Pre-Polished Cam Fiber Optic Termination Kits Features • Virtually eliminates operator error by providing visual indication of proper termination after the cam step has been completed • No adhesive or electricity required for termination • Include installation instructions and stripping templates for all PANDUIT® OptiCam® Pre-Polished Connectors

Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor Cable Specifications This LSZH rated cable provides water-blocking, high density, and easy installation in duct applications and entrance facilities. Fiber optic indoor/outdoor cable meets the IEC 60794-1 standards. 10 GbE fiber optic indoor/outdoor cable as well as multimode and singlemode indoor/outdoor cables are available.

LC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors – Pre-Polished Cam Termination Specifications LC small form factor (SFF) pre-polished connectors with rear pivot latch shall be TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible and contain a factory-terminated fiber, eliminating field polishing and adhesive. LC pre-polished connectors shall have an average insertion loss of 0.3dB per mated pair for multimode fiber. LC pre-polished connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one action allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degradation in performance.

Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor Interlocking Armored Cable Specifications Interlocking aluminum armor eliminates the need for inner duct or conduit to provide a smaller crush resistant pathway. Available in 6- 144 fiber counts. Multimode (OM3, OM2, and OM1) and singlemode (OS1/OS2) fiber available optimized) fiber available. Opti-Core® 10Gig™ OM3 Cable is designed to support network transmission speeds up to 10 Gb/s for link lengths up to 300 meters with an 850nm source per IEEE 802.3ae 10 GbE standard; backward compatible for use with all 50/125μm system requirements

SC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors – Pre-Polished Cam Termination Specifications SC pre-polished fiber optic connectors shall be TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant and contain a factory-terminated fiber, eliminating field polishing and adhesive. SC pre-polished connectors shall have an average insertion loss of 0.3dB per mated pair for multimode and singlemode fiber. SC prepolished connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one action allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degradation in performance.

Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/ Outdoor Interlocking Armored Cable Specifications Interlocking aluminum armor eliminates the need for inner duct or conduit to provide a smaller crush resistant pathway for improved design flexibility and lower installed cost. OPTI-CORE ® 10GIG™ Fiber Optic Indoor Interlocking Armored Cable features the highest quality OM3 laser optimized fiber to support 10Gb/s applications while maintaining compatibility with existing 50μm multimode systems. RoHS compliant singlemode and multimode cable is available in fiber counts from 6 to 48 fibers.

Armored Cable Grounding Kit Specifications Crimped jumper wire assembly; 24” (609.6mm) length; LCC6-14, #10 mechanical clamp; provided with two each #12-24, M6 slotted hex head zinc-plated thread-forming screws, and black polypropylene terminal cover.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-23

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media Building the Fiber Optic Channel 10Gig® 50/125um (OM3) Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications Patchcords shall include LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. Pigtails shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (unterminated) on the other end.

Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs) Specifications Fiber adapter panels are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS Snap quickly into the front of all components. Phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications.

Multimode 62.5/125um (OM1) or 50/125 (OM2) Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications Patch cords shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. Pigtails shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (unterminated) on the other end.

Opticom® Rack Mounted Fiber Enclosures Specifications Rack mounted fiber enclosures house, organize, manage and protect fiber optic cable, terminations, splices, connectors and patch cords. The enclosures accommodate fiber adapter panels (FAP) and fiber mount panels (FMP) plus associated trunk cables, connectors and patch cords.

Singlemode 9/125um (OS1/OS2) Fiber Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications Specifications Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels mount to RoHS compliant fiber optic patch cords shall any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack and accept all Mini-Com® include simplex or duplex LC or keyed LC, Adapter Modules and Jack Modules including LC, SC, and SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or MTP* fiber adapter modules. Modular patch panels are jacks on both ends. RoHS compliant fiber optic pigtails shall available in a variety of sizes and styles in both flat and include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, angled patch panel versions. Individual adapter module or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (unter- identification is provided via pre-numbered ports and proviminated) on the other end. sions for field generated port ID labels. LC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Adapter SC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Adapter Modules Modules Specifications Specifications LC Sr./Sr. and Sr./Jr. small form factor (SFF) SC fiber optic adapter modules are fiber optic adapter modules are TIA/EIA-604 TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible. They shall be compatFOCIS-10 compatible. LC adapters and adapter modules shall ible with Mini-Com® products for complete modularity. They include phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applicashall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves tions or zirconia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applicato fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split tions. They shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic sleeves are required for singlemode applications. split sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications. Opticom® Fiber Adapter Patch Panels Specifications Fiber adapter patch panels mount to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack. Standard version holds QuickNet™ MTP* Cassettes and Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Angled version holds Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels and matches Mini-Com® Angled Patch Panel profile. Used with Opticom® Fiber Mount Tray (FMT) to protect fibers and terminations. ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-24

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.2

Building the Fiber Optic Cable Channel with Stratix Switches

Fiber-based media for Stratix switch systems offer advantages in distance and noise immunity over copper-based systems. The selection of both SFP module and fiber media must be made together for an optimized solution that delivers on the distance, environmental and performance requirements for the application, also keeping an eye on future needs. Stratix SFP modules are available in four models that support multimode (shorter reach) and singlemode fibers (longer reach) at both 100Mb (100BASE) and 1Gb (1000BASE) communication rates. PANDUIT provides fiber solutions that achieve high performance at the maximum rates and channel distances supported by these modules in a range of environmental hardening for indoor and outdoor use. The diagram below shows elements of a basic fiber optic channel from Stratix switch to the control room. This section of the Guide provides an overview of fiber media cabling and patch cord options available for building a fiber optic channel. PANDUIT offers an extensive range of solutions to accommodate both new installations, where the channel components can be fully specified to a standard, as well as retrofits where patching must be done from other standard connec-

tors (FC, ST, SC, etc). PANDUIT solutions include pre-polished, pre-tested LC solutions that can be field installed without adhesives or heat, and pre-tested “hybrid” patch cords that can transition from legacy connections to the LC connector required for the Stratix switch. PANDUIT solutions also can be utilized to easily transition between connector types when upgrading switches or cable infrastructures. For example, an existing cabling infrastructure with ST connections can remain in place when upgrading to the new Stratix (LC connector) switch. An ST-to-ST adapter can be mounted in a surface mount box or bracket to accept the existing ST cabling. Then, an ST-to-LC hybrid patch cord can then be used to connect the new Stratix switch to the existing cabling infrastructure. In this way, network stakeholders can avoid costly replacement of horizontal cabling and minimize or eliminate network disruption due to the switch upgrade. This section includes selection guide and examples for fiber channels that include adapting legacy cable to the LC connectors on the Stratix switch. PANDUIT solutions include the related products that provide secure mounting, slack fiber management, critical bend radius control, and identification. Keyed connector solutions allow segregation of redundant or multiple rings or infrastructure levels or to lock in critical links or block out open ports.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-25

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.2.1 SELECTING STRATIX SFP MODULES AND SPECIFYING FIBER MEDIA The following table correlates available Stratix SFP switch modules to fiber media options for horizontal cabling, with PANDUIT part numbers listed in right-hand columns. It is generally predicted that most (if not all) cabling links in the data center will need to carry 10 Gb/s in the near future. For the factory floor or control room physical infrastructure, specifying 10 Gig 50 μm fiber optic links will cost effectively connect with the current 1000Base-SX SFP of the Stratix but also be ready for higher rates as 10 Gb/s communication is extended to the factory floor.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-26

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.2.2 Specifying Fiber Patch Cables for Stratix Cables for Stratix SFP Modules The Stratix SFP modules use LC connectors, which are acknowledged as offering superior performance compared to other fiber connectors. However, for retrofit applications, there is often a need to transition from LC connectors to other connector types. PANDUIT offers a wide range of “hybrid” patch cords that allow for patching from legacy cabling to the Stratix SFP modules.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-27

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.3

Adapters for Legacy Fiber

The following adapter parts are used to connect legacy fiber cable to LC patch cables that mate with the Stratix switch line.

4.2.4 End-to-End Channel Building Multimode Fiber Solutions for Stratix 1783-SFP100FfX or 1783-SFP1GSX

The diagram above shows a fiber link for Stratix modules 1783-SFP100FfX or 1783-SFP1GSX. • In the control panel, the Stratix switch will connect to the surface mount box with a multimode SC to ST patch cord. The multimode horizontal cabling (preterminated SC to pigtail solution shown) can be terminated in the control panel utilizing either field polish connectors, OptiCam™ pre-polished connectors, or a pre-terminated pigtail solution if fiber splicing is an option (ST OptiCam™ connector option is shown).

• In the control room a rack mount enclosure will house a SC fiber adapter panel which will be utilized to connect the horizontal cabling to the switch via an SC to SC patch cord.

(continued on next page) ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-28

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media Part ordering for fiber link constructed for the 1783-SFP100FfX or 1783-SFP1GSX includes:

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-29

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.4.1 End-to-End Channel Building Singlemode Fiber Solutions for Stratix 1783-SFP100LX or 1783-SFP1GLX

The diagram above shows a fiber link for Stratix modules 1783-SFP100LX or 1783-SFP1GLX. In the control panel, the Stratix switch will connect to the surface mount box with singlemode LC to LC Keyed patch cords (LC Lock-In and keyed solution shown as a security feature). The singlemode horizontal cabling (armored cabling shown with grounding kit) can be terminated in the control panel and control room utilizing field polish connectors, OptiCam™ connectors or a pre-terminated pigtail solution if fiber splicing is an option (keyed OptiCam™ connector option is shown).

In the control room a rack mount enclosure will house a keyed LC fiber adapter panel which will be utilized to connect the horizontal cabling to the switch via a Keyed LC to LC patch cord.

Ordering information for the option shown:

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-30

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.4.2 End-to-End Channel Building Singlemode Fiber Solutions for Stratix 8000 8-Port Fiber Expansion Unit Using 100FX LC-Style Connectors on Stratix 1783-SFP100LX or 1783-SFP1GLX The Stratix 8000 can accommodate a maximum of one expansion unit with integrated 100FX LC-style fiber optic connectors. The following diagram shows the fiber optic elements utilized under this scenario to complete a fiber optic channel from the Control Room to factory equipment. This channel runs from a switch in the Control Room to a Stratix switch and expansion module located in a Control Panel, and then to equipment on the factory floor.

4.2.5

Installation

Both outside plant and in-building communications cable are often placed in conduit or duct. This is dependent upon the construction of the fiber cable. If it has an armoring manufactured into the cable, then the cable can usually be placed without additional protection with the exception of areas with the cable would be exposed to extreme conditions such as heat, heavy construction traffic, etc. 4.2.5.1 Cable Pulling The most common method of installing cable is called cable pulling. If the cable is placed in conduit, a line is threaded through the conduit which will act as a pull device. Once pulled through the entire run the line is attached to the cable.

The line is used to drag the cable back through the conduit. If the cable is not installed in a conduit, the cable is placed along the designed cable route and secured with manufacturer recommended cable ties or cable clamps, dependent upon the cable route. During installation, the cable is under tension. For this reason, manufacturers provide cable tension information with their cables so damage will not incur during install. One way to minimize cable tension is to install pull boxes. Pull boxes should be located so that cables are not pulled through a continuous run with bends that exceed 180º (for example: two 90° bends, four 45° bends, or one 90° bend and two 45° bends). In addition to this, cable pulling lubricants can be applied to the cable as it is being pulled through the run to reduce friction and ease pulling tensions. Cable bend radius is another important parameter involved in cable installation. . This is the maximum bend that can be introduced into a fiber cable before the transmit signal within the cable begins to refract or escape through the fiber cladding. Excessive bending will lead to micro fractures in the cable resulting in a higher overall cable attenuation and possible irreversible damage. Table 4B-2 summarizes the bend radii for Panduit non-armored distribution cable. The bend radius of the Interlocking armored cable has been specified within the cable specifications sheets in Appendix B. Fiber cable is shipped on a spool. Un-spooling of the fiber cable during installation also assists in relieving cable tensions by relieving the curving introduced in the cable created by the cable spooling process. Figure 4.2-1 shows how the cable reel would be placed on jack stands and un-spooled in a figure eight configuration.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-31

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media Fiber cable is shipped on a spool. Un-spooling of the fiber cable during installation also assists in relieving cable tensions by relieving the curving introduced in the cable created by the cable spooling process. Figure 4.2-1 shows how the cable reel would be placed on jack stands and un-spooled in a figure eight configuration. After the fiber is un-spooled, the whole figure eight can be flipped (or rolled) to allow easy cable pulling from the figure eight. If space does not allow for this installation procedure, the fiber can be installed right off the reel, but it will not have the opportunity to relax from the spooling process and some twisting of the fiber may occur, causing higher attenuation values. Table 4.2-2. Bend Radius of Panduit Non-Armored Distribution Fiber Cable

Figure 4.2-1. Fiber Cable Un-spooling For Installation.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-32

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.5.2 Terminating OPTICAM® Fiber Optic Connectors Pre-Polished Cam Termination • Provide field termination in less than half the time of field polish connectors • Patent pending re-termination capability provides yield rates approaching 100% • A single OPTICAM® Termination Tool (OCTT) provides fast and easy terminations • User-friendly tool utilizes an integrated visual fault locator (VFL) for visual indication of proper termination after the cam step has been completed • System virtually eliminates operator error and delivers yield rates approaching 100% for lower installed costs

Prepare OptiCAM termination tool.

Verify Opticam connector

OPTICAM® Termination LC Connector Mounting Hold the connector body with the latch facing up and slide the connector body into the LC Cradle. The connector is inserted fully when the backbone threads rest completely on the cradle flange as shown.

SC Connector Mounting Remove both dust caps from the connector inner housing assembly; then place the inner housing assembly into the OCTT cradle as shownat right:

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-33

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 4.2.6

Testing

1. Setting a Reference Value There are two methods for setting a reference value presented below. Precaution: Make sure that the tester is fully charged and within current calibration date before testing. Note: In the event the tester has been stored in a cold environment, make no attempt to test or set reference values until the tester comes up to an ambient temperature – this will eliminate fluctuations in accuracy. It is important to clean all connector enfaces (reference jumpers and Link Under Test (LUT) connectors) with alcohol and lint-free wipes prior to testing. Ensure that the reference leads are in good condition and meet specifications in section 12.0 Test Lead Performance Verification before testing. Note that mandrels are not required for links with OS1 (Singlemode) fiber. Reference Setting – Method A Connect one reference lead to tester terminal labeled Output (A) and the other reference lead to the tester terminal labeled Input (B). Mate the other ends of the reference leads together in an adapter (Refer to TIA/EIA 526-14A Std. Method A. This method is used in conjunction with the Two Jumper and Three Jumper test methods described later in the document. Method A for Setting Reference

Follow test unit manufacturer’s instructions for setting reference values for the applicable wavelengths, numbers of adapters, splices, etc.

Reference Setting – Method B Connect one reference lead from tester terminal labeled Output (A) to the power meter terminal labeled Input (B). Refer to TIA/EIA 526-14A Std. Method B. Note: This method can only be used when the connector types of the LUT and connectors on the reference leads are of the same type. This method is used in conjunction with the One Jumper test method described later in the document. Method B for Setting Reference

Even though Method “B” is proven to be slightly more accurate when setting a Ref Value, not all fiber techs have the same connector types as the Link Under Test. Therefore, most rely on Method “A” above. Follow test unit manufacturer’s instructions for setting reference values for the applicable wavelengths, numbers of adapters, splices, etc. Once the test system is referenced, the launch and receive leads may not be removed from the test equipment. Doing so will require re-referencing. NOTE: On less sophisticated light source/power meters, the normal method to establish a reference value is as follows: 1. Connect Launch and Receive leads with a mating adapter. 2. Record the loss shown on the power meter. This will be your reference value. 3. Connect Launch and Receive leads to their respective ends of the link under test. 4. Measure the loss. Record this value. 5. Subtract the value recorded in Step 2 from the value in step 4. 6. This is your actual link loss. This is only necessary when the tester being used does not have the same adapter as the LUT. Good reference values average around -19.0dB for 62.5/125μm, - 24.0dB for 50/125μm and around -8.0dB for 9/125μm fiber.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-34

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media 2. Testing a Permanent Link Unless otherwise stated, all permanent link loss testing of a segment shall be performed with a handheld power meter/ source. This equipment will measure link attenuation, which is the most important performance parameter when installing components. Maximum allowable attenuation of Ethernet applications is shown in Table 4.2-3.

ible method. In utilizing this method, you have to set a reference value using Method B. Store/record permanent link loss measurement for future reference. Figure 4.2-2. One Jumper Method

OTDR testing is not a requirement in fiber certification. In fact, this basic fiber certification (Tier 1) with a power meter and light source is the only type of testing required by TIA-568B for premises cabling. This test method measures end-to-end insertion loss by using a power meter and light source. If the attenuation is within the limits of the allotted power budget, the system will work. PANDUIT does not recommend testing links via the OTDR method. Table 4.2-3. Acceptable Link Loss for Ethernet Applications Link Loss = LBX + LXY + LYC Where LBX is the loss value of the adapter on the transmit side, LYC is the loss value of the adapter on the receive side and LXY is the total link under test.

Link-Loss Test Recommended Methods There are two standard methods of completing a link loss test that Panduit recommends: • One Jumper Method (Method B) • Two Jumper Method (Method A) Note that in all of the methods that will be discussed “reference quality” patch cords and adapters need to be used to ensure accurate, repeatable and reproducible measurements. One Jumper Method (Method B) The one jumper method calculates the link loss as the loss of the two adapters and the link under test. This is the preferred method as outlined in TIA/EIA 568-B.1 and the secondary method outlined in ISO/IEC 11801. Here the power meter test lead must have the same connector type as the LUT. This has been proven to be the most accurate and reproduc-

As shown in Figure 4.2-2 above, start by setting a reference as described previously in this document. Once the reference is set, we are ready to move on to test the LUT. It is best to test the LUT from the fiber adapter panel to fiber adapter panel. This ensures that all splices, connections, and fiber cables in the link are included in the test. These two points are labeled as X and Y in the above illustration. The source side remains at one end of the link while the meter side is moved to the far end receive side of the link. Link loss will be calculated by the test equipment. If not, it can be calculated by subtracting link loss minus the Reference value measured.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-35

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media Two Jumper Method (Method A) The two jumper method calculates the link loss as the loss of the adapter in the original reference setup subtracted from the sum of the two adapters and the link under test. This method is preferred by contractors even though it is not referenced in ISO/IEC 11801 because the power meter test lead does not have to have the same connector type as the LUT. This method also assumes that a majority of the loss is in the fiber cable itself and not the connectors. Figure 4B-3. Two Jumper Method

3. Interpreting Test Results Most fiber loss test sets provide a Pass/Fail indication. Each tester has a means of manually defining the link under test (LUT) so the test results will be given based upon the amount of light loss and knowing those optical characteristics which have a direct affect on the total optical loss of the LUT. The link characteristics you need to define to the tester include: • Core Size: 50/125μm, 62.5/125μm, or 9/125μm. • Number of adapters in the link (normally two) • Number of splices (mechanical or fusion) Note: The link length does not need to be defined; the tester will determine the link length. If the Fluke DTX-1800 is used, it measures the length by gathering the values from the fiber characteristics (such as Index of Refraction) combined with the time it takes the light source to reach the remote unit and this allows the unit to calculate the length of the fiber run. Given that the index of refraction is the speed the light travels through the fiber, all we need is the time it takes at that speed to determine the distance the light has traveled.

Link Loss = LBX + LXY + LYC - LBC Where LBX is the loss of the adapter on the transmit side, LXY is the loss of the link under test, LYC is the loss of the adapter on the receive side and LBC is the loss of the adapter in the reference setup. As shown in the Figure 4.2-3 above, start by setting a reference as described previously in this document. Once the reference is set, we are ready to move on to test the LUT. It is best to test the LUT from the fiber adapter panel to fiber adapter panel. This ensures that all connections, patch cables, and fiber cables in the link are included in the test. These two points are labeled as X and Y in the above illustration. The source side remains at one end of the link while the meter side is moved to the far end receive side of the link. Link loss will be calculated by the test equipment, if not it can be calculated by subtracting the Loss of the Link measures during the link test minus the Reference value measured.

Based upon the Ref Value you have set plus the Link characteristics defined to the tester, it will provide you with a PASS or FAIL based upon the Industry Standards stored within the tester’s firmware. The most current tester firmware should be available from the vendor’s website and should always be up to date on the tester. PASS / FAIL: Some testers automatically determine whether a link passes or fails depending on a number of given specifications internal to the tester that are selected before testing. If the tester does not automatically determine PASS / FAIL then use the calculation presented in Section 6.0 to determine the maximum allowable link loss (Reference TIA/EIA 568-B.1 Std., Section 11.3.3.4). PASS or FAIL is a matter of measuring permanent link optical power loss against accepted industry standards per IEC/TIA 568-B.1. If a link fails immediately, it is possibly a polarity issue where the transmit and receive patch cords are flipped. Consider using a visual light source to manually observe whether light can travel from one end of the link to the other. This is a safe and practical means of troubleshooting. This will save time as testing post-installation will likely

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-36

Section 4.2: Fiber Optic Media reveal some polarity problems, which are much easier to correct than other light loss or light obstruction problems. Tester Link Loss Formula: Optical Link Headroom = Permanent Link Loss Budget – Permanent Link Loss Measured If the test results show that your Optical Link Headroom is equal or greater than the Permanent Link Loss Budget, the tester will show a PASS. If the Optical Link Headroom displayed is in the negative direction, your Permanent Link Loss Budget is experiencing too much optical loss and will not meet IEC/TIA 568-B.1 requirements and show a FAIL. With the tester set up to correctly reflect the optical characteristics of the Permanent Link, test the link to see if the losses encountered are within the allowable limits set by the IEC/TIA that have already been loaded into the tester. Sometimes the test results may show that more light was “gained” in the link. This result is erroneous and called a “gainer” or an increase in optical power from the referenced value to the total loss of the LUT. For example, if the reference value for a given link is –25dB but in testing a LUT your meter now reads only –19.5 dB, your link has gained power! This is not possible and should alert you to a problem within the link.

Assuming the initial core-to-core alignment was off-center, taking the reference value now will indicate a higher amount of loss than normally found. Continuing with the test and connecting both ends of the reference leads to the LUT can actually improve the loss amount since the core-to-core alignment can be made better without the offsets of the reference leads. Tests completed in this scenario will surely show erroneous light gains, commonly known as “gainers”. 4.2.7

Documenting

In compliance with TIA/EIA-526-14A “Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant” and TIA/EIA-526-7 “Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant”, the following permanent link data should be documented as a result of link loss testing: • Date of link testing • Names of personnel conducting the test • Test equipment details (manufacturer, model, serial number) • Center wavelength(s) and spectral width(s) of the test unit • Fiber details (type) • Test direction and end point locations • Reference power measurement (if applicable) • Segment link loss results • Link loss budget

There are two possible causes for “gainers.” (1) Your reference leads connectors enfaces were initially dirty and when you disconnected the reference leads to attach to the LUT, the dirt/debris is displaced and now you have significantly more light being received at the far end (2) The second way to gain light is when the core-to-core alignment of the reference leads is not well centered with one another. This can be improved, insuring that proper reference cords are being used and not just “bucket” cords and by using zirconia ceramic split sleeves found in the blue singlemode adapters rather than the phosphor bronze split sleeves found in the electric ivory multimode adapters. Zirconia ceramic split sleeves maintain better core-to-core alignment than phosphor bronze split sleeves. ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-37

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 4.3

Grounding and Bonding

From the control room or data center, to the manufacturing floor and to facilities operations --in all of these areas, there are critical systems that require proper grounding and bonding. Protecting those systems, equipment and personnel helps to ensure equipment reliability and, thus, availability of services and lower operational expense. Network equipment, such as switches, routers, and storage devices can cost up to hundreds of thousands of dollars. The loss of network equipment can be very costly, but the real danger is the downtime that can be caused by the failure of this network equipment, especially with today’s automated systems and processes. Downtime can have serious consequences. A well engineered grounding and bonding system is critical to the safety and performance of power distribution, control, communications, security and IT systems. It is vital that the network equipment in Industrial Automation environments be properly bonded and grounded to protect workers and equipment from electrical surges, transient voltages, electrical noise and electrostatic discharge (ESD). While the National Electric Code provides good grounding and bonding guidance for the safety of personnel and the robust equipment within an electrical distribution system, extra attention must be paid to the protection of the sensitive electronic equipment found in today’s networks. This section of the Guide provides an overview of the different grounding and bonding systems, standards and codes and definition of key terms, acronyms to help you make better decisions in the selection of proper grounding and bonding techniques and equipment for industrial automation spaces and applications. Sometimes the amount of information can seem overwhelming even to seasoned professionals, especially in the area of grounding and bonding. However it is more important than ever to keep up-to-date with the industry standards, best practices, highest quality products and partners that know and understand what is required to install and maintain these systems. DEFINITIONS Bonding – The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.

Ground/Earth– A conducting connection, whether intentional or incidental, by which an electric circuit or equipment is connected to the ground/earth, or to some conducting body of relatively large extent that serves in place of the earth. High Frequency Bonding – Creating equal potential between electrical devices and its infrastructure components in a system to minimize the effects of electrical noise and electromechanical interference. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) - When the build-up of static electricity on an object is transferred to a grounded object or an object of lower potential. ACRONYMS GEC – Grounding Electrode Conductor GES – Grounding Electrode System MCBN – Mesh Common Bonding Network TBB – Telecommunications Bonding Backbone TEBC – Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor TGB – Telecommunications Grounding Busbar TMGB – Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar

STANDARDS and CODES ANSI/TIA-1005 / ANSI/TIA-1005-1 Publication of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises and its first addendum, covering Industrial Pathways and Spaces, is forthcoming is 2009. The documents are based on the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and TIA-569-B series of standards, and they include appropriate allowances and exceptions to those standards for industrial premises. They also contain techniques to mitigate mechanical, ingress, climate/chemical, and electromechanical (M.I.C.E.) effects across multiple areas. TIA/EIA-942 TIA/EIA-942 (Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers) specifies the minimum requirements for the telecommunications infrastructure of data centers and computer rooms. ANSI/J-STD-607-A-2002 ANSI/J-STD-607-A-2002 (Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications) specifies the minimum requirements for the telecommunica-

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-38

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding tions grounding and bonding infrastructure for buildings with telecom rooms, communication rooms, data centers, control rooms, network rooms and wherever sensitive electronic equipment is found. IEEE Std. 1100-2005 IEEE Std. 1100-2005 (IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding of Electronic Equipment) recommends a buildings power and grounding minimum requirements for sensitive electronic equipment. IEEE Std. 142-1991 IEEE Std. 142-1991 (IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems) recommends grounding practices for the various power distribution system topologies and the equipment within those systems.

• Provides equalization paths and ports for ESD protection wrist straps • Supports the proper operation of surge protective devices for ITE and power circuits • Promotes electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) within the data center environment • Must adhere to all local electrical codes, and should be listed with a nationally recognized test lab (such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.). In addition to meeting these standards, all grounding and bonding components should be listed with a nationally recognized test lab (such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) and must adhere to all local electrical codes. The PANDUIT® StructuredGround™ System for data center grounding provides robust connections that have low resistance, are easy to install, and are easily checked during the inspection process.

IEEE Std. 837-2002 IEEE Std. 837-2002 (IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding) recommends the minimum requirements for connectors used in the grounding electrode system such as connections to ground rods, rings, meshes, ufer grounds and conductor electrodes. NFPA 70® NFPA 70® (2008 National Electrical Code) is the minimum requirements for electrical installations. NECA/BICSI 607 NECA/BICSI 607 (National Electrical Contractors Association/Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.) recommends minimum requires for telecommunications, IT and network type of grounding and bonding systems. According to standards TIA-942, J-STD-607-A-2002, and IEEE Std. 1100 a properly designed grounding system as shown in Figure 4C-1 has the following characteristics: • Has an intentional design – each connection must be engineered and installed to properly handle the anticipated currents • Bonds all metallic components to the grounding system (e.g., equipment, racks, cabinets, access floors, ladder racks, cable trays, water pipes, conduit, building steel, etc.) • Is visually verifiable and generally arranged for ease of inspection and testing ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-39

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 4.3.1

End-to-End Grounding & Bonding System Elements

Figure 4.3-1. Example Grounding and Bonding System in a Control Room with Access The following are the basic elements of an end-to-end grounding and bonding system for industrial buildings and environments. Each requires proper design and installation by trained and qualified personnel, and is discussed in further detail below. • Grounding electrode system • Utility entrance facility / grounding and bonding infrastructure • Telecommunications system grounding for the Control Room • Control system grounding ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-40

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 4.3.1.1

Grounding Electrode System (GES)

The most critical part of any grounding system is the connection to earth which is the function of the grounding electrode system (see Figures 4C-2 and 4C-3). Design and installation of the grounding electrode system should be performed by qualified and trained personnel. The GES is compromised of grounding electrodes which may be present in an installation depending on particular applications. Grounding electrodes include ground rods and pipes, ground rings, Ufer grounds, structural steel, water pipes and ground meshes. The schematic diagram in Figure 4.3-2 shows a generic layout of a facilities grounding infrastructure including the GES, the entrance facility bonding and the distribution of the grounding system. Figure 4.3-3 shows a graphic representation of the elements of a GES. The requirements for the GES are described in the NFPA 70®, 2008 National Electri-

cal Code. Components that are used in the GES should be listed with a testing agency (UL). For a higher quality GES it should be constructed of high grade copper conductor and connections that are IEEE 837-2002 approved. Each building and each application can be different so each situation has unique requirements that need to be considered. Selection of the GES components must be done during the planning phase of any project. The ground electrode system is the first part of the electrical system that gets installed when constructing a new building. Since the GES is buried directly into the soil, high quality, tested connections help lead to higher reliability. Every ground connection is important all the way to the network equipment and it starts here in the grounding electrode system. See Appendix C-1 for a sample connector specification that can be used for writing project specifications.

Building the Grounding Electrode System PANDUIT Part#

Description

E-Style Grounding Connectors GCE1/0-1/0

E Style Grounding Connector, Main/Tap #6 SOL - 1/0 STR

GCE250-1/0

E Style Grounding Connector, Main 1/0 STR - 250Kcmil, Tap #6 SOL - 1/0 STR, Ground Rods 1/2” - 5/8”, Rebar, 3/8’ - 1/2’

GCE250-250

E Style Grounding Connector, Main/Tap 1/0 STR - 250Kcmil, Ground Rods 1/2” - 5/8’, Rebar 3/8” - 1/2”

GCE500-1/0 GCE500-250

E Style Grounding Connector, Main 250 - 500 Kcmil, Tap #6 SOL - 1/0, Ground Rods 1/2’ - 3/4’, Rebar 5/8” - 3/4’ E Style Grounding Connector, Main 250 - 500 Kcmil, Tap 1/0 STR - 250 Kcmil, Ground Rods 1/2’ - 3/4’, Rebar 5/8” - 3/4’

Grounding Gross Connectors GCC6X61/0-1/0

Grounding Cross Connectors, #6 SOL - 1/0 STR.

GCC6X6250-1/0

Grounding Cross Connector, (A) #2 SOL - 250 Kcmil, Ground rods 1/2” - 5/8”, Rebar 3/8” - 1/2” (B) #6 SOL - 1/0 STR

GCC6X6250-250

Grounding Cross Connector, (A/B) #2 SOL - 250 Kcmil, Ground Rod 1/2” - 5/8”, Rebar 3/8’ - 1/2”

GCC6X6500-1/0

Grounding Cross Connector, (A) 250 - 500 Kcmil, Ground rods 1/2” - 3/4”, Rebar 5/8” - 3/4” (B) #6 SOL - 1/0 STR

GCC6X6500-250

Grounding Cross Connector, (A) 250 - 500 Kcmil, Ground rods 1/2” - 3/4”, Rebar 5/8” - 3/4” (B) #2 SOL - 250 STR

Misc Components GPC4H250-2

Grounding Plate Connector, #2 SOL - 250 Kcmil

GUBC500-6

Universal Beam Grounding Clamp, #6 AWG - 500Kcmil

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-41

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-2. Schematic View of a Generic Grounding Infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-42

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-3. Grounding Electrode System Graphical Reference ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-43

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 4.3.1.2 Utility Entrance Facility/Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure Once the connection is established to the ground or earth by the Grounding Electrode System, the next critical link is the bonding of that GES to the rest of the building systems. That bonding should be done at the building’s utility entrance facility (see Figures 4.3-2, 4.3-4, and 4.3-5).The main connection from the GES outside the building to inside of the building is called the Grounding Electrode Conductor. The Grounding Electrode Conductor enters the building and typically terminates at the main ground bus in the AC main service panel or to a main ground bus external to the AC main service panel. See Appendix C-2 for a sample grounding and bonding specification that can be used for writing project specifications. Once the main ground bus is established in the entrance facility, grounding connections can be distributed to various areas of the building. Those areas could be telecom rooms, server rooms, data centers, control rooms and other similar type installations where sensitive electronic equipment is located. To establish a high quality, reliable and flexible grounding and bonding infrastructure, ANSI/J-STD-607-A principles should be applied. The grounding system starts in the entrance facility with the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). The TMGB is independent of the AC grounding system, but is bonded to the main ground bus in the AC main service panel or to another main ground bus external to the AC main ser-

vice panel. The following graphical representation of a building entrance facility serves as an example, keeping in mind that every building presents unique challenges. Although every entrance facility can look different, the basic requirement of bonding the various components and/or systems together is the goal. ANSI/J-STD-607-A also requires a ground bar, called the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) to be placed in each equipment room to establish the grounding reference. Each TGB will then be bonded back to the TMGB via the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone or TBB. The TBB should be a continuous conductor when possible to keep the resistance to a minimum. The TBB should bond to each TGB by “tapping” off of the TBB as shown in Figure 4C7. It is important to properly size the TBB so it is adequate to carry the current that is likely to be imposed on it. Table 4C-1 is from the standard and provides guidance for sizing the TBB properly for the distance. Some of the other important requirements from the standard are related to the types of products and workmanship requirements. The use of copper conductors, types of busbars and the types of connectors are called out in the standard. One of the more important requirements of the standard is the use of two-hole compression connectors for making terminations at the TMGB and TGB. These types of connectors will provide a more reliable connection for the life of the installation. They will resist coming loose at the busbar and will not loosen up at the connector like a mechanical type of connector would over time.

Table 4C-1. Sizing the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TBB) TBB Length in Linear meters (feet)

TBB Size (AWG)

Less than 4 (13)

6 (16mm²)

4-6 (14-20)

4 (25mm²)

6-8 (21-26)

3 (25mm²)

8-10 (27-33)

2 (35mm²)

10-13 (34-41)

1 (35mm²)

13-16 (42-52)

1/0 (50mm²)

16-20 (53-66)

2/0 (70mm²)

Greater than 20 (66)

3/0 (95mm²)

Source: ANSI/J-STD-607-A

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-44

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding Building the Utility Entrance Facility Grounding System PANDUIT Part#

Description

GB4B0632TP-1

Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) 1/4” x 4” x 24”, Solid Copper, Tin Plated

HDW1/4-KT

Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 1/4”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers

HDW3/8-KT

Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 3/8”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers

HDW1/4-A-KT

Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 1/4”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers

HDW3/8-A-KT

Stainless Steel Hardware Kit, 3/8”, (2) bolts, (2) nuts, (4) flat washers, (2) Belleville washers

LCC250-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 250 MCM, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC4/0-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4/0 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC3/0-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 3/0 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC2-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 2 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC4-38DW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4 AWG, 3/8” stud hole, 1” spacing

LCC4-12W

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 4 AWG, 1/2’ stud hole, 1 3/4” spacing, NEMA

LCC6-14AW

Two-hole, long barrel lug w/window, 6 AWG, 1/4’ stud hole, 5/8” spacing

GUBC500-6

Universal Beam Grounding Clamp

GPL-8

Grounding Clamp, U-Bolt. 1/2” to 3/4” pipe. #8 AWG to #4 AWG

GPL-16

Grounding Clamp, U-Bolt. 1” pipe. 2/0 AWG to 250 MCM

GPL-34

Grounding Clamp, U-Bolt. 2” pipe. 2/0 AWG to 250 MCM

KP1

Grounding Clamp for Water Pipes 1/2” to 1”, #10 AWG to #2 AWG

KP2

Grounding Clamp for Water Pipes 1 1/4” to 2”, #10 AWG to #2 AWG

LTYK

Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding Label Kit

GACB-1

Auxiliary Cable Bracket

GACBJ68U

Auxiliary Cable Bracket Jumper Kit, 8”

GACBJ612U

Equipment Jumper Kit, 6 AWG, 12”,terminated at both ends

GACBJ618U

Equipment Jumper Kit, 6 AWG, 18”,terminated at both ends

,

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-45

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-4 Utility Entrance Facility ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-46

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-5. Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure Requirements of the ANSI/J-STD-607-A

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-47

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-6. Data Center Grounding

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-48

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-7. Control Room Grounding

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-49

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 4.3.1.3 Telecommunications System Grounding (Control Rooms and Data Centers) Telecommunications grounding and bonding topologies are based on standards, ANSI/J-STD-607, TIA-942 and IEEE Std. 1100-2005. This is a typical practice found in enterprise data centers and telecom type service provider facilities (see Figure 4.3-8). These same standards and practices can be applied to the industrial data centers, control rooms and remote instrumentation enclosures (see Figures 4.3-2, 4.3-6, and 4.3-7).

be deployed and bonded to the TGB. This process can be broken into two smaller steps: (1) ensuring electrical continuity within rack and cabinet units, and (2) bonding these units to the busbar. When assembling and installing racks and cabinets, TIA942 and the upcoming BICSI/607 require the installer to verify that electrical continuity exists between all structural members. The paint used on racks and cabinets acts as an electrical insulator, preventing the flow of electricity from one section of the rack or cabinet to another. Therefore, attaching

Figure 4.3-8. Schematic Diagram of Typical Grounding and Bonding of the Control Room

In general, once the AC power ground has been bonded to the TGB, installers can follow these basic steps in common TR spaces to deploy a robust grounding and bonding system that satisfies the intent of the standards and is professional in appearance: 1. Verify that the AC panel board is bonded to the TGB 2. Bond the TGB to the telecommunications grounding and bonding infrastructure 3. Create continuity within racks and cabinets 4. Bond the racks and cabinets to the TGB 5. Bond the equipment to the racks

a grounding jumper from the rack to the TGB may not actually ground the entire rack, which results in a safety hazard. Racks and cabinets are available that are fully bonded upon arrival from the manufacturer. Other rack designs contain provisions to create electrical continuity via grounding washers as the units are assembled in the field (see Figures 4.3-9 and 4.3-10). Otherwise, it is important to use paint-piercing hardware tested for its ability to create an electrical bond as the rack or cabinet is being assembled or, a last option is to scrape the paint between the mating components (see Figure 4.3-11).

Grounding Cabinets and Racks. Once all bonds from TGB to building steel, raceways, and TBB have been made, the telecommunications room is ready for racks and cabinets to ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-50

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-9. Cabinet Grounding

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-51

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-52

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-10. Rack Grounding

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-53

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding After the rack is assembled, install electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap ports approximately forty-eight inches above the floor in racks that house active equipment, such as switches. Having such ports available allows people who service that equipment to have a convenient place to plug in their ESD protection wrist straps, thus protecting the equipment from damage while it is being worked upon (see Figure 4C-12). Figure 4.3-11. Grounding washers can be used to create electrical continuity in racks and cabinets. In this photo a bolt and washer is removed, showing paint removal from the contact area (bottom right).

present a more complicated bonding situation. Under these circumstances, the installer should run a continuous TEBC from the TGB down each row of racks, making a bond from the TEBC to each rack. These jumpers should be bonded to the TEBC using compression HTAP connectors, and bonded to the rack using a two-hole compression lug. The use of this lug at the rack is quite important, as this is a series circuit (where only one connection is made between rack and TEBC) and a two-hole compression lug will maintain the reliability of the connection at the same level as connections to the TGB (see Figure 4.3-14). Compression connectors are required by many grounding standards and specifications because the connector barrel will not loosen from the conductor over time. The conductors used in bonding the racks to the TGB should be insulated with an all-green jacket or a green jacket having a distinctive yellow stripe to visually indicate them as being used for grounding purposes. In most telecommunications closets, use #6 AWG TEBC which will be sufficient due to the limited length required within a closet space.

Figure 4.3-12. ESD wrist straps and ports enhance equipment protection. Different options exist for how to bond racks to the busbar (see Figure 4.3-13). Which method is chosen often depends upon the size and configuration of the installation. In TRs with about a half-dozen racks or less, such as most industrial control rooms, the most convenient method of bonding the racks to the busbar is to run a jumper known as a telecommunications equipment bonding conductor (TEBC) directly from each rack to the TGB. In larger installations, the number of lug mounting locations on the busbar and the management of the grounding cables ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-54

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-13. Telecommunications room bonding topologies (no access floor). Top – several TEBCs used to bond each rack directly to the TGB. Bottom – racks bonded to a single TEBC which then bonds to the TGB.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-55

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding Busbar Hardware Kit

Figure 4.3-14. Busbar Hardware and Armored Fiber Grounding Kits

When bonding the conductor to the rack, it is important to remove insulating paint from the mating surface to complete the connection. For this purpose, most installers prefer to use thread-forming screws that remove paint from the thread holes as they are installed, or to use suitable bonding hardware for cage nut rail applications. It is also acceptable to simply scrape the paint off the rack in the area that the lug will bond, but is more time and labor intensive than using thread-forming screws. Bonding Equipment to Racks. The final step for an installer is to bond active equipment (such as switches and servers) to the rack or cabinet as it is installed. The forthcoming BICSI/607 standard will likely contain the following statement when it is officially adopted: “Grounding through the equipment AC (alternating current) power cord does not meet the intent of this standard. It is intended that the ac power ground path and the telecommunications ground path offer redundant and specific ground paths for the equipment. While the AC-powered equipment typically has a power cord that contains a ground wire, the integrity of this path to ground cannot be easily verified.

Rather than relying on the AC power cord ground wire, it is desirable that equipment be grounded in a verifiable manner as described in this Standard.” The best strategy to meet the intent of this statement is to use a discreet jumper wire that bonds from a lug mounting pad (if provided by the manufacturer) on the active equipment and terminates via a two-hole compression lug at a busbar or vertical grounding strip attached to one of the rack’s equipment mounting rails. The busbar or vertical grounding strip should be used to provide a visually-verifiable, all-copper grounding path (see Figures 4.3-9 and 4.3-10). When equipment does not provide a lug mounting pad, the next best option is to bond the equipment mounting flanges directly to the rack rails. If the equipment mounting flanges are painted or covered in a non-conductive coating, bonding screws can be used to make this bond (i.e., thread-forming screws with serrations under the head of the screw will remove coatings from the surface to which they are mounted).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-56

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding Bonding STP Shielded Cables in Control Systems. Shielded twisted pair Ethernet cables provide an important means of returning high frequency noise to the noise source (see Table 4.3-2). The design of shielded cables and the proper termination of these cables require careful study of vendor recommendations and understanding of the system’s bonding and grounding design to avoid ground loops. The key issue with shielded cable systems is provide proper bonding to prevent high frequency noise from coupling to cable while reducing risk of ground loops and hazardous voltage from causing equipment or personnel concerns. There are several techniques and solution approaches that have been developed to provide options, depending on the magnitude and frequencies of the noise involved, that impact the quality of the ground system and topology of cable channel. Table 4.3-2. Key Techniques for Effective Shield Bonding 360 degree Shield termination 360 degree Shield termination

Avoid the high impedance caused by long pigtail drain wires by using shield clamps that encircle the circumference of the shielded cable.

Ground loop avoidance

Proper system bonding between machine and control cabinets can allow bonding both ends of shield without concern of ground loop for maximum shield benefit for controlling noise. Otherwise, consider hybrid bonding through RC circuit or else bonding only one end of shielded able.

Motor Cable shielding

Shielding motor cables can reduce this noise source risk but requires termination at the motor and at the drive only. Do not terminate the motor cable to the subpanel to avoid noise problems.

Ground Loop Concerns. A ground loop can form when there is a different voltage potential between two ends of a cable (see Figure 4.3-15). The concern is that even a small voltage difference can result in high enough noise currents to cause coupling to cables. In some cases, this voltage can be quite high and cause real concern about communication disruptions - even equipment damage. This fear leads to common wisdom to only ground one end of a shielded cable. However, this common wisdom falls down for high frequency noise mitigation where inductive and capacitive effects prevent a single point ground from effectively reducing noise voltages. For best noise mitigation, therefore, it’s desirable to extend the ground plane by bonding both ends of the cable. However, this is not readily done without creating a ground loop. This dilemma has led to development of hybrid bonding solutions to provide bonding at both ends while blocking low frequency ground loops.

Figure 4.3-15. Example of Ground Loop caused by voltage difference between equipment grounds at two ends of a shielded cable.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-57

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding Hybrid Bonding. To allow for bonding both ends of a shielded cable with some mitigation of the ground loop concern, a technique called hybrid bonding is employed where an RC circuit only allows high frequency noise to pass through the loop and blocking the lower frequencies (e.g. 60 Hz) that may be present because of ground level differences. Figure 4.3-16. Hybrid bonding using RC circuit that blocks low

Shielded Cable Patching Options for Stratix switch based systems. To complicate the design of proper even further, you need to consider the physical infrastructure arrangements related to patch panels in rack/enclosure systems in a control rooms, zone enclosures, and control panels. The distribution of network cabling from control rooms out to control systems greatly benefits from use of consolidation and patching areas as discussed in Sections 2.3 and 2.4 of this Reference Architecture Guide. The complication arises with shielded cable systems is avoiding introducing ground loops at the patch points when installing shielded components.

frequency ground loop currents

Ethernet/IP use of Hybrid bonding, overall channel design. Most Ethernet/IP devices built today employ hybrid bonding built into the device. However, due to legacy and third party non-Ethernet/IP devices, a system designer needs to examine each device and make appropriate decisions on when and where to bond to avoid ground loops. The overall shielded cable channel design from switches through patching to devices needs to be analyzed from the bonding perspective to gain important noise control benefits brought by the shielded cable while avoiding ground loop problems. The following details patching options that can assist with mitigating noise and avoiding ground loops in automation systems that employ switches and devices with hybrid bonding or mixed approaches.

Ground loop problem associated with a patch panel. Ground loop problems can arise in a control room even between a switch and a patch panel mounted in the same or a few feet away in an adjacent rack depending on the noise frequencies involved. At high frequencies, noise can capacitatively or inductively couple through paths that are not the intended ground path. Voltage differences can develop between areas of rack or enclosure systems that appear to be securely bonded. A patch panel for shielded cable that is bonded may actually be at different voltage than the switch in the same vicinity! This problem is illustrated in Figure 4.317.

Figure 4.3-17. Ground Loop formed between patch panel and switch due to ground voltage differences. The hybrid bond at the device prevents ground loop from patch to device for lower frequencies.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-58

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding Standard data center practice for shielded patch panels is to bond the patch panel and shielded connector together which, in turn, is bonded to the rack. This bonding is effective for the typical data center noise and ground loop issues. However, for industrial applications in control rooms, zone enclosures and patch panels, direct bonding at the patch panel can introduce a ground loop as in the diagram above. Method to prevent ground loops when using patching. One recommended method to prevent ground loops forming at the patch area or out to the field device is to use an electrically isolated, insulated patching solution. This requires that the shielded jack snap into plastic or other insulating material rather than bonding to the patch panel and to the rack which is typically bonded to the room ground system.

A patch panel or outlet assembly that is not bonded but that does allow continuity of the shield through the patch field can effectively eliminate the patching ground loop concern. Figure 4.3-18 shows an insulated patch approach. The shielded jack and shielded patch cord would pass the high frequency noise back to the switch but not introduce a ground loop at the patch.

Figure 4.3-18. Insulated patch panel prevents ground l oop at switch and patch panel

X The following are PANDUIT parts that can aid in implementing an insulated patch panel solution at the control room, zone cabling enclosure or control panel. PANDUIT Part#

Description

CPPA24FMWBLY

Angled 24-port flush mount patch panel

QPPABL Accept QuickNet™ Copper Cable For use with QuikNet Assemblies and QuickNet™ SFQ Panels and or QuickNet Series MTP* Fiber Optic Cassettes 0RU Bracket

CPP24FMWBLY

24-port flush mount patch panel supplied with rear mounted faceplates.

CWPP12WBLY

UICMPPA24BLY

24-port angled patch panel with six UICPPL4BL Mini-Com® Ultimate ID® Faceplates.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

12-port patch panel supplied with three factory installed CFFP4 snapin faceplates with integrated wall mount bracket.

Page 4-59

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding In cases where there are no substantial ground loop concerns (e.g. facility with well engineered mesh ground system), it may be desirable to bond shielded cables at the patch panel especially for cabling run within the control room or other well bonded areas. The following procedure and diagram outlines basic methods for this approach. As an example and outlined in Figure 4.3-19, the PANDUIT four step process to properly bond the shield at the patch panel is as follows: 1. Bond all the shielding (foil and/or braid) of the data cable to the shielded jack module, which provides 360° shielding termination, as shown in Figure 4.3-20. 2. Snap the jack module into an all-metal patch panel to create a bond between the module and the unpainted tabs on the patch panel. 3. Attach the patch panel to the rack using threadforming bonding screws; the thread on the screws removes paint from the thread holes on the rack and the serrations on the head of the screws remove paint from the patch panel, creating a high-performance electrical bond between the patch panel and the rack. 4. So long as electrical continuity exists throughout the rack, the last step is to bond the rack to the main busbar or MCBN located under the data center raised floor. To ensure long-term integrity of the system, always use compression connectors, not mechanical, so the connection does not loosen with vibration. Once cabling to the patch field has been bonded, attention can be turned to the rest of the bonding and grounding system. The rest of this article focuses on several best practices that must be considered during the design and installation of the rest of your shielded structured cabling system.

Grounding the Cable Shield. During installation, a frequently asked question is whether the installer should ground one end or both ends of a shielded cable channel. Generally, the cable shield is bonded to the grounded equipment chasFigure 4.3-20. PANDUIT Shielded sis or rack at each access Cable and Jack Module Termination or patch location. In other words, if all ITE is grounded, then any shielded cables used to connect equipment to patch panels, or to other equipment, must be grounded. A typical shielded structured cabling channel runs from a switch to the workstation and is comprised of two patch cord links and the shielded horizontal link. One end of the channel starts in the data center, where the switch, patch panel, and shielded patch cord linking them must be properly bonded to the rack. The rack is tied to the telecommunications grounding system, which in turn is bonded to the AC power system (see Figure 4C-19). The other end of the channel terminates outside the data center at a workstation outlet. An issue that must be considered is whether a shielded cabling link at this outlet location can be properly bonded to a grounding system without inducing a ground loop. A cable shield that is terminated at the workstation may be bonded to the AC ground via connections within the workstation itself, but the outlet AC ground must be at the same potential as the telecommunication grounding system. The recommended method for grounding the shielded link is to use the workstation-provided ground. Use of a shielded patch cord grounds both ends of the shielded cable link and completes the shielded channel. However, when both ends of a shielded link are grounded, there is the possibility for a ground current to be conducted across the shielding if the grounds are not at the same potential. In this example, a voltage difference may exist on the ground between the AC Figure 4.3-19. The PANDUIT® StructuredGround™ System for data center grounding provides robust connections that have low resistance, are easy to install, and are easily checked during inspections.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-60

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding power source serving the workstation and the telecommunication ground within the data center.

and doors to allow the high frequency current to conduct with less impedance.

Therefore, to reduce the magnitude of such ground currents, all serving AC power systems must be bonded together to the same grounding electrode system (a building can have only one grounding electrode system, as required by the NEC). This approach will reduce any ground voltage differences that may exist either between differing AC power system grounds or between the AC power system ground and the telecommunications ground.

3. Ground Plane Principle Printed circuit board designers were the first to use the ground plane principle when designing high frequency circuits. Everything is at the same potential at the surface and the impedance is practically zero at all frequencies. The back plane or sub-panel makes an ideal ground plane to bond control panel components. Ideally, the ground plane should extend to include the entire machine or process by connecting to a mesh ground system or with large equipotent bonds run to external cabinets or machine bases.

4.3.1.4 Control System Grounding Bonding and grounding is the foundation for controlling EMI in control systems. Because grounding is a legal NEC requirement for electrical safety, the sight of green and yellow ground straps, ground bars, and PE conductors are common and relatively well understood. However, you can have a fully compliant, ultra safe grounding system yet have equipment that encounters serious disruptions, stoppages, and even damage due to an inadequately installed and engineered low impedance ground/bonding system for high frequency noise. Control Panel Grounding. Three concepts of best practice control panel layout and design (see Figure 4.3-21) for this high frequency noise are: 1. High Frequency Return Path High frequency noise currents will return to their source to complete a circuit. In some cases this can lead to noise being coupled into adjacent Ethernet cables. The goal is to layout noise sources and cabling with their associated grounds and cable shields so that the noise currents return in a safe controlled path rather than inadvertently traveling through sensitive circuit cables and devices. This requires understanding the noise sources and the role of shielded cables and equipment grounds.

Tips for Using the Ground Plane Principle • Use an electro galvanized sub-panel instead of the more common painted panel. This avoids need to remove paint for bonding with resultant long term corrosion potential risking poor performance. • Bond multiple sub-panels together using 1” wide short flat braided bonding straps to create one large ground plane. (See Figure 4C-22). • Bond the incoming ground conductors to the sub-panel where they enter the panel. • Bond the equipment grounds from the components in the cabinets directly to the sub-panel using equipment manufacturer recommended conductors or short flat braided bonding straps. • Bond the enclosure door(s) with short flat braided bonding straps. • Bond incoming cable shields (see Figure 4C-5), conduits and cable trays to enclosure

2. Braided Bond Straps A low-resistance 3-foot 14awg wire which serves quite adequately as a safety ground for 60Hz power is totally inadequate as a conductor for high frequency return current since at 10 MHz it has 300 ohms of impedance. At high frequencies of >1 MHz, multiple short 1” minimum width braided bond straps should be used between sub-panels ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-61

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding

Figure 4.3-21. Schematic Diagram of Control Panel Grounding and Bonding

\Motor Cable Termination Best Practice. Control system noise problems can cause intermittent communication problems that are difficult to diagnose and solve. One important recommendation is to prevent potential noise problems from high frequency noise that can be introduced from poor termination practice with servo or VFD motor drive cabling systems. There are well established best practices for motor cable termination to avoid noise problems that are published by vendors and in technical journals. However, mistakes are still being made that cause communications and control disruptions because of a failure to change installation practice in the field.

Figure 4.3-22 describes the best practices for motor cable grounding, and Figure 4.3-23 shows how using shielded cable presents a low impedance return path for motor noise currents with greatly reduced noise through the ground systems. This approach reduces the size of the ground return loop and reduces the coupling of noise to adjacent communication cables.

Figure 4.3-22. Motor Cable Grounding Best Practices ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-62

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 4.3.2

Selection

Most facilities are subjected to many electrical disturbances including lightning strikes, voltage fluctuations, static electricity and electrical noise, all of which are capable of affecting production in virtually everyone’s business. A designer or engineer of any of these systems needs to understand the requirements of the grounding and bonding system for each of their applications.

Selection of appropriate and robust power system grounding schemes, equipment grounding methods, surge protection equipment, lightning protection equipment, ground electrode systems and the protection of sensitive electronic equipment are critical to the performance and reliability of industrial systems. A full example specification documents for GES connections and for a data center / control room environment are provided in Appendices C-1 and C-2, respectively.

Figure 4.3-23. Best Wiring Solution: Shielded input/output with insulated jacket completely avoids ground noise problems in system.

4.3.3

Installation

The ground/earth system must be designed for high reliability. Therefore, the grounding/earthing system shall meet following criteria: 1. Local electrical codes shall be adhered to. 2. The grounding/earthing system shall comply with J-STD607-A, ANSI/TIA-942, IEEE Std 1100™, and in international regions BS EN 50310:2000. 3. All grounding/earthing conductors shall be copper.

4. Lugs, HTAPs, grounding strips, and busbars shall be UL Listed and made of premium quality tin-plated electrolytic copper that provides low electrical resistance while inhibiting corrosion. Antioxidant shall be used when making bonding connections. 5. Wherever possible, two-hole lugs shall be used because they resist loosening when twisted (bumped) or exposed to vibration. All lugs shall be irreversible compression and meet NEBS Level 3 as tested by Telcordia. Lugs with inspection windows shall be used in all non-corrosive environments so that connections may be inspected for full conductor insertion (battery rooms are an exception where windowless lugs may be used).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-63

Section 4.3: Grounding and Bonding 6. Die index numbers shall be embossed on all compression connections to allow crimp inspection. 7. Cable assemblies shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. Cables shall be a distinctive green or green/yellow in color to signify that they are grounding conductors, and all jackets shall be UL, VW-1 flame rated. 4.3.3.1 Visual Inspection To optimize the safety and performance of your network grounding and bonding system a visual inspection should be performed upon installation and on an annual or semi-annual basis thereafter. An inspection that follows a line-by-line work order allows early detection of potential problems such as loosened or corroded connections, missing labels, conductors that have been damaged, cut, or removed, and new metallic elements that require connections to the grounding system. Connections to Busbars, Racks, Cabinets, Enclosures and Network Equipment should be inspected on a yearly basis. An example of an inspection process and a form for documentation of basic requirements and verifications can be found in Appendix C-3. To facilitate inspection of the grounding system, install connectors, busbars, and conductors in such a way to allow visual verification of the bond. There should be a logical flow as you follow the grounding path(s); for example, follow the path(s) from the equipment chassis to the rack, from the rack to the data center grounding infrastructure, then over to the local TGB. The TGB connects to the telecommunication bonding backbone (TBB), or grounding cable, that runs back the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB), which is bonded to earth ground via the electrical entrance facility and links all the TBBs together. Inspect all splices for proper crimping, and inspect labels to ensure that proper labeling has been followed.

measure the resistance of any single bonding connection. As such, it is important to combine a visual inspection with measurements when verifying an installation. An inspection should include the following steps: a) Check for excessive currents on the conductors bonded to the TGB. Using a clamp-on ammeter check to be sure AC RMS currents are between 0.0 A and 1.0 A and DC currents are between 0.0 A and 0.5 A. b) Complete visual verification of the bonding and grounding system: ---Confirm bond between AC panel board and TGB ---Verify continuity within racks/cabinets ---Look for two-hole compression lugs on racks/ cabinets and on busbars ---Ensure that ESD wrist strap docking stations are convenient ---Confirm that equipment is bonded to the rack/cabinet c) Perform two-point continuity checks between surfaces where a bond is desired. 4.3.4

Documenting

A good documentation process goes hand in hand with a good inspection program. Grounding inspections should be well documented. An example of an inspection process and a form for documentation of basic requirements and verifications can be found in Appendix C-3.

Attempting to measure the resistance of any bond will actually result in the measurement of all electrical paths available, making it difficult to ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-64

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures 4.4

Racks and Cabinet Enclosures

As modern manufacturing continues to evolve, operations have become intensive producers and consumers of data. The heart of any data management and storage system is the physical layer equipment: switches, routers, servers, cabling/connectors, and patch panels. This equipment finds its home in the racks and enclosures that provide a robust environment, managing risks to equipment from physical damage, temperature variations, and unauthorized access. Rack and cabinet enclosures are available in a variety of configurations to address the variety of risks that manufacturing data systems are exposed to in the industrial environment. “Open” enclosure systems allow excellent air flow for keeping equipment cool, and include 2- and 4-post racks plus their accessories. Ironically, the main advantage of open systems can also be their main disadvantage. In a manufacturing environment, fibers and dust can migrate from the plant floor and come into contact with physical layer equipment, potentially disrupting network operations and increasing maintenance costs. Open systems, however, present security and safety risks because anyone with access to the control room has direct access to all physical layer equipment. Cabinet enclosures offer many of the advantages of an open 4-post rack system with the added security of side panels, a top and bottom, and lockable doors at front and back. These features help manage risk associated with keeping office and control networks linked yet segregated, and help prevent unauthorized access or inadvertent damage to control networks from Internet users. (See Section 4.8 of this Guide for more information on Safety and Security issues related to Industrial Ethernet networks.) Outside the control room, smaller enclosures (often referred to as “Zone Cabling Enclosure”) are available that allow remote deployment in factory applications for either active equipment or for patching the factory Ethernet network into manufacturing equipment.

ment issues need to be addressed in ways that differ from server cabinet applications.

STANDARDS and CODES Industrial network stakeholders can leverage the expertise of Data Center standards in industrial automation areas (both in the Control Room and on the factory floor) to mitigate performance risks and enable system convergence. TIA/EIA-942 TIA/EIA-942 (Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers) specifies the minimum requirements for the telecommunications infrastructure of data centers and computer rooms. CEA-310-D Consumer Electronics Association CEA-310-E, design requirements for Cabinets, Panels, Racks and Subracks (formerly EIA-310-D). TIA/EIA-568-B TIA/EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard) covers structured cabling systems (both balanced copper cabling and fiber optic cabling) for commercial buildings, and between buildings in campus environments. The bulk of the standards define cabling types, distances, connectors, cable system architectures, cable termination standards and performance characteristics, cable installation requirements, and methods of testing installed cable. 4.4.1 Selection Selecting an end-to-end enclosure system extends beyond choice of racks and cabinets, and includes horizontal and vertical cable managers. Together, these systems optimize thermal management in dense active equipment environments by routing cables away from exhaust fans and neatly managing them in horizontal and vertical pathways.

PANDUIT offers specialized cabinets for server applications, such as those running FactoryTalk, RSView SE, or other manufacturing application software. Cabinets are also available for switching applications, where cabling manage©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-65

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures Open Racks CMR19X84 19” EIA rack, aluminum. Dimensions: 84.0”H x 20.3”W x 3.0”D (2134mm x 514mm x 76mm). Standard 2-post open rack

CMR4P84 4-post EIA rack with #12-24 threaded rails. Dimensions: 84.0”H x 23.3”W x 30.2”D (2134mm x 591mm x 767mm). 4-post open equipment rack.

Cabinet Enclosures CS1 Server cabinet frame with top panel. Single hinge perforated front door. Split perforated rear doors open in the middle to minimize door swing footprint. Designed for servers and patch panels.

CN1 Switching and patching cabinet frame with top panel. Single hinge perforated front door. Split perforated rear doors open in the middle to minimize door swing footprint. Designed for switches and patch panels.

Cable Managers NM2 NetManager Horizontal Cable Manager High Capacity Front and Rear 2 RU. Cat6A cabling.

PRV8 Patchrunner Vertical Cable Manager Front & Rear 8” (203mm) for 84” High (2134mm) Racks.

Horizontal cable manager used with racks or cabinet enclosures

Vertical cable manager used with open 2- or 4-post racks

Zone Cabling Enclosure

Blanking Panel

PZC12W 12RU Wall mount cabinet with windowed front door; black.

DPFP8 Filler Panel 8 RU Used to blank out unused rack spaces in open racks or enclosures. Also used to mount panel equipment into open racks and cabinets.

Used for remote installation of RU based equipment.

NOTE: DIN rails can be mounted to these filler panels for DIN rail based equipment.

Grounding and Bonding RGEJ624PFY 6 AWG (16mm²) jumper; bent lug on grounding strip side to straight lug on equipment; provided with .16 oz. (5cc) of antioxidant and two each #12-24 x 1/2”, M6 x 12mm, #10-32 x 1/2” and M5 x 12mm thread-forming screws

RGCBNJ660P22 #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper; 60” (1.52m) length; 45° bent lug on grounding strip side; provided with .16 oz. (5cc) of antioxidant, two each #12-24 x 1/2”, M6 x 12mm, #10-32 x 1/2” and M5 x 12mm thread-forming screws and a copper compression HTAP* for connecting to the MCBN.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-66

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures 4.4.2 Installation Proper installation of cabinets and open 2 and 4 post racks rely heavily on the directions supplied by the manufacturer. Some overriding best practices are common among all manufacturers and weight load -- cabinets and open racks are rated for their load supporting capability. It is important that the weight rating is not exceeded. Reputable manufacturers have their cabinets and racks weight capacity certified by Underwriters Labs. Stability: Especially for 2 post open racks, stability under load should be evaluated. If stability is a concern, a 4 post open rack or cabinet may be required. If the installation environment is in an earthquake-prone area, extra steps will need to be taken to insure stability and safety. Bellcore GR-63-CORE standards cover seismic requirements.

• Cable performance is based on: - The locations of the twisted pairs inside the sheathing - The spacing of the twisted pairs, (most cable will have plastic structures to maintain spacing and create air gaps between twisted pairs) - The twist rate, is crucial in managing the capacitance, inductance and maintaining the high frequency performance of data cables.

Proper bend radius control reduces the risk of performance degradation due to deformation of the structured cabling.

Electrical safety: Virtually all cabinets and open racks have provisions for grounding and bonding the structure. Modern data center and control equipment need proper grounding for electrical noise control and personnel safety. Proper grounding should be established on installation. • Cabinet CN1, CS1 installation instructions: 108487.pdf • 4 Post Open Rack installation instructions: 104554.pdf • 2 Post Open Rack installation instructions: 069026.pdf 4.4.2.1 Physical Infrastructure Management Cabling to and from the equipment in the cabinets or open 2 and 4 post racks must be managed. Of primary importance here is the care and management of modern high performance data cabling. The mechanical construction of the cable dictates much of its electrical performance. Therefore, it’s necessary that any physical equipment such as cabinets, open 2 and 4 post racks have vertical and horizontal cable management.

4.4.2.2 Selection of Cabinets or Racks Cabinets • Select for maximum security for equipment • Select for server applications or switch and patching applications • Recommended for enterprise switches and server applications • 2500Lb rating 4 Post racks • Recommended for enterprise switches and server applications • 2000Lb rating • 2 Post 6 inch channel • Suitable for enterprise switches • 1500Lb rating 2 Post 3 inch channel • Recommended for patching and smaller RU height equipment • 1000Lb rating

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-67

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures • Front and rear or front only - Select front and rear managers to provide support for back bone/horizontal cabling. - Select front only for installations where the backbone/horizontal cabling will be manually tied down - ccable should not be allow to pull on termination / punch downs - Select front only for 4 post rack installations where horizontal cable support in back is not needed.

4.4.2.3 Selection of Vertical and Horizontal Cable Managers Cable capacity charts are available for all Panduit vertical and horizontal managers. Be sure to check them before selecting a catalog number. • Select the horizontal and vertical managers for the system cable being installed. • Select CEA-310 compliant Cat6A Managers - Bend radius to support Cat6A cable - Stated Cat6A compatibility. Typically deep with support for cable transition from the horizontal to vertical - Aesthetics suitable for the installation - Compatible with system wide components Cat5e and Cat6 - Bend radius to support cable - Stated Cat5e and Cat6 compatibility. Support for cable transition from the horizontal to vertical - Aesthetics suitable for the installation Compatible with system wide components

Selecting Vertical Cable Managers Vertical cable managers are available in a variety of widths. The widths vary based on the number of cables the manager will carry. Knowing the number of cables to be managed, select the vertical manager from the selection charts available from the manufacturer. • Use cable capacity charts provided by the manufacturer • Vertical Managers - Panduit recommends a fill ratio of 35%. - Allows space for slacking of cables and moves, adds and changes (MAC). - TIA -569-B covers tray capacities

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-68

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosuresy Selecting and Cabling Horizontal Cable Managers Horizontal cable managers are available in a variety heights based on Rack Units (RU). One RU is 1.75 inches. The height in RU and depth of a horizontal manager vary based on the number of cables the manager will carry. Knowing the number of cables to be managed, select the horizontal manager from the selection charts available from the manufacturer • Horizontal managers are used with flat patch panels • Use cable capacity charts provided by the manufacturer • Common horizontal manager sizes are 1, 2,3, and 4 Rack Unit (RU) • Horizontal Managers - Panduit recommends a fill ratio of 40%. - Allows space for moves adds and changes (MAC) - TIA -569-B covers tray capacities

Cabling Techniques for Horizontal Managers Method 1: Split each way • Maximize the usage of manager cable capacity • More cables if both end exits are used

Method 2: All One Side • One direction needed. • One exit point for all cables may limit number of cables

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-69

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures 4.4.2.4 Mounting Stratix Switches on DIN Rail or in Blacking Panels Stratix switches or panel mount equipment not configured in the data center rack unit configuration can be mounted in open racks or enclosures by using available blanking panels. These panels are used to block off sections of open rack space. The template for the equipment being used can be transferred to the blanking panel. The necessary holes can be drilled into the panel for mounting.

4.4.2.5 Patching For testability and organization of cables through moves, adds and changes, it would be recommended that for most manufacturing centered installation that flat patch panels and horizontal managers be used. • Standard density patching - Use Flat Patch Panels and Horizontal Mangers - Up to 450 ports per rack plus switch - Moves, adds and changes (MAC) are occasional to frequent

- Applications: • Leased office space • Cubicle based office space • Telecommunications rooms • Co-location sites

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-70

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures Table 4D-1. Dedicated Switch Rack and Patching Rack Recommendations Recommended

Description

Maximum Ports

Moves Adds &

Recommended

Recommended

Changes (MAC)

Vertical

Horizontal

MACs are oc-

PatchRun-

FRME1 or 2 on

Select 4 Post

casional

ner PRV10 or

top for fiber to

CMR4P84,96

PRVF10 Cat5e

switch*. Patch-

preferred for

Medium to high

or Cat6, PRV12

Link WMP1E,

equipment

density patching.

or PRVF12 for

WMPH2E for

and 2 post

Cat6A

Cat5e or Cat6.

CMR19X84,96

High Capac-

for Patching

Application

Rack

frequency Rack cable

Flat Patch Pan-

manage-

els with horizon-

ment solution.

tal managers.

500 to 700

ity NetManager NM2 or NMF2 for Cat6A Rack cable

Flat Patch Pan-

management

els with horizon-

solution. Low to

tal managers.

Up to 500

MACs are fre-

PatchRunner

FRME1 or 2 on

quent

PRV8 or PRVF8

top for fiber to

for Cat5e,Cat6.

switch*. Patch-

medium density

PRV10 or

Link WMP1E or

patching

PRVF10 for

WMPH2E with

Cat6A

Cat 5e or Cat 6. High Capacity NetManager NM1 or NMF1 with Cat6A.

Rack Low

Flat Patch Pan-

density patch-

els with horizon-

ing or patching

tal managers.

Under 350

MACs are fre-

PatchRunner

FRME1 or 2 on

quent

PRV6 or PRVF6

top for fiber to

for Cat5e,Cat6.

switch*. Patch-

with some active

PRV8 or PRVF8

Link WMPFSE,

equipment Plan-

for Cat6A

WMPLFSE,

ning for future

WMPLSE or

expansion

WMPSE with Cat5e or Cat6. High Capacity NetManager NM2 or NMF2 with Cat6A.

.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-71

Section 4.4: Rack and Cabinet Enclosures 4.4.2.6 Thermal Management Managing heat in switch or server installation depends on understanding the equipment being installed and how installation and cabling affects the equipments ability to stay cool. Some enterprise switches cool themselves by pulling air from front to back, others move air from side to side. The units that move air from side are more sensitive to cabling and the effect it has on the switches ability to move air. A common technique for switches that require side-to-side airflow switch is to cable “fan avoidance” which involves using a horizontal manager in the rack or cabinet to take cables around the fan tray.

4.4.2.7 Security For security, cabinets provide the highest level of physical security to equipment and patch fields. For “Zone Cabling” enclosures, locking mechanisms, either built in or padlock are ready to secure its internals. In some instances the control room or area will have its own security policies, such as the following: •





Structuring the industrial network with smart switches or firewalls to prevent unauthorized access. Securing individual data ports Approval process that require enterprise IT personnel and manufacturing data personnel to approve patching changes. Using advanced patching management systems to authorize and verify any enterprise to manufacturing changes.

.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-72

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems 4.5 Pathway Systems Pathway systems are critical factors because they give network stakeholders the ability to segregate, route, and protect communications cabling from other infrastructure elements and from adverse impacts from environmental hazards. Both overhead and under-floor systems are available to maintain the integrity of the fiber and copper cabling plant. Cable management accessories also ease the transition points from horizontal pathway spaces (overhead or under-floor) to an equipment rack or cabinet to vertical, maintaining proper bend radius and relieving cable strain. Overall, pathway systems provide greater system flexibility and they contribute to improved industrial Ethernet network reliability. They also reduce the time and cost of installing your cabling infrastructure.

STANDARDS and CODES GR-63 CORE (NEBS) Level 3 This Generic Requirements document (GR) presents minimum spatial and environmental criteria for all new telecommunications equipment used in Central Offices (COs) and other environmentally controlled telephone equipment spaces. This document provides only those requirements related to the physical aspects of equipment-building interfaces, including physical dimensions and environmental performance criteria. Issue 3 of GR-63 includes the following updated information: • Fire resistance requirements incorporating new ANSI methods and specific carrier requirements • An earthquake and vibration method for wall mounted products • New criteria for equipment airflow patterns • New criteria and test methods for thermal margin testing and operation with fan failure

• Riser - Evaluated for installation in risers in accordance with the National Electrical Code as well as general purpose applications. • General Use - Evaluated for general purpose applications only. NEMA VE1 / VE2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (partnered with CSA) Standard for Metal Cable Tray Systems / Installation Guidelines IEC 61537 International Electrotechnical Contractors Standard for Cable Tray Systems and Cable Ladder Systems for Cable Management IEC 60204 International Electrotechnical Contractors Standard for Safety of Machinery/Electrical Equipment with Machinery NFPA 70 and 79 National Fire Protection Association’s Standards.

ULC 2024A, Optical Fiber Cable Raceway This standard covers the following types of optical fiber cable raceways and fittings designed for use with optical fiber cables in accordance with Article 770 of the National Electrical Code (NEC): • Plenum - Evaluated for installation in ducts, plenums, or other spaces used for environmental air in accordance with the National Electrical Code as well as general purpose applications. ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-73

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems 4.5.1 Selection: Control Room

Figure 4.5-1. PANDUIT® FiberRunner® and FIBER-DUCT™ Routing System protects fiber optic cables from damage to support network reliability.

FiberRunner ® and FIBER-DUCT™ Routing Systems The PANDUIT® FiberRunner® and FIBER-DUCT™ Routing Systems are overhead, solid pathway system designed specifically for fiber optic cables and patch cords. It is ideal for jacketed ribbon-style interconnect cables or small diameter distribution cables (6, 12, or 24 fiber cables) that do not have a separate strength member. These systems consist of channels, fittings and brackets designed to segregate, route and protect fiber optic and high performance copper cabling. Typical applications include control rooms where cable is routed from distribution areas to equipment cabinets or racks (see Figure 4.5-1). They also can be deployed in approved under-floor installations.

Transition Point: from FiberRunner® Overhead Pathway to Equipment Rack/Cabinet When routing distribution or interconnect cables from FiberRunner® pathways to an equipment rack or cabinet, an appropriately sized spill-out should be used to assist in the transition from the pathway to the equipment rack (see Figure 4.5-2). These spill-outs will also ensure proper cable management and maintain minimum cable bend radius. Some installations may use split corrugated loom tubing to provide extra protection for the cable transition between FiberRunner® pathway and the rack/cabinet (see Section 4.5.2).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-74

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems

Figure 4.5-2. PANDUIT® FiberRunner® Overhead Pathway with Spill-Out

Once the fiber optic cables have transitioned from the FiberRunner® pathways into the rack or cabinet, it is critical to properly manage the cable routing prior to entry to the rack-mounted fiber enclosures or patch panels. This is best accomplished using PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties. The use of PANDUIT® Pan-Ty® Cable Ties should be avoided with jacketed ribbon-fiber interconnect cables or small fiber-count distribution cable (6, 12, and 24 fiber cables) that do not have an internal strength member, as the cable tie could be over-tightened and crush the optical fibers. See Figure 4.5-3 for routing and tie-off point details, and Figures 4.5-4 and 4.5-5 for application examples.

Figure 4.5-4. Example installation of FiberRunner® overhead pathway showing transition to 4-post racks. Cable is 12- fiber jacketed ribbon interconnect.

Secure Points Figure 4.5-5. Example installation of FiberRunner® overhead pathway to PANDUIT® NetAccess™ cabinets. Cable is 12fiber trunk. Note copper cabling installed in wire basket above FiberRunner® pathway system. Figure 4.5-3. Schematic of FiberRunner® overhead pathway to rack/cabinet transition.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-75

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems

Figure 4.5-6. The PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Routing System supports highdensity applications and provides integral bonding to the mesh common bond network (MCBN), improving user safety and equipment protection.

GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Routing System The PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Cable Routing System is a wire basket pathway designed to route and manage network data and power cabling beneath the raised floor in a control room or data center (see Figure 4.5-6). This innovative system supports high cable capacities, protects cables from damage to improve network performance, and is fully electrically bonded to facilitate proper grounding.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-76

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems Transition Point: PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ Under-floor Pathway to Equipment Rack/Cabinet In under floor pathway installations, high-performance copper cables and fiber optic trunk cables transition upward from the under floor pathway (PANDUIT® GridRunner ™ or similar) through an opening in a raised floor tile, and are secured on the vertical cable manager or rack/cabinet post with PANDUIT® Pan-Ty® Cable Ties. As the transition from under floor wire basket to the rack or cabinet is often an unguided route, cable transitions must flow gently and minimum bend radius allowances must be observed at all times (see Figure 4.5-7).

Figure 4.5-8. Example installation of fiber optic trunk cable transitioning from under floor pathway, through floor tile, to 2-post rack with PANDUIT® PatchRunner ™ vertical cable manager. Cable is 48- fiber pre-terminated trunk.

Some installations may use split corrugated loom tubing to provide extra protection for fiber optic cable transition from the under floor wire bask to the vertical cable manager and/or rack/cabinet post. In these installations, the corrugated loom tubing should be secured with PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to avoid over-tightening and crushing of the small-diameter fiber optic cables.

Figure 4.5-7. Schematic of under-floor wire basket pathway to rack/cabinet transition.

Figure 4.5-9. Example installation of GridRunner™ under floor wire basket pathway with 2-post rack and vertical cable manager. Cable is 12- fiber jacketed ribbon interconnect inside split loom tubing. Note PANDUIT® Cool Boot ™ Raised Floor Air Sealing Grommet (dark blue) installed to minimize air leakage through opening in raised floor tile.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-77

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems Transition Point: Overhead Wire Basket to Equipment Rack/Cabinet When routing distribution cable from an overhead wire basket pathway to an equipment rack or cabinet, it is recommended to utilize Panduit Waterfall Accessories to assist in the transition from the wire basket to the equipment rack (see Figure 4.5-10). These accessories will also assist with managing of the cable bend radius. Once cabling has transitioned from the overhead pathway into the rack or cabinet, it is critical to “tie-off” and strain relieve the cable to the vertical cable manager or rack/cabinet vertical post prior to cable break-out and/or cable entry to the rack-mounted fiber enclosures or patch panels. See Figure 4.5-11 detailing the routing and tie-off points, and Figures 4.5-12 and 4.5-13 for application examples.

Figure 4.5-12. Example installation of transition from overhead wire basket. Cable is 24- fiber trunk routing down to 4-post rack. Note use of PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to secure and manage cable.

Figure 4.5-13. Example installation of overhead wire basket to 4-post rack transition. Cable is 24- fiber trunk routing along vertical rack post to FCE1 enclosure. Note use of PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to secure trunk cable to vertical rack post.

Figure 4.5-10. Overhead wire basket to four-post rack transition.

Figure 4.5-11. Schematic of overhead wire basket to rack/cabinet transition

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-78

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems Transition Point: Overhead Ladder Rack to Equipment Rack/Cabinet When routing distribution cable from an overhead ladder racking system to an equipment rack or cabinet, it is recommended to utilize PANDUIT Waterfall Accessories to assist in the transition from the ladder rack to the equipment rack (see Figure 4.5-14). These accessories will also assist with managing of the cable bend radius.

Figure 4.5-16. Example installation of overhead ladder rack to two-post rack transition with PANDUIT® PatchRunner ™ Vertical Cable Manager. Cable is 48-fiber trunk routing through PRV12 vertical cable manager into FCE4 enclosure. Note use of PANDUIT® Pan-Ty® Cable Ties to secure trunk cable to vertical cable manager. Figure 4.5-17. Example installation of overhead ladder rack to two-post rack transition with PANDUIT® PatchRunner ™ Vertical Cable Manager. Cable is 12-fiber trunk routing through PRV12 vertical cable manager into FCE4

Figure 4.5-14. Overhead ladder rack with PANDUIT Waterfall Accessory

enclosure. Note use of PANDUIT® Tak-Ty® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to secure

Once the cable has transitioned from the overhead pathway into the rack or cabinet, it is critical to “tie-off” and strain relieve the cable to the vertical cable manager or cabinet vertical post prior to cable break-out and/or cable entry to the rack-mounted fiber enclosures or patch panels. See Figure 4.5-15 detailing the routing and tie-off points, and Figures 4.5-16 and 4.5-17 for application examples.

trunk cable to vertical cable manager.

Figure 4.5-15. Schematic of overhead ladder rack to rack/cabinet transition.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-79

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems 4.5.2 Selection: Plant Floor Plant floor pathways formerly required extensive cable tray or conduit arrangements. With industrial Ethernet networks, it is much more common and economical to run small groups of Ethernet cabling between control rooms or enclosures using J-Hooks to secure cable or fiber media from the ceiling joists. The PANDUIT® J-Pro™ Cable Support System is designed to provide an economical cable system to route communication cable along horizontal pathways, whether above suspended ceilings or under raised floors, or across the ceiling of a factory floor. The J-Hook is made of strong and durable non-metallic material to prevent cables from coming in contact with metal, and the low friction nylon surface facilitates pulling cable (and eliminates “shiners” created by metallic hooks).

Corrugated loom tubing also can be used to protect fiber optic media in light industrial environments. This tubing creates a cable pathway that is easy to pull through, and is available in a variety of diameters, materials, and in split or solid versions. This tubing can be suspended from J-Pro cable supports as a pathway solution. 4.5.3 Installation FiberRunner ® 1. Configure the pathway runs

1. Configure the pathway runs

to the cabinets or racks.

to the cabinets or racks.

2. Design logical routes that

2. Design logical routes that

optimize cable lengths and

optimize cable lengths and

minimize turns.

minimize turns.

3. Snap-together assembly

3. Drop-in assembly reduces

reduces installation time: • QuickLock Coupler provides fast mechanical assembly • No tools required to make reliable connection • Brackets attach system to common infrastructure

This system provides complete horizontal and vertical 1” bend radius control, preventing pinch points that could cause damage to cable, and is available in four sizes (¾”, 1-5/16”, 2” & 4” bundle capacities). The large channel size allows the use of TAK-TY® Hook & Loop Cable Ties to retain and manage the cable bundle. A variety of mounting options, including pre-riveted mounting assemblies, provide the ability to attach to walls, ceilings, beams, threaded rods, drop wires, and under floor supports to meet the requirements of a variety of applications.

GridRunner ™

elements (ladder rack, strut, etc.) • Loosen clips, slide into position, and re-tighten to

installation time: • Position and install pedestal support bracket on pedestals. • Secure one captured fastener. • Drop wire basket section between stringers. • Secure wire baskets to pedestal support brackets with pedestal clamp.

mount channel to bracket. 4. Size the main runs and

4. Size the main runs and

branches for the anticipated

branches for the anticipated

fills. Generally, plan the initial

fills. Generally, plan the initial

cable channel fill at a 40% fill

cable channel fill at a 40% fill

density.

density.

5. Determine the amount of

5. Determine the amount of

cables to be spilled out into

cables to be spilled out into

racks/cabinets and select

racks/cabinets and select

choice of spill-over or

choice of spill-over or

transition accessory.

transition accessory.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-80

Section 4.5: Pathway Systems 4.5.4 Documentation FiberRunner Design tools Panduit provides design tools for AutoCAD and VISIO that speed system design, specification and documentation.

GridRunner Design tools Panduit provides design tools for AutoCAD and VISIO that speed system design, specification and documentation.

AUTOCAD** FiberRUNNER™ Design Tool for AutoCAD** includes: • Available on free CD - SA-FRCD02 • Drag & Drop • Design in 2D or 3D • BOM Generator • Allows FIBERRUNNER to be incorporated into working drawings

AUTOCAD** GRIDRUNNER™ Design Tool for AutoCAD** includes: • Drag & Drop Functionality • Ability to design in 2D and 3D • Versions compatible with AutoCAD** and AutoCAD LT** • Automated BOM Generator • Available on CD, SA-FRCD02 free through Customer Service

VISIO* VISIO* Layout Tool includes: • Free download from panduit.com • Drag & Drop • BOM Generator • Great for incorporating visuals into proposals *VISIO is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United

VISIO* Data Center VISIO* Layout Tool includes: • Drag & Drop Functionality • Ability to design in 2D (stencils for three different views are provided) • Automated BOM Generator • Free download from: www.panduit.com/gridrunner/visio

States and/or other countries. **AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

*VISIO is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. **AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-81

Section 4.6: Wire Management 4.6

Wire Management

One of the most critical layers for the physical infrastructure is the management of wires encountered throughout the various environments. The physical infrastructure must be specified with enough support, environmental rating, and protection features to ensure that components will perform consistently and reliably. Wire management can often times be overlooked, but as the industry transitions to more integration of sensors and automation components out onto machines and into harsher environments, it will be an essential area for consideration. Environmental factors in the space can range from extreme cold or hot temperatures outdoors or in a process line to humidity. In addition, chemical exposure can degrade insulation to vibration or shock that can cause mechanical connection failures. The MICE rating system allows these factors to be categorized and analyzed for mitigation. Wires and cables must be protected in different ways within these various environments. Cable bend radius control and excessive deformation through over tensioning of cable ties and mounts are additional items you need to consider.

STANDARDS and CODES TIA/EIA-568-B TIA/EIA-568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard) covers structured cabling systems (both balanced copper cabling and fiber optic cabling) for commercial buildings, and between buildings in campus environments. The bulk of the standards define cabling types, distances, connectors, cable system architectures, cable termination standards and performance characteristics, cable installation requirements, and methods of testing installed cable. TIA/EIA-569-A TIA/EIA-569-A (Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces) provides design specifications and guidance for building facilities relating to telecommunications cabling systems and components. Bend radius control of conductors also warrant consideration in this area.

UL 1565 – Wire Positioning Devices This standard applies to those metallic and nonmetallic devices used for positioning – which may include bundling and securing – or to a limited extent supporting cable, wire, conduit, or tubing of a wiring system in electrical installations, to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons. This standard applies to, but is not limited to, cable ties, cable tie mounting blocks, cable clamps, cable and conduit clips, and non-raceway ducts. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code This Code covers the installation of electrical conductors, equipment, and raceways; signaling and communications conductors, equipment, and raceways; and optical fiber cables and raceways for installations used by the electric utility, such as office buildings, warehouses, garages, and machine shops. UL 94 – Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances These requirements cover tests for flammability of polymeric materials used for parts in devices and appliances. They are intended to serve as a preliminary indication of their acceptability with respect to flammability for a particular application. UL 224 VW1 – Vertical Wire Flame Test Samples of fully recovered tubing are placed over a length of fine spring steel music wire. The test requires the precise placement of a controlled flame that contacts the heat shrink tubing. The flame is applied in five 15-second intervals with a time period between applications. If the flame extinguishes immediately after the first flame removal, subsequent flame applications are made to the tubing. Duration of specimen flaming is noted. A piece of surgical cotton is placed under the specimen. If a flaming or glowing piece of tubing drips and ignites the cotton, this is also noted.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-82

Section 4.6: Wire Management 4.6.1 Selection 4.6.1.1 Abrasion Protection Full Coverage. Choose from heat shrink, braided sleeving, CLT, Pan-Wrap™ Split Harness Wrap, spiral wrap, and grommet edging. All product lines are available in various sizes and materials to meet the application needs. Selecting the Appropriate Heat Shrink. Generally, the largest tube that shrinks down tightly onto an object should be chosen. This allows the heat shrink tubing maximum stress relief and this will yield the longest service life. Example: A multi-conductor cable needs to be covered with HSTT Type Heat Shrink. The area to be covered has a measured outside diameter of .700” (17.8mm). The two possibilities are HSTT75-48-5 and HSTT100-48-5. Part Number

Expanded I.D.

Recovered I.D.

In. (mm)

In. (mm)

HSTT75-48-5

.750 (19.0)

.375 (9.5)

HSTT100-48-5

1.00 (25.4)

.500 (12.7)

The proper choice is HSTT100-48-5 since the tube will recover more than HSTT75-48-5. The HSTT75-48-5 and HSTTAF100-48-5 will fit over the .700” (17.8mm) outside diameter; however, this is not the proper choice since the recovered I.D. is smaller than the HSTTAF100-48-5. In general, heat shrink should recover at least 10% - 20% to reduce stress and yield the longest service life.

Figure 4.6-1. Approximate Wire Outside Diameter Chart

Table 4.6-1 indicates the approximate outside diameter of various electrical wires. Utilize this table when selecting abrasion protection or cable accessory products, such as heat shrink or fixed diameter cable clamps.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-83

Section 4.6: Wire Management Building an Abrasion Solution Braided Sleeving

Highly flexible open weave for abrasion protection; fray resistant available

Corrugated Loom Tubing

Provides protection for cables; slit or solid wall

Grommet Edging

Protect cables from sharp edges; solid or slotted; adhesive lined available

Heat Shrink (4: 1)

Heatshrink insulates and protects cables; 4:1 shrink ratio for terminated wires; adhesive lined

Heat Shrink Thin Wall

Standard thin wall heatshrink insulates and protects cables; 2:1 shrink ratio

PAN-WRAP™ Split Harness Wrap

Maintains uniform bundle with improved flexibility and abrasion protection

Spiral Wrap

Harness multiple cables into a single bundle while allowing breakouts; multiple colors available for identification purposes

4.6.1.2 Cable Ties and Installation Tooling Cable tie products are used to bundle, mount and identify in countless indoor, outdoor and harsh environment applications. Panduit offers a wide breadth of cable tie designs, sizes and specialty materials to address customer wire management challenges throughout the industrial space.

The PANDUIT Material Selection Guide (Table 4.6-2) will help you select the most appropriate specialty cable tie material based on industrial application / MICE requirements. Table 4.6-3 lists recommended PANDUIT products for Control Panel and On-Machine Applications.

Cable tie installation tools range from high speed automatic systems to hand operated tools; all with consistent, reliable performance that provide a flush cable tie cut-off limiting exposure to sharp edges. Panduit installation tools are light weight, ergonomic, designed for ease of use and reduce repetitive stress injuries. These tools also provide speed in installation to reduce installed cost. Control Panel and On-Machine Applications. Environmental factors on the factory floor can range from extreme cold or hot temperatures to humidity or chemical exposure that can degrade insulation, to vibration or shock that can cause mechanical failures of connections.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-84

Section 4.6: Wire Management Figure 4.6-2a. PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-85

Section 4.6: Wire Management Table 4.6-2b PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide (continued)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-86

Section 4.6: Wire Management Figure 4.6-2c. PANDUIT Cable Tie Material Selection Guide (continued)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-87

Section 4.6: Wire Management Figure 4.6-3. Cable Ties Recommended for Control Panel and On-Machine Applications PANDUIT Part #

Description

PANDUIT Part #

Description

PLT**-M

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Nylon 6.6, 1”-4” Bundle Diameter (M,I,S Cross sections)

PLT**-M0

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1”-4” Bundle Diameter, (M,I,S Cross sections)

PLC2S-S10-M*

PAN-TY® Clamp Tie - Nylon 6.6, 2” Bundle Diameter, S Cross section (Heat stabilized also available)

PLWP**-**

PAN-TY® Push Mount Tie - Weather Resistant Nylon 6.6, 1”-2” Bundle Diameter, (M,S Cross sections), (Heat stabilized and weather resistant also available)

PLM2S-M*

PAN-TY® Marker Tie - Nylon 6.6, PFX-0 2” Bundle Diameter, S Cross section (Heat stabilized also available)

Black Marking Pen

PLT**-M30

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Heat Stabilized Nylon 6.6,1”-4” Bundle Diameter (M,S Cross sections)

PLT**-C186

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Metal Detectable Polypropylene, 1”-4” Bundle Diameter , (M,S Cross sections)

PLT**-M109

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Polypropylene, 1”-4” Bundle Diameter (M,S,H Cross sections)

PLT**-*76

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - Tefzel, 1”-4” Bundle Diameter, (M,I,S,H Cross sections)

PLT*S-M702Y

PAN-TY® Cable Tie - HALAR, Plenum Rated, Flame Retardant, 2”-3” Bundle Diameter, S Cross section

GTS

Cable Tie Tool - Manual InstallSM,M,I,S

GTH

Cable Tie Tool - Manual InstallS,HS,LH,H

PTH

Cable Tie Tool - Pneumatic InstallS,HS,LH,H

Control Room, Network Distribution, and Zone Cabling Enclosure Applications. PANDUIT has a comprehensive offering of cable ties that deliver reliability by protecting against over tensioning of high performance fiber and copper cables. Table 4.6-4 lists recommended PANDUIT products for control room, network distribution, and zone cabling Enclosure applications. • TAK-TY® Hook & Loop Cable Ties. The Hook & Loop fabric maintains network data integrity by protecting against over-tensioning, unraveling and de-lamination. These ties are adjustable, releasable and reusable up to hundreds of times – ideal for applications requiring frequent moves, adds or changes. A wide range of designs, sizes and colors provides flexibility and an aesthetically pleasing appearance. Also available is custom printing text and logos on Hook & Loop ties for identification and promotional purposes.

• Elastomeric Cable Ties. The Elastomeric Cable Tie is an innovative design with elastic material that provides safe and reliable cable bundling preventing over tensioning. The soft material has no sharp edges, promoting worker safety. These flexible ties cinch the cable bundle preventing lateral movement along the bundle. The UL94V-0 flammability rating and Halogen free construction ensures compliance with environmental and industry requirements. The releasable design accommodates frequent moves, adds and changes. These ties are weather and UV resistant, suitable for bundling sensitive fiber and copper cables in both outdoor as well as indoor applications.

• TAK-TAPE™ Hook & Loop Rolls. Strong, low profile material is thin and flexible to quickly wrap around bundles. TAK-TAPE™ is a cost-effective solution for general purpose bundling. The continuous rolls can be cut to size, and the fabric is adjustable, releasable and reusable.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-88

Section 4.6: Wire Management • ULTRA-CINCH™ Hook & Loop Ties. Exclusive Hook & Loop material with hooks and loops on same side allows user to secure a greater range of bundle diameters, including smaller bundles. A low profile contoured cinch ring reduces overall bundle size. These ties are adjustable, releasable and reusable hundreds of times. A tapered tip speeds installation and a strong brass grommet on select styles assure reliable installations that resist pullout. A wide range of colors is available for color-coding requirements. PANDUIT’s Cable Bundle Organizing Tool efficiently arranges up to 24 data cables to optimize bundle size and improve installed appearance prior to installing Panduit hook and loop or Elastomeric cable ties. This user friendly tool accommodates a wide range of cable diameters and reduces cable bundling time by 50% compared to manual methods. Another important product is the Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention Device which reduces the risk of equipment downtime due to accidental plug disconnection from select PANDUIT power outlet units. This product helps manage risk in network installations by enabling safe and secure power connections for greater reliability of the physical infrastructure. The retention device is compatible with IEC 320 C13/C14 outlet socket and plug models, accommodating various plug strain relief heights and cable insulation diameters. The releasable design is UL 94V-0 flammability rated and includes an integrated label area to identify outlet sockets and cords.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-89

Section 4.6: Wire Management

TAK-TY ® Loop Ties

TAK-TY ® Strip Ties

TAK-TY ® Rolls

TAK-TY ® Stacked Strips

Slot allows for pre-wrapping

Rolls perforated in convenient

Continuous rolls of 15’ and 75’

Eliminate cutting and staging

of bundles

6”, 8” or 12” strips for use with

can be cut to any length

7” strips (100 pieces)

pre-determined bundle sizes

TAK-TY ® Cable Ties –

Ultra-Cinch™ Ties

Elastomeric Cable Ties

TAK-TAPE ™ Rolls

Plenum Rated UL approved

Cinch ring accommodates

UL 94V-0 flammability rating

General purpose fastener

for use in air handling spaces

tighter bundles

Safe and releasable

Hook & Loop Wrap Marker Ties

Cable Bundle Organizing Tool

Custom Imprinting Service

POU Plug Retention Device

Write-on identification area

Arrange 24 data cables prior to

Used for identification, labeling

Reduce the risk of equipment

Custom Imprinting Available

installing cable ties

and promotional purposes

downtime due to accidental plug disconnection

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-90

Section 4.6: Wire Management Fig. 4.6-4. Cable Ties Recommended for Control Room, Network Distribution, and Zone Cabling Enclosure Applications Part Numbers

Description

HLM-15R0

HLM Series 15 Ft. Roll x .330” Width, Black

HLS-75R0

HLS Series 75 Ft. Roll x .75” Width, Black

HLB2S-C0

100 Pc TAK-TY Stacked Strips, 7” Strip Tie, 0.75” Width, Black

HLS3S-X0

HLS Series 12” Strip Tie, Black

HLT*I-X0

HLT Series 8-12” Loop Tie, Black

HLTP2I-X12

HLTP Series 8” Loop Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

HLSP3S-X12

HLSP Series 12” Strip Tie, UL, Plenum UL94V-2 - Maroon

CBOT24K

Cable Bundle Organizing Tool

PRPC13-69 PRPC13-60

Power Outlet Unit Plug Retention Device - Only used with select Panduit Power Outlet Units (Natural and BLK colors)

ERT*M-C20

8.5-11” Elastomeric Cable Tie, Network Cable safe, Weather/UV Resistant, UL94V-0 Flammability Rating

4.6.1.3 Adhesive Backed Mounts PANDUIT adhesive mounts provide a quick, economical, and dependable method of supporting, routing, and protecting wires and cables. Some are used with PANDUIT cable ties and others can be used without cable ties. Adhesive backed mounts adhere to a variety of surfaces. This alternative to mechanical fasteners offers the advantage of lower installed cost with safe, easy-to-use, quality products.

General Mount Guidelines. PANDUIT pressure sensitive adhesive (foam tape) mounts are intended to secure wire bundles or other light objects to smooth surfaces. These mounts are not designed to support excessive loads and should not be used when the maximum expected load exceeds the rated capacity of the mount. Choosing the Right Adhesive. PANDUIT offers two standard pressure sensitive foam tapes which are available on most adhesive backed wiring accessories products. The general purpose tape is produced with a rubber based adhesive and is identified by an “-A” in the part number. This tape develops its strength extremely fast and can be used in environments with temperatures ranging from -40°F (-40°C) to +120°F (49°C). We recommend that rubberbased adhesive mounts dwell 2 hours after installation, prior to loading. Rubber-based adhesive tape is the best choice for most adhesive mount applications, including power coated surfaces. Acrylic-based adhesive tape is also available and is identified by an “-AT” in the part number. This tape is for use in environments where continuous exposure to temperatures as high as 180°F (82°C) is possible. Acrylic-based adhesive develops its maximum strength over a longer period of time than rubber-based adhesive. It is recommended that acrylic adhesive mounts dwell 8 hours after installation, prior to loading. Acrylic based adhesive tape is a good choice for environments with prolonged exposure to UV rays or temperatures about 120°F (49°C). Proper Storage Conditions. All PANDUIT adhesive products have an expiration date printed on the package label. For rubber and acrylic based foam tape adhesives, store in temperatures of 70°F (21°C) and 45% Relative Humidity (R.H.).

Applications include: • To route wires in control panels and switchboards • To support bundles of wires away from moving me chanical devices • Routing and harnessing cables, both indoors and out, to prevent safety hazards • To organize flat cables in many locations with low profile construction • Ideal for supporting wire bundles where holes cannot be made in the substrate • To separate groups of wires for identification ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-91

Section 4.6: Wire Management Adhesive Backed Latching Clips

Latching cover withstands vibration

Latching Wire Clip

Latching wire clip with convenient releasable latch

Adhesive Backed Mounts

Adhesive backed cable tie mounts; rubber or acrylic adhesive

Marker Plates

Install as flags, tags, or wraparound labels to clearly identify harnesses

Adhesive Cord Clip

Adhesive cord clip that easily Metal Adhesive Cord Clip allows cables to snap into place

Metal adhesive backed cord clip; opens and closes to add/ remove cables

Beveled Entry Clip

Beveled entry allows for easy insertion of cable bundles

Multiple Bridge Adhesive Backed Mounts

Multiple bridge adhesive backed mount; has four cable tie mount bridges

Cable Holder

Releasable latch allows cables to be added/removed; adhesive/screw mount

Push Mount Assemblies

Unique barb design with u mbrella tensioning; pre-assembled with standard cable tie

Cable Spacers

Used to separate and/or hang cables

Push Mounts with Umbrellas

Unique barb design with umbrella tensioning

Cable Tie Mounts

Low profile, cradle design keeps cables close to mounting surface; screw mount

Standard Fixed Diameter Clamps

Standard size cable clamps; install with #8 (M4) screw

Control Panel Mounts

Installed behind control panel switches

Standard Multiple Tie Plates

Low profile design used to separate closely bundled cables

Dynamic Cable Manager

Dynamic cable manager for panel strain relief; adhesive backed mount

Swivel Mounts

Separates bundles to avoid abrasion; swivels 360 degrees

Heavy-Duty Fixed Diameter Clamps

Heavy-duty cable clamps; install with #10 (M5) screw

Tie Anchor Mounts

4-way cable tie orientation; small overall size

Rounded Edge Multiple Tie Plates

Heavy-duty design used to sep- Vertical Cord Clip arate closely bundled cables

J-PRO™ Cable Support System

Durable non-metallic J-hooks can manage/support large numbers of cables

Funnel entry design allows for easy installation of cables

Building an Adhesive-Backed Mounting Solution 4.6.1.4 Cable Accessories Product Lines A Cable Management System shall be used to provide a neat and efficient means for routing and protecting fiber and copper cables and patch cords on telecommunication racks and enclosures. The system shall be a complete cable management system comprised of vertical cable managers, horizontal cable manager, and cable management accessories used throughout the cabling system. The system shall protect network investment by maintaining system performance, controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief.

Vertical D-Rings. A vertical cable management solution of flexible Vertical D-rings shall be used on standard communication racks. The Vertical D-rings used for open access shall be manufactured from a Polycarbonate material and shall be black in color. The vertical cable management D-rings shall be a one-piece design. The front arm of the product shall be able to rotate ninety degrees to allow entire cable bundles to be inserted. The vertical cable management solution of flexible D-rings shall be installed with two screws less than 0.25” in diameter.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-92

Section 4.6: Wire Management Part Number

Outside Dimensions (LxW)

Capacity (.187” UTP)

Capacity (.25”ScTP)

Capacity (3mm Fiber)

CMVDR1

5.7”x2”

96

48

252

CMVDR1S

3.3”x2”

52

32

132

CMVDR2

5.7”x3”

192

96

504

CMVDR2S

3.3”x3”

96

48

252

CMVDRC

5.6”x8”

400

200

1000

TAK-TY ® Hook & Loop Cable Tie Mounts. A mounting device shall be used with ¾” maximum TAK-TY ® Cable Ties to secure bundles of communication cabling in cabinets, closets or other environments where cable management is a concern. Adhesive backed products can be utilized to bundle up to .38 lbs. of communication cable. If more than .38 lbs. of holding force is required, a fastener such as a #6 screw shall be used. Part Number

Mounting Method

Color

ABMT-A-C

Rubber Adhesive

Natural

ABMT-A-C20

Rubber Adhesive

Black

ABMT-S6-C

#6(M3) Screw

Natural

ABMT-S6-C20

#6(M3) Screw

Black

ABMT-S6-C60*

#6(M3) Screw

Black

ABMT-S6-C69*

#6(M3) Screw

Natural

* Flame retardant products are manufactured from a material that is rated UL94V-0.

Waterfall Accessories. Cable Management Waterfall Accessories shall be utilized to transfer communication cable from ladder racks to enclosures or equipment racks below. These cable management waterfall systems shall maintain 1” bend radius control in both vertical and horizontal directions. The system shall be modular in order to allow for multiple widths. Part Number

Description

Color

CMW-KIT

Waterfall Kit

Black

CMW-KIT10

Waterfall Kit

White

CMWB

Waterfall Base

Black

CMWB10

Waterfall Base

White

CMWW

Waterfall Wing

Black

CMWW10

Waterfall Wing

White

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-93

Section 4.6: Wire Management Stackable Cable Rack Spacers. Stackable Cable Rack Spacers shall be utilized to route bulk fiber optic cable or high performance copper communication cable bundles. Stackable Cable Rack Spacers shall be utilized in communication closets and other interior locations where cables and cable bundles are routed along traditional ladder racks that consist of rungs and stringers. The Stackable Cable Rack Spacers shall be applied on every rung up to a recommended maximum stack height. Dovetail slots and a positive latching mechanism shall provide a secure locking feature. Part Number

Cable Bundles

Bundle Diameter

Recommended Stack Ht.

CRS6-X

6

.8”

5

CRS1-X

1

.8”

5

CRS4-125-X

4

1.25”

4

CRS1-125-X

1

1.25”

1

Threaded Rod Cover. The Threaded Rod Cover shall be utilized to protect communication cable from abrasion caused by contact with threaded rod. The Threaded Rod Cover shall be manufactured from a gray flame-retardant polyethylene material that is UL94V-0 rated. The material shall be pliable to allow for easy installation. Part Number

For Threaded Rod Size

Length

TRC18FR-X8

1/2”x5/8”

18”

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-94

Section 4.6: Wire Management J-MOD ™ Cable Support System. Open top cable supports shall be utilized as a pathway for communication cabling. The J Hook cable supports shall be manufactured from a non-conductive material suitable for use in air-handling spaces. The cable support must maintain complete horizontal and vertical 1” bend radius control and must manage up to 50 four-pair UTP cables. The system must allow for the ability to add future cable routing capacity. The cable support must provide the ability to retain the cable bundle with TAK-TY ® Hook & Loop Cable Ties. Part Number

Description

Material*

Maximum Static Load (Lbs.)

JMJH2W-X20+

J Hook for wall moutn applictions

Nylon

30

JMJH2-X20+

J Hook for use with brackets

Nylon”

30

JMCB-X

Ceiling Bracket

Galvanized Steel

120

JMCMB25-1-X

Ceiling Mount Bracket (1 level)

Galvanized Steel

180

JMCMB25-3-X**

Drop Wire Bracket (3 level)

Galvanized Steel

180

JMDWB-1-X

Drop Wire Bracket (1 level)

Galvanized Steel

20

JMDWB-3X**

Drop Wire Bracket (3 level)

Galvanized Steel

40

JMTRB38-1-X

Threaded Rod Bracket (1 level)

Galvanized Steel

180

JMTRB38-3-X**

Threaded Rod Bracket (3 level)

Galvanized Steel

180

JMSBCB87-1-X

Screw=on Beam Clamp Bracket (1 level)

Galvanized Steel

180

JMSBCB887-3-X**

Screw-on Beam clamp Bracket (3 level)

Galvanized Steel

180

** Not for use with chaining brackets + Available in natural and black * Suitable for use in air handling spaces per UL 2043. Listed in accordance with CAN/ULC 8102.2 when mounted as single units on/in pairs. Minimum spacing of 1 ft. (1220mm) required between mount points. (Flame Spread Rating - 0, Smoke Developed Classification - 30”)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-95

Section 4.6: Wire Management J-PRO ™ Cable Support System. Open top cable supports shall be utilized as a pathway for communication cabling. The J Hook cable supports shall be manufactured from a non-conductive material suitable for use in air-handling spaces. The pre-riveted J Hook assemblies must maintain complete horizontal and vertical 1” bend radius control. The cable support must provide the ability to retain the cable bundle with TAK-TY ® Hook & Loop Cable Ties. Part Number

Part Description

Bundle Capacity (In)

Material*

Static Load Rating (Lbs.)

JP75W-120

J Hook for wall mount application One 1/4” (M6) mounting hole for user supplied screw

0.75

Nylon 6.6

15

JP131W-L20

J Hook for wall mount application One 1/4” (M6) mounting hole for user supplied screw

1.31

Nylon 6.6

20

JP2WT-20

J Hook for wall mount application One 1/4” (M6) mounting hole for user supplied screw”

3

Nylon 6.6

30

JP4W-X20

J Hook for wall mount application One 1/4” (M6) mounting hole for user supplied screw

4

Nylon 6.6

100

4.6.2

Installation

4.6.2.1 Mount Spacing To determine the number of mounts to use in a given application, the following formula can be used as a guideline: (Cable or weight (Lbs. /ft.)/Static Load rating of Mount (Lbs./mt.) = Spacing (Mounts/Ft.) 4.6.2.2 Adhesive Backed Mounts Surface Preparation. For best results, PANDUIT adhesive mounts should be applied to clean, dry, grease-free surfaces. We recommend that the surface be cleaned prior to mount installation. For rubber and acrylic based foam tape adhesives, a blend of isopropyl alcohol and water 50/50 may be used to clean most surfaces.

Proper Installation Techniques for Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Mounts. For proper installation of adhesive mounts with foam tape, simply remove the release liner and place the mount in the desired location. Avoid touching the adhesive prior to positioning the mount. Apply firm pressure to the mount for 5 seconds to insure proper adhesion. 1. Clean surface with a clean cloth and isopropyl alcohol 2. Allow surface to air dry 3. Remove the release liner, being careful not to touch the adhesive 4. Apply full thumb pressure for at least 5 seconds 5. Allow mount to properly dwell

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-96

Section 4.6: Wire Management 4.6.2.3 Dynamic Cable Manager •





For best results, PANDUIT rubber adhesive mounts should be applied to clean, dry, grease-free sur faces. It is recommended that the surface be cleaned prior to mount installation with a blend of isopropyl alcohol and water 50/50. For proper installation, simply remove the release liner and place the mount in the desired location. Avoid touching the adhesive prior to positioning the mount. Apply firm pressure to the mount for 5 seconds to insure proper adhesion. Allow the mount to properly dwell. Ball-and-socket tether must hang down from the mount with bundle installed below the mount.



Unsupported bundle length should be no more than 1.27 lbs. (see illustration below, unsupported bundle length is shown as figure “A”)



There must be no rigid mounts in line with the dynamic cable manager. These mounts would restrict bundle motion.



The mounts should not be placed directly next to the hinge. A suggested minimum of 1” between edge of part and hinge is recommended.



Please see below for a comparison of typical current installations using static mounts and suggested installation using dynamic cable manager mounts.

Typical current installations using static mounts

Suggested installation using dynamic cable manager mounts

.v vzgadfsgd gd g df .vzgadfsgdf

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-97

Section 4.7: Identification 4.7

Identification

Proper identification is crucial to the successful design, installation, and management of the industrial automation infrastructure components. Identification provides these important benefits: • • •

Determining locations of components Defining the system connections Communicating safety hazards

It is this determining, defining, and communicating that provide quick, clear direction that is necessary to accurately and safely install, maintain, and repair critical industrial automation infrastructure components resulting in efficient and reliable performance.

STANDARDS and CODES Although no standards currently define labeling practices in the industrial automation space, several existing standards can be used as a guide. These standards are developed by organizations committed to the best practices for network and electrical infrastructure.

4.7.1

Selection

4.7.1.1 Control Room Infrastructure The control room environment is much like a data center in that it provides all the computing, storage, and network resources for data communication across the industrial automation space. The identification of infrastructure in this area is based on the TIA/EIA-606A, Addendum 1 Standard for Data Centers. The basis of this standard is the physical location of connection ports. Grid Labeling. Component locations in the control room are determined by using an X-Y coordinate system that is usually based on the floor tile system in the control room space. If there is not a raised floor then a 24 inch x 24 inch (61cm x 61cm) grid may be applied to the room. By using alphabetical designations on one axis of the room and numerical designations on the other axis of the room, you can create a series of alphanumeric designations that can be established for each floor tile or grid in a control room space. These floor tile designations are the basis for determining the location of control room devices.

TIA/EIA-606A Identification and Administration of Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure TIA/EIA-606A, Addendum 1 Identification and Administration of Equipment Rooms and Data Centers National Electric Code – NFPA 70 UL 508A – Industrial Control Panel

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-98

Section 4.7: Identification Cabinet/Rack Labeling . The floor tile or grid designations are used to identify each cabinet or rack in the control room. The cabinet/rack location is based on which floor tile the right front corner of the cabinet/rack rests upon. Cabinets and racks should have location labels applied to the top and bottom of both the front and rear of the device. These labels should be visible whether or not doors are closed or opened on the cabinets. A typical cabinet/rack label would have the following scheme:

AB04

This identifier would define that the cabinet/rack is located with its right front corner at the intersection of row AB and column 04. Panel Labeling. Once the cabinet/rack identifiers are established, the various panels in the cabinet/rack should be identified. The designation for the panel positions in a cabinet/rack can be either an alphabetic designation or a two-digit number that represent the rack unit number (RU) where the top-left mounting screw lands in the cabinet/rack. Using the RU method provides the control room manager with greater flexibility since it allows for panels and equipment to be added or removed later without disrupting the designation of panel identifiers.

This identifier would define that the top left mounting screw of the panel is located at the 24th rack unit position in the cabinet/rack located grid AB04 in the control room. Port Labeling. Now that cabinets/racks and panels in each rack are identified, the next task is to establish identifiers for each port on a panel. Port identifiers are very important because they define the connectivity of cabling within the control room infrastructure. Many patch panels come from suppliers with numbers already screen-printed above the ports; if this is the case there is no need to re-label those patch panels. If the patch panels are not pre-printed with port numbers, labels will need to be created to identify the port numbers. The numbering sequence should proceed from left to right and top to bottom for all ports on a patch panel. The number of digits used for all numbers on a patch panel should be consistent with the total number of ports on that patch panel. For example, a 48-port patch panel should be labeled 01 through 48 and a 144-port patch panel should be labeled 001 through 144. In a data center, a typical port label would have the following scheme:

AB04-24:01

A typical panel label would have the following scheme:

AB04-24

This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port 01 located on panel 24 in cabinet/rack AB04. However, in a control room environment, this information is somewhat redundant given that the cabinet/rack and panel are clearly identified and are not usually required information on the port label, as the cabinet/rack and panel are apparent to the viewer who is standing at the location of the port.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-99

Section 4.7: Identification Therefore, a typical control room port label would have the following scheme:

01 This identifier defines that this is port 01. Cable Labeling and Patch Cord Labeling. The cabling on the back and front of the cabinet/rack must be identified. Labeling of cables on the back of the panel is considered cable labeling and the labeling of cables connected to the front of the panel is considered patch cord/ equipment cord labeling. Cable Labels Cables labels are identified with information that defines the connection between the near end panel connection and the far end panel connection. A near end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. The far end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. A typical cable label would arrange near end / far end information in the following scheme:

AB04-24:01/AB07-36:13

Patch Cord/Equipment Cord Labels. Patch cord/equipment cord labels are identified with information that defines the connection between the near end patch panel front connections and the far end patch panel front connections or equipment connections. A near end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/ rack location, panel location, and port location. The far end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. A typical patch cord label would arrange near end / far end information in the following scheme:

AB04-24:01/AB04-36:13

This identifier would be decoded to define the patch cord connection between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going to the same cabinet panel 36 port 13. The far end of the cable would have a label that would have the same information but in the reverse order. A typical equipment cord label would information in the following scheme:

AB04-24:01/AB04-Server2:A

This identifier would be decoded to define that the cable connects between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going to cabinet AB07 panel 36 port 13. The far end of the cable would have a label that would have the same information in the reverse order.

This identifier would be decoded to define the equipment cord connection between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going to the same cabinet port A on equipment named Server2. Rack unit location could be substituted for equipment name if necessary.

Patch Panel Connectivity.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-100

Section 4.7: Identification Patch Panel connectivity is considered the most important area of network infrastructure labeling because it defines the critical connections between ports on patch panels and equipment. This information defines the connections between the near-end ports and the far-end ports. This labeling can define the connection of a range of ports on a panel or just define the connection for two individual ports. A typical patch panel connectivity label would arrange near end / far end information in the following scheme:

AB04-24:ports 01-12/ AB07-36:ports 25-36

The typical scheme for a grounding busbar would be:

2-R201-TGB This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the telecommunications grounding busbar on floor 2 in space R201. The typical scheme for the busbar connections would be:

1-B301-TMGB/2-R201TGB This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the conductor that connects the main telecommunications grounding busbar located on floor 1 in space B301 to the telecommunications grounding busbar on floor 2 in space R201. Power Cables. Labeling of the power system involves the labeling of the cables feeding power outlet units (POU) with information which define the source of power to the POU. This information would include the distribution panel and the circuit that feeds the POU.

This identifier would be decoded to define that the ports 01 through 12 on panel 24 of cabinet AB04 connect to ports 25 through 36 on panel 36 of cabinet AB07. Grounding and Bonding. Labeling of the grounding and bonding system involves the identification of the main grounding busbar, grounding busbars, conductors connecting busbars, conductors connecting devices to busbars, and equalizing conductors. The typical scheme for the main grounding busbar would be:

1-B301-TMGB This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) located on floor 1 in space B301.

A typical scheme for the power labeling would be:

AB03A-PP21-15 This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the power cable that connects POU A located in rack/cabinet AB03 to circuit breaker 15 in power panel 21. 4.7.1.2

Network Infrastructure

The Network Infrastructure can be identified using the guidance of TIA/EIA-606A. Cable Labels Cable labels are identified with information that defines the connection between the near end connection and the far end connection. A near end connection identifier would consist of the location of the enclosure, the panel location in the enclosure, and the port location. The far end connection identifier would consist of the location of the enclosure, the panel location in the enclosure, and port location. For cables that do not connect between patch panels the machine name or location and the port number can be used.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-101

Section 4.7: Identification A typical cable label would arrange near end / far end information in the following scheme:

AB04-24:01/1ZB.01-2:01 (Origination Port / Destination Port)

Firestopping. Each firestopping location shall be labeled at each location where firestopping is installed, on each side of the penetrated fire barrier, within 12 inches (300mm) of the firestopping material. A typical firestopping label would arrange information in the following scheme:

1-FSL01(2) This identifier would be decoded to define the cable connects between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 in the control room going to port 01 in patch panel 2 located in zone box #1 on the first floor of the facility. The far end of the cable would have a label that would have the same information but in the reverse order. Pathways. Cable Pathways are identified with information that defines routing of the cables contained in a pathway. This information is useful for determining which pathway connects between industrial automation areas. Locating the proper pathway is necessary to remove, add, or repair a cable in the infrastructure. A typical pathway label would arrange near end / far end information in the following scheme:

AB04/1ZB.01

This identifier would be decoded to define that this is firestopping location number 01 on the first floor and that the firestopping has a two hour rating. Grounding and Bonding. Labeling of the grounding and bonding system throughout the network involves the identification of the grounding busbars, conductors connecting busbars, conductors connecting devices to busbars, and equalizing conductors. The typical scheme for a grounding busbar would be:

2-R201-TGB This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) on floor 2 in space R201.

This identifier would be decoded to define that the pathway connects between cabinet AB04 in the control room and zone enclosure #1 on the first floor of the facility.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-102

Section 4.7: Identification 4.7.1.3

Zone Cabling Enclosure Labeling

Labeling in the Zone Cabling Enclosure can be identified using the guidance of TIA/EIA-606A. Ideally the physical location of the zone cabling enclosure within the facility should be used on the label to identify the zone enclosure. This is provides a quick method of locating connections to zone cabling enclosures using information on far end cables. Often there is not a good method to assigning a physical location so then a unique number and the type of telecommunication space is used. These labels should be visible whether or not doors are closed or opened on the enclosures.

Panel Labeling The designation for the panel positions in a zone enclosure can be either an alphabetic designation or a two-digit number that represent the rack unit number (RU) where the top-left mounting screw lands in the zone enclosure. Using the RU method provides greater flexibility since it allows for panels and equipment to be added or removed later and not disrupt the designation of panel identifiers. A typical panel label would arrange near end / far end information the following scheme:

1ZB.01-2

A typical zone cabling enclosure label with a physical location would have the following scheme:

AA10

This identifier would define that the top left mounting screw of the panel is located at the 2nd rack unit position in the zone box # 1 located on the first floor of the facility. This identifier would define that the enclosure is located with at the intersection of wall marker AA and wall marker 10. A typical zone cabling enclosure label without physical location would have the following scheme:

1ZB.01 This identifier would define that the enclosure is located on the first floor and is zone cabling enclosure number 1 in the facility.

Port Labeling. Many patch panels come from the factory with numbers already screen-printed above the ports. If this is the case, there is no need to re-label those patch panels. If the patch panels are not pre-printed with port numbers then labels will need to be created to identify the port numbers. The numbering sequence should proceed from left to right and top to bottom for all ports on a patch panel. The number of digits used for all numbers on a patch panel should be consistent with the total number of ports on that patch panel. For example a 48-port patch panel should be labeled 01 through 48 and a 144-port patch panel should be labeled 001 through 144.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-103

Section 4.7: Identification A typical port label would have the following scheme:

1ZB.01-2:01

This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port 01 located on panel 2 in zone box # 1 on the first floor of the facility. This is somewhat redundant information given that the cabinet/rack and panel are clearly identified and are not usually required information on the port label since the cabinet/rack and panel are apparent to the viewer who is standing at the location of the port. Therefore a typical port label would have the following scheme:

01

4.7.1.4

Control Panel Infrastructure

Enclosure Labels Ideally, the physical location of the control panel within the facility should be used on the label to identify the control panel. This provides a quick method of locating connections to control panels using information on far end cables. Often, there is not a good method to assigning a physical location. In this case, a unique number and the type of telecommunication space are used. These labels should be visible whether or not doors are closed or opened on the enclosures. A typical control panel label with a physical location would arrange information in the following scheme:

BE24 This identifier would define that the enclosure is located with at the intersection of wall marker BE and wall marker 24. A typical control panel label without physical location would arrange information in the following scheme:

1CP.05

This identifier defines that this is port 01. Production Offices In the office area, each individual telecommunications outlet/ connector shall be labeled with the horizontal link identifier. The labeling shall appear on the connector or faceplate in a way that clearly identifies the origination of the horizontal link. A typical office outlet connection would arrange information in the following scheme:

1ZB.01-2:01 This identifier can be decoded to define that this connection originates in port 01 located on panel 2 in zone box # 1, in the following scheme:

1ZB.01-2:01 This identifier can be decoded to define that this connection originates in port 01 located on panel 2 in zone box # 1.

This identifier would define that the enclosure is located on the first floor and is control panel number 5 in the facility. Port Labeling Industrial Automation control panels can have ports located on any surface of the control panel. To delineate the location of each port in a control panel the mounting surface should be specified. The following designations can be used to clearly communication the location in the control panel of each port.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-104

Section 4.7: Identification Control Panel Part

Designation

Inside Surface (Optional)

Outside Surface (Optional)

Back Plane

BP

IBP

OBP

Panel Door

PD

IPD

OPD

Panel Right Side

PR

IPR

OPR

Panel Left Side

PL

IPL

OPL

Panel Top Side

PT

IPT

OPT

Panel Bottom Side

PB

IPB

OPB

In addition to the control panel surface each port in the control panel should be labeled with a unique number. The numbering sequence should proceed from left to right and top to bottom for all ports in a control panel. The number of digits used for all numbers in the control panel should be consistent with the total number of ports in that control panel. For example a control panel with 48 ports should be labeled 01 through 48 and a control panel with 120 ports should be labeled 001 through 120.

This is somewhat redundant information given that the control panel and surface are clearly identified and are not usually required information on the port label since the control panel and surface are apparent to the viewer who is standing at the location of the port. Therefore a typical port label would have the following scheme:

01 This identifier defines that this is port 01.

A typical port label would arrange information in the following scheme:

1CP.08-BP:01

Cable Labels Cable labels are identified with information that defines the connection between the near end connection and the far end connection. A near end connection identifier would consist of the location of the enclosure and the port location. The far end connection identifier would consist of the location of the enclosure, the panel location in the enclosure, and port location. A typical cable label would arrange near end / far end information in the following scheme:

1CP.08-BP:01/1ZB.04-2:01 (Origination Port / Destination Port)

This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port 01 located on the back plane of the control panel #8 on the first floor of the facility.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-105

Section 4.7: Identification This identifier would be decoded to define that the cable connects between port 1 on the back plane of control panel #8 located on the first floor of the facility going to port 1 on the patch panel 2 in zone box #4 on the first floor. The far end of the cable would have a label that would have the same but with the information reversed. Enclosure Markings. Labels and warning are required to communicate safety information without the use of words.

 Protective Conductor

Dangerous Electrical Voltage

Safety Function Ground

Earth Ground

UL 508A Warning Sign

NEC 70A Arc Flash Warning Sign

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-106

Section 4.7: Identification 4.7.2

Installation

The following label creation and generation products will help you clearly identify all industrial network components according to the schemes described in this section.

4.7.2.1 Label Creation

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-107

Section 4.7: Identification 4.7.2.2 Label Generation



©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-108

Section 4.8: Safety and Security 4.8

Safety and Security

Increasingly, electrical and network systems are converging throughout the physical infrastructure. In industrial environments this trend toward unifying the infrastructure has introduced new safety and security concerns, particularly at control panel locations. Acce-ssing the control panel has inherent hazards such as arc flash, shock, and the inadvertent or unauthorized disconn-ection of communication cables. All these risks have a potentially adverse impact on reliability and performance. In addition, the presence of networking physical layer hardware and cabling has the potential to introduce new safety risks. Why? Network technicians who are less familiar with control panel environments may be working in these spaces. The network infrastructure also must be secure from intruders and unauthorized changes to protect sensitive data and to ensure that system uptime and productivity goals are met. Security The physical infrastructure must be secured to maintain the highest possibly network reliability. All connections should be secured with restricted access to unused and open ports Costs associated with network downtime or security breach can be tremendous. The connections in a crowded control room rack or enclosure system are important to document and control from a security perspective. Demilitarized zones (DMZ) and their firewalls depend on segregating connections for enterprise and manufacturing layers yet mistakes or security breaches can develop if patching connections are not made properly. A manual system to identify and audit can be time consuming and difficult to maintain. Physical Infrastructure Management (PIM) technology can automate this process by monitoring these connections and serving this data to higher level systems. This management software also provides tools for improved efficiency when planning and executing changes to patching or additions to the system. A managed system with logging and configuration tracking makes your infrastructure more transparent and controlled which can be an important piece of the security strategy for a critical process plant or control system.

Safety Network technicians are not always knowledgeable of the potential hazards around control panels; therefore, proper identification of hazards, such as Arc Flash and shock is critical. It is estimated that the average total cost of an arc flash incident is around $15 million. With this in mind, having a comprehensive safety program which includes identification and control of hazardous energy can be an inexpensive form of risk mitigation. This safety program can include items such as proper Lockout/Tagout, proper arc flash labeling, Short Circuit Current Rating labeling, and the use of Data Ports so that industrial control panels can stay closed as much as possible.

STANDARDS and CODES: Safety NFPA 70E The primary National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) code that is critical for safety is NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety in the Workplace. NFPA 70E addresses the electrical safety requirements for employees’ workplaces which are essential to ensure employee safety. As physical infrastructure systems converge, an increasing number of workers are not familiar with electrical or other hazards, so applying NFPA 70E is key to having a safe workplace for all employees. One of the key areas of NFPA 70E in Industrial Automation is Arc Flash hazard identification. An important change was made in the 2009 version of NFPA 70E where article 130 states that “Equipment shall be field marked with a label containing the available incident energy or required level of PPE.” Whereas it was previously mandated that a comprehensive arc flash analysis shall be used to determine the arc flash boundary and the personal protective equipment (PPE) that people within the arc flash boundary must use, it is now also mandated that such information be posted on the equipment so that it is clearly available to all employees.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-109

Section 4.8: Safety and Security NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) The other important code is NFPA 70, which is also called the National Electric Code, is a standard for the safe installation of electrical wiring and equipment. One particular section concerning safety is Article 409, which requires that a Short Circuit Current Rating be marked on all Industrial Control Panels. Article 409.2 defines an Industrial Control Panel as: “An assembly of two or more components consisting of one of the following: (1) Power circuit components only, such as motor controllers, overload relays, fused disconnect switches, and circuit breakers. (2) Control circuit components only, such as pushbuttons, pilot lights, selector switches, timers, switches, control relays (3) A combination of power and control circuit components.” For safety purposes, Section 409.110 of the National Electric Code mandates that the Industrial Control Panel be marked with: “Short-circuit current rating of the industrial control panel based on one of the following: a. Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly b. Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method” It is also important to note that a footnote refers to the UL 508A standard, Supplement SB (see below). UL 508A UL 508A, the UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels, addresses some of the safety identification requirement for control panels in industrial automation. Section SB5.2 of UL 508A is titled “Cautionary markings”. It reads:

current-carrying parts and other components protected by this device should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of a current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced” STANDARDS and CODES: Control of Hazardous Energy OSHA 1910.147 The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) released a standard called the Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout-Tagout) which is referred to as 1910.147. This standard spells out the steps that employers must take to prevent accidents associated with hazardous energy and its control during servicing and maintenance of equipment or machinery. NFPA 70E NFPA 70 E also addresses “Establishing an Electrically Safe Work Condition” in Article 120. It is similar to the OSHA 1910.147 standard except that it is more targeted at electrical energy and not all types of energy. The requirements of both standards for controlling hazardous energy are addressed in the Installation portion of this section of this guide.

4.8.1 Selection: Security The challenge to maintain security and manage risk along all connection points is becoming a top priority for network stakeholders. Each point of connection within a network represents a risk for a potential security breach and must be safeguarded against intruders, both purposeful and accidental. This requires tight security controls to protect sensitive data running over multiple data systems and networks.

“An industrial control panel with a short circuit current rating based on the high fault short circuit current ratings of one or more components as specified in SB4.2.3 shall be marked with the word “WARNING” and the following statement: “Risk of Fire or Electric Shock – The opening of the branch-circuit protective device may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. All ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-110

Section 4.8: Safety and Security 4.8.1.1 Physical Infrastructure Management The use of integrated server and switch architectures promotes a consolidation model which incorporates a defined upgrade path, whether through capacity increases within existing enclosures and patch fields or via straightforward addition of more enclosures, patch panels, racks, and/or cabinets without costly physical migration, cut-over activities, or “rip-and-replace” schemes. Upgrades are made easier with the use of Physical Infrastructure Management (PIM) software and the complementary PANDUIT® PANVIEW iQ™ System (see Figure 4H-1), which provide real-time monitoring and visibility into dense physical layer connectivity. PIM systems are designed to increase the speed of configuring consolidated assets and applications, and to identify and resolve problems or security threats in real-time for quick resolution. LC fiber optic and RJ45 copper

structured cabling connections can be automatically tracked through the patch field. By continuously monitoring all patch field connections, a PIM system instantly identifies any interruption or disconnection and immediately notifies a network administrator of the event or can provide SNMP data that can link to higher level software systems. These actions help to ensure that any inadvertent disconnections are remedied, minimizing downtime. Likewise, disruptions caused by potential security breaches are instantly identified for quicker response. Information recorded in the PIM configuration database may be leveraged in several ways. First, the automated documentation of all configuration events can be used to track hardware assets (servers, switches) for commissioning/ decommissioning purposes. The data also may be used to meet the reporting requirements of industry regulations or to meet established SLAs, and to provide a “snapshot” of the newly consolidated network to restore connectivity as part of an emergency or disaster recovery measures.

Figure 4.8-1. PIM systems optimize a consolidation strategy and improve business agility by achieving better port utilization through superior management of network ports and IT assets.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-111

Section 4.8: Safety and Security Building a PIM Solution PanView iQ™ Physical Infrastructure Management Solution

Hardware

Patch Cords

Patch Panels

Accessories

Software

Accessories

Software

PanView™ Physical Layer Management Solution

Hardware

Patch Cords &

Patch Panels

Attachment cords

4.8.1.2

Keyed Connector Solutions

It is important to select a structured cabling system that uses a modular system of proprietary connector and adapter products to support end-to-end separation of data networks. Innovative keyed system components are available to connect all cabling elements in an enterprise running from the main equipment room to the desk, delivering best value to organizations seeking to increase security and minimize risk. Other keyed systems in the marketplace have been defeated by permitting an alien connector – either a differently keyed (or non-keyed) connector from the same manufacturer, or another manufacturer’s connector – to be substantially inserted into a keyed port. This can result in a complete optical connection and thus compromise network security. In contrast, the PANDUIT Keyed LC System is tamper-resistant and robust against intrusion, securing networks against any other connector except the appropriate matching and colorcoded PANDUIT keyed connector.

PANDUIT Keyed LC cable assembly, adapter and quicktermination connector components all feature both positive (key) and negative (keyway) elements that mechanically distinguish connections to maximize network security (see Figure 4.8-2). This combination of keys and keyways results in up to 18 different keying options, allowing a high number of discrete and secure networks to coexist in the same facility while preventing all un-alike keyed connectors and adapter ports from mating. 4.8.1.3 Physical Network Security Devices Another efficient tool in maximizing physical network reliability and security is the use of Physical Network Security devices. These devices should be universal so that they can be retrofitted in the network infrastructure and be tamperresistant, using a tool so that only authorized personnel can get access to the unused ports or connections they help to secure. They should also be used on both copper (RJ45) and fiber (LC) network connections to secure the integrity of the entire network infrastructure.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-112

Section 4.8: Safety and Security

Fig. 4.8-2. The PANDUIT Keyed LC System provides a superior level of security to fiber optic channels because its system of both keys and keyways prevents un-alike keyed PANDUIT connectors, as well as other manufacturers’ connectors, from being inserted into a PANDUIT Keyed LC Adapter port.

The Panduit Physical Network Security devices are the leading solution available in the market today to protect the physical layer of the network and are available for both copper and fiber connections. As an additional benefit, they are available in many colors, which can also be used for visual identification. For Copper, the RJ45 Lock-In device is available in standard and recessed versions to address various depths of RJ45 jacks. For example, maximum physical security is achieved on the Stratix switch by using a combination of standard and recessed devices with the downlink and uplink ports. The Panduit Physical Network Security devices are the leading solution available in the market today to protect the physical layer of the network and are available for both copper and fiber connections. As an additional benefit, they are available in many colors, which can also be used for visual identification. For Copper, the RJ45 Lock-In device is available in standard and recessed versions to address various depths of RJ45 jacks. For example, maximum physical security is achieved on the Stratix switch by using a combination of standard and recessed devices with the downlink and uplink ports.

. The PANDUIT Keyed LC System provides a superior level of security to fiber optic channels because its system of both keys and keyways prevents un-alike keyed PANDUIT connectors, as well as other manufacturers’ connectors, from being inserted into a PANDUIT Keyed LC Adapter port.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-113

Section 4.8: Safety and Security For the LC physical network security devices, the lockin duplex clip for the cable assembly connector prevents adapter latches from disengaging from the connector unless an installation/removal tool is used. The tool also enables blockout devices to be snapped in or out of LC adapters or receptacles. These tools are available from PANDUIT to limit installation or removal of lock-in and blockout devices to only authorized users. 4.8.2

Selection: Safety

4.8.2.1 Data Access Port Electricians, engineers, and network support staff often need to access the network connections internal to a control panel for configuration, programming or troubleshooting. Safety risks arise because many of these activities must be performed with the panel power on so that the machine controller and network switch are powered. Opening a ‘live’ control panel presents shock and arc flash dangers that can severely injure or even kill.

Figure 4.8-3. RJ45 Plug Lock-In device installed on patch cords secures connections to reduce network downtime, data security breaches, and hardware replacement due to theft. The RJ45 Jack Blockout Device installed in unused ports provides a simple and secure method to control access to data and deter vandalism to jacks.

A dedicated access port that is designed for secure, safe access to data connections along with a power receptacle suitable for a laptop can greatly improve the compliance with the safety mandates concerning opening live control panels. A service person can now simply open this access port and configure or program devices internal to the panel without opening the panel door. A key advantage of PANDUIT’s Data Access Port (see Figure 4.8-5, next page) is a modular construction that can accommodate a number of available interfaces for Ethernet, RS232, and other standard network connections. This adaptability is important because control systems can evolve over time requiring additional connectors to support connectivity to added devices in the panel. This modular approach allows configuring to customers’ existing needs then expanding or modifying so that this important safety feature stays useful over time as business requirements change.

 

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0



Figure 4.8-4. LC Connector Lock-In (left) and LC Duplex Adapter Blockout (right) devices further prevent unintentional moves, adds, and changes to PANDUIT Keyed LC deployments, mitigating the risk of connectors becoming accidentally dislodged or otherwise compromised.

Page 4-114

Section 4.8: Safety and Security 4.8.2.2 LOTO Devices Devices selected for Lockout / Tagout should be as universal as possible to cut down on the total number of devices needed to safely control the hazardous energy present in the infrastructure. They should also be easy-to-use so that there is no reason for employees to bypass Lockout / Tagout when performing service or maintenance on equipment or machinery.

4.8.2.3 Safety Labels It is important to keep in mind the environment when selecting labels to identify hazards. For example, it is a best-practice to use Polyester labels with high-tack adhesive to ensure the longevity of the labels and offer the widest temperature range available. Also, it is best to use one supplier for labels so that the colors and appearance of the labels are consistent throughout the workplace.

Figure 4.8-5. Data Access Ports manage risk in industrial settings by providing access to the network without opening the control panel.



Figure 4.8-7. PANDUIT recommends this label to meet the identification requirement of UL508A, as it provided space to write in the necessary Short Circuit Current Rating information

Figure 4.8-6. Arc Flash labels from PANDUIT are recommended for use: (top) label includes space to meet NFPA 70E requirements by writing the available incident energy of the required level of Personal Protective Equipment; (bottom) label contains all of the necessary information for Arc Flash and Shock hazards

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-115

Section 4.8: Safety and Security 4.8.3

INSTALLATION: Security

RJ45 Jack Blockout Device

4.8.3.1 Keyed Systems Fiber and copper keyed connectivity systems are comprised of all necessary elements (connectors, adapters, patch cords) to deploy a physically secure network infrastructure. These systems employ specialized connectors and adapters that physically prevent access to all but the network for which a user is authorized. The idea is similar to requiring a key to unlock a door. Color-Coded, Mechanical Keying Functionality. Color-coding ensures visual separation of networks by visually distinguishing connections for user convenience. IT Personnel assign each discrete network its own color, and only connectivity of that color may be used across the channel from outlets and wall plates to zone enclosures and consolidation points. Positive and negative keying features on each connector match only with corresponding features on similarly colored adapters and/or patch cords. Unwanted connections are prevented by the unique mechanical geometry associated with connectors for each color, keeping multiple networks separate and secure throughout the facility. These combined features provide true keying security by: • Limiting network access to specific functional key types • Preventing the insertion of other keyed and non-keyed connector products that would compromise the secured keyed network • Ensuring that only authorized personnel perform moves, adds, and changes to the network





Step 1: To install:

Step 2: To release:

Step 3: To remove:

snap the blockout

insert the special

retract the device

device into the jack

removal tool, which

module

attaches to the blockout device

RJ45 Lock-In Device



Installing Lock-In device onto RJ45 Plug:

Step 3:

Step 1:

Push plug into device until it

Align white line on tool with

snaps into place. Check that

white line on device.

plug is fully seated in the device.

Step 2:

Step 4:

Insert tool into device and

Rotate tool counter-clockwise

rotate tool clockwise 90°.

90° and remove tool from device.

Quick Verification of Secure Network Separation. Keyed connectivity systems provide secure data networks with quick visual verification of secure network separation at all points across the channel. These systems ensure that different personnel cannot violate the DMZ through accidental crosspatching, preventing not only a compromise of mission but also a compromise of established physical layer security protocols. In addition, for installers and similar network technicians working in dense patch field areas, the color-coding on keyed connectivity systems makes it easy to identify correct ports for fast and easy troubleshooting. With best-in-class keyed systems, the chance that a well-meaning user will successfully connect to the wrong network is greatly minimized.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-116

Section 4.8: Safety and Security Installing RJ45 Plug Into Jack Removing RJ45 Plug From Jack Insert plug into jack until plug

Step 1:

locks into place. Lightly

Align white line on tool with

pull on the cable to confirm that white line on device. plug is locked into

Step 2:

the jack.

Insert tool into device and rotate tool clockwise 180°. Step 3: Remove plug from jack. Step 4: Rotate tool counter-clockwise 180° and remove tool from device.

Removing Lock-In Device From RJ45 Plug Step 1: Align white line on tool with white line on device. Step 2: Insert tool into device and rotate tool clockwise 90°. Step 3: Use a screwdriver or fingernail to release locking tab on bottom of device. While holding release tab, push plug out of the device Step 4: Rotate tool counter-clockwise 90° and remove tool from device.

4.8.4

Installation: Safety

Several mandatory steps must be taken to deploy an effective lockout/tagout program. The first step is to conduct a hazard assessment by identifying all equipment that is used, serviced, maintained or stored. All energy sources must be documented, including the type of hazard, the location on the equipment, proper isolation procedure, and lockout device. Next, document the methods used to dissipate the stored energy and verify the isolation. The second step is to develop a detailed written energy control procedure, which contains the information identified above and also steps to de-energize and re-energize, equipment-specific drawings and diagrams, a list of employees exposed to hazards and qualified to perform lockout/tagout, and the employee in charge of the program. The third step is to ensure that a robust training program is in place. OSHA mandates that training be given at least annually, but also to new employees or employees with new responsibilities or when new equipment is acquired or a change in machines, equipment or processes presents a new hazard or a change in the energy control procedures. Levels of lockout/tagout training can be split into two main employee categories: • Authorized employees lock-out and/or tag-out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance. Their training should make them proficient in the recognition of hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of energy available in the workplace, the methods and means necessary for energy isolation, control and verification of isolation. • Affected employees are all workers who operate equipment which may be locked out/tagged out during servicing or maintenance, or whose job requires them to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed. Their training should instruct them in the purpose and use of the energy control procedure while making it clear that they should never attempt to restart or re-energize equipment which is locked out or tagged out, and that warning tags must be respected.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-117

Section 4.8: Safety and Security OSHA lists Other Employee as a third category, but for simplicity, Other Employees can be trained in the same fashion as affected employees.

PSL-P: Plug Lockout Device

The final step is to perform an annual inspection, which includes not only reviewing the company energy control procedure but also observing an instance of lockout/tagout in progress. PSL-CB: Circuit Breaker Lockout



PSL-CBL: Large Circuit Breaker Lockout (for molded-case circuit breakers) Step 1: Verify Circuit breaker is de-energized. Place PSL-CBL over breaker with handle centered in lockout opening. Step 2: Turn the toggle set screw knob and tighten firmly against breaker handle. Step 3: Rotate/flip the toggle set screw knob down Step 4: Install lock and tag and test for security. Verify that the lockout device secures the breaker handle in an off position.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-118

Section 4.8: Safety and Security PSL-WS: Wall Switch Lockout Device 1. Place the switch in the desired position. If the circuit is controlled by more than one switch, make sure that all switches are in the desired position and have a PSL-WS installed on them.

PSL-GLB: Group Lock Box

2. Place the PSL-WS lockout over switch. 3. Tighten the set screw securely with a 1/8” or smaller flathead screwdriver. Typically,one – to – two (1 – 2)) complete revolutions of the set screw are required after the screw first touches the switch. Do not over tighten the set screw or apply to lighted switches. The switch may fracture.



4. Verify that the lockout is adequately secured to the switch. 5. Insert a padlock through both holes. This will prevent access to the set screw. The PSL-WS lockout is designed for use with 9/32” diameter shackle padlocks. Smaller diameter padlocks may not adequately block access to the set screw 6. Verify that the switch cannot be moved to the undesired position. 7. Attach a safety tag. PSL-1 / PSL-1A / PSL-1.5 / PSL-1.5A: Hasps

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-119

Section 4.8: Safety and Security PSL-PEL: Pneumatic Lockout Device Step 1: Verify valve is de-

PSL-MLD: Multiple Lockout Device (Used as a gate valve lockout device)

energized. Thread end of cable

Step 1: Disconnect the

through gate valve handle and

pneumatic supply line

then through loophole of cable.

from the equipment. Protect yourself from any release 

Step 2: Place the opening of

of pressure in the machine line.

the PSL-PEL onto the locking groove of the pneumatic fitting. Use the

Step 2: With loophole

opening on the PSL-PEL that

tight against the gate

fits tightest on the

valve and lockout open,

pneumatic fitting.

continue threading end of cable through the

Step 3: Rotate the PSL-PEL

pre-notched opening of

discs to fully enclose the pneu-

lockout device.

matic fitting. Note arrows that indicate direction of rotation.

Step 3: Cinch up plastic lockout body onto cable, forming a secure bond.

Step 4: Install lock and tag and test for security. Verify that the lockout device fits securely on the pneumatic fitting and that the pneumatic supply line cannot be attached to the equip-

Step 4: Insert up to six

ment. 

padlocks and tags into holes of the hasp. Verify that the lockout device secures the gate valve in a safe or off position.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-120

Section 4.8: Safety and Security PSL-MLD: Multiple Lockout Device (used as a disconnect switch lockout device) Step 1: Verify disconnect is de-energized. Thread cable through holes on each disconnect handle. Insert end of cable through loophole and tightly hold firm near lockout point.

Step 2: Thread end of cable through prenotched opening of lockout device.

Step 3: Cinch up plastic lockout body onto cable, forming a secure bond.

Step 4: Insert up to six padlocks and tags into holes of the hasp. Verify that the lockout device secures the disconnect switches in a safe or off position.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-121

Section 4.8: Safety and Security OSHA lists Other Employee as a third category, but for simplicity, Other Employees can be trained in the same fashion as affected employees.

PSL-P: Plug Lockout Device

The final step is to perform an annual inspection, which includes not only reviewing the company energy control procedure but also observing an instance of lockout/tagout in progress. PSL-CB: Circuit Breaker Lockout



PSL-CBL: Large Circuit Breaker Lockout (for molded-case circuit breakers) Step 1: Verify Circuit breaker is de-energized. Place PSL-CBL over breaker with handle centered in lockout opening. Step 2: Turn the toggle set screw knob and tighten firmly against breaker handle. Step 3: Rotate/flip the toggle set screw knob down Step 4: Install lock and tag and test for security. Verify that the lockout device secures the breaker handle in an off position.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-122

Section 4.9: Wireless Technologies 4.9

Wireless Technologies

IEEE 802.11a / b / g Wireless access points on the market today are required to comply with current IEEE 802.11 standards. Several types of multi-standard access points are available, including singleband (802.11b/g) and dual-band (802.11a/b/g) devices.

Integrated wired and wireless networks are an essential element of successful enterprise and industrial environments. The Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is a broad term that denotes a wireless network which allows Ethernet data • The 802.11b standard was released in 1999 and defines communications as well as other rapidly developing applicawireless operation in the 2.4 GHz unlicensed frequency tions. The WLAN can be connected easily to a wired network band at a basic data rate of 11 Mb/s. to allow communication from a wireless client to anywhere • The 802.11a standard was also released in 1999 and dewithin the defined LAN or beyond. fines the wireless operation in the 5 GHz frequency band at a basic data rate of 54 Mb/s. The entry point for the wireless client is the wireless ac• The 802.11g standard released in 2003 also operates in the cess point (AP), which is a bi-directional transceiver that 2.4 GHz frequency band, but at a basic data rate of 54 Mb/s. interfaces from conventional structured cabling of the wired network to radio frequency communications required for Actual data throughput often averages to less than half of the wireless client devices. The access point is located at a theoretical data rate maximum, depending on the distance convenient point –perhaps in the ceiling of the factory floor of the user to the access point, the number of users sharing or another open, public space – and is typically connected the same access point, and the bandwidth required by the to the enterprise computing facilities by means of structured applications in use. cabling links. This frees client devices on machines and at work stations from being tethered to data outlets, instead usIEEE 802.11n (in draft) ing wireless technology to transmit to and receive Ethernet The IEEE currently is developing the 802.11n standard, traffic from the closest access point. which states a basic data rate of 600 Mb/s in both the 2.4 and 5 GHz frequency bands, with an expected actual data Distributed network topologies are increasingly bringing powthroughput between 100 and 200 Mb/s. The standard is due er, switching, and data transfer functions closer to industrial for release in late 2009, but many “Draft N” products are endpoint devices for improved network manageability and already available. It is expected that 802.11n products will scalability. Network stakeholders can use wireless techbe backward compatible with 802.11a/b/g products; however, nologies to deliver additional freedom and mobility to users the overall data rate of a mixed network will be limited by the accessing industrial Ethernet networks, as well as added top speed of legacy equipment. flexibility in deploying wireless-enabled endpoint devices to track assets throughout the warehouse and factory floor. Several new technologies are being implemented in 802.11n access points, including Multiple Input, Multiple Output STANDARDS and CODES (MIMO) antenna technology and channel bonding. MIMO While operation of the wireless network in the United States technology uses more than one antenna both in the client is unlicensed, it is regulated by the Federal Communicaand within the access point to generate multiple data paths tions Commission (FCC). The Institution of Electrical and between the client and access point in order to optimize Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 series of standards signal reception. With channel bonding, the 802.11n access defines wireless transmission parameters, including speeds, point uses two separate non-overlapping channels at the channels, and operating frequencies for the wireless LAN. same time to increase data throughput, improving over legacy Wireless access points operate on a defined channel within systems which are able to use only one channel at a time. the allowable frequency band of operation to reduce direct interference. Typically, equipment will be set to a default channel, but can self-select an alternative channel of operation if excessive interference is detected.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-123

Section 4.9: Wireless Technologies ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 TSB 162; ISO/IEC TR24704 In 2004 the International Organization for Standards (ISO) ratified telecommunications report ISO/IEC TR24704, “Information Technology – Customer Premises Cabling for Wireless Access Points,” that outlines a method of integrating APs with the structured cabling infrastructure. The standard defines a cabling grid system for wireless coverage areas, and is popular outside the United States. In 2006 the ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 committee developed Telecommunications Services Bulletin (TSB) 162, “Telecommunications Guidelines for Wireless Access Points,” for use in North America. This bulletin proposes two ways to design a coverage area (see Figure 4.9-1): a generic wireless coverage area tailored for North American buildings and a customsized coverage area per the building characteristics. 4.9.1

Installing

Because APs are commonly positioned in public areas outside the telecom room or closet, they can be subject to tampering or theft. Therefore APs should be mounted either on the wall or ceiling in secure and aesthetically pleasing enclosures that minimally affect the RF signal propagation. Such enclosures offer protection from harsh industrial environments, and must integrate with the rest of the network infrastructure by offering provisions for conduit or raceway, a demarcation outlet, and grounding.

Access points require data traffic backhauling to the wired network. The format of this traffic is 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet traffic, which travels over Category 5e cable or greater. Installing Category 6 cable is recommended, depending on equipment evolution, to extend the life of the network cabling infrastructure. Cabling infrastructure should comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, TIA-569-B, and forthcoming TIA-1005. 4.9.1.1

Network Architecture Options

Two common logical architectures are used to deploy wireless networks: individually managed wireless access points are known as “autonomous” or “distributed”, and centrally managed wireless access points are termed “lightweight” or “centralized”. In an autonomous architecture, each AP supports all necessary switching, security, and advanced networking functions necessary to route wireless traffic (see Figure 4.9-2). In this sense, autonomous APs are similar to a traditional Ethernet switch that provides data connectivity to end users, since a wireless controller is not required. In contrast, lightweight WLAN architecture hardware consists of APs that operate in conjunction with a centralized wireless controller. The difference between the physical infrastructures of lightweight and autonomous WLAN architectures is minimal; the only additional component in a lightweight architecture is the wireless controller. The APs reside at the edge (access layer) of the network to support the Physical Layer (PHY or OSI Layer 1) as well as the real-time portions of Media Access Control management, and the controller resides deeper in the LAN network at the distribution or possibly at the core layer (see Figure 4.9-2).

Figure 4.9-1. ANSI/TIA/EIA 42.7 TSB 162 - Generic (left ) and Custom (right) Wireless Cell Size ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-124

Section 4.9: Wireless Technologies Larger industrial AP deployments usually use lightweight architectures due to the operational cost efficiencies that can be achieved via group management of lightweight APs. Autonomous APs require individual management: any configuration changes can be accomplished via the console port session, a telnet session, a Web connection, or SNMP commands. If a change must be made across the entire WLAN network, every autonomous AP must be individually reconfigured. Also, autonomous APs usually have no visibility or control of neighboring APs, and thus cannot perform self-healing, client load balancing, or other advanced radio resource services.

wireless coverage is expanded with the addition of APs, the solution can be converted into a centralized lightweight architecture. Migration from an autonomous to a lightweight solution is possible with the addition of the wireless controller and an operating system upgrade to selected Cisco APs. A lightweight WLAN solution will in turn ease network-wide policy and security implementations that are of critical importance for large scale deployments. 4.9.1.2 Power Typically APs will operate at 48 volts of DC power. There are several ways to provide power to access points: • Brick” Type. A “brick” type power supply is used in the proximity of the access point to convert from 110 volts AC to the required 48 volts DC and supply this to the access point. This then means that the power supply and access point is in the vicinity of a power outlet. This may not be the case for a ceiling mounted access point and the center of a room in an office – and the cost associated with installing a new power outlet can be prohibitive.

Figure 4.9-2. Physical Layout Showing AP Deployments Powered

• Power Injector. This is an electronic device that is fed either from a power supply above or from the 110 volt outlet directly, and that provides the appropriate DC voltage on the access point side of the structured cabling. In this way the access point can be powered, but the power supply can be located at a more physically convenient point in the network.

by PoE Technologies

4.9.1.3 Power over Ethernet In contrast, a lightweight architecture eases management of large deployments by controlling all APs from a single device. Power over Ethernet (PoE) technologies enable WLAN managers to power access points over the network and realBecause the lightweight APs also have visibility and awareize the benefits of ease and speed of deployment, ease of ness of their neighboring APs, they can supervise and alert management, and enhanced security (see Section 4K of this the wireless controller if one of their neighbors becomes document). PoE solutions to power APs are very common faulty. Lightweight WLANs can be self-healing because the in industrial networks as access points often are installed controller commands neighboring APs to adjust their power levels to compensate for a failed counterpart. In addition, the long after the building is finished. This compels network stakeholders to find a power solution that avoids the cost of wireless controller can offload wireless clients to a neighrunning new AC outlets and eliminates the expense of power boring AP if a single AP becomes overloaded. These load adapters. balancing and self-healing capabilities mitigate production downtime risks by preventing disruptions to mission-critical The IEEE 802.3af PoE standard allows for a maximum of applications and processes. 15.4 W to be delivered by Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) For smaller wireless deployments requiring only a few APs, to powered devices. Upcoming standard IEEE 802.3at (exthe WLAN can be designed using autonomous APs. As pected to be ratified in 2009) would increase power delivery ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-125

Section 4.9: Wireless Technologies to a minimum of 25 W at up to 45°C maximum ambient temperature over Category 5e, 6, and 6A copper cabling. Some 802.11n access points may draw more power than provided under 802.3at; in these situations, single-port power injectors may be used to accommodate the additional power requirements of these devices. 4.9.1.4

Effective Range

A significant amount of published specification information from the access point vendors states that the access point can operate reliably typically up to 300 ft. This distance applies in an open, unobstructed environment. In reality, the effective range is very dependent on the type of building construction materials used and the specific deployment of obstacles within the building. For example, in a typical building with concrete walls with steel reinforcing bars and light drywall panels for offices or light office furniture, the coverage distance will be less than 300 ft. TSB-162 balances the needs of coverage from the wireless perspective consistent with meeting performance requirements in the structured cabling system that is used to link the access points to the wired network. The bulletin focuses on a distance of 60 ft as a starting point for consideration of the distance between access points in commercial buildings. However, industrial environments can contain metal surfaces that could reflect RF signals and affect their propagation. Therefore, we recommend that network stakeholders use an RF planner and conduct a site assessment (and in some circumstances an actual site survey) to determine the exact coverage areas and requirements.

Private Network (VPN). WLAN security also exists at the physical layer – specifically, sturdy yet aesthetic metal enclosures should be used to provide security and physical protection to access points. IPrated industrial enclosures include such features as sealed antenna bulkheads, gland plate(s), and vibration-mitigating backplates. Apertures must be drilled in these enclosures to accommodate conduit, cables, and antennas associated with the access point. WLAN security can be enhanced by remote management capabilities. During the workday, for example, RFID-enabled badges can allow the location of human resources to be monitored across the facility, an application which can be critical in sensitive or high-security business or government environments. Then overnight, remote management of the wireless system permits selective shutdown of access points in order to discourage unauthorized users from attempting to log on to the WLAN while providing coverage for the limited number of authorized users and keeping mission-critical security applications functional (badge-in/badge-out, asset tracking). 4.9.2

Testing

Per ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB 162, cabling should be installed and tested in accordance with TIA/EIA-568B (see Section 4.1 of this document for testing procedures).

4.9.1.5 Security Wireless technology has developed effective security standards to provide user authentication and authorization. The IEEE 802.11i standard outlines authentication and encryption mechanisms to secure wireless connections. Authentication is accomplished in the same way on a WLAN as it is on a wired LAN, as outlined in the IEEE 802.1X standard. 802.1X provides a framework for mutual authentication (client and network equipment) before a connection becomes active. Data confidentiality is protected with encryption mechanisms such as Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). Confidentiality across multiple networks can be ensured with a Virtual ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-126

Section 4.9: Wireless Technologies 4.9.3

Documenting

The process of documenting your industrial wireless network is to aid in troubleshooting and reduce the time required for routine maintenance and moves, adds, and changes. The following are considered essential elements and processes to document: 1. All site surveys conducted to determine access point placement and coverage areas 2. Blueprint or floor plan showing current physical location of each access point and associated cabling Standard / Technology

3. Current configuration, IP address, and security (i.e., WEP/WPA) settings for each access point 4. Up-to-date maintenance log documenting all moves, adds, and changes 5. Up-to-date labeling information on physical infrastructure (cables, enclosures, etc.) in accordance with TIA-606A. Building a Wireless Solution Note: Part numbers given in these tables are illustrative only. A detailed review of required part numbers must be carried out specific to each deployment.

Wireless Access Point Panduit Part Number

PanZone ® Enclosure Panduit Part Number

802.11 a/g Distributed, Internal Antennas

P-AP1131AG-A-K9

PZWIFIEW

802.11 a/g Centralized, Internal Antennas

P-LP1131AG-A-K9

PZWIFIEW

802.11 a/g Distributed, External Antennas

P-AP1242AG-A-K9

PZWIFIED

802.11 a/g Centralized, External Antennas

P-LP1242AG-A-K9

PZWIFIED

802.11 a/g/n Draft Distributed, External Antennas

P-AP1252AG-A-K9

PZWIFIEN

802.11 a/g/n Draft Centralized, External Antennas

P-LP1252AG-A-K9

PZWIFIEN

Panduit Part Number Types for the Outdoor / Industrial Environments Standard / Technology

Wireless Access Point Panduit Part Number

PanZone ® Enclosure Panduit Part Number

802.11 a/g Distributed, Internal Antennas

P-AP1131AG-A-K9

PZNWE12

802.11 a/g Centralized, Internal Antennas

P-LP1131AG-A-K9

PZNWE12

802.11 a/g Distributed, External Antennas

P-AP1242AG-A-K9

PZNWE12

802.11 a/g Centralized, External Antennas

P-LP1242AG-A-K9

PZNWE12

802.11 a/g/n Draft Distributed, External Antennas

P-AP1252AG-A-K9

PZNWE12

802.11 a/g/n Draft Centralized, External Antennas

P-LP1252AG-A-K9

PZNWE12

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-127

Section 4.10: Power over Ethernet 4.10 Power over Ethernet Power over Ethernet (PoE) is an established technology that extends the utility of Ethernet connectivity by providing reliable low-voltage DC power delivery to network devices over the same Category 5e and Category 6 cabling infrastructure that traditionally have only carried data. To implement PoE in a new or existing Industrial Ethernet network, organizations have a choice of varied solutions that include PoE-enabled network switches, midspan power sourcing equipment (PSE), powered patch panels, and single port injectors.

against power outages and spikes. These benefits have helped PoE gain rapid traction in industrial environments for the deployment of wireless access points (WAPs) placed in locations that are difficult to access manually (i.e., attached to high ceilings or above active machinery), which minimizes production downtime and simplifies WAP reconfiguration tasks. Industrial security applications such as network surveillance cameras, electromagnetic door locks, and radio frequency identification (RFID) systems are beginning to see wider integration with PoE due to reduced power demand from client devices and greater availability of pre-standard PoE Plus equipment. STANDARDS and CODES IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at Since acceptance of the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard in 2003, equipment vendors have been designing standards-based products that leverage the numerous advantages and benefits offered by PoE technologies (see Figure 4.10-1). The newer PoE Plus standard is being written to accommodate more power hungry devices such as PLC devices, HVAC units, specialized industrial lighting, motorized (i.e., point-tilt-zoom, or PTZ) network cameras, proximity sensors, or other security apparatus.

• Under IEEE 802.3af, 15.4 W of power are available for each include Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) phones, wireless access powered device with a maximum DC current of 350 mA per pair, which is adequate for most current PoE applications. points (WAPs), and IP security and surveillance cameras.

Figure 4.10-1. Applications currently driving the adoption of PoE

PoE offers two benefits that are consistent across appli• New standard IEEE 802.3at (commonly referred to as PoE cations: cost savings and flexibility of device placement. Plus) is expected to be ratified in mid-2009. The standard Because PoE runs data and power together over the same would increase power delivery up to a minimum of 25 W at a cable to each device attached to the local area network maximum DC current would be 720 milliamps (mA) per pair (or 360 mA per conductor), up to 45°C maximum ambient (LAN), devices can be installed without the need for a deditemperature over Category 5e, 6, and 6A copper cabling. cated AC outlet. This saves money by eliminating the cost and time associated with AC outlet installations, while provid- PoE also helps protect network investments, as it is an extension of the established 802.3 Ethernet protocol and is ing the flexibility to locate PoE devices where performance supported under 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1Gbps and is optimum. eventually 10Gbps.National Electric Code (NEC) – Safety Also, by using a centralized power source, PoE offers the Extra Low Voltage (SELV) PoE conforms to Underwriters ability to remotely power and manage connected devices Laboratories (UL) Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) classifiin the event of service disruptions or reconfigurations, and cation.An SELV circuit provides extra-low voltage define as helps manage power sources and battery backups to protect > highlight Twisted Pair, hit Enter >> on following screen, hit the right arrow to go to tab 2>> highlight AC Wire Map, hit Enter >> highlight Enable, hit Enter.

Unlike traditional DC testing methods, testing capabilities are being introduced that utilize AC signals to perform Wire Map measurements that are not blocked by Power over Ethernet (see Figure 4.10-5). This technique provides visibility of each wire in the cable to ensure that the wire pairs are correctly connected and that power will be properly supplied to powered devices. Category 5e and Category 6 channel and permanent link testing for the DPoE™ 1GIG™ Power Patch Panel can be done by configuring the Fluke DTX-1800 series cable analyzer as follows. Once the configuration settings are set, the DTX-1800 series cable tester is ready to perform any necessary testing. Two examples of expected test results are shown in Figure 4.10-6. (NOTE: The DPoE™ 1GIG™ Power Patch Panel should NOT be powered during testing.)

Figure 4.10-5. AC Wireman Testing Procedure

The Agilent WireScope Pro N2640A also is capable of testing through midspan PoE devices.

Figure 4.10-6. Example PoE Test Results from Fluke DTX1800 Series Cable Analyzer

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-132

Section 4.10: Power over Ethernet 4.10.4

Documenting

Building a PoE Solution

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-133

Section 4.10: Power over Ethernet

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-134

Section 4.11: Connected Building Solutions 4.11

3. Remote access for system status, control, alarming, logging, trending.

Connected Building Solutions

Enterprises today require the spaces they occupy to be designed to support a wide variety of building systems and cutting-edge communications technologies. Traditional building systems such as lighting, security, HVAC, structural health monitoring, and energy management now must coexist with IP-based voice, data and video communication technologies. The terms “Intelligent” or “Connected” Building have evolved to reflect these changes in building systems design and construction. Once used to denote structures with automation features that offered improved control over various building systems, today’s Connected Buildings are designed with extensive system convergence and interoperability in mind. A connected building has the ability to share or leverage data between disparate systems to achieve a more efficient process. This is accomplished by reducing energy operation cost and providing a comfortable safe work environment. Linked facility and network systems are now built directly into the building fabric, generating and sharing data over a single platform to enhance the efficiency and effectiveness of the building as a whole.

4. Card Access control and security. The card access system can be set up so that an employee has to scan their ID on a machine in order to have the machine power up. These ID credentials can ensure that the employee has been trained and authorized to use this equipment. Installation The phases to a successful installation of information technology cabling in industrial environments include: Phase 1: Design – the selection of cabling components and their configuration. A Unified Physical Infrastructure (UPI)based solution should be considered. Phase 2: Specification – the detailed requirement for the cabling, its accommodation and associated building services addressing specific environment(s) identified within the premises together with the quality assurance requirements to be applied. Phase 3: Implementation – the physical installation in accordance with the requirements of the specification. Phase 4: Operation – the management of connectivity and the maintenance of transmission performance during the life of the cabling.

Some examples of an industrial connected building include the following: 1. In the event that a plant’s main power-feed experiences a phase loss, the alarm message can be communicated through the switchgear control via a communication protocol like modbus. This message can be sent to a middleware platform where a software policy can be written to send an e-mail alarm messages to the facilities group, local service provider, and even the industrial machines’ HMI. 2. Facilities HVAC systems can share temperature and humidity information between the HMI or to the facilities control operators interface, which can be beneficial for critical machining processes. Other data points such as start/stop/status of a machine or machine maintenance schedules can be maintained.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-135

Section 4.11: Connected Building Solutions Multi-Technology Cable Bundle to Physically Converge Systems Connected Building Solutions are based on running a multitechnology cable bundle along shared pathways in order to extend the reach of a physically converged infrastructure to all devices and systems. By capturing and transporting all operational and services data over a physically converged infrastructure, it becomes possible to implement facility-driven policies that support business requirements and tenant/customer demands. Most systems can be physically converged through shared conduit, cable trays, and building pathways; others will converge through a switched IP network.

The physical layer provides the foundation for key building and enterprise systems to communicate both locally and remotely. PANDUIT Connected Building Solutions complement Cisco and Rockwell Automation logical network architecture solutions by allowing building systems to converge and extend the reach of the IP-based network to all devices within an enterprise. Connected Buildings can interface and share information through a common gateway or middleware (see Figure 4.11-1); the gateway uses various drivers to normalize the data to be converged or integrated for a more efficient process.

Figure 4.11-1. By capturing and transporting all operational and services data over a physically converged infrastructure, it becomes possible to implement facility-driven policies that support business requirements and tenant/customer demands. ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-136

Section 4.11: Connected Building Solutions Common processes that might be integrated include: • Facilities Common communication protocol LON or BacNet • Fire/Life/Safety Common communication protocol RS485/232 • Industrial Controls Common communication protocol Modbus or SCADA RS-485/232 • Energy Management Common communication protocol LON or BacNet • Card Access Common communication protocol RS232 or TCP/IP

Traditional (Home Run) Cabling Infrastructure

parate pathways, leading to inefficiencies in specification, installation, and maintenance. Network cabling becomes easier to locate, manage and maintain as each additional building system is routed within the same pathways and enclosures. Managed cabling also helps eliminate abandoned cable in ceilings, making the workplace run more efficiently and safely. Physically converged infrastructures also contribute toward larger corporate sustainability initiatives. Basic green

Converged ("Zone Cabling”) Infrastructure

Figure 4.11-2. Connected Building Solutions deploy all building systems along common pathways to multiple zones where systems connectivity is required.

“Zone Cabling” Architecture A highly effective way to layer intelligence throughout a building is to logically distribute cabling runs using “zone cabling” architecture for all building networks. Zone cabling enables automated building systems to be converged with Ethernet cabling pathways as they are being designed. This converged multi-technology backbone is comprised of Category 5e/6/6A copper, optical fiber, coaxial, RS-485, and other fieldbus cabling. These systems are converged within a common pathway and then terminated within zone enclosures distributed throughout the building (see Figure 4.11-2).

objectives include reducing consumption of non-renewable resources and creating healthy environments. To support these objectives smart lighting subsystems, indirect lighting, daylight harvesting, and modern under-floor HVAC are used to improve occupant comfort and achieve energy efficiencies throughout the building thus shrinking the organization’s carbon footprint. These solutions also add value by enabling green performance and LEED certification for building stakeholders, which differentiates buildings from the competition in a business climate where environmental stewardship is increasingly valued.

The zone cabling enclosures become network consolidation points, allowing all cables to be managed and patched in a single enclosure. This architecture differs from dedicated cabling runs typically used in building systems, in which multiple lengthy and redundant cabling routes along dis-

Further information on the PANDUIT Connected Building Solution is available in the following documents: • Introduction to Connected Building Solutions • Unified Physical Infrastructure: Introduction to the UPI Vision • Managing Physical Security Risk in the Infrastructure

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 4-137

Section 5

Network and Security Services Network and Security Services are designed to support a project or system throughout its lifecycle while assisting the customer with reaching necessary reductions in design and implementation costs, increase uptime and reduce future maintenance costs. 5.1

Network Services

The Network lifecycle phases include the following: • Assess • Design and Plan • Implement • Audit • Manage and Monitor 5.1.1

configuration scheme will meet the functional requirements. The deliverable is a summary of observations, issues, and resolutions. This can be used to ensure that all vendor designs will interconnect without any issues, to verify that the design is within your specific requirements or to offer thirdparty review.

Assess

Network Assessments are a group of offerings that evaluate the current condition of a designed or implemented network via documentation review or on-site network analysis. Assessments can help the customer determine whether the network is able to meet the functional requirements needed to achieve production and business goals. It accomplishes this by evaluating the network, documenting design or implementation issues, and offering resolutions to prevent or fix these issues. An assessment can be used to learn about potential problems that could result in future unplanned downtime. Customers can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Improving Revenue via Increased Uptime by discovering inefficient and problem-ridden designs or implementations before problems escalate to devastating downtime • Reducing Project Costs by ensuring that networks are correctly designed to meet the highest performance capabilities • Improving Productivity through efficient network architecture and design Network Design Assessment offers a review of existing design documentation (network layout, Bill of Material (BOM), cable schedules, configuration plans) to ensure that the specified components, network architecture and network

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture

On-site General Assessment is a one day review of the network’s installation, configuration and information. The deliverable is a summary of findings with a rated criticality and high level path forward. On-site Comprehensive Assessment focuses on customer needs (issue, upgrade, expansion). It can include operational tests, physical media testing, or issue identification. The deliverable is a summary of observations, issues, and resolutions that will assist in preventing downtime by bringing your network up to optimal condition. 5.1.2

Design and Plan

Good network design and planning form the foundation upon which performance and reliability are built. That foundation can help customers realize the value of manufacturing convergence and negate the potential impacts of improper implementation. Network design services enable them to achieve production and business goals and foster manufacturing convergence by enabling the following: • Integration of business and manufacturing systems • Remote access and support • Visibility and integration of technologies and communications • Fewer networks to maintain • Foundation for more innovative business models The design process begins with customer collaboration which includes assessing the network design expectations, business objectives, and identifying functional and informational requirements. Once the specific expectations and requirements are determined, a detailed specification is created. This is the basis for the network topology design and it will ensure that the network design best meets the needs for the system. (continued on next page)

Page 5-1

Section 5 : Network and Security Services Customers can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Reducing project costs by ensuring that networks are correctly designed to meet current and future performance and information sharing requirements • Increasing network availability and uptime to ensure production application and control system stability • Improving productivity by ensuring that networks are designed to meet production goals and are available when production is scheduled Network Design Development offers a range, from a design framework document that can be implemented by a network or IT specialist, to a full design package - any subset in between. The required deliverables are determined by customer collaboration at the onset. Network Migration Development offers design assistance that focuses on upgrading an existing network which typically begins with an assessment. The deliverable includes a hardware and media path forward based on customer requirements and current status of the network. Network Standards Development offers assistance to customers requiring plant-wide or corporate-wide standards for network consistency. The deliverable includes recommendations to be incorporated in a standards document based on blend of industry standards and customer requirements 5.1.3

• Integration of business and manufacturing systems • Remote access and support • Visibility and integration of technologies and communications • Fewer networks to maintain • Foundation for more innovative business models The implementation process can consist of turnkey solutions working with our partners that offer guaranteed network installation to simple system configurations. Customers can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Reducing project costs by ensuring that networks are correctly implemented to meet current and future performance and information sharing requirements • Increasing network availability and uptime to ensure production application and control system stability • Improving productivity by ensuring that networks are implemented to meet production goals and are avail able when production is scheduled Network Installation includes a range of offerings from equipment procurement to complete media and hardware installation services. Network Configuration includes hardware and software setup for network devices. Optional deliverables can include configuration data and/or backup and restore procedures.

Implementation 5.1.4

Network implementation services help customers realize the benefits of manufacturing convergence through improved network efficiency, reduced operational costs and increased manufacturing productivity. Network infrastructure Implementation is the foundation for a highly operational network and includes not only the media that transmits the traffic but the hardware that controls the flow of traffic as well as the software that sends, receives and manages the traffic. A network implementation that follows industry standards increases the opportunity of achieving the necessary performance and reliability and can negate the impacts of improper implementation. Network implementation services, similar to design services, help customers to achieve production and business goals and foster manufacturing convergence by enabling the following:

Audit

A Network Audit confirms whether networks are installed according to governing body and/or customer standards. State-of-the-art network diagnostic tools are used to conduct installation and operational tests to validate system implementation and to ensure that performance is within standards outlined by TIA/EIA, ODVA, CNI or an appropriate governing body. Installation testing validates the installation of new networks and prevents commissioning problems. Operational testing is an operational evaluation that tests system performance to ensure reliable communications and verify critical operating parameters. All test results and performance data are completely documented as a baseline for future reference.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 5-2

Section 5 : Network and Security Services Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Improving Revenue via Increased Uptime by discovering inefficient networks and preventing a problem that would cause a shut-down • Reducing Project Costs by ensuring that networks are correctly designed and implemented to meet the highest performance capabilities • Decreasing Downtime by discovering potential problems within your network before problems escalate Network Design Audit consists of comprehensive installation and operational network tests, measurements and analysis based on governing body standards (ODVA, TIA/EIA, and ControlNet International). The deliverable is a report documenting all findings, measurements, analysis, and remediation suggestions. 5.1.5

Manage and Monitor

Manage and Monitor Services are a group of offerings that help customers maintain the network to achieve their expected production and business goals. Offerings range from continuous monitoring or ad hoc diagnostic monitoring to periodic visits or emergency response. These network management offerings can help improve network uptime when customers do not have the resources, tools and technical knowledge internally. Customer can improve Return On Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Improving Revenue via Increased Uptime by discovering inefficient and problem ridden designs or implementations changes before problems escalate to devastating downtime • Improving Productivity by efficiently managing the net work architecture and design • Improving availability by quickly determining the issue and resolving Remote Monitoring ranges from continuous surveillance to ad hoc diagnostic monitoring of your network infrastructure and activity. Incident Response is a customer-initiated engagement that can include network trouble shooting, repair, or analysis.

Onsite Support includes annually or regularly scheduled network assessments to analyze any changes to the system and their effects. 5.2

Security Services

Network & Security Services are designed to support a project or system throughout its lifecycle and to assist the customer to reach necessary reductions in design and implementation costs, increase uptime and reduce future maintenance costs. The security lifecycle phases include the following: • Assess • Design & Plan • Implement • Audit • Manage and Monitor 5.2.1

Assess

Security Assessments can improve automation asset reliability by determining potential risks to the production process and by developing procedural and technical countermeasures to reduce these risks. Industrial Automation and control assets, similar to traditional IT systems, are vulnerable to many security issues such as unauthorized modifications, intellectual property theft, and malware such as viruses, worms and trojans. Any compromise of these systems can impact production, quality, regulatory compliance, and even safety. To reduce risks to the business, Rockwell Automation’s Security Services focus on identifying potential threats to automation assets and developing cost-effective countermeasures to protect the production process Customers can improve your Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures and security compromises • Increasing Performance by protecting against unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability improvements and reducing risks of modifications that affect product quality • Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of current assets and providing additional security controls to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 5-3

Section 5 : Network and Security Services Policy Assessments are conducted via interviews with key personnel to identify vulnerabilities associated with existing security policies, procedures or overall program. The deliverable will include a “path forward” plan to continuously improve security by introducing human-based security controls. Design Assessments are a full architecturally-based analysis of customer’s infrastructure with documentation provided by the customer. With this analysis, their infrastructure will be compared to their existing security requirements and various industry security standards, which will result in recommendations for their network and information infrastructure in the controls environment On-site Operational Assessments are an analysis of customer’s manufacturing infrastructure including interfaces to the business infrastructure. Security will be evaluated with respect to industrial control networks and integration strategies with business infrastructures. The deliverable will be a report detailing observed vulnerabilities, issues, and resolutions. On-site Risk Assessments help identify customer assets and their values, vulnerability and threats. The deliverable will quantify the probability and business impact of those threats and provide possible solutions and the cost of the countermeasure. On-site Vulnerability Assessment will identify system vulnerabilities. The deliverable will be a report detailing observed vulnerabilities, issues, and resolutions. 5.2.2

Design and Plan

Security design and planning services can help customers realize the value of manufacturing convergence and negate the impacts improper design. While manufacturing convergence has many benefits, it can cause negative impacts due to environmental, architectural, maintenance, and consequence of failure differences between manufacturing and IT enterprises. Security design services enable them to achieve production and business goals and to foster manufacturing convergence by enabling the following in a secure manner and reducing the associated risks:

• Integration of business and manufacturing systems • Remote access and support • Visibility and integration of technologies and communications • Fewer networks to maintain • Foundation for more innovative business models Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures and security compromises • Increasing Performance by protecting against unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability improvements and reducing risks of modifications that affect product quality • Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of current assets and providing additional security controls to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership Security Program Development is the overall encompassing offering that steps customers through the development of a Security Program which can include some or all of the following services. Security Policy Development is a collaborative effort with the customer to assist in creating their security policy. The deliverable includes recommendations to be incorporated in a standards document based on blend of industry standards and customer requirements. Security Design Development offers a range from a design framework document that can be implemented by a network or IT security specialist to a full design package or any subset in between. The required deliverables are determined by customer collaboration at the onset. Business Continuity Planning (BCP) helps minimize the effects of necessary resources that are no longer available or functional to a customer trying to conduct business. The BCP engagement entails collaboration with the customer to develop new business continuity plans or review the existing business continuity plans stemming from an existing business impact analysis; to identify continuity risks, evaluate existing preventive controls; to develop mitigation and recovery strategies and to develop and document roles, responsibilities and actions within the contingency plans.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 5-4

Section 5 : Network and Security Services Disaster Recovery Planning and Incident Response Planning for the controls environment will fall under and support the larger BCP supporting the overall Security Program. While Disaster Recovery Planning entails how to recover, Incident Response Planning entails what to do when it occurs. 5.2.3

Implementation

Security Implementation services can help customers realize the value of manufacturing convergence and negate the impacts of improper implementation. While manufacturing convergence has many benefits, it can cause negative impacts due to environmental, architectural, maintenance, and consequence of failure differences between manufacturing and IT enterprises. Security implementation services enable them to achieve production and business goals and foster manufacturing convergence by enabling the following in a secure manner and reducing the associated risks: • Integration of business and manufacturing systems • Remote access and support • Visibility and integration of technologies and communications • Fewer networks to maintain • Foundation for more innovative business models Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures and security compromises • Increasing Performance by protecting against unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability improvements and reducing risks of modifications that affect product quality • Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of current assets and providing additional security controls to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership Security Program Implementation takes the design and development documents to the next level – implementation. The overall program implementation includes implementing the security design, policies and procedures.

Security Configuration is the configuration of network devices and security appliances including firewall and switch security configurations (firewall rule sets, ACLs, etc) Non-Production Penetration Testing can only be done in a lab or an offline production environment. It includes reconnaissance, asset identification, vulnerability discovery and exploitation and attacking in scope targets. System Hardening reviews Vulnerability Assessment data and implements system changes to prevent network and application-based attacks, essentially addressing risks identified in the assessment stages. Security Policy Training creates awareness throughout the organization of the desired security changes and helps enforce accountability for new security policies. 5.2.4

Audit

Security Audits are based on customer and/or known standards and verify whether a security program is implemented as expected, whether implemented by Rockwell Automation or not. Industrial Automation and control assets, similar to traditional IT systems, are vulnerable to many security issues such as unauthorized modifications, intellectual property theft, and malware such as viruses, worms and trojans. Any compromise of these systems can impact production, quality, regulatory compliance, and even safety. To reduce risks to the business, Rockwell Automation’s Security Services focus on identifying potential threats to automation assets and developing cost-effective countermeasures to protect the production process. While auditing, Rockwell Automation offers remediation to meet standards that are currently not met. Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures and security compromises • Increasing Performance by protecting against unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability improvements and reducing risks of modifications that affect product quality

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 5-5

Section 5 : Network and Security Services • Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of current assets and providing additional security controls to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership • Regulatory compliance Security Audits evaluate existing infrastructure against customer security design or policy or against a known and accepted standard or government requirement. Compliance examples include items such as the NERC CIP standards, ISA SP-99, NIST 800-53, NIST 800-82, etc. 5.2.5

Managed Security Services

Managed Security services can help customers realize the value of manufacturing convergence and can also negate the impacts of improper implementation. While manufacturing convergence has many benefits, it can cause negative impacts due to environmental, architectural, maintenance, and consequence of failure differences between manufacturing and IT enterprises.

Remote Monitoring can be offered in conjunction with our InSite team or can be implemented in an ad-hoc, non realtime fashion to diagnose long-term potential security and network issues. Incident Response includes management, coordination and resolution services that entail assessing / verifying security incidents and providing guidance on further action as necessary. On-site support and disaster recovery assistance offers support when a customer’s Disaster Recovery Plan has been implemented once a business continuity impacting event has occurred. This response could range from technical support to managing the disaster recovery actions.

Security implementation services enable them to achieve production and business goals and foster manufacturing convergence by enabling the following in a secure manner and reducing the associated risks: • Integration of business and manufacturing systems • Remote access and support • Visibility and integration of technologies and communications • Fewer networks to maintain • Foundation for more innovative business models Customers can improve Return on Net Assets (RONA) and Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) by: • Increasing Uptime by lowering risk of network failures and security compromises • Increasing Performance by protecting against unauthorized changes that reduce efficiency • Increasing Quality by tracking and traceability improvements and reducing risks of modifications that affect product quality • Increasing System Reliability by maximizing usage of current assets and providing additional security controls to improve security at the lowest overall cost of ownership

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page 5-6

Appendix A PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

A-1: Conduit Fill Capacity Tables A-2: Rack Vertical Manager Horizontal Cable Fill Capacity Tables A-3: Approved Test Leads for PANDUIT Patch Panels A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Product Specification Details

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-1

Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Appendix A-1 PANDUIT® TX6ATM 10GigTM UTP Copper Cabling System Conduit Fill Capacity Table

PANDUIT® TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System Conduit Fill Capacity Table

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-2

Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information PANDUIT® TX6™ PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System Conduit Fill Capacity Table

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-3

Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS Shielded Copper Cabling Conduit Fill Capacity Table

PANDUIT® TX5e™ UTP Copper Cabling Conduit Fill Capacity Table ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-4

Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information PANDUIT® TX5eTM Copper Cabling Conduit Fill Capacity Table

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-5

Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

PANDUIT® TX5e™ Shielded Copper Cabling System Conduit Fill Capacity Table

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-6

Appendix A-1: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-7

Appendix A-2: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Appendix A-2 Rack Vertical Manager Horizontal Cable Fill Capacity Tables PANDUIT® TX6™ 10GigTM Copper Cabling System

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-8

Appendix A-2: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information PANDUIT® TX6™ 10GigTM Copper Cabling System (continued)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-9

Appendix A-2: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System

PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS UTP Copper Cabling

PANDUIT® TX6™ PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS Shielded Copper Cabling

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-10

Appendix A-2: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS UTP Copper Cabling System

PANDUIT® TX6TM PLUS Shielded Copper Cabling

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-11

Appendix A-2: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

PANDUIT® TX5e Shielded Copper Cabling System

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-12

Appendix A-2: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information PANDUIT® TX5e Shielded Copper Cabling System

Practical Fill: Estimate assumes a 40% fill factor (i.e. Sum of the cable cross sectional areas equals 40% of the vertical channel.) The 40% factor is intended to account for cable routing.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-13

Appendix A-3: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Appendix A-3 Approved Test Leads for PANDUIT Patch Panels

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-14

Appendix A-3: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

* PANDUIT has not physically tested the FrameScope 350. Agilent maintains the FrameScope and WireScope have identical software and hardware for cabling testing.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-15

Appendix A-3: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-16

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Appendix A-4 PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Product Specification Details

• Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots simplify termination

Category 5e Mini-Com® TX5e Shielded Jack Module

• Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all Mini-Com® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels and

Specifications Eight-position jack module shall terminate 4 pair 22-26 AWG 100 ohm shielded twisted pair cable and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. Jack module shall use forward motion termination to optimize performance by maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The red termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Class D/Category 5e channel and component performance – Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz • FCC Compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold • IEC Compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 Key Features and Benefits • 100% NEXT & Return Loss performance tested – Confidence that each jack module exceeds NEXT and Return Loss industry standard requirements

• Surface Mount Boxes for fast moves, adds and changes • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term installed performance • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control number for traceability • Integral shield – No additional assembly required and provides 360 conductive path for grounding Applications Mini-Com® TX5e™ Shielded Jack Module is a component of the TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Shielded System provides end-to-end Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the ISO 11801 Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Voice/data systems • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

• Utilizes Enhanced Giga-TX™ technology – Optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces installation expense

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Module Spaces

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

CJS5E88TGY

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black module with integrated shield.

1

1

50

CJS5E88TGY

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire, universal shielded black module with integrated shield, bulk packaged.

1

24

240

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-17

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Mini-Com® TX5e™ UTP Jack Module Specifications Category 5e/Class D eight-position jack module shall terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. Jack modules shall use forward motion termination to optimize performance by maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The red termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Category 5e/Class D channel and component performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz • FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each jack module will deliver the critical electrical performance requirements • Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ technology – Optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces





• • •

installation expense Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots simplify the termination clearly identified on universal label Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all Mini-Com® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels and Surface Mount Boxes for fast moves, adds and changes True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for longterm installed performance Individual serialized – Marked with quality control number for traceability Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to endusers; backwards compatible

Applications Mini-Com® TX5e™ UTP Jack Module is a component of the TX5500™ Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Copper Cabling System provides end-to-end Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 Class D Standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Voice/data systems • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Module Spaces

Color*

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

CJ5E88TGIW

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal module.

1

Off White

1

50

CJ5E88TGIW-24

Category 5e, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal module, bulk packaged

1

Off White

24

240

*For standard colors other than Off White, replace suffix IW (Off White) with EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (international Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red), BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-18

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information • Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and provides easy release, saving time on frequent moves, adds and changes • Identification – Provides identification of performance level, length, and quality control number for future traceability • Variety of boot colors and cable lengths – Meets individual length and color coding requirements for greater system flexibility • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing additional color coding options • RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord

TX5e™ Shielded Patch Cord Specifications Category 5e patch cords shall be constructed of 26 AWG shielded stranded copper cable and shielded high performance modular plugs at each end. Patch cords shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be offered in gray cable and a variety of boot colors and lengths. Patch cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Category 5e/Class channel and component performance – Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz • FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • UL rated – No. 1863 Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each patch cord delivers specified performance • Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance and consistency by reducing untwist at plug

Applications TX5e™ Shielded Patch Cords are a component of the TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System delivers end-toend Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the ISO 11801 Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Voice/data systems • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

Boot Color

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

STPCH*MBBL

Category 5e, shielded patch cord with PanPlug® Modular Plugs on each end..

Black

Int’l. Gray

1

10

*For standard lengths 1 to 10 meters (increments of 1 meter) and 0.5, 1.5, 2.5, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 meters change the length designation in the part number to the desired length. For boot colors other than Black, replace suffix BL (Black) with BU (Blue), GR (Green), RD (Red) or YL (Yellow). For example, the part number for a 15 meter patch cord with blue boots is STPCH15MBBU.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-19

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX5e™ UTP Patch Cords Specifications Category 5e/Class D UTP patch cords shall be constructed of unshielded twisted pair stranded copper cable and a high performance modular plug at each end. Patch cords shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Category 5e/Class D channel and component performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz • FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • UL rated – No. 1863 Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each patch cord delivers specified performance • Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance and consistency by reducing untwist at plug

• Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and provides easy release, saving time on frequent moves, adds and changes • Identification – Provides identification of performance level, length, and quality control number for future traceability • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual length and color coding requirements for greater system flexibility • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing additional color coding options • RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord Applications TX5e™ UTP Patch Cords are a component of the TX5500™ Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Copper Cabling System provides end-to-end Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 Class D standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Voice/data systems • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

UTPCH*Y

Category 5e, UTP patch cord with Pan-Plug® Modular Plugs at each end.

Off White

1

10

*For lengths 1 to 20 feet (increments of 1 foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 feet change the length designation in the part number to desired length. For standard cable colors other than Off White, add suffix BL (Black), BU (Blue), GR (Green), RD (Red), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL (Violet) before the Y in the part number. For example, the part number for a blue 15-foot patch cord is UTPCH15BUY.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-20

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Key Features and Benefits • Foil shield – Reduces ingress of EMI interference to ensure cable performance at high frequency levels Specifications • Braided shield – Provides superior structural integrity The S/FTP Shielded cable shall be constructed of 4-pair inand reduces low frequency external interference to sulated AWG conductors. The twisted pairs shall be wrapped ensure exceptional cable performance at all swept in an overall metallic foil with an overall braid within a LSZH frequencies or PVC jacket. • Bulk packaging – 1,640 ft. (500M) per reel “ • Descending length” cable markings – Easy Technical Information identification of remaining cable reduces installation • Class E/Category 5e channel performance – Exceeds time all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e channel standard requirements at swept Applications frequencies up to 100 MHz TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cable is a component of the • Class E/Category 5e component performance – TX5500™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT Exceeds all ISO 1801 2nd Edition Class D and TX5500™ Shielded System provides end-to-end Gigabit EthTIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e component standard ernet with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz performance to the ISO 11801 Class D and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 • Cable conductors – Polyethylene (PE) insulation Category 5e standards, this system will support the following • Cable jacket – LSZH – low smoke zero halogen plastic applications: (dark gray) PVC – low smoke flame retardant PVC • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), (light gray) • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • Cable diameter – 0.31 inches (7.87mm) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 MB/s ATM • Flame rating – LSZH – IEC 60332-1 rated PVC – NEC • Token Ring 4/16 type CM (UL) and FT4 rated • Voice/data systems • Temperature rating – 32 degrees to 140 degrees (0 to • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) 60 degrees C) during installation, -4 to 140 degrees (-20 to 60 degrees C) during operation • Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110N) maximum TX5500™ Shielded Cable – S/FTP

Part Number

Part Description

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

PFP5504IG-UY

Category 5e plenum (CMP) shielded copper cable

1000 ft.

39000 ft.

PFR5504IG-UY

Category 5e riser (CMR) shielded copper cable

1000 ft.

39000 ft.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-21

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX5500™ UTP Copper Cable Specifications Category 5e cable shall far exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and IEC 61156-5 Category 5e component standards. The conductors shall be 24 AWG construction with FEP (CMP) or polyolefin (CMR) insulation. The copper conductors shall be twisted in pairs and covered in a low smoke flame retardant PVC (CMP) jacket or a flame retardant PVC (CMR) jacket. Technical Information Electrical performance – Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standards at swept frequencies up to 100 MHZ. Certified component performance up to 100 meters and exceeds the component requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2 and IEC 61156-5 Category 5e component standards at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz. • Conductors/insulators – Plenum – 24 AWG bare copper wire covered by FEP insulation • Riser – 24 AWG bare copper wire covered by polyolefin (PE) insulation • Flame rating – Plenum – NFPA 262 Riser – UL 1666 • Installation tension – 25 lbs (110 N) maximum • Temperature rating – Plenum - 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) during installation, 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C) during operation – Riser - 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) during installation, 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C) during operation

• Cable jacket – Plenum – low smoke, flame retardant PVC – Riser - flame retardant PVC • Cable weight – Plenum – 21 lbs./1000 ft. (9.6 kg/305m) – Riser – 22 lbs./1000 ft. (9.9 kg/305m) • Cable diameter – Plenum – 0.193 in. (4.9mm) nominal – Riser – 0.225 in. (5.7mm) nominal • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m), in an easy payout box, tested to ISTA Procedure 1 A Weight: Plenum – 24 lbs./1000 ft. (10.9 kg/305m) – Riser – 25 lbs./1000 ft. (11.3 kg/305m) Key Features and Benefits Easy payout box – Ensure proper performance and provides quick installation Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of remaining cable reduces installation time and cable scrap Applications TX5500™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PANDUIT TX5500™ UTP Copper Cabling System. This end-toend system provides Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 Class D standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

PUR5504BU-UY

Category 5e riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 24 AWG construction with HDPE insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs and placed in a flame-retardant PVC jacket.

Blue

1000 ft.

39000 ft.

Category 5e riser PUP5504BU-UY

Category 5e plenum (CMP) 4-piar UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 24 AWG construction with FEP insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs and placed in a low smoke, flame retardant PVC jacket.

Blue

1000 ft.

39000 ft.

**For standard cable colors other than Blue, replace BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow), or IG (International Gray). ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-22

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information DP5e™ Patch Panel Specifications Category 5e/Class D punchdown patch panels shall terminate unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks. Industry standard single wire 110 punchdown tool shall be used for terminations. Patch panels shall be supplied with T568A and T568B wiring configurations. Ports and panels shall be easy to identify with pre-printed numbers and write-on areas. Technical Information • Category 5e/Class D channel and component performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class D standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 100 MHz • Dimensions – 12 port flat: 2.10”H x 10.0”W x 1.17”D (53.3 x 253.9 x 29.7mm), 89D bracket - 24 port flat: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 1 RU - 48 port flat: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 2 RU - 24 port angled: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 1 RU - 48 port angled: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 2 RU

• Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks (23” requires use of extender bracket); 12-port suitable for wall mount with 89D bracket • Packaging – Packaged with M6 and #12 – 24 mounting screws

Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each port will deliver the critical electrical performance requirements • Each port individually serialized – Can be quality traced to sub-components • Common termination tooling – Terminates with industry standard 110 punchdown tool for familiar, easy and fast installation • Port and panel identification – Write-on areas follow TIA/EIA-606-A labeling standard • Universal wiring schemes – T568A and T568B wiring scheme clearly identified on universal label • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to endusers; backwards compatible • Replaceable port module – Ability to easily replace damaged port for full panel use Applications DP5e™ Patch Panel is a component of the TX5500™ Copper Cabling System. The PANDUIT TX5500™ Systems provides end-to-end Gigabit Ethernet performance with usable bandwidth beyond 100 MHz. With certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category 5e and ISO 11801 Class D standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Voice/data systems

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Rack Spaces

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

DPA245E88TGY

24-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 24 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports

1

1

10

DPA485E88TGY

48-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 48 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports

2

1

10

DPA485E88TGY

12-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 12 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports. Mounts to 89D wall mount bracket.

1

10

DPA485E88TGY

12-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 12 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports. Mounts to 89D wall mount bracket.

1

1

10

DPA485E88TGY

48-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 48 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports

2

1

10

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-23

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Category 6 Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS Shielded Jack Module Specifications 8-position jack module shall terminate 4-pair 22 – 26 AWG 100 ohm shielded twisted pair cable and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. Jack module shall use forward motion termination to optimize performance by maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The white termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Class E/Category 6 channel performance – Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 channel standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz • Class E/Category 6 component performance – Exceeds all ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 component standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz • FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 Key Features and Benefits • 100% NEXT and Return Loss performance tested – Confidence that each jack module delivers NEXT and Return Loss performance

• Utilizes Enhanced Giga-TX™ Technology – Optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces installation expense • Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots simplify termination • Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all MiniCom® faceplates, modular patch panels and surface mount boxes for fast moves, adds and changes • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term installed performance • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control number for traceability • Integral shield – No additional assembly required and provides 360 conductive path for grounding Applications Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS Shielded Jack Module is a component of the TX6000™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. Interoperable and backward compatible, this system provides design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. With certified performance to the ISO 11801 Class E and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standards, this system is ideal for today’s high performance workstation applications. Applications of the TX6000™ Shielded Copper Cabling System include: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), • 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video • Voice over internet protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Module Space

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

CJS688TGY

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black module with integral shield.

1

1

50

CJS688TGY-24

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black module with integral shield, bulk packaged

1

24

240

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-24

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information • Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots simplify termination • Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of MiniCom® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels and Surface Mount Boxes for fast moves, adds and changes • True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term installed performance • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control number for traceability • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to endusers; backwards compatible

Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS UTP Jack Module Specifications Category 6/Class E eight-position jack module shall terminate unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. Jack module shall use forward motion termination to optimize performance by maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The white termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Category 6/Class E channel and component performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz • FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each jack module will deliver the critical electrical performance requirements • Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ technology – Optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist; reduces installation expense

Applications Mini-Com® TX6™ PLUS UTP Jack Modules is a component of the TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems. Interoperable and backward compatible, these end-to-end systems provide design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. With certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E standards, these systems are ideal for today’s high performance workstation applications. Usage of the TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems include: • Ethernet 10BASE0T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10000BASE-T (10 Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-t standards) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Module Spaces

Color*

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

CJ688TGIW

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal module

1

Off White

1

50

CJ688TGIW-24

Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal module, bulk packaged

1

Off White

24

240

*For standard colors other than Off White, replace suffix IW (Off White) with EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red), BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet).

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-25

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6™ PLUS UTP Patch Cords Specifications Category 6/Class E UTP patch cords shall be constructed of 24 AWG unshielded twisted pair stranded copper cable and an enhanced performance modular plug at each end. Patch cords shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Technical Information • Category 6/Class E channel and component performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz • FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • UL rated – No. 1863 Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each patch cord will deliver the critical electrical performance requirements • Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance and consistency by reducing untwist at plug • Slender strain relief boot – Provides easy access in high-density applications

• Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and provides easy release, saving time on frequent moves, adds and changes • Identification – Provides identification of performance level, length and quality control number for future trace ability • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual length and color coding requirements for greater sys tem flexibility • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing additional color coding options • RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord Applications TX6™ PLUS UTP Patch Cords are components of the PANDUIT TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems. Interoperable and backward compatible, these end-to-end systems provide design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. With certified performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E standards, these systems are ideal for today’s high performance workstation applications. The TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10000BASE-T (10 Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-T standards) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Srd. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

UTPSP*Y

Category 6, UTP patch cord with TX6™ PLUS Modular Plugs on each end.

Off White

1

10

*For lengths 1 to 20 feet (increments of 1 foot) and 25, 30, 36, 40 feet change the lengths designation in the part number to desired length. For standard cable colors other than Off White, add suffix BL (Black), BU (Blue), GR (Green), RD (Red), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL (Violet) before the Y at the end of the part number.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-26

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6000™ UTP Copper Cable Specifications Category 6 cable shall exceed ANSI/ TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and IEC 61156-5 Category 6 component standards. The conductors shall be 23 AWG construction with FEP (CMP) or polyolefin (CMR) insulation. The copper conductors shall be twisted in pairs, separated by a cross-divider and covered by a low smoke, flame retardant (CMP) jacket or a flame retardant (CMR) jacket. Technical Information Electrical performance – Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceed ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E Category 6 standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz. Certified component performance up to 100 meters and exceeds the component requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 and IEC 61156-5 Category 6 component standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz • Conductors/insulators – Plenum – 23 AWG bare copper wire covered by FEP insulation – Riser – 23 AWG bare copper wire covered by polyolefin (PE) insulation • Flame rating – Plenum – NFPA 262 – Riser – UL1666 • Installation tension – 25 lbs (110 N)maximum • Temperature rating – 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) during installation – 14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C) during operation • Cable jacket – Plenum – low smoke, flame retardant PVC – Riser – flame retardant PVC • Cable diameter – Plenum – 0.236 in. (5.9mm) nominal – Riser – 0.240 in. (6.1mm) nominal

• Cable weight – Plenum – 28 lbs./1000 ft. (12.7 kg/305m) – Riser – 31 lbs./1000 ft. (14.1 kg/305m) • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m), reel-in-a-box – Plenum – 32 lbs./1000 ft. (14.5 kg/305m) – Riser – 35 lbs./1000 ft. (15.9 kg/305m) – Package tested to ISTA Procedure 1A Key Features and Benefits • Third party tested – Cable had been tested as part of the TX6000™ Copper Cabling System by an independent laboratory and complies with the electrical channel requirements of the following standard: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 • Integrated pair divider – Separates pairs for the exceptional cable performance • Reel-in-a-box – Ensures proper performance and provides quick installation • Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of remaining cable reduces installation time and cable scrap Applications TX6000™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PANDUIT TX6000™ UTP Copper Cabling System. Interoperable and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. With certified performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10GABSE-T (10 Giga-bit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-T standards) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Srd. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

PUR6004BU-UY

High performance Category 6 riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper

Blue

1000 ft.

27000 ft.

Blue

1000 ft.

27000 ft.

cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with HDPE insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated pair divider, and placed in a flame retardant PVC jacket.

PUP6004BU-UY

High performance Category 6 plenum (CMP) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with FEP insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated pair divider, and placed in a low smoke, flame retardant PVC jacket.

*For standard colors other than Blue, replace suffix BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow), or IG (International Gray). ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-27

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6500™ UTP Copper Cable

• Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m), reel-in-a-box – Plenum – 39 lbs./1000 ft. (17.7 kg/305m)

Specifications

– Riser – 36 lbs./1000 ft. (16.3 kg/305m)

Category 6 cable shall far exceed ANSI/

– Packaging tested to ISTA Procedure 1A

TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801 Class E standards. The conductors shall be 23 AWG construction with FEP (CMP)

Key Features and Benefits • Third party tested – Cable has been tested as part of

or polyolefin (CMR) insulation. The cop-

the TX6500™ Copper Cabling System by an independent

per conductors shall be twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated

laboratory and complies with the electrical channel requirements of the following standard: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1

pair divider and shall be covered by a low smoke, flame retardant (CMP) jacket or a flame retardant (CMR) jacket.

• Integrated pair divider – Separates pairs for exceptional

Technical Information

• Reel-in-a-box – Ensures proper performance and provides

cable performance quick installation

Electrical performance – Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds ANSI/

• Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of

TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E

remaining cable reduces installation time and cable scrap

standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz. Certified component

• Reduced attenuation – Maximizes the amount of signal that reaches the receiver and increases bandwidth

performance up to 100 meters and exceeds the component requirements of ANSI/TIA.EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and IEC 61156-5 and component standards at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz. • Conductors/insulators – Plenum – 23 AWG bare copper wire covered by FEP insulation – Riser – 23 AWG bare copper wire covered by polyolefin (PE) insulation • Flame rating – Plenum – NFPA 262 – Riser – UL 1666 • Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110 N) maximum • Temperature rating - 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) during

Applications TX6500™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PANDUIT TX6500™ Copper Cabling System. Interoperable and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. With certified performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E standards, this system will support the following applications: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T

installation, 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C) during operation

(Gigabit Ethernet), 10GABSE-T (10 Gigabit Ethernet over

• Cable jacket – Plenum – low smoke, flame retardant PVC

limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-T standards)

– Riser – flame retardant PVC • Cable diameter – Plenum – 0.264 in. (6.7mm) nominal – Riser – 0.265 in. (6.8mm) nominal

• 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16

• Cable weight – Plenum – 35 lbs./1000 ft. (15.8 kg/305m) – Riser – 32 lbs./1000 ft. (14.5 kg/305m)

Part Number

Part Description

Color*

Srd. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

PUR6504BU-UY

Enhanced high-performance Category 6 riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP

Blue

1000 ft.

27000 ft.

Blue

1000 ft.

27000 ft.

copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with HDPE insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated pair divider and placed in a flame-retardant PVC jacket.

PUP6504BU-UY

Enhanced high-performance Category 6 plenum (CMP) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG construction with FEP insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated pair divider and placed in a low smoke, flameretardant PVC jacket.

*For standard colors other than Blue, replace suffix BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow) or IG (International Gray). ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-28

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information DP6™ PLUS Patch Panel

Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each port will deliver the critical electrical performance requirements

Specifications Category 6/Class E punchdown patch

• Each port individually serialized – Can be quality traced to sub-components

panels shall terminate unshielded twisted 4 pair, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm pair

• Common termination tool – Terminates with industry standard 110 punchdown tool for familiar, easy and fast installation

cable and shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23”racks. Industry standard single

• Port and panel identification – Write-on areas follow TIA/EIA606-A labeling standards

wire 110 punchdown tool shall be used for terminations. Patch panels shall be supplied with T568A and T568B wiring configurations.

• Universal wiring schemes – T568A and T568B wiring schemes clearly identified on universal label

Ports and panel shall be easy to identify with pre-printed numbers

• Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to end-users;

and write-on areas.

backwards compatible • Replaceable port modules – Snaps in and out of patch panel

Technical Information

for fast moves, adds and changes

• Category 6/Class E channel and component performance – Exceeds all TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standard requirements at swept frequencies up to 250 MHz • Dimensions – 12 port flat: 2.10”H x 10.0”W x 1.17”D (53.3 x

Applications DP6™ PLUS Patch Panel is a component of the TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems. Interoperable and backward

253.9 x 29.7mm), 89D bracket

compatible, these end-to-end systems provide design flexibility

- 24 port flat: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 1 RU

to protect network investments well into the future. With certi-

- 48 port flat: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 1.17”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 29.7mm), 2 RU

fied performance to the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO

- 24 port angled: 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (43.7 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 1 RU

11801 Class E standards, these systems are ideal for today’s high

- 48 port angled: 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 4.77”D (88.1 x 482.6 x 121.2mm), 2 RU

• Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” pr 23” racks • Packaging – Packaged with M6 and #12 – 24 mounting screws

performance workstation applications. Usage of the TX6500™ and TX6000™ Copper Cabling Systems include: • Ethernet 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T (Fast Ethernet), 1000BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet), 10000BASE-T (10 Gigabit Ethernet over limited distances as specified in the industry 10GBASE-T standards) • 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 Mb/s ATM, 1.2 Gb/s ATM • Token Ring 4/16 • Digital video and broadband/baseband analog video • Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Rack Spaces

Srd. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

DPA24688TGY

24-port, angled, Category 6, patch panel with 24 RJ45, 8-position,

1

1

10

2

1

10

8-wire ports.

DPA48688TGY

48-port, angled, Category 6, patch panel with 48 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports.

DP12688TGY

12-port, Category 6, patch panel with 12 RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire ports. Mounts to 89D wall mount bracket.

1

10

DP24688TGY

24-port, Category 6, patch panel with 24 RJ45, 8-position, 1 8-wire ports.

1

10

DPA48688TGY

48-port, Category 6, patch panel with 48 RJ45, 8-position, 2 8-wire ports.

1

10

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-29

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Module

installation time and expense • Improved termination cap – Conductor retention slots simplify terminations

Specifications Augmented Category 6 eight-position jack

• Integral 360° shield – No additional assembly required

module shall terminate shielded twisted 4-pair

and provides a 360° conductive path to ground; shield provides

22-26 AWG 100 ohm cable and shall not re-

seamless bonding of the jack module with a Mini-Com® All

quire the use of a punchdown tool. Jack mod-

Metal Modular Patch Panel

ule shall use forward motion termination to optimize performance by

• Modularity – Jack modules snap in and out of all Mini-Com® Faceplates, Modular Patch Panels, and Surface Mount Boxes

maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist.

for fast moves, adds and changes

The blue termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. The TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Module must

• True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term installed performance

be installed as part of the TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System to achieve IEEE 10GBASE-T certified performance.

• Individually serialized – Marked with a quality control number for traceability

Technical Information • Augmented Category 6/ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1

Applications

– Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration

TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Jack Modules are a component of the

up to 100 meters and exceeds the draft requirements of

TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. This end-to-end

TIA/EIA 568-B.2-AD10, ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1,

system provides a cost-effective medium for ensuring that network

and IEEE 802.3an-2006 ratified standard for supporting

bandwidth needs are easily met today and tomorrow. This shielded

10GBASE-T transmission over copper twisted pair cabling

cabling system provides high performance, excellent EMI suppres-

when used as part of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded

sion, and aids in secure data transmission. The PANDUIT solution

Copper Cabling System

helps ensure organizations efficiently and reliably meet their data

• Category 6/Class E performance – Exceeds all Category

transmission needs. Usage of the TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper

• 6/Class E component and channel standard requirements

Cabling System includes high bandwidth applications within data

• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F

centers and connections to high-end workstations such as:

• IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7

• Stacking switches and switch-to-switch links • Storage area networks

Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested for wire-map, NEXT, and return

• Aggregation of Gigabit Ethernet channels • Real-time intensive financial transactions

loss – Guarantees that each jack module delivers specified

• Streaming video

performance

• Animation

• Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ Technology – Optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist and reduces

• Scientific modeling • Medical imaging

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Rack Spaces

Srd. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

CJS6X88TGY

Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8-wire universal shielded black module with integral shield

1

1

50

CJS6X88TGY-24

Category 6A, RJ45 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8-wire universal 1 shielded black module with integral shield, bulk packaged

24

240

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-30

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module

• Utilizes Flex technology – Shortens the tuning length of the jack module enabling higher performance • Alien crosstalk suppression – Innovative foil technology

Specifications

provides superior alien crosstalk performance enabling high

Category 6A, 8-position jack module shall

density applications (48 ports in 1 RU) • Utilizes enhanced Giga-TX™ Technology – Wire cap

terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26

optimizes performance by eliminating conductor untwist and

AWG, 100 ohm cable and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. The jack module shall use a forward

reduces installation time and expense; simplifies termination

motion termination method to optimize performance by maintaining

and maintains conductor twists for reliable and consistent terminations

cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist. The blue

• True strain relief – Controls cable bend radius for long term

termination cap shall be color-coded for T568A and T568B wiring

installed performance

schemes.

• Modular – Jack modules snap in and out of Mini-Com® Face Technical Information

plates, Modular Patch Panels and Surface Mount Boxes for

Category 6A/Class EA channel and component performance – Cer-

easy moves, adds and changes • Individually serialized – Marked with quality control number

tified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100

for future traceability

meters and exceeds the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10

• Jack module blockout device (optional) – Provides a simple

Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting

and secure method to control access to data ports

10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems as part of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System.

Applications

Certified component performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting

The Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Jack Module is a component

10GABSE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems

of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System. Interop-

• FCC compliance – Meets ANSI/TIA-968-A; contacts are plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7

erable and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. Key applications include: • 10GBASE-T Ethernet

• PoE compliance – Meets IEEE 802.3af and draft

• Data center 1/O consolidation

requirements of IEEE 802.3at for PoE Plus • UL rated – No. 1863

• Data center server virtualization

• Conductor termination range – Accepts primary conductor

• Consolidation of network interconnects • Back-bone aggregation

O.D. between 0.037 in. to 0.062 in.

• Parallel processing and high speed computing Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each jack module delivers specified performance • Advanced electrical compensation technology – Headroom over industry standards for lower risk and higher bandwidth

\

network availability

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Module Spaces

Color*

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

CJ6X88TGIW

Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8-wire universal module.

1

Off White

1

50

CJ6X88TGIW-24

Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8wire universal module, bulk packaged.

1

Off White

24

240

*For standard colors other than Off White, replace suffix IW (Off White) with EI (Electric Ivory), WH (White), IG (International Gray), BL (Black), OR (Orange), RD (Red), BU (Blue), GR (Green), YL (Yellow) or VL (Violet). ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-31

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Patch Cords

adds and changes • Slender strain relief boot – Provides easy access in

Specifications

high-density applications

Category 6A shielded patch cords shall be constructed of shielded 26 AWG stranded

• Robust construction – Plug contact plated with 50 micro inches of gold and rated to 2500 mating cycles

copper cable and an enhanced performance shielded modular plug at each end. Patch

• Flexible stranded cable – Copper cable made of 0.23 inch S/STP stranded 26 AWG allows for high density

cord cable shall be offered in colored S/STP

and superior panel cable management

cable with a black boot. Patch cords shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be wired to be com-

• Identification – Provides identification of performance

patible with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. The TX6™

level, length, and quality control number for future

10Gig™ Shielded Patch cords must be installed as part of a com-

traceability

plete PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System in

• Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual length and color coding requirements for greater sys

order to achieve 10GBASE-T certified performance.

tem flexibility

Technical Information • Category 6A/ISO 11801 Class EA channel performance

• Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing additional color coding options

tested to 650 MHz – Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and

• RJ45 plug lock-in device (optional) – Secures plug into jack to prevent unauthorized removal of patch cord

exceeds the draft requirement of ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 21, and IEEE 802.3an-2006, TIA/EIA568-B.2-10

Applications

ratified standards for supporting 10GBASE-T trans-

TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Patch Cords are a component of the

mission over copper twisted pair cabling when used

PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System. This

as part of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded

end-to-end system provides a cost-effective medium for ensuring

Copper Cabling System

that network bandwidth needs are easily met today and tomorrow.

• FCC compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 subpart F; contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior

This shielded cabling system provides high performance, excellent EMI suppression, and aids in secure data transmission. The PANDUIT solution helps ensure organizations efficiently and reliably

performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7

meet their data transmission needs. Usage of the TX6™ 10Gig™

• UL rated – No. 1863

Shielded Copper Cabling System includes high bandwidth applica-

Key Features and Benefits

tions within data centers and connections to high-end workstations

• 100% performance tested for wire-map, NEXT and

such as:

return loss – Confidence that each patch cord delivers

• Stacking switched and switch-to-switch links

specified performance

• Storage area networks

• Centered de-embedded plug – Performance in center

• Aggregation of Gigabit Ethernet channels

of ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2-1 component range, ensuring

• Real-time intensive financial transactions

interoperability and optimum performance

• Streaming video

• Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance, consistency and reliability by reducing untwist at plug • Patented tangle free latch – Prevents snags and

• Animation • Scientific modeling • Medical imaging

provides easy release, saving time on frequent moves,

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

STP6X*IG

Category 6A, 10 Gb/s STP patch cord with TX6™ PLUS Modular Plugs on each end.

Int’ll Gray

1

10

*For lengths 2 to 20 feet (increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 feet change the length designation in the part number to the desired length. For standard cable colors other than IG (International Gray) replace IG suffix with BL (Black), BU (Blue), GR (Green), RD (Red), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL (Violet) to the end of the part number.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-32

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords Specifications Category 6A UTP patch cords shall be constructed of 24 AWG solid copper cable with an enhanced performance modular plug at each end. Patch cords shall be used in all work area outlets and patch panels. Patch cords shall be wired to be compatible with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. The TX6™ 10Gig™ Patch Cords must be installed as part of a complete PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System in order to achieve 10GBASE-T certified performance. Technical Information • Category 6A/ISO 11801 Class EA channel performance tested to 650 MHz – Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds the draft requirements of ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1, and IEEE 802.3an-2006, TIA/EIA568-B.2-10 ratified standards for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems as part of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling Systems • FCC Compliance – Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plates with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • UL rated – No. 1863 Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each patch cord delivers specified performance • Centered de-embedded plug – Performs in center of TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 component range ensuring interoperability and excellent performance

• Integral pair manager – Optimizes performance, consistency, and reliability by reducing untwist at plug • Patented tangle-free latch – Prevents snags and provides easy release, saving time and providing reliability on frequent moves, adds and changes • Slender strain relief boot – Provides easy access in high-density applications • Robust construction – Plug contacts plated with 50 micro inches of gold and rated to 2500 mating cycles • Identification – Provides identification of performance level, length and quality control number for future trace ability • Variety of cable colors and lengths – Meets individual length and color coding requirements for greater sys tem flexibility • Color bands (optional) – Snap onto cable, allowing additional color coding options Applications TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Patch Cords are a component of the PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System. This end-to-end system provides a cost effective media for ensuring that the most challenging network bandwidth needs are easily met today and tomorrow. Businesses are placing increased reliance on their networks to efficiently pass vital and time sensitive information throughout the enterprise. The TX6™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System will support the following applications: • Data Center high bandwidth applications for switch-toswitch links, storage area networks, and aggregation of data • 3-D modeling and work group file transfer • Web-enabling applications such as Voice over Internet • Protocol (VoIP)

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

STP6X*IG

Category 6A, 10 Gb/s STP patch cord with TX6™ PLUS Modular Plugs on each end.

Int’ll Gray

1

10

*For lengths 3 to 20 feet (increments of one foot) and 25, 30, 35, 40 feet change the length designation in the part number to the desired length. For standard cable colors other than Off White, add suffix BL (Black), BU (Blue), RD (Red), GR (Green), YL (Yellow), OR (Orange) or VL (Violet) before the Y at the end of the part number. For example, the part number for a blue 15-foot patch cord is UTP6X15BUY.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-33

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Cable – U/FTP

• Cable outer diameter – Plenum: 0.29” (7.36mm), Riser: 0.31” (7.87mm) • Packaging – 1,000’ (305M) per reel, CMR – 50 lbs. (22.6kg), CMP – 45 lbs. (20.4kg)

Specifications Augmented Category 6 Shielded Copper Cable shall be constructed of 4-piar twisted insulated 23 AWG conductors. Each individual

Key Features and Benefits • Individual screened pairs – Exceptional suppression of

pair shall have a metallic foil shield and all four pairs shall be cov-

internal and external (Alien) cross-talk which exceed

ered with a flame retardant PVC jacket. The shielded cable shall

IEEE 802.3an-2006 specifications and EMI protection

provide superior alien cross-talk performance. The TX6™ 10Gig™

• Internal drain wire – Facilitates means of grounding the cable and provides for efficient performance and

Shielded Cable must be installed as part of the TX6™ 10Gig™

protection of network investment

Shielded Copper Cabling System to achieve certified 10GBASE-T

• Descending length” cable markings – Easy identification of

performance.

remaining cable reduces installation time and scrap Technical Information • Augmented Category 6/ISO 11801 Class EA Edition 2.1

Applications

– Certified channel performance in a 4 –connector

TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Cable is a component of the TX6™ 10Gig™

configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds the draft

Shielded Copper Cabling System. This end-to-end system provides

requirements of TIA/EIA 568-B.2-AD10, ISO 11801

a cost effective medium for ensuring that network bandwidth needs

Class EA Edition 2.1 and IEEE 802.3an-2006 ratified

are easily met today and tomorrow. This shielded cabling system

standard for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over

provides high performance, excellent EMI suppression, and aids

copper twisted pair cabling when used as part of the

in secure data transmission. The PANDUIT solution helps ensure

PANDUIT TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling System

organizations efficiently and reliably meet their data transmission

• Category 6/Class E performance – Exceeds all

needs. Usage of the TX6™ 10Gig™ Shielded Copper Cabling

Category 6/Class E component and channel standard

System includes high bandwidth applications within data centers and

requirements

connections to high-end workstations such as:

• Cable jacket – Riser and Plenum: 100% low-smoke, flame

• Stacking switches and switch-to-switch links • Storage area networks

retardant PVC • Flame rating – Plenum: meets NEC type CMP (UL) – FT6 rated, Riser: meets NEC type CMR (UL) – FT4 rated

• Aggregation of Gigabit Ethernet channels • Real-time intensive financial transactions

• Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110 N) maximum

• Streaming video

• Temperature rating – 32 to 140 degrees F (0 to 60 degrees

• Animation

C) during installation, 14 to 140 degrees F (-10 to 60 C)

• Scientific modeling

during operation

• Medical imaging

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

PSR6004BU-UGY

Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-pair U/FTP shielded copper cable.

Blue

1000 ft.

15000 ft.

Blue

1000 ft.

15000 ft.

Copper conductors are 23 AWG with HDPE insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs, each individual twisted pair includes a metallic foil shield and is protected by a flame retardant PVC jacket.

PSP6004BU-UGY

Category 6A plenum (CMP) 4 pair U/FTP shielded copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG with FEP insulation. Conductors are twisted in pairs; each individual twisted pair includes a metallic foil shield and is protected by a low smoke, flame-retardant PVC jacket.

*For standard colors other than Blue, replace BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow) or IG (International Gray). ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-34

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cable

• Cable jacket – Plenum (CMP): Flame retardant PVC

Specifications

– Riser (CMR): Low smoke flame retardant PVC

Category 6A cable shall meet the ANSI/EIA/

• Cable weight – Plenum (CMP): 44 lbs./1000 ft. (20 kg/305m)

TIA-568-B.2-10 and IEC 61156-5 component standards. The conductors shall be 23 AWG

– Riser (CMR): 35 lbs./1000 ft. (16 kg/305m) • Packaging – 1000 ft. (305m) on a reel, Package tested to

construction with FEP (CMP) or PE (CMR)

ISTA Procedure 1A

insulation. The copper conductors shall be

– Plenum (CMP): 48 lbs./1000 ft. (22 kg/305m)

twisted in pairs and separated by a cross web. All four pairs shall be surrounded by matrix tape and a flame retardant jacket. The patent pending matrix tape shall suppress the effect of alien cross-

– Riser (CMR): 39 lbs./1000 ft. (18 kg/305m) Key Features and Benefits • Innovative matrix tape technology – Provides superior

talk allowing 10 Gb/s transmission. This innovative cable design

suppression of both PSANEXT and PSAACRF; improves the

shall provide installation flexibility as cables can be routed in tight

installation flexibility by allowing cable combing in existing

bundles through pathways and spaces.

pathways without compromising performance

Technical Information

• Round cable design – Improves fill capacity, cable manage-

Category 6A/Class EA channel and component performance – Cer-

ment, reduces required bend radius and allows efficient use

tified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10

of pathways and spaces • Extended temperature range – Allows operation in 75°C

Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting

ambient environment providing error-free performance in high-

10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems as part

density cabinets and large cable bundles running PoE+

of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System.

applications

Certified component performance up to 100 meters and exceeds

• Cross-divider – Separates pairs for exceptional cable performance

the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A and IEC 61156-5 Cat-

• Descending length cable markings – Easy identification of

egory 6A standards for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems. • Cable diameter – 0.295 in. (7.5mm) nominal • PoE compliant – Meets IEEE 802.3af

remaining cable to reduce installation time and cable scrap Applications The TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cable is a component of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System. Interoperable

and draft requirements of IEEE 802.3at

and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides design

for PoE Plus

flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. Key

• Conductors/insulators – 23 AEG solid

applications include:

copper insulated with FEP (CMP) or

• 10GBASE-T Ethernet

flame retardant PE (CMR)

• Data center I/O consolidation

• Flame rating – Plenum (CMP): NFPA 262 – Riser (CMR): UL 1666

• Data center server virtualization • Consolidation of network interconnects

• Installation tension – 25 lbs. (110 N) maximum

• Back-bone aggregation

• Temperature rating - 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C) during

• Parallel processing and high speed computing

installation, -4°F to 167°F (-20°C to 75°C) during operation

Part Number

Part Description

Cable Color

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

PUR6A04BU-UG

Category 6A riser (CMR) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper con-

Blue

1000 ft.

18000 ft.

Blue

1000 ft.

18000 ft.

ductors are 23 AWG. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated divider, surrounded by a patent-pending matrix tape and protected by a flame-retardant jacket.

PUP6A04BU-UG

Category 6A plenum (CMP) 4-pair UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 23 AWG. Conductors are twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated pair divider, surrounded by a patent-pending matrix tape and protected by a low smoke, flame-retardant jacket.

*For standard colors other than Blue, replace BU (Blue) with WH (White), YL (Yellow) or IG (International Gray). ©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-35

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information DP6A™ 10Gig™ Patch Panels Specifications Category 6A/Class EA patch panel shall terminate unshielded twisted 4-pair, 22 – 26 AWG, Category 6A cable and shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks. Patch panels shall be supplied with T568A and T568B wiring schemes. Ports and panels shall be easy to identify with pre-printed numbers, write-on areas, and optional label kits. Industry standard single wire 110 punchdown tool shall be used for terminations. Technical Information Category 6A/Class EA channel and component performance – Certified channel performance in a 4-connector configuration up to 100 meters and exceeds the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting 10GBASE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems as part of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ UTP Copper Cabling System. Certified component performance to the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Category 6A and ISO 11801 Class EA standards for supporting 10GABSE-T transmission over twisted-pair cabling systems • UL rated – No.1863 • FCC compliance – Meets ANSI/TIA-968-A; contacts are plated with 50 micro inches of gold for superior performance • IEC compliance – Meets IEC 60603-7 • PoE compliance – Meets IEEE 802.3af and draft requirements of IEEE 802.3at for PoE Plus • Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks • Packaging – Packaged with M6 and #12 – 24 mounting screws

Key Features and Benefits • 100% performance tested – Confidence that each port delivers specified performance • Advanced electrical compensation technology – Head room over industry standards for lower risk and higher bandwidth network availability • Each port individually serialized – Marked with quality control number for future traceability • Common termination tooling – Terminates with indus try standard 110 punchdown tool for familiar, easy, and fast installation • Industry standard RJ45 interface – Familiar to endusers; backwards compatible • Identification – Pre-printed ports and write-on areas available for port and panel identification; optional label kits available for TIA/EIA-606A compliance • Angled design (optional) – Facilitate proper bend radius control and minimizes the need for horizontal cable managers • Blockout device (optional) – Provides a simple and secure method to control access to data ports • Replaceable port module (optional) – Ability to replace field damaged ports for full panel use Applications The DP6A™ 10Gig™ Patch Panel is a component of the PANDUIT TX6A™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System. Interoperable and backward compatible, this end-to-end system provides design flexibility to protect network investments well into the future. Key applications include: • 10GBASE-T Ethernet • Data center I/O consolidation • Data center server virtualization • Consolidation of network interconnects • Back-bone aggregation • Parallel processing and high speed computing

Part Number

Part Description

No. of Rack Spaces

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

DPA246X88TGY

24-port, angled, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 24 RJ45

1

1

10

2

1

10

8-position, 8-wire ports.

DPA486X88TGY

48-port, angled, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 48 RJ45

DPA486X88TGY

24-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 24 RJ45 8-position, 8-wire ports.

1

1

10

DPA486X88TGY

48-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch panel with 48 RJ45 8-position, 8-wire ports.

2

1

10

8-position, 8-wire ports.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-36

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Data-Patch™ 10/100BASE-T Patch Panel Specifications 10/100BASE-T patch panels shall feature RJ45 ports on the front of the panel. Panel PC board is wired for 10BASE-Tand 100BASE-T Ethernet utilizing pins 1, 2 and 3, 6. The back of the patch consists of female telco 50-pin/25-pair connectors wired per RJ21 industry standards for backward compatibility. Patch panels shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks. Patch panel does not require the use of a punchdown tool. Technical Information • Performance – Category 5e designed to maintain network cabling system reliability (UL 1863 Listed and CSA Certified) • Dimensions – 24-port = 1.72”H x 19.0”W x 1.39”D (43.7mm x 4.82.6mm x 35.3mm), 1 RU 48-port = 3.47”H x 19.0”W x 1.39”D (88.1mm x 482.6mm x 35.3mm), 2 RU • Mounting option – Mounts to standard EIA 19” rack or 23” rack when used with optional panel extender brackets • Packaging – Packaged with four #12 – 24 x .5” round head screws to allow fastening to racks

Part Number

Part Description

DP24584TV25Y DP24584TV25Y

Key Features and Benefits • Port and panel identification – Pre-numbered ports, write-on areas and optional label holders follow TIAEIA-606-A labeling standards • RJ21 connector – Female Industry Standard, meets EIA standard environmental and electrical performance, UL recognized, CSA approved • Hook and loop/screw connector – Accommodates 180, 110 or 90 degree male patch cord connectors on back of patch panel Applications 10/100BASE-T patch panels provide a Category 5e channel when used with PANDUIT Category 5e 25-pair cable assemblies. Panels should be used with the PANDUIT cable management system to achieve the most organized and efficient telecommunications room cabling. Patch panels provide maximum density to meet high density requirements by conserving space.

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

224-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 24 RJ45 ports wired 1 to two RJ21 Telco connectors.

1

10

48-port, Category 5e, patch panel with 48 RJ45 ports wired to four RJ21 Telco connectors.

1

10

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

No. of Rack Spaces

2

Page A-37

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information QuickNet™ Copper Cabling System The PANDUIT QuickNet™ Copper Cabling System provides a custom, pre-terminated cabling solution which meets unique requirements. Fast and simple to install, the system enables quick network deployment, increased reliability, and lowest total cost of ownership as compared to field terminated installations. Engineered for maximum design flexibility and high rack density utilization (up to 48 ports in one rack space), the system offers 100% factory tested pre-terminated cable assemblies in custom lengths and configurations. QuickNet™ Angled and Flat Patch Panels accept QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes, Patch Panel Adapters, and Blacks, which snap in and out, with one hand, for quick installation. Technical Information • Each QuickNet™ Cable Assembly is factory tested to electrical permanent link specifications • TX6™ 10Gig™ Copper Cabling System exceeds draft requirements of TIA/EIA-568-2-AD10, ISO 110801 Class EA Edition 2.1 and IEEE 802.3an ratified standard for supporting 10GBASE-T requirements • TX6™ Copper Cabling System exceeds TIA.EIA-568-B.2-1 and ISO 11801 2nd Edition Class E standards Jack modules utilize patented Giga-TX™ Technology which optimizes performance by maintaining cable pair geometry and eliminating conductor untwist Modular plugs meets all applicable FCC Part 68 Subpart requirements and exceed IEC 60603-7

Key Features and Benefits • Pre-terminated – Controlled factory environment provides consistent network performance while reducing installation time and on-site waste as compared to field-terminated installations • 100% factory tested – Eliminated the time and cost associated with on-site testing and ensures verified performance (permanent link test data supplied with each cable assembly) • Wide range of cable types and performance levels – Category 6 UTP and Category 6A UTP/STP performance levels available in plenum or riser cable fire ratings • Wide range of termination configurations and custom lengths – Cable assemblies allow customization including pre-terminated cassettes, jack modules, modular plugs, plug packs, and/or unterminated cable options to provide design flexibility for all installations in lengths from 10’ to 295’ (1’ increments) • Pre-terminated cassettes – Snap in and out of switches and utilize an integral release tab to ensure easy on-site moves, adds and changes • Plug Packs – Snap in and out of switches and utilize an integral release tab to ensure easy on-site moves, adds and changes • Patch panel adapter – Snaps in and out of QuickNet™ Patch Panels and accepts Mini-Com® Modules for UTP, fiber optic and audio/visual applications • Standard and high-density solution – QuickNet™ Patch Panels in angled and flat designs enable 24 and 48 ports in one rack unit for efficient rack space utilization • Assembly identification – Each cable assembly label includes part number, performance level, and serialized quality assurance number for future traceability; custom cable assembly and/or individual cable labels available upon request.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-38

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Specifications

1 – Q = QuickNet

K = Jack Modules staggered right

2 – Performance Level

L = Jack modules staggered left

A = Category 6A (10Gig™) UTP

Q = Modular plugs staggered right

B = Category 6 Enhanced UTP

S = Modular plugs staggered left

C = Category 6 UTP

U = Unterminated

E = Category 6A (10Gig™) STP

O = Unterminated with cassette & jack modules for on-site termination

3 – Flame /Smoke Rating R = Riser or P = Plenum 4 – Cable Color B = Blue or W = White 5 – Termination End 1 A = Plug Pack

8 – Termination End 2 Color Options Cassette, Jack Module and Unterminated Color Options B = Blue, E = Electric Ivory, G = Green, H = Off White, I = International Gray, L = Black, O = Orange, R = Red, V = Violet, W = White, Y = Yellow. Shielded jack modules choose option X, all Shielded Jack Modules are Black.

C = Cassette

Plug Pack Color Options

J = Jack Modules

B = Blue, W = White, R = Red, L = Black

P = Modular Plugs

Modular Plug Color Options

K = Jack modules staggered right

X = No color option available, all modular plugs are clear

L = Jack modules staggered left

Unterminated Color Option

Q = Modular plugs staggered right

X = No color option available

S = Modular plugs staggered left

9 – Assembly Options

6 – Termination End 1 Color Options

P = Pulling eye

Cassette and Jack Module Color Options: B = Blue, E = Electric Ivory, G = Green, H = Off White,

X = No Assembly options requested 10 – Custom Labeling*

I = International Gray, L = Black, O = Orange, R = Red,

L = Custom assembly label

V = Violet, W = White, Y = Yellow. Shielded Jack

C = Custom cable labels

Modules choose option L, all Shielded Jack Modules are Black.

B = Custom assembly and cable labels

Plug Pack Color Options:

X = No custom labels required

B = Blue, W = White, R = Red, L = Black Modular Plug Color Options: X = No color option available, all modular plugs are clear 7 – Termination End 2

11 – Assembly Length** 10 – 295 feet *Custom cable assembly labels are available up to 18 characters; individual cable labels are available up to 15 characters

A = Plug Pack

**QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cable Assemblies are available in one foot in-

C = Cassette

crements in lengths 10 – 295 feet. All connectivity is wired T568B Category

J = Jack Modules

6 Enhanced Performance level utilizes PANDUIT® TX6500™ Category 6

P = Modular Plugs

UTP Cable. Permanent link test results shipped with each cable assembly.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-39

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies PANDUIT QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies facilitate quick and easy connection and disconnection of patch cords to a variety of switches, reducing time and cost associated when installing and maintaining structured cabling links. Innovative design features of the plug pack allow multiple patch cords to be installed simultaneously with one hand for speed of deployments, while providing flexibility and ease to identify and remove individual cable links without disrupting service to the other network connections. QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies are constructed of 100% performance tested PANDUIT patch cords and assembled in a factory-controlled environment for more consistent connections with optimum reliability. Engineered for design flexibility and high-density utilization, QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies are available in Category 6A, 6 and 5e performance levels. An optional lock-in security device prevents unauthorized removal of plug packs form the switch, providing an additional level of security. Key Features and Benefits • Compatible with Cisco Catalyst 6500 or 4500 series switches – utilizes precision for quick connection to select switches • Integrated finger latch – Enables quick, one-handed installation and removal of QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assemblies form the switch • Wide range of performance levels – Provides optimum flexibility with Category 6A, 6 and 5e performance levels • Variety of configurations – Available in 6, 8 or 12 cable assemblies for optimal switch compatibility

• Variety of lengths – Enables greater design flexibility • Modular design – Snaps modular plugs directly into switches and utilizes an integral release tab to ensure easy on-site moves, adds and changes • Low profile design – Allows plug pack assemblies to be installed side by side or stacked on top of each other providing maximum port density in high density installations • Removal tool (optional) – Allows individual patch cords to be removed without disrupting other network connections • Lock-in device (optional) – Prevents unauthorized removal of patch cords from the switch for an additional level of security • Marker ties – Enables easy identification in high density installations; provides additional level of security when combined with optional lock-in device • Identification labels – Includes part number, performance level, and quality assurance number for future traceability; custom labels available upon request Application Information Switch blades periodically need to be replaced or exchanged due to system upgrades or repair/replacement. Due to high port density and increasing cable diameter (as cabling requirements shift from Category 5e to Category 6A cable), removing and re-connecting each individual patch cord is time consuming. Each QuickNet ™ plug Pack Assembly house 6, 8 or 12 patch cords, allowing them to be quickly installed, disconnected, and re-connected in significantly less time than traditional methods. Labels on each plug pack provide easy identification further reducing the time associated with identifying and re-connecting each individual cable. As a result, you can be assured that each patch cord is installed quickly and accurately.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-40

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information

1 – QuickNet™ Plug Pack Assembly (QPP) 2 – Performance Level A = Category 6A (10Gig™) UTP E = Category 6A (10Gig™) STP* C = Category 6 UTP D = Category 5e UTP 3 – Flame/Smoke Rating C = CM (UTP only) D = Dual rated CM and LSZH (shielded only) 4 – Cable Color B = Blue W = White 5 – Plug Pack Configuration A = 6 pack B = 12 pack D = 8 pack 6 – Plug Pack Color** B = Blue W = White 7 – Assembly Length 03 = 3 feet 05 = 5 feet 07 = 7 feet 10 = 10 feet 14 = 14 feet

All UTP cable is available in CM Flame/Smoke Rating. *All STP cable is dual rated for CM and LSZH applications **Non-standard plug pack colors are available in red and black.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-41

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Mini-Com® Ultimate ID® Hybrid Box Specifications The hybrid box shall be a merging point for fiber and copper installations and shall accept all modules. The hybrid box shall offer independent access to each type of media providing easy installation and maintenance. The box shall provide various mounting options. A retention block shall include a built-in spool that holds a total of 12 meters of fiber buffered cable and shall accept a single gang faceplate for up to 6 modules. A cover extension shall provide additional security and bend radius protection to the connections. The hybrid box shall comply with labeling standards by including a station ID pocket and a 6 port ID pocket for all base mounted modules. Technical Information • Dimensions - .98”H x 4.24”W x 7.89”L (25mm x 107.6mm x 200.4mm)

• ultimate ID ® labeling system – Easy identification to help troubleshooting and maintenance, meets 606-A standard • Optional cover extension – Provides additional security to fiber connections and offers bend radius protection • Modularity – Multimedia flexibility simplifies moves, adds and changes • Retention block – Will manage up to 12 meters of buffered fiber cable • Raceway breakout – Provides routing flexibility, easy to install for low installed cost Applications Schools, hospitals and government/military are among many organizations that are considering fiber optic/copper solutions to reduce the amount of network upgrades required to satisfy increasing demands for higher bandwidth. Fiber, in closer proximity to the source, will ensure there is adequate bandwidth installed to support high-demand, multi-user environments.

.98”H x 4.24”W x 9.56”L (25mm x 107.6mm x 242.9mm)

• Color options: Available in Electric Ivory, International White and White • Mounting option: Mounts to single or double gang openings, compatible with DIN openings, mounts with adhesive tape to flat surfaces • Packaging: Hybrid box and hybrid box with cover extension will both include retention block, mounting screws, adhesive tape and clear label covers Key Features and Benefits • Copper/Fiber in one outlet – One outlet will merge fiber and copper connections

As the demand for higher bandwidth increased, applications such as military secured networks, corporate research and development projects and digital imaging equipment in hospitals will require functional high capacity products to support high end networks. The Mini-Com® Ultimate ID ® Hybrid box can bring fiber to the work area today, and can also serve as a future migration path, providing a merging point that will support installations requiring both fiber and copper connections.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-42

Appendix A-4: PANDUIT Copper Cabling System Technical Information Part Number

Part Description

Color*

Labels Used with Required** Pan-Way® Raceway

Std. Pkg. Quantity

Std. Ctn. Quantity

UICBXH6IW-A

Hybrid box with cover accepts up to 6

Off White

One 1-Port, LD3, LD5 One 6-Port

1

10

Off White

One 1-Port, LD3, LD5 One 6-Port

1

10

1

10

Mini-Com® Modules in a single gang Mini-Com® Faceplate, and up to six MiniCom® Fiber Optic Modules in the base.

DPA486X88TGY Hybrid box with cover and cover extension accepts up to 6 Mini-Com® Modules in a single gang Mini-Com® Faceplate, and up to six Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Modules in the base.

DPA486X88TGY Cover extension for hybrid box.

Off White

DPA486X88TGY 24-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch 1 panel with 24 RJ45 8-position, 8-wire ports.

1

10

DPA486X88TGY 48-port, Category 6A, 10 Gb/s patch 2 panel with 48 RJ45 8-position, 8-wire ports.

1

10

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page A-43

Appendix B PANDUIT Fiber Opticr Cabling System Technical Information

B: Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information

Appendix A-1

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-1

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor Cable Specifications Fiber optic indoor cable is an integral part of the end-to-end fiber optic solution, designed to support today’s data needs while meeting tomorrow’s ever-advancing network requirements. Fiber optic indoor cable is used within buildings to provide high-density connectivity and ease of installation. Applications include intra-building backbones, routing between telecommunications rooms and connectorized cables that require LSZH ratings. 10 GbE fiber optic interconnect cable features the highest quality OM3 laser optimized fiber to support 10 Gb/s applications while maintaining

compatibility with existing 50μm multimode systems. Standard singlemode and multimode indoor cable is available in fiber counts from 4 to 72 fibers. Larger distribution cable features a 6-fiber sub-unit design that simplifies fiber identification, provides easy access and routing of the fibers, and increases cable durability with a dielectric central strength member.

Technical Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-2

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor Interlocking Armored Cable Specifications Used in intra-building backbone, building backbone, and horizontal installations for riser (OFCR), plenum (OFCP), and harsh environments. Interlocking aluminum armor eliminates the need for inner duct or conduit to provide a smaller crush resistant pathway for design flexibility and a lower installed cost. Available in 6, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 and 144-fiber counts. Multimode (OM3, OM2, and OM1) and singlemode (OS1/OS2) fiber available optimized) fiber available. 900μm standards-based color-coded buffer

coating protects fibers during handling and allows for easy identification and stripping. Cable design and flexible buffer tubes allow for quick breakout and ease of routing. Opti-Core® 10Gig™ OM3 Cable is designed to support network transmission speeds up to 10 Gb/s for link lengths up to 300 meters with an 850nm source per IEEE 802.3ae 10 GbE standard; backward compatible for use with all 50/125μm system requirements

Technical Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-3

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/ Outdoor Interlocking Armored Cable Specifications PANDUIT ® OPTI-CORE ® Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor Interlocking Armored Cable is an integral part of the PANDUIT end-to-end fiber optic solution, designed to support today’s data needs while meeting tomorrow’s ever-advancing network requirements. OPTI-CORE ® Fiber Optic Indoor Interlocking Armored Cable is used within buildings to provide high-density connectivity and ease of installation. Interlocking aluminum armor eliminates the need for inner duct or conduit to provide a smaller crush resistant pathway for improved design flexibility

and lower installed cost. Applications include intra-building backbones, building backbones, and horizontal installations for riser (OFNR), plenum (OFNP), and harsh environments. OPTI-CORE ® 10GIG™ Fiber Optic Indoor Interlocking Armored Cable features the highest quality OM3 laser optimized fiber to support 10Gb/s applications while maintaining compatibility with existing 50μm multimode systems. RoHS compliant singlemode and multimode cable is available in fiber counts from 6 to 48 fibers.

Technical Information

]

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-4

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor Cable Specifications Fiber optic indoor/outdoor Cable is an integral part of the end-to-end fiber optic solution, designed to support today’s data needs while meeting tomorrow’s ever-advancing network requirements. This LSZH rated cable provides water-blocking, high density, and easy installation in duct applications and entrance facilities. Fiber optic indoor/outdoor cable meets the IEC 60794-1 standards. 10 GbE fiber optic indoor/outdoor cable features the highest quality OM3 laser optimized fiber to support 10 Gb/s applications while maintaining compatibility with existing 50μm multimode

systems. Standard RoHS compliant multimode and singlemode indoor/ outdoor cables are available in fiber counts up to 24 fibers as a “central tube” design, and up to 72 fibers as a “stranded tube” design.

Technical Information

Ordering Information

** Substitute for fiber count: 04, 08, 12, 24, 36, 48 72

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-5

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Armored Cable Grounding Kit Specifications Crimped jumper wire assembly; 24” (609.6mm) length; LCC6-14, #10 mechanical clamp; provided with two each #12-24, M6 slotted hex head zinc-plated thread-forming screws, and black polypropylene terminal cover. Technical Information

LC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors – Pre-Polished Cam Termination Specifications LC small form factor (SFF) pre-polished connectors with rear pivot latch shall be TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible and contain a factory-terminated fiber, eliminating field polishing and adhesive. LC pre-polished connectors shall have an average insertion loss of 0.3dB per mated pair for multimode fiber. LC pre-polished connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one action allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degradation in performance.

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Fiber cable type

900μm tight-buffered cable only

Fiber cable size

1.6mm – 2.0mm and 3.0mm jacketed cable

Ferrule type

Zirconia ceramic with a pre-polished fiber stub

Insertion loss

Ceramic: 0.3dB average (multimode and

with optional boots

singlemode) Return loss

Ceramic: >20dB (multimode), >26dB (10Gig™ multimode), >50dB (singlemode)

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-6

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information LC Fiber Optic Connectors – Field Polish Termination Specifications LC small form factor (SFF) field polish connectors with rear pivot latch are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. LC simplex and duplex connectors are field terminable. The fibers shall terminate in 1.25mm ceramic ferrules with non-optical disconnect functionality and an average insertion loss of 0.1dB per mated pair for multimode and singlemode fiber. Ordering Information

SC OptiCam® Fiber Optic Connectors – Pre-Polished Cam Termination Specifications SC pre-polished fiber optic connectors shall be TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant and contain a factory-terminated fiber, eliminating field polishing and adhesive. SC pre-polished connectors shall have an average insertion loss of 0.3dB per mated pair for multimode and singlemode fiber. SC pre-polished connectors shall captivate fiber and buffer in one action allowing for up to two re-terminations with no degradation in performance.

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Fiber cable type

900μm tight-buffered cable recommended

Fiber cable size

1.6mm – 2.0mm jacketed cable

Ferrule type

Zirconia ceramic ferrule

Insertion loss

0.1dB average (multimode and singlemode)

Return loss

>20dB (multimode), >40dB (singlemode)

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant; exceeds

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Fiber cable type

900μm tight-buffered cable only

Fiber cable size

1.6mm – 2.0mm and 3.0mm jacketed cable with optional boots

Ferrule type

Zirconia ceramic or composite ferrule with a

Insertion loss

Ceramic: 0.3dB average (multimode and

pre-polished fiber stub singlemode) Composite: 0.3dB average (multimode) Return loss

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Ceramic: >20dB (multimode), >26dB (10Gig™ multimode), >50dB (singlemode) Composite: >20dB (multimode)

Page B-7

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information SC Fiber Optic Connectors – Field Polish Termination Specifications SC field polish connectors are TIA/EIA604 FOCIS-3 compliant. SC simplex and duplex connectors are field terminable. The fibers shall terminate in 2.5mm ceramic ferrules with non-optical disconnect functionality and an average insertion loss of 0.1dB (multimode) and 0.15dB (singlemode) per mated pair. Ordering Information

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant; exceeds

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Fiber cable type

900μm tight-buffered cable recommended

Fiber cable size

3.0mm or 1.6mm – 2.0mm jacketed cable

Ferrule type

Zirconia ceramic ferrule

Insertion loss

0.1dB average (multimode), .15dB (singlemode)

Return loss

>20dB (multimode), >40dB (singlemode)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-8

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information LC Fiber Optic Adapters Specifications LC small form factor (SFF) fiber optic adapters with integrated panel retention clips are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. Each LC simplex adapter shall connect one LC connector pair in one module space. Each LC duplex adapter shall connect two LC connector pairs in one module space. LC adapters and adapter modules shall include phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applications or zirconia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applications.

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds-

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Compatibility

Small form factor (SFF) duplex adapter fits

Split Sleeve type

Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze

into single module space

LC Adapter Type

Description

Application Type

Sr./Sr. (Senior/Senior)

Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface (without keyway) at each end.

Typically used for patch panel and outlet applications, including behind the wall applications.

Both ends accept FOCIS-10 compatible senior LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded ferrules) Sr./Jr. (Senior/Junior)

Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface (without keyway) at one end and a FOCIS-10 compatible junior adapter interface (with keyway) at the other end. Both ends accept all FOCIS-10 compatible senior LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded ferrules). Junior end also accepts FOCIS-10 compatible junior LC connectors (keyed; fixed ferrule/ springless).

Shorter profile of junior end accommodates tighter applications behind the wall, allowing easier access to FOCIS-10 compatible junior (shorter) LC connectors terminated on 900μm buffered fiber. PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels and QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes include Sr./Jr. Adapters.

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-9

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs) Specifications Fiber adapter panels are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS. Snap quickly into the front of all components. Phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications.

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS compatible for all MPO/

requirements

MTP*, LC, SC, ST, MT-RJ or FC adapters

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 50/125μm 10Gig™ and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Compatibility

Compatible with Opticom® Enclosure and

Split Sleeve type

Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze

Patch Panel products for complete modularity

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-10

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opticom® Rack Mounted Fiber Enclosures Specifications Rack mounted fiber enclosures house, organize, manage and protect fiber optic cable, terminations, splices, connectors and patch cords. The enclosures accommodate fiber adapter panels (FAP) and fiber mount panels (FMP) plus associated trunk cables, connectors and patch cords. Integral cable management and bend radius control for transition to vertical cable managers is provided. Rack mounted enclosures are constructed of steel with molded front and rear doors that are removable for cabling and connector access and installation. A flat front door enables direct access to fiber optic patch cords. The 1RU and 2RU enclosures feature a forward and backward sliding drawer for access to all fiber connections and terminations. The 3RU and 4RU enclosures use a fixed bulkhead design. Multiple knockouts allow a variety of trunk cable entry points.

Technical Information Compatibility

Houses any PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panel, or Opticom® Fiber Mount Panel (FMP). Also compatible with PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber Optic Splice Module (FOSM) for fusion splice installations

Adapter Types

Supports MTP, LC, SC, ST, FC, and MT-RJ

Sizes

1RU, 2RU, 3RU, and 4RU versions

Mounting

Universal brackets (included) allow enclosure

adapters

to fit in 19” wide EIA-310 style or 23” wide EIA310 or WECO style racks Accessories

Mounting hardware and accessory kit with slack spools, fiber routing clips, bend radius control guides, and port labeling and identification card included

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-11

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opticom® Fiber Adapter Patch Panels Specifications Fiber adapter patch panels mount to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack. Standard version holds QuickNet™ MTP* Cassettes and Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs). Angled version holds Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels and matches Mini-Com® Angled Patch Panel profile. Used with Opticom® Fiber Mount Tray (FMT) to protect fibers and terminations.

Technical Information Compatibility

Houses any PANDUIT® QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated MTP* Cassette or Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panel. Use with Opticom® Fiber Mount Tray (FMT) to protect fibers and terminations.

Sizes

1RU and 2RU sizes, flat panel and angled panel versions

Mounting

Mounts to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack

Accessories

Mounting hardware included

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-12

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information SC Fiber Optic Adapters Specifications SC fiber optic adapters with integrated panel retention clips are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant. Each SC simplex adapter shall connect one SC connector pair in one module space. Each SC duplex adapter shall connect two SC connector pairs in two module spaces. SC adapters and adapter modules shall include phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applications or zirconia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applications.

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible; exceeds

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Compatibility

Compatible with Mini-Com® products for

Split Sleeve type

Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze

complete modularity

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-13

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information LC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Adapter Modules Specifications LC Sr./Sr. and Sr./Jr. small form factor (SFF) fiber optic adapter modules are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. They shall be compatible with MiniCom® products for complete modularity. LC small form factor (SFF) fiber optic adapters with integrated panel retention clips are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. Each LC simplex adapter shall connect one LC connector pair in one module space. Each LC duplex adapter shall connect two LC connector pairs in one module space. LC adapters and adapter modules shall include phosphor bronze split sleeves for multimode applications or zirconia ceramic split sleeves for singlemode applications. They

shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications. Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds-

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Compatibility

Small form factor (SFF) duplex adapter fits

Split Sleeve type

Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze

into single module space.

LC Adapter Type

Description

Application Type

Sr./Sr. (Senior/Senior)

Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface (without keyway) at each end.

Typically used for patch panel and outlet applications, including behind the wall applications.

Both ends accept FOCIS-10 compatible senior LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded ferrules). Sr./Jr. (Senior/Junior)

Has a FOCIS-10 senior adapter interface (without keyway) at one end and a FOCIS-10 compatible junior adapter interface (with keyway) at the other end. Both ends accept all FOCIS-10 compatible senior

Shorter profile of junior end accommodates tighter applications behind the wall, allowing easier access to FOCIS-10 compatible junior (shorter) LC connectors terminated on 900μm buffered fiber.

LC connectors (non-keyed; spring loaded ferrules).

PANDUIT® Opticom® Fiber Adapter Panels Junior end also accepts FOCIS-10 compatible junior and QuickNet™ Pre-Terminated Cassettes LC connectors (keyed; fixed ferrule/springless). include Sr./Jr. Adapters. Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-14

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information SC Mini-Com® Fiber Optic Adapter Modules Specifications SC fiber optic adapter modules are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible. They shall be compatible with MiniCom® products for complete modularity. They shall have phosphor bronze or zirconia ceramic split sleeves to fit specific network requirements; zirconia ceramic split sleeves are required for singlemode applications.

Technical Information Standards

TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compatible; exceeds

requirements

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements

Fiber compatibility 62.5/125μm OM1, 50/125μm OM2, 10Gig™ 50/125μm laser optimized OM3 and 9/125μm OS1/OS2 Compatibility

Compatible with Mini-Com® products for complete modularity

Split Sleeve type

Zirconia ceramic or phosphor bronze

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-15

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels Specifications Mini-Com® Modular Patch Panels mount to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack and accept all Mini-Com® Adapter Modules and Jack Modules including LC, SC, and MTP* fiber adapter modules. Modular patch panels are available in a variety of sizes and styles in both flat and angled patch panel versions. Individual adapter module identification is provided via pre-numbered ports and provisions for field generated port ID labels.

Technical Information Compatibility

Compatible with all PANDUIT® Mini-Com® products for complete modularity

Adapter Types

Supports MTP*, LC, SC, ST, FC, and MT-RJ adapter modules

Sizes

1RU and 2RU sizes, flat panel and angled panel versions with 24, 48, and 72 ports

Mounting

Mounts to any 19” wide EIA-310 style rack

Mounting

Mounting hardware included

Ordering Information

*MTP is a registered trademark of US Conec Ltd. ** CPP48HDWBLY and CPPA48HDWBLY high-density patch panels have provision for pre-printed port ID numbers (1-48) only

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-16

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opti-Core® Traditional Trunk Cable Assemblies Specifications Traditional trunk cable assemblies allow for rapid deployment of highdensity permanent links in a single assembly for data center applications requiring quick infrastructure deployment, such as main, horizontal, and zone distribution areas. Traditional trunk cable assemblies optimize cabling routing requirements to ensure efficient use of pathway space and significantly reduce installation time and cost. Traditional trunk cable assemblies, built with traditional simplex and duplex connectivity (LC, SC, and ST), guarantee compatibility, flexibility, and system performance in all permanent link applications. All traditional trunk cable assemblies are factory terminated and tested to deliver verified optical performance and reliability for improved network integrity. 10 GbE versions provide 10 Gb/s network performance up to 300M per IEEE 802.3ae 10 GbE standard while maintaining compatibility with legacy systems. 150M and 550M link length options are also available.

Technical Information Application

Tailors configuration and breakout construc-

specific design

tion to application requirements to minimize waste, optimize cable management, speed deployment, and improve flexibility and manageability for lower installation costs

Termination data

Assures verified optical performance for im-

supplied

proved network integrity

Plenum rated

Meets NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame rating for

jacket

standard compliant safety

LSZH rated jacket Meets IEC-60332 (LSZH) flame rating for standard compliant safety High-density

Uses pathway space more efficiently to

cable

improve manageability and reduce installation costs

Range of fiber

Supports 10 Gb/s, multimode, and singlemode

configurations

pre-terminated permanent link elements in the data center to provide design flexibility for all connectivity types

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-17

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Fan-Out Cords Specifications Fan-out cords allow quick high performance field fusion splice during installation to provide the lowest installed cost. Fan-out cords are built with traditional simplex connectivity (LC, SC, and ST), guarantee compatibility, flexibility, and system performance in all permanent link applications. All Fan-out cords are factory terminated and tested to deliver verified optical performance and reliability for improved network integrity.

Technical Information Standard

All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500

Requirements

mating cycles

Compliant with

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5) UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings

Insertion loss

0.25dB per connector

Endface

Inspected in compliance with Telcordia GR326-CORE, Issue 3 requirements to ensure high performance

Riser or plenum

Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)

rated jacket

flame ratings for standard compliant safety

Test data

Supplied with each patch cord and pigtail Establishes a performance reference to streamline maintenance

Q.C. identification

Quality control reference provides lifetime

label

traceability of test data

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-18

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Opti-Core® Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails

Technical Information Standard

10Gig® 50/125um (OM3) Multimode Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications Fan-out cords allow quick high performance field fusion splice during installation to provide the lowest installed cost. Fan-out cords are built with traditional simplex connectivity (LC, SC, and ST), guarantee compatibility, flexibility, and system performance in all permanent link applications. All Fan-out cords are factory terminated and tested to deliver verified optical performance and reliability for improved network integrity.

All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500

Requirements

mating cycles

Compliant with

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5) UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings

Insertion loss

0.25dB per connector

Endface

Inspected in compliance with Telcordia GR326-CORE, Issue 3 requirements to ensure high performance

Riser or plenum

Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)

rated jacket

flame ratings for standard compliant safety

Test data

Supplied with each patch cord and pigtail Establishes a performance reference to streamline maintenance

Q.C. identification

Quality control reference provides lifetime

label

traceability of test data

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-19

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Multimode 62.5/125um (OM1) or 50/125 (OM2) Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications RoHS compliant fiber optic patch cords shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. RoHS compliant fiber optic pigtails shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (unterminated) on the other end. Patch cords and pigtails shall include laser optimized OM3 fiber or OM1, OM2 or fiber in 900μm tight-buffered fiber, 1.6mm or 3.0mm simplex or duplex zipcord jacketed cable, or 1.8mm duplex zipcord jacketed cable. Jacketed cable shall be compliant with UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings. Patch cords and pigtails shall meet or exceed requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. The fiber connectors shall be FOCIS compliant or compatible, and exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles.

Technical Information Standard

All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500

Requirements

mating cycles

Compliant with

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5) UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings

Insertion loss

Per connection: 0.10dB typical, 0.30dB max. (multimode), 0.50dB max. (MT-RJ multimode); 0.25dB typical, 0.75dB max. (singlemode), 0.35dB max. (LC singlemode)

Return loss

20dB min. (multimode); 26dB min. (10Gig™ multimode); 55dB min. (singlemode)

Riser or plenum

Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)

rated jacket

flame ratings for standard compliant safety

Test data

Supplied with each patch cord and pigtail Establishes a performance reference to streamline maintenance

Q.C. identification

Quality control reference provides lifetime

label

traceability of test data

Ordering Information

*Indicates length in meters. Patch cords are available in 1m – 10m lengths in 1m increments and 15m, 20m, 25m and 30m lengths. Add the letter B to the end of the part number for pair wise flip. Pigtails are available in 1m, 2m, and 3m lengths.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-20

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Singlemode 9/125um (OS1/OS2) Fiber Optic Patch Cords and Pigtails Specifications RoHS compliant fiber optic patch cords shall include simplex or duplex LC or keyed LC, SC, ST or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on both ends. RoHS compliant fiber optic pigtails shall include simplex or duplex LC, SC, ST, or MT-RJ connectors, or FJ or keyed FJ plugs or jacks on one end and open (unterminated) on the other end. Patch cords and pigtails shall be OS1/OS2fiber in 900μm tight-buffered fiber, 1.6mm or 3.0mm simplex or duplex zipcord jacketed cable. Jacketed cable shall be compliant with UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings. Patch cords and pigtails shall meet or exceed requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. The fiber connectors shall be FOCIS compliant or compatible, and exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA-455-21A for 500 mating cycles.

Technical Information Standard

All connectors exceed TIA/EIA-455-21A: 500

Requirements

mating cycles

Compliant with

TIA/EIA-568-B.3 TIA-604-5 (FOCIS-5) UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP) flame ratings

Insertion loss

Per connection: 0.75dB max. (singlemode), 0.35dB max. (LC singlemode)

Return loss

55dB minimum

Single Mode

Inspected in compliance with Telcordia GR-

Enface

326-CORE, Issue 3 requirements to ensure high performance

Endface Polish

UPC finish to ensure high quality endface for higher return loss to meet application standards.

Low Water

Eliminates high attenuation in the high E-band

Peak Fiber

and allows operation over the entire 12801625nm wavelength range; excellent for CWDM and DWDM applications.

Riser or plenum

Meets UL1666 (OFNR) or NFPA 262 (OFNP)

rated jacket

flame ratings for standard compliant safety

Test data

Supplied with each patch cord and pigtail Establishes a performance reference to streamline maintenance

Q.C.identification

Quality control reference provides lifetime

label

traceability of test data

Ordering Information

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-21

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Connector Cleaning Tools Features • All tools feature a dry cloth cleaning system with an ultra clean micro-fiber cloth that captures debris and contamination • Anti-static cloth minimizes additional debris from being attracted to connector surfaces • Densely woven, robust cloth doesn’t fray or leave fibrous materials behind • All tools and refills can be used to clean 400 connectors Ordering Information Part Number

Description

For

FMTPFCT

Reel type connector cleaning tool

Cleaning MTP* female connectors (without pins)

FMTPRR6

Cleaning reel refill (includes six reels)

FMTPFCT and FMTPMFCT reel type MTP* connector cleaning tools

Fiber Optic Termination Kits OptiCam® Pre-Polished Cam Fiber Optic Termination Kits

• No adhesive or electricity required for termination • Include installation instructions and stripping templates for all PANDUIT® OptiCam® Pre-Polished Connectors Ordering Information

Features • For termination of all PANDUIT® OptiCam® Pre-Polished Connectors • OptiCam® Termination Tool simplifies tooling and termination, and virtually eliminates operator error by providing visual indication of proper termination after the cam step has been completed Field Polish Fiber Optic Termination Kits Features • For termination of all PANDUIT Field Polish Connectors • Fast acting adhesive; no long curing epoxy required for termination • Kit provides consumables for terminating up to 200 field polish connectors • Include installation instructions and stripping templates for all PANDUIT Field Polish Connectors; also available on www.panduit.com

Part Number

Description

FCAMKIT

Opti-Cam Pre-Polished Cam Termination Kit

FCLEANKIT

Cleaning Consumables Replenishment Kit

FIELDKITUPG

Field Polish Kit Upgrade for OptiCam® Connector Termination

Ordering Information Part Number

Description

FIELDKIT

Field Polish Termination Kit (110VAC, 60Hz)

FIELDKIT-G

CField Polish Termination Kit (230VAC, 50Hz)

FIELDKITRFB

Field Polish Consumables Refurbishment Kit

FCLEANKIT

Cleaning Consumables Replenishment Kit

FCAMKITUPG

OptiCam Kit Upgrade For Field Polish Connector Termination (110VAC, 60Hz)

FCAMKITUPG-G

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

OptiCam Kit Upgrade For Field Polish Connector Termination (230VAC, 50Hz)

Page B-22

Appendix B: PANDUIT Fiber Optic Cabling System Technical Information Fiber Optic Splice Module Features The fiber optic splice module (FOSM) shall house and protect fiber optic splices, guarantee proper fiber cable management and bend radius control, and allow for clear labeling and logical organization of the fiber optic splices. The FOSM shall support 24 fusion splices or 12 mechanical splices in one module and shall be compatible with all PANDUIT rack mounted fiber enclosures. Slacking and spooling shall be selfcontained within the FOSM. The FOSM shall be self-stacking with a hinged clear cover

Ordering Information Part Number

Description

FOSMF

Splice Module Fusion

FOSMM

Splice Module Mechanical

Metal Splice Tray Features Fiber splice tray kit for up to twelve mechanical or fusion splices. Fits in PANDUIT FMT, FWME4, and FWME8 series enclosures. Stack up to four high using FSTHE stacking unit in rack mount enclosures or using FST6H4 stacking unit in wall mount enclosures. Ordering Information Part Number FST6

Description Fiber Splice tray for up to twelve mechanical or fusion splices

Fiber Optic Protector Sleeves Features Fiber splice protectors help protect the fibers after fusion splicing to ensure integrity and safety in the fiber splice tray. Protection and support is provided by a stainless-steel strength member which ensures fiber rigidity after splicing. Ordering Information Part Number

Description

FOSP61

60mm splice protector sleeve

FOSP45

45mm splice protector sleeve

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page B-23

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information

C-1: Example Specification Document for GES Connections C-2: Example Specification Document for Communications Systems C-3: Example Visual Inspection and Documentation Process

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-1

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Appendix C-1: Example Grounding and Bonding System Specification Document for GES Connections Direct Burial Compression Grounding System Specification Sheet Scope The scope of this specification includes the materials, design, marking, installation, inspectability, and performance of grounding connectors used for direct burial in earth or concrete. All connectors shall meet the requirements of this specification. Materials Connector body shall be of wrought or cast copper Design All connectors shall: • Utilize irreversible compression technology • Be factory-filled with an oxide-inhibiting compound • Utilize vacuum-sealed packaging to guarantee that the oxide-inhibiting compound is not rubbed off the part during shipping or before installation Marking • Connector and matching installation die shall be color-coded to ensure proper die selection • Clearly marked with manufacturer, catalog number, conductor size, and required compression tool die index number • Marked with “DB” to indicate that the parts are for direct burial • Labeled with the specific types, sizes, and combina tions of conductors and other items connected approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) • Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code – NEC)

Installation • Connectors shall be installed as per manufacturer’s instructions, including surface preparation, in stallation tools, crimping dies, and the required number of crimps • Connectors shall be installable in any weather, including wet or extreme cold (-40º F) conditions • Completing the connections shall require that no hazardous material be brought into the work site Inspectability • When crimped, die index numbers shall be em bossed upon the part. The embossed die index numbers shall match the die index numbers printed on the part • Installation process shall indicate that the performance requirements of IEEE Std 837™-2002 are met. The markings shall be an integral part of the crimping process, and must indicate that all steps have been met. Example of acceptable indication includes that the die index numbers are embossed on the part once for UL/CSA only, and twice for IEEE Std 837™-2002 Performance Connections shall comply with the following standards: • IEEE Std 837™-2002 – Standard for Qualifying Per manent Connections Used in Substation Grounding • NFPA 70™ – National Electrical Code • UL 467 – Grounding and Bonding Equipment, for • CSA C22.1 – Canadian Electrical Code, Part I • MIL-STD-202G (METHOD 201A) – Department of Defense: Test Method Standard: Electronic and Electrical Component Parts (Vibration)

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-2

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Appendix C-2: Example Grounding and Bonding System Specification Document for Communications Systems CSI SECTION 270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS The purpose of this document is to provide documentation to cabling professionals interested in providing their customer a standard specification applicable to commercial building structured cabling applications. The documentation includes: Product specifications, minimum product performance, structured cabling design considerations and installation guidelines. The information contained in this document is based on our experience to date and is believed to be reliable. It is intended as a guide for use by persons having technical skill and is to be used with their own discretion and risk. We do not guarantee favorable results or assume any liability in connection with its use. Dimensions contained herein are for reference purposes only. For specific dimensional requirements consult the factory. This publication is not to be taken as a license to operate under, or a recommendation to infringe any existing patents. This supercedes and voids all previous literature, etc. It is highly recommended and the issuer’s responsibility to have any RFQ documents, including those based on this general format, reviewed by the issuing company’s professional advisors before it is released to the public. In no way may this document be used in a manner that is detrimental to the interests of Panduit and/or its subsidiaries.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-3

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Work Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Scope of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Regulatory References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Approved Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 Workmanship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 11

PART 2 - PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Equivalent Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Grounding/Earthing and Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Components, Kits and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Construction of the Grounding/Earthing System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Rack Grounding/Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Cabinet Grounding/Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Shield Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 12 12 13 7 10 18 14 17 17

PART 3 - EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 24

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-4

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information SECTION 271116 Part 1 - General 1.1

Work Included

1.3

A. The following industry standards are the basis for the grounding/earthing and bonding system described in this document. 1. NFPA • NFPA-70 2. IEEE • Std 1100

A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Construction Documents 1.2

Regulatory References

Scope of Work

Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers • J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements • TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings International Standard • BS EN 50310:2000 Application of equipotential bonding and earthing in Buildings with information technology equipment

B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: • Grounding/Earthing System • Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) • Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) • Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) • Rack Grounding/Earthing and Bonding • Cabinet Grounding/Earthing and Bonding • Shield Grounding/Earthing and Bonding

D. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Quantities grounding/earthing products, typical installation details and cable routing will be provided as an attachment to this document. If the bid documents are in conflict, this specification shall take precedence. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the cable system described in this document.

IEEE Recommend Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book)

3. TIA/EIA • TIA-942

A. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and installing Grounding/Earthing and Bonding for Communications Systems.

C. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding/earthing hardware shall be furnished, installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the telecommunications contractor as detailed in this document.

National Electric Code (NEC)

B. The most recent versions of all documents apply to this project. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, the order above shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving the issue unless an enforce able local or national code is in effect. 1.4

Quality Assurance

A. See the Panduit Electrical Product Warranty on www. panduit.com/warranty 1.5

Approved Products

A. Approved grounding/earthing system manufacturer: PANDUIT B. Approved telecommunications grounding busbar manufacturer: PANDUIT C. Approved rack grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-5

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information D. Approved retrofit rack grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT E. Approved cabinet grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT F. Approved retrofit cabinet grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT G. Approved shielded cabling grounding kit manufacturer: PANDUIT 1.6

Definitions

Bonding – The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed. Mesh Common Bonding Network (MCBN) – The mesh CBN (MCBN) can be readily utilized for efficient direct bonding of equipment and other apparatus to the grounding system. Such an arrangement provides efficient grounding and inter/intra-unit bonding of metal cabinets, racks and miscellaneous metal objects (especially when they are not powered). Additionally, the MCBN ensures grounding reliability of the equipment in the event the equipment grounding conductor of the serving power circuit is compromised or disconnected during maintenance. Electrostatic charge buildup and dissipation is also greatly aided by the multiple grounding paths of the CBN. See Figure 1. Ground/Earth (Earth/Earthing is an international term equivalent to grounding) – A conducting connection, whether intentional or incidental, by which an electric circuit or equipment is connected to earth, or to some con ducting body of relatively large extent that serves in place of the earth. Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing – The application of grounding/earthing products and technology where equipment is already deployed and functioning within the equipment rack.

Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing – The application of grounding/earthing products and technology where equipment is already deployed and functioning within the equipment cabinet. 1.7

Overview

A primary purpose of the grounding/earthing and bonding system is to create an adequate capacity path for electrical surges and transient voltages to return to their source (which may include the earth). Lightning, fault currents, circuit switching (motors turning on and off), activation of surge protective devices (SPDs) and electrostatic discharge are common causes of these electrical surges and transient voltages. An effective grounding/earthing and bonding system minimizes the detrimental effects of these electrical surges and transient voltages, which include degraded network performance and reliability and increased safety risks. A properly constructed protection system includes a number of subsystems including: • • • • •

Grounding electrode system Lightning protection system Surge suppression AC/DC power systems grounding Telecommunications supplemental grounding and bonding

While each subsystem is designed with a specific intent in mind, the systems interact and enhance the overall capability of the entire protection system. This specification focuses primarily on the telecommunications supplemental grounding and bonding subsystem, hereafter referred to as the grounding, bonding, or grounding/earthing system. The grounding/earthing system must be intentional, visually verifiable, adequately sized to handle expected currents safely, and directs these potentially damaging currents away from sensitive network equipment. As such, grounding/earthing must be purposeful in its design and installation. Four issues require special consideration:

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-6

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information A. Although AC powered equipment typically has a power cord that contains a ground/earth wire, the integrity of this path cannot be easily verified. Thus, many equipment manufacturers require grounding/ earthing above and beyond that which is specified by local electrical codes, such as the National Electrical Code, etcetera. Always follow the grounding/earthing recommendations of the manufacturer when installing equipment. B. While the building steel and metallic water piping must be bonded to the grounding/earthing system for safety reasons, neither may be substituted for the telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB). C. Electrical continuity throughout each rack or cabinet is required to minimize safety risks. Hardware typically supplied with bolt-together racks is not designed for grounding/earthing purposes. Additionally, most racks and cabinets are painted. Paint is an insulator. Unless rack and cabinet members are deliberately bonded, continuity between members is incidental, and in many cases, unlikely. D. Any metallic component that is part of the data center, including equipment, racks, cabinets, ladder racks, enclosures, cable trays, etc. must be bonded to the grounding/earthing system. 1.8

Workmanship

The ground/earth system must be designed for high reliability. Therefore, the grounding/earthing system shall meet following criteria: A. Local electrical codes shall be adhered to. B. The grounding/earthing system shall comply with ANSI/TIA-942, J-STD-607-A, IEEE Std 1100™ (IEEE Emerald Book), and in international regions BS EN 50310:2000.

D. Lugs, HTAPs, grounding strips, and busbars shall be UL Listed and made of premium quality tin-plated electrolytic copper that provides low electrical resistance while inhibiting corrosion. Antioxidant shall be used when making bonding connections in the field. E. Wherever possible, two-hole lugs shall be used because they resist loosening when twisted (bumped) or exposed to vibration. All lugs shall be irreversible compression and meet NEBS Level 3 as tested by Telcordia. Lugs with inspection windows shall be used in all non-corrosive environments so that connections may be inspected for full conductor insertion (battery rooms are an exception where windowless lugs may be used). F. Die index numbers shall be embossed on all compres sion connections to allow crimp inspection. G. Cable assemblies shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. Cables shall be a distinctive green or green/yellow in color, and all jackets shall be UL, VW-1 flame rated.

Part 2 - Products 2.1

Equivalent Products

A. PANDUIT shall manufacture all products, including but not limited to grounding/earthing and bonding for communications systems. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.2

Grounding/Earthing and Bonding

A Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be located at the service entrance. A Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be located in each telecommunications space. The TGB will be grounded/earthed to the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB).

C. All grounding/earthing conductors shall be copper.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-7

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information The TMGB shall be bonded to building steel and grounded/ earthed to the electrical service ground according to J-STD607-A guidelines. Each TGB shall be bonded to building steel and the electrical panel serving equipment in the telecommunications space. See figure 1 below.

Route the TBB to each TGB in as straight a path as possible. The TBB should be installed as a continuous conductor, avoiding splices where possible. Use PANDUIT part number series HTWC to tap into the TBB where necessary. When more than one TBB is used, bond them together using the TGBs on the top floor and every third floor in between with a conductor known as a grounding equalizer (GE). Use the J-STD-607-A guidelines for sizing of the TBB when sizing the GE (shown in the table above). 2.3

Components, Kits and Hardware

PANDUIT® STRUCTUREDGROUND™ Grounding System (STRUCTUREDEARTH™ Earthing System) kits, components, and hardware shall be used to construct the grounding/earthing system.

Figure C-1 – Service Entrance Grounding

The gauge of the connecting ground/earth cable, known as the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) will follow J-STD-607-A guidelines, as is shown in the table below.

Use PANDUIT GB4 series BICSI/J-STD-607-A telecommunications grounding busbars for the TMGB, which is ideally located at the AC service entrance. Use a PANDUIT GB2 series busbar for the TGB in each of the other telecommunications/equipment spaces throughout the building. Use PANDUIT LCC-W series lugs when connecting conductors to the TMGB and TGB.

Sizing of the TBB TBB Length in Linear meters (feet)

TBB Size AWG

2.4

Construction of the Grounding/Earthing System

Less than 4 (13)

6 (16mm²)

4-6 (14-20)

4 (25mm²)

6-8 (21-26)

3 (25mm²)

8-10 (27-33)

2 (35mm²)

10-13 (34-41)

1 (35mm²)

13-16 (42-52)

1/0 (50mm²)

16-20 (53-66)

2/0 (70mm²)

Avoid routing grounding/earthing conductors in metal conduits. If the grounding/earthing conductor must be routed through a metal conduit, bond each end of the conduit to the grounding/earthing conductor. Use PANDUIT GPL series grounding clamps to bond to the conduit, a PANDUIT HTWC HTAP with clear cover to bond to the grounding/earthing conductor, and a #6 AWG copper conductor to connect the GPL grounding clamp to the HTWC HTAP.

Greater than 20 (66)

3/0 (95mm²) In telecommunications spaces with a small number of racks or cabinets, it may be most convenient to bond the grounding/earthing jumper cable directly to the TGB. Larger spaces require a mesh Common Bonding Network, as described below.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-8

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Cable Sizes for Other Grounding/Earthing Applications Not Specifically Described Elsewhere in This Document Purpose

Copper Code Cable Size

Aisle ground (overhead) of the common bonding network

Minimum #2 AWG (35mm²)

Aisle ground (under floor) of the mesh common bonding network

Minimum # 6 AWG (16mm²)

Bonding conductor to each PDU or panel board serving the room.

Size per NEC 250.122 & manufacturer recommendations

Bonding conductor to HVAC #6 AWG (16mm²) equipment Building columns

#4 AWG (25mm²)

Cable ladders and trays

#6 AWG (16mm²)

Conduit, water pipe, duct

#6 AWG (16mm²)

Raised Floor (Access Floor) mesh Common Bonding Network - The following requirements shall apply when constructing the MCBN under the floor:

The under the floor MCBN shall be constructed of a #2 AWG (35mm²) or smaller gauge bonding conductor, but never smaller than a #6 AWG (16mm²) conductor. The MCBN should be connected to the Telecommunications Grounding busbar (TGB) using a 1/0 AWG (50mm²) or larger conductor. MCBN grid shall be installed on every other pedestal, this allows for bonding of one pedestal from each access floor tile to the MCBN. A grounding clamp shall create a bond between conductors at each intersection and to the access floor by bonding the pedestals to the MCBN conductors. PANDUIT part number GPQC1/0 shall be utilized for ¾” (19.1mm) and 1” (25.4mm) round or square pedestals and where MCBN conductors range from #6 AWG (16mm²) – 1/0 AWG (50mm²). MCBN grid shall be bonded no further than every 5th pedestal to be compliant with TIA-942 standard. Use HTCT HTAP connectors for series bonds (such as from the rack to the mesh CBN) and either HTCT or CTAPF connectors to provide parallel connections within the auxiliary grounding system (such as when bonding conductors to the outer ring that encompasses the raised floor).

MCBN connection to TGB 1/0 AWG (50mm²) MCBN conductors are bonded to every other floor pedestal using PANDUIT part GPQC1/0

Bond the frame of the CRAC unit to the MCBN using #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper and HTCT HTAP

Bond each cabinet/rack to MCBN using #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper and HTCT HTAP

CTAPF connectors provide parallel connections

SBCT3-C to bond wire basket to MCBN

Bond wire basket to MCBN using #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper and HTCT HTAP

Bond water pipes to the MCBN with GPL Clamp and #6 AWG (16mm²) jumper with HTCT HTAP

Figure 2 – Mesh Common Bonding Network and Wire Basket Bonding

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-9

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Overhead Common Bonding Network and Ladder Rack Bonding The overhead common bonding network shall be constructed of a minimum of a #2 AWG (35mm²) or larger gauge wire. The CBN shall be bonded to the TGB using a 2-hole copper compression connector, PANDUIT part series LCC-W or metric equivalent.

2.5

Rack Grounding/Earthing

Equipment and racks shall be bonded in accordance with the p g 4 below. methods prescribed in ANSI/TIA-942, as is shown in figure

Ladder racks shall be bonded per the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The bond shall be made in accordance with Figure 3 below to the mesh Common Bonding Network.

Figure 3 – Overhead Common Bonding Network and

Figure 4 - Properly Grounded/Earthed Rack (Back of Rack Shown)

Ladder Rack Bonding

To provide electrical continuity between ladder rack segments use PANDUIT® STRUCTUREDGROUND™ Auxiliary Cable Bracket, PANDUIT part number GACB-1. When installed, the paint piercing teeth on the bracket remove paint from the ladder rack sections providing an electrical bond. There shall also be a grounding jumper, PANDUIT part number GACBJ618U, that connects to the auxiliary cable brackets to bond the sections of the ladder rack together.

To provide electrical continuity between rack elements, PANDUIT paint piercing grounding washers, series RGW, shall be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides, under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack. All racks shall utilize a full-length rack ground strip, PANDUIT series RGS, attached to the rear of the side rail with the thread-forming screws provided to ensure metal-to-metal contact. Mount an electrostatic discharge (ESD) port kit, PANDUIT series RGESD, directly to the rack grounding strip on the back of the rack at approximately 48 inches (122cm) from the floor. Mount a second RGESD directly to the vertical mounting rail of the rack in the front at approximately the same height. Use the thread-forming screws provided to form a bond to the rack. Place the ESD protection identification stickers directly above the ESD ports.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-10

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information When the equipment manufacturer provides a location for mounting a grounding connection, that connection shall be utilized. Use the appropriate PANDUIT RG series jumper for the equipment being installed and the thread-forming screws provided in the kit. Use PANDUIT part number series RGCBNJ (Common Bonding Network Jumper) to attach the rack ground strip to the mesh CBN. This kit includes the #6 AWG cable with one factory installed two-hole lug and hardware to connect to the busbar and one HTCT HTAP to connect to the mesh CBN. In addition, all components can be utilized if your mesh common bonding network is below or overhead. Do not bond racks or cabinets serially. Use the HTCT HTAP that comes with the kit to bond the conductor directly to the mesh common bonding network. Patch panels will be bonded to racks using the appropriate PANDUIT bonding screws, series RGTBS. Mounting rails may utilize cage nuts, threaded holes or thru hole mounting fasteners to secure patch panels to the rails.

2.6

Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing

If the racks already have network equipment installed, it may not be feasible to install the rack ground strip without disrupting data cables. Further, it may be undesirable to disassemble rack hardware to install paint piercing grounding washers, or in some cases, the construction of the rack may make grounding washer installation impossible. In these circumstances, the PANDUIT Retrofit Rack Grounding Kits, PANDUIT part family RGR, are to be installed. For retrofit rack grounding/earthing installations, use PANDUIT part number RGRKCBNJY to ground/earth the rack to the mesh common bonding network. Use PANDUIT part number RGREJ696Y (provided with #6 AWG grounding conductor) or PANDUIT part number RGREJ1096Y (provided with #10 AWG grounding conductor) to ground/earth equipment chassis to the rack grounding busbar provided with the RGRKCBNJY as is shown in figure 5 below.

Figure 5 - Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-11

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information 2.7 Cabinet Grounding/Earthing Non-PANDUIT Cabinet Grounding/Earthing All non-PANDUIT equipment and cabinets shall be bonded in accordance with the methods prescribed in ANSI/TIA-942, as is shown in figure 6 below.

All cabinets shall utilize a full-length rack ground strip, PANDUIT series RGS, attached to one of the four mounting rails using the hardware provided to ensure metal-to-metal contact. All cabinets shall utilize a copper busbar, PANDUIT part number RGRB19U, as a main collection point before connecting to the mesh common bonding network (MCBN). The busbar can be mounted at the top or the bottom of the cabinet depending on where the MCBN is located. The copper busbar will then be connected to the MCBN utilizing the PANDUIT common bonding network jumper kit, part number series RGCBNJ. This kit includes the #6 AWG cable with one factory installed two-hole lug and hardware to connect to the busbar and one HTCT HTAP to connect to the MCBN. In addition, all components can be utilized if the MCBN is below or overhead. Mount an electrostatic discharge (ESD) port kit, PANDUIT series RGESD, directly to the grounding strip on the back of the cabinet at approximately 48 inches (122cm) from the floor. Mount a second RGESD directly to the grounding strip at the front at approximately the same height. Place the ESD protection identification stickers directly above the ESD ports. Cabinet equipment mounting rails may utilize cage nuts, threaded holes or thru-hole type mounting fasteners to secure equipment to the rails. Each kit is supplied with the unique thread-forming screws and bonding studs to provide the bond to the equipment mounting rails.

Figure 6 - Properly Grounded/Earthed Cabinet (Back of Cabinet Shown)

Grounding/Earthing PANDUIT Cabinets

To provide electrical continuity between cabinet rails, PANDUIT rail jumper kit, series CGJ, shall be used to bond the front and rear equipment mounting rails. It may not be feasible or may be undesirable to disassemble the cabinet to install the paint piercing washers. Using the rail jumper kits is a more cost effective way to bond the equipment mounting rails together.

All PANDUIT® NET-ACCESS™ Cabinets shall be bonded in accordance with the methods prescribed in ANSI/TIA-942. Since the NET-ACCESS™ Cabinet features a fully integrated, electrically bonded structure, there is no need to bond the rails together with front to back jumpers and the 19” horizontal busbar. See figure 7 below.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-12

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information 2.8 Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing If the cabinets already have network equipment installed, it may not be feasible to install the rack ground strips without disrupting data cables. In these cases the rack ground strip would not be used and equipment jumpers would be used to make the bond between network equipment and the busbar. See figure 6 for details. All other grounding/earthing requirements apply to retrofit installations without exception. 2.9 Shield Grounding A key element of a shielded copper cabling system is proper grounding. PANDUIT TX6™ 10GIG™ Shielded Copper Cabling System shall be bonded as shown in figure 8. The cable shield shall be run continuously from port-to-port. As the shield becomes bonded to the equipment chassis when the plug is inserted into the jack on the equipment, this effectively bonds the shield conductor at both ends of the cable, and at patch panels in between. Such a system is most effective at reducing noise coupling to the data signal so long as the power sources feeding the equipment involved are bonded together.

Figure 7 - Properly Grounded/Earthed PANDUIT® NET-ACCESS™ Cabinet (Back of Cabinet Shown)

Figure 8 – Properly grounding shielded copper cabling system

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-13

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information 2.10 Zone Box Grounding

Part 3 - Execution

All active equipment in the enclosure and the enclosure itself (including door) shall be bonded to a dedicated ground via a grounding bracket. The grounding bracket shall incorporate a space-saving design without stacking lugs, and it shall prevent lugs from twisting loose. An electrostatic discharge (ESD) port shall be mounted directly to the grounding bracket. PANDUIT part number PZAEGK shall be utilized. See figure 9 below.

3.1

Grounding System

The communications grounding system shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that the work is to be performed. The communications grounding system shall adhere to the recommendations of the ANSI/ TIA-942 and J-STD-607-A standards, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice. International regions shall adhere to the recommendations of the BS EN 50310:2000 standard. A licensed electrical contractor shall perform installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground. 3.2

Figure 9 – Exploded view of STRUCTUREDGROUND™ Enclosure Kit

Inspection of the Grounding System

The communications grounding system should be inspected at time of installation and then on yearly basis thereafter. Refer to Panduit document, “ITE Supplemental Grounding and Bonding Inspection” for inspection process and documentaiton procedures.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-14

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Appendix C-3: Example Grounding and Bonding System Visual Inspection and Documentation Process Example of a Grounding Visual Inspection and Documentation Process Date: Company: Contact:

This document describes the process of properly inspecting information technology equipment (ITE) supplemental grounding and bonding systems. An answer of “yes” for each question on the inspection list indicates that the components of the ITE supplemental grounding and bonding system have been installed to commonly referenced industry standards. Use the room/rack/cabinet number space on each sheet to provide each measurement set with a unique identification number so that issues found during the inspection can be addressed later.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-15

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Bonding inspections for each telecommunications space Room Number:________

Is a Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) present?

 Yes

 No

The AC electrical panel

 Yes

 No

Accessible building steel

 Yes

 No

The Mesh Common Bonding Network1

 Yes

 No

The Telecommunications Bonding Backbone2

 Yes

 No

Have the following bonds been made to the TGB?

1. The Mesh Common Bonding Network (MCBN) is the conductor or group of conductors that extend from the TGB to each bay in the room. The MCBN can be installed above the bays or under the access floor. 2. The Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) is the conductor that bonds every TGB in the bonding network together. The TBB may not be present in every installation.

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-16

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Using a clamp-on amp meter, check for AC and DC current on each of the bonds listed above. A  Yes reading of zero amps AC and DC may be indicative of an open connection. A reading of greater than one amp AC and 0.5 amps DC may be indicative of fault conditions somewhere in the power system.

 No

Clamp the meter around the grounding conductor in question Are the AC and DC currents at acceptable levels?

 Yes

 No

Are the bend radii of all these conductors greater than twelve inches?

 Yes

 No

Are all the bonds to the TGB made with two-hole compression lugs?

 Yes

 No

Is each conductor bonded to the TGB labeled or tagged as a grounding conductor as shown below?

 Yes

 No

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-17

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Bonding inspections for each rack: Rack Number:_______

Are electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap ports available on the front and back of each rack?

 Yes

 No

Are two-hole compression lugs compression HTAPs used wherever possible?

 Yes

 No

Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the common bonding network (CBN) to rack jumper and the HTAP connecting the jumper to the mesh common bonding network as shown below. One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the HTAP:

 Yes

 No

 Yes

 No

 Yes

 No





Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω? Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between each section of the rack and the common bonding network to rack jumper as shown below. One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the washer:

 Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each section of rack? Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the mounting flange of each piece of powered equipment and the common bonding network to rack jumper. Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each piece of equipment?

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-18

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Bonding inspections for each cabinet Cabinet Number: ______

Are electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap ports available on the front and back of each rack?

 Yes

 No

Are two-hole compression lugs compression HTAPs used wherever possible?

 Yes

 No

Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the common bonding network (CBN) to rack jumper and the HTAP connecting the jumper to the mesh common bonding network as shown below. One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the HTAP:

 Yes

 No

 Yes

 No

 Yes

 No

 Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω? Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the rack/cabinet’s equipment mounting rails and the common bonding network jumper. One probe on the CBN jumper: One probe on the rail:

Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each section of rack? Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the mounting flange of each piece of powered equipment and the common bonding network to rack jumper. Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each piece of equipment?

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-19

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Bonding inspections for each piece of equipment: Equipment Identification Number: ______ Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between the equipment grounding jumper (when present) or the mounting flange of each piece of powered equipment and the common bonding network to rack jumper as shown below.

 Yes

 No

One probe on the equipment grounding jumper:

One probe on the CBN jumper:

 OR One probe on the equipment mounting flange:



Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω for each piece of equipment?

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-20

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Bonding inspections for shielded cables Rack/Cabinet Number: ______

Has the bay passed all the rack or cabinet bonding inspections?

 Yes

 No

Using a two-point multimeter, measure the DC resistance between each cable shield and the common bonding network (CBN) to rack jumper as shown below. One probe on the shield: One probe on the CBN jumper:

 Yes

 No





Is the DC resistance ≤ 0.1Ω between each module and the CBN rack jumper?

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

Page C-21

Appendix C: PANDUIT Grounding and Bonding System Technical Information Bonding inspections for shielded cables Rack/Cabinet Number: ______ Using a two-point multimeter, measure the voltage between the module and the ground wire of the electrical outlet used to provide power to the equipment as shown below. One probe on the module:

One probe in the ground receptacle:

©2009 PANDUIT / Physical Infrastructure Reference Architecture Guide 1.0

 Yes

 No

Page C-22